Modicon

A120 Series I/O Modules

User Guide
890 USE 109 00 Version 4.0
31000401 04
ii 890 USE 109 00 March 2003
 Table of Contents

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Chapter 1 Panel Software Options with A120 I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Panel Software Option with A120 I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2 Overview of the ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . 5

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
What is the ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Field Wiring and LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . 12
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Noise Suppression DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . 13
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 3 Overview of the ADU 205 Analog Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 19

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
What is the ADU 205 Analog Input Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Chapter 4 Overview of the ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . 31

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
What is the ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 iii

 Chapter 5 Overview of the ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module . . . . 53
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
What is the ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Installing the ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Chapter 6 Overview of the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input

Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
What is the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module "J" Thermocouple Quick Start . . . 67
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Field Wiring Examples. . . . . . . . . 77
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Output Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Input Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sequentially Reading ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module
Channel Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 7 ADU 214 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Overview of the ADU 214 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Conversion Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuration - Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
ADU 214 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Chapter 8 ADU 216 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
What Is the ADU 216 Analog Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

iv 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Chapter 9 Overview of the ADU 257 Analog Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . 155
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
What is the ADU 257 Analog Input Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ADU 257 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Installing the ADU 257 Analog Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ADU 257 Isolated Analog Input Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ADU 257 Analog Input Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Chapter 10 AS-BDEA 203 Profibus-DP Coupler Module Description . . . 171

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Features and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Chapter 11 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module . . . . . . . . 183
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
What Is the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module? . . . . . . . . . . 184
Physical Characteristics of the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S
Master Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Switch Settings for the BKF 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Installation of the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) Interbus Master Module . . . . . . . . 189
Operation of the BKF 201 Master Module: I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Example of Hardware and I/O Mapping for the BKF 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Chapter 12 BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
What Is the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Physical Characteristics of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module. . . . . . . . . . 203
Switch Settings for the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Installation of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Operation of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Specifications of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Chapter 13 DAO 216 Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
What is the DAO 216 Discrete Output Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
DAO 216 Discrete Output Module Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Protecting the DAO 216 Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back
EMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
DAO 216 Discrete Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 14 Overview of the DAP 204 Relay Output Module . . . . . . . . . . 221

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
What is the DAP 204 Relay Output Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 v

 DAP 204 Relay Output Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
DAP 204 Relay Output Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Protecting the DAP 204 Relay Output Module from Inductive Back EMF . . . . . 225
DAP 204 Relay Output Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Chapter 15 Overview of the DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module. . . . . . . 231

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
What is the DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Protecting the DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module from Inductive Back
EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 16 Overview of the DAP 209 Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
What is the DAP 209 Output Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
DAP 209 Output Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
DAP 209 Output Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
DAP 209 Output Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 17 Overview of the DAP 210 Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
DAP 210 Output Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
DAP 210 Output Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
DAP 210 Output Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
What is the DAP 210 Output Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Chapter 18 Overview of the DAP 211 Combined I/O Module. . . . . . . . . . 253

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
What is the DAP 211 Combined I/O Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Logical Input Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Error Checking Procedure for Output
States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Setup Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
DAP 211 Combination I/O Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Chapter 19 Overview of the DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module . . . . . . 261

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
What is the DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module Field Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Protecting the DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back
EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

vi 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Chapter 20 Overview of the DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module . . . 273
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
What is the DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
DAP 216/216N Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Resetting the DAP 216 Module After an Overload of Short Circuit . . . . . . . . . . 277
Protecting the DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back
EMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
DAP 216N Discrete Output Module Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Chapter 21 Overview of the DAP 217 Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . 283

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
What is the DAP 217 Discrete Output Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
DAP 217 Discrete Output Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
DAP 217 Discrete Output Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Protecting the DAP 217 Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back
EMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
DAP 217 Discrete Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Chapter 22 Overview of the DAP 218 Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
What is the DAP 218 Output Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
DAP 218 Output Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
DAP 218 Output Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
DAP 218 Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Chapter 23 Overview of the DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module . . . . . . 297

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
What is the DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Recovery After Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Chapter 24 Overview of the DAP 253 Combined I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . 307

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
What is the DAP 253 Combined I/O Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
DAP 253 Combined I/O Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
DAP 253 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Protecting the DAP 253 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF . . . . 312
DAP 253 Combined I/O Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Chapter 25 Overview of the DAP 292 Combined I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . 319

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
What is the DAP 292 Combined I/O Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 vii

 DAP 292 Combined I/O Module LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
DAP 292 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Protecting the DAP 292 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF . . . . 324
DAP 292 Combined I/O Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Chapter 26 DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
What Is the DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Chapter 27 DAU 204 Analog Output Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
What Is the DAU 204 Analog Output Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Conversion Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Custom Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Chapter 28 Overview of DAU 208 Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
What is the DAU 208 Analog Output Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Conversion Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Chapter 29 DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
DEA 202 Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Configuration of the DEA 202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
DEA 202 LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
DEA 202 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Chapter 30 Overview of the DEO 216 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
What is the DEO 216 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Specifications of the DEO 216 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

viii 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Chapter 31 Overview of the DEP 208 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
What is the DEP 208 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
DEP 208 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
DEP 208 Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Using the DEP 208 Input Module wilth Proximity Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
DEP 208 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Chapter 32 Overview of the DEP 209 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
What is the DEP 209 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
DEP 209 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
DEP 209 Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Using the DEP 209 Input Module with Proximity Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
DEP 209 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Chapter 33 Overview of the DEP 210 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
What is the DEP 210 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
DEP 210 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
DEP 210 Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
DEP 210 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Chapter 34 Overview of the DEP 211 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
What is the DEP 211 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
DEP 211 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
DEP 211 Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
DEP 211 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Chapter 35 Overview of the DEP 214/254 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
What is the DEP 214/254 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
DEP 214/254 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
DEP 214/254 Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
DEP 214/254 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Chapter 36 Overview of the DEP 215 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
What is the DEP 215 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
DEP 215 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
DEP 215 Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Unique True Low Characteristics of the DEP 215 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
DEP 215 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 ix

 Chapter 37 Overview of the DEP 216/256 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
What is the DEP 216/256 Input Module?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
DEP 216/256 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
DEP 216/256 Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
DEP 216/256 Input Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Chapter 38 Overview of the DEP 217 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
What is the DEP 217 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
DEP 217 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
DEP 217 Input Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
DEP 217 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Chapter 39 Overview of the DEP 218 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
What is the DEP 218 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
DEP 218 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
DEP 218 Input Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
DEP 218 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Chapter 40 Overview of the DEP 220 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
What is the DEP 220 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
DEP 220 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
DEP 220 Input Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
DEP 220 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Chapter 41 Overview of the DEP 257 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
What is the DEP 257 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
DEP 257 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
DEP 257 Input Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
DEP 257 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Chapter 42 Overview of the DEP 296 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
What is the DEP 296 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
DEP 296 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
DEP 296 Input Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
DEP 296 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Chapter 43 Overview of the DEP 297 Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
What is the DEP 297 Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
DEP 297 Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
DEP 297 Input Module Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

x 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP297 Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Chapter 44 Overview of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module . . . . . . . . . 473

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
What is the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Physical Characteristics of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module. . . . . . . . . . . 475
Operating Modes of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Configuration of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Operation and LED Displays of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module . . . . . . . 481
Specifications of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Chapter 45 Overview of MOT 20X Motion Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
What are the MOT 20X Modules?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Overview of the MOT 201 Motion Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Overview of the MOT 202 Motion Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
MOT 20X Module System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
MOT 20X Motion Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Chapter 46 Overview of the VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input

Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
What is the VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Installation of the VRC/CTR 2XX Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Configuration for 16-bit Compact
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module for Compact 32-bit Controllers. . . . 551

Chapter 47 Overview of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module. . . . . . 555

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
47.1 Overview of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
What is the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
LED Indicator Displays of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module . . . . . . . . . 558
Choosing Operating Mode and Input Voltage Level for the ZAE 201 Counter/
Positioner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Operating States of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Representing the ZAE 201 Data Blocks in the I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
47.2 Using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module as a High-Speed Counter . . . . 563
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Field Wiring the ZAE 201 for Counting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Switch Settings for Using the ZAE 201 as a High-Speed Counter . . . . . . . . . . 567

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xi

 Overview of ZAE 201 Counter Mode Commands and States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
ZAE 201Counter Mode Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Example: Using the ZAE 201 as a High-Speed Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
47.3 Using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module as a Positioning Controller . . . 576
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Field Wiring for ZAE 201 Positioning Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Switch Settings for Using the ZAE 201 as a Positioning Controller . . . . . . . . . . 580
Overview of ZAE 201 Positioning Mode Commands and States. . . . . . . . . . . . 581
The ZAE 201 Positioning Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Example: Using the ZAE 201 Module as a Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
47.4 Specifications of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Specifications of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Chapter 48 Overview of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module . . . . 599

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
What is the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Operating and Display Elements of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Configuration of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Example Field Connections and Signal Addresses for the ZAE 204
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Output Register Formats of the ZAE 204 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Input Register Formats of the ZAE 204 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Operation of the ZAE 204 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Specifications of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counting Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Appendix A IEC Wiring Diagrams for A120 I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
IEC Nomenclature Legend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
IEC Wiring Diagrams for A120 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Appendix B I/O Configuration with Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Multiplexing I/O Data with Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Configuring A120 Discrete Input Modules with Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Configuring Discrete Output Modules with Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Configuring Discrete Combination Modules with Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Configuring Analog Input Modules with Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Intelligent Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Concept I/O Map Status Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

xii 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Appendix C I/O Configuration of A120 Series I/O Modules with
Modsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Configuring A120 Discrete Input Modules with Modsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Configuring A120 Discrete Output Modules with Modsoft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Configuring A120 Discrete Combination Modules with Modsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Configuring A120 Analog Input Modules with Modsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Configuring A120 Analog Output Modules with Modsoft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Configuring A120 Intelligent Modules with Modsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Configuring A120 Communication Interfaces with Modsoft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

Appendix D Modsoft Application Examples for Selected A120 Series I/O

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
ADU 205 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
DAU 204 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
VRC/CTR 2xx (VIC2xx) Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760

Appendix E A120 Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
SIM 203 Analog Simulator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
SIM 216 Binary Simulator Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
NUL 200 and 202 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

Appendix F Requirements for CE Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
CE Compliance Requirements for Compact 984 Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
CE Compliance Requirements for Compact 984 Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

Appendix G Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Schneider Automation Customer Service Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Installing the Loadables for A120 Series I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xiii

xiv 890 USE 109 00 March 2003
 Safety Information
§

Important Information

NOTICE Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn
of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates
that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will
result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in injury or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xv

Safety Information

PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be serviced only by qualified personnel. No responsi-
bility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use
of this material. This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained
persons.
© 2003 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved

xvi 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope This manual describes the functionality of the Modicon A120 Series I/O Modules.

Validity Note The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding. We reserve the right to
modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development. The
information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric.

Related
Documents
Title of Documentation
IEEE Std 518--1977, Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize Electrical
Noise Inputs to Controllers from External Sources
IEEE Std 142--1982, Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial
Power Systems
Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems, by Henry W. Ott; published by Wiley--
Interscience of New York in 1976

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xvii

About the Book

Product Related Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this
Warnings document. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have
found errors in this publication, please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of
Schneider Electric.

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
[email protected]

xviii 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Panel Software Options with
A120 I/O Modules

Panel Software Option with A120 I/O Modules

Overview This section describes Panel Software options for the A120 series I/O Modules, and
related information.

Panel Software The Compact Controllers may be configured, I/O Mapped, and programmed using
Support either Concept panel software, full-feature Modsoft panel software or Modsoft Lite
depending upon the model.
Either software package may be installed on the Modicon P230, an IBM-AT, or
compatible computer.
Programming and configuration editors used for a Compact are similar to those used
for other 984s, special I/O Map screens have been designed for A120 I/O modules.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 1

Panel Software for A120

Concept (E984- Concept may be used with the E984-258/265/275/285 models. Concept contains
258/265/275/285 Function Block Diagram (FBD) and Sequential Function Chart (SFC) programming
Only) languages as well as a subset of data types of the international IEC 1131-3 norm.
Concept features the following:
l FBD depicts process data flow typically suited for discrete and continuous control
applications.
l SFC provides a graphical representation of the process.
l Instruction List is a text-based Boolean language used to build more complex
applications.
l EFB is a "C" tool kit that permits you to create custom function blocks.
l Structured Text is ideal to implement complex equations.
l Ladder Diagram (ladder logic) complies with the IEC 1131-3 ladder diagram
specification.
l LL984 inside Concept provides the same tools as Modsoft 984 ladder logic.
Concept operates with either: Windows 98, Windows NT, or Windows 2000. The
E984-258/265/275/285 models are supported by three different Concept software
packages: Concept M (372 SPU 472 01vxx), Concept XL (372 SPU 474 01vxx), and
Concept 984 XL (372 SPU 479 0x).

Note: You must use Concept 2.1 or higher to operate the E984-258/265/275/285
models. Modsoft does not support these models.

For a detailed description of Concept and its operations, see the Concept User
Manual (840 USE 49300).
Refer to I/O Configuration with Concept, p. 671, for a list of A120 I/O modules that
are compatible with Concept.

CAUTION
Mode Malfunction Hazard
The output module Time Out States are only valid in a normal PLC stop
state. Therefore, when the PLC powers down or goes into kernel mode,
the outputs default to the modules fail safe state. The Time Out States
are defined in the I/O Map modules parameter screens.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

2 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Panel Software for A120

Modsoft Lite Modsoft Lite (371SPU921000) is provided on 3.5 inch diskettes. Standard panel
(A984-1xx, E984- software packages contain the following editors:
24x/251/255
Editor Description
Only)
Configuration Defines controller and communication parameters, allocates memory,
accesses controller operations and specials (e.g., battery coil register,
timer register, and time-of-day clock)
I/O Map Links discrete and register reference numbers to modules in the I/O
subsystems. Defines I/O data types
Programmer Generates, edits, monitors ladder logic, and accesses controller
Transfer Loads programs from disk to controller, records 984 memory to disk,
compares programs on disk and in memory
Print Generates hard copy of user logic program and prints user comments
Environment Defines default configurations for the panel software (e.g. printer setup, file
locations)

For a detailed description of Modsoft lite and its operations, see the Modsoft Lite
Programmer User Manual (GM-MSLT-001).

890 USE 109 00 December 2002 3

Panel Software for A120

Modsoft-Full- Modsoft full-feature (SW-MSxD-9SA) is an integrated software tool for

Feature (A984- programming, testing, and documenting application logic for 984 controllers. The
1xx, E984-24x/ full-feature Modsoft package includes all the editor functions available with Modsoft
251/255 Only) Lite along with enhanced features, including sequential function chart (SFC) and
macros.
Sequential Function Charting: SFC allows you to generate programs arranged in
steps rather than a linear ladder logic sequence, this is especially suitable for
sequential processes. A sequential function chart can solve multiple networks in a
parallel link or one in a choice of several networks in a selective link. Logic is solved
within a block until a specified transition event informs the CPU to move to the next
step. SFC allows application software to be created in a format that more closely
emulates an actual machining procedure or process flow; it can help improve system
throughput by solving only those networks specified by transition events rather than
moving linearly through each network in the program on every scan.
Modsoft macros simplify the task of generating and updating large numbers of
repetitive network structures. They allow you to create the repeating structure once,
then specify the node values using macro parameters rather than standard 984
reference numbers. Each macro can contain up to 66 macro parameters-by using
(*) wild card characters in your naming scheme, you can create thousands of
parameters per macro.

Note: If you are using full-feature Modsoft to develop application logic for a
Compact system that will be using full Modsoft as its permanent programming
software, you must be careful when dealing with SFC and macro ladder logic. You
may develop your programs using the /p switch; this switch prevents you from
creating SFC logic and does not reserve any registers or coils for SFC use-do not
use macros in this case. Alternatively, you may develop programs with SFC and
macros, then use the convert-to-file menu in Modsoft to produce an equivalent
program in standard ladder logic that will run with other panel software.

For a detailed description of full-feature Modsoft and its operations, see the Modsoft
Programmer User Manual (890 USE 115 00).
For a list of A120 I/O modules that are compatible with Modsoft refer to I/O
Configuration of A120 Series I/O Modules with Modsoft, p. 745

4 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ADU 204/254
Analog Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose This chapter begins with an overview of the ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module. The
chapter continues with discussions on field wiring, the noise suppression DIP switch,
and calibration. Finally, the specifications are given, for the ADU 204/254 Analog
Input Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module? 6
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges 7
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Field Wiring and LED Displays 12
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Noise Suppression DIP Switch 13
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Calibration 14
ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Specifications 17

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 5

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

What is the ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module?

Brief Product
Description
Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/
211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

The ADU 204/254 is a four-channel analog input module without opto-isolation. It

performs dual-slope integrating A/D conversions, converting analog values into 12-
bit digital values in the recommended range. It may be used in conjunction with
either two-wire +/-500 mV sensor field devices or PT100 four-wire resistance
temperature detector (RTD) field devices. The ADU 254 functions just like the ADU
204, except that the ADU 254 operates at extended temperature.

Note: The ADU 254 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is ADU 254C, which meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

6 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges

Introduction The ADU 204/254 is a four-channel analog input module without opto-isolation. It
performs dual-slope integrating A/D conversions, converting analog values into 12-
bit digital values in the recommended range. It may be used in conjunction with
either two-wire +/-500 mV sensor field devices or PT100 four-wire resistance
temperature detector (RTD) field devices. The ADU 254 functions just like the ADU
204, except that the ADU 254 operates at extended temperature.

Note: The ADU 254 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is ADU 254C, which meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

Conversion The PLC model determines the ranges. A table is provided below for each of the
Ranges available ranges:
When the module goes out of range--either over or under range--and then returns
to a valid operating range, the module will resume proper operations, unless your
out-of-range condition reaches or exceeds the safety range of +/-24 V.

Conversion table The following table gives the ranges for A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255 PLC models:
for A984-1xx and
Input/Voltage Data Count (Decimal) Operating Results
E984-24x/251/
255 less than or equal to +1 V 0 Under range
-0.99... -0.501 V 1... 2048
-500 mV 2049 up arrow
... ... ...
0 mV 4096 Recommended operating range
... ... ...
+500 mV 6143 0
+0.501... +0.99 V 6144... 8191
greater than or equal to +1 V 8192 Over range

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 7

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

Conversion table The ranges for Pt 100 -200 degrees C to 850 degrees C for E984-258/265/275/285
for Pt 100 -200 PLC models are:
degrees C to 850
Temp 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 13-bit 15-bit Measuring
degrees C for
(degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees + sign step/value
E984-258/265/
C) C C F F range
275/285
less than - -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under
205 range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 3132 -7529 Nominal
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 range

+850 +850 +8500 +1562 +15620 8191 32000

greater +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Over range
than +870

Conversion table The ranges for Pt 200 -200 degrees C to 250 degrees C for E984-258/265/275/285
for Pt 200 -200 PLC models are:
degrees C to 250
Temp 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 13-bit 15-bit Measuring
degrees C for
(degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees + sign step/value
E984-258/265/
C) C C F F range
275/285
less than - -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under
205 range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 819 -25600 Nominal
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 range

+250 +250 +2500 +482 +4820 8191 32000

greater +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Over range
than +256

8 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

Conversion table The ranges for Ni 100 -60 degrees C to 250 degrees C for E984-258/265/275/285
for Ni 100 -60 PLC models are:
degrees C to 250
Temp 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 13-bit 15-bit Measuring
degrees C for
(degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees + sign step/value
E984-258/265/
C) C C F F range
275/285
less than - -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under
61 range
-60 -60 -600 -328 -3280 819 -25600 Nominal
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 range

+250 +250 +2500 +482 +4820 8191 32000

greater +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Over range
than +256

Conversion table The ranges for Ni 200 -60 degrees C to 150 degrees C for E984-258/265/275/285
for Ni 200 -60 PLC models are:
degrees C to 150
Temp 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 13-bit 15-bit Measuring
degrees C for
(degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees + sign step/value
E984-258/265/
C) C C F F range
275/285
less than - -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under
61 range
-60 -60 -600 -76 -760 2458 -12800 Nominal
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 range

+150 +150 +1500 +302 +3020 8191 32000

greater +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Over range
than +151

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 9

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

Conversion table The ranges for APt100 -200 degrees C to 600 degrees C for E984-258/265/275/285
for APt100 -200 PLC models are:
degrees C to 600
Temp 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 13-bit 15-bit Measuring
degrees C for
(degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees + sign step/value
E984-258/265/
C) C C F F range
275/285
less than - -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under
205 range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 2731 -10667 Nominal
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 range

+600 +600 +6000 +1112 11120 8191 32000

greater +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Over range
than +614

Conversion table The ranges for APt200 -200 degrees C to 250 degrees C for E984-258/265/275/285
for APt200 -200 PLC models are:
degrees C to 250
Temp 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 13-bit 15-bit Measuring
degrees C for
(degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees + sign step/value
E984-258/265/
C) C C F F range
275/285
less than - -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under
205 range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 819 -25600 Nominal
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 range

+250 +250 +2500 +482 +4820 8191 32000

greater +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Over range
than +256

10 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

Conversion table The ranges for R, 0 to 400 ohms for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC models are:
for R, 0 to 400
Resistance in ohms 13-bit 15-bit + sign Value range
ohms for E984-
258/265/275/285 0 0 0 Recommended
100 2048 +8000 nominal range

200 4096 +16000

399.902 8191 +32000
Greater than or equal 8191 +32767 Over range
to 400

Note: In RTD applications, the internal precision source forces a 2.5 mA current
through the resistance. For a PT 100 RTD, a range of 18.49... 390.25 ohms would
correspond to -200... +850 degrees C; the values 80.31 ohms (-50 degrees C) to
194 ohms (+250 degrees C) are in the recommended range. Consult your RTD
data book for the appropriate linearization equations for your field device.

WARNING
Unit Damage Hazard
Operation at an extreme out-of-range voltage--at or beyond +/-24 V--
will cause permanent damage to the module.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

The ADU 204/254 operates off the 5 V supply voltage provided internally over the
I/O bus.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 11

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Field Wiring and LED Displays

Introduction The ADU 204/254 module may be field wired for any combination of RTD or 500 mV
inputs at its four analog channels.

Note: Unused inputs should always be jumpered. Therefore, jumper pins 3 ... 6 for
channel 1, pins 7 ... 10 for channel 2, pins 14 ... 17 for channel 3, pins 18 ... 21 for
channel 4.

Wiring Diagram The following illustration is a wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the ADU
204/254 analog input module.
I/O Bus
Interface
1
2 MUX
3 Dual
4 Scale
V
5 A/D
6 MUX
RED 7
RED 8
BLK 9
RTD MUX
BLK 10
11
12
13 MUX
14
15
V
16
17
RED 18
RED 19
BLK 20
RTD BLK 21 5 Vdc
22 REF
Green
LED

ADU 204/254 The ADU 204/254 has one green LED opposite terminal screw 1, used to indicate
Analog Input the presence of the 5 V power supply from the backplane.
Module LED

12 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Noise Suppression DIP Switch

Introduction A two-position DIP switch on the back of the ADU 204/254 can be set to protect the
module from external noise interference.

Changing the The factory setting is for 50 Hz voltage interferences. By alternating the switch
Switch Setting position, you can set the device for 60 Hz noise suppression.
The following illustration shows the noise suppression switch on the rear of the ADU
204/254.

LR

Position R on Switch 2 = 50 Hz Noise Suppression

Position L on Switch 2 = 60 Hz Noise Suppression

Switch 1 is not used

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 13

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Calibration

Introduction By adjusting the two potentiometers on the top of the ADU 204/254, you can
calibrate the four analog input channels to an accuracy of +/-3 counts over the
recommended linear count range of the module (2049... 6143).

Calibrating the The following illustration shows the location of the potentiometers on the ADU 204.
Analog Input
Channels
Potentiometers

To adjust the potentiometers:

14 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

Adjusting the The following are the steps to adjust the potentiometers on the 204/254 Input
Potentiometers Module:
Step Action
1 Stop your A984-1xx controller.
2 Using the DIP switch on the back of the module, set it for the desired noise
suppression.
3 To calibrate all analog channels, install a precision 200 ohm (+/-1%) resistor
across each input, as instructed below.
Note: Make sure all jumper wires are the same length and resistor/wire
connections are of high quality.
4 Identify the active input point by taking a precision multimeter and connecting it
across each of the 200 ohm resistors. Only one point will display approximately
500 mV; the other three points will equal 0 mV. The identified point is the last
point polled by the A/D converter, and is the only point presently outputting the
2.5 mA constant current source.
5 Having identified the active input point, use the precision Multimeter to adjust
potentiometer "A" for a reading of 500 mV (+/-100 mV). This adjustment
calibrates the internal 2.5 mA constant current source.
6 START the 984-1xx controller and enter the Online Reference screen to view the
input values associated with the ADU 204:
3XXX16143
3XXX26143
3XXX46143
3XXX36143
You need one input data register per channel.
7 Adjust Potentiometer "B" for an input of 6143 (+/-3 counts). This adjustment sets
up the overall A/D converter accuracy for all four inputs.
8 When you are satisfied with the readings on all channels, drop a bead of sealing
varnish on each potentiometer to secure its setting.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 15

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

Step Action
9 The following illustration shows a 200 ohm resistor across each Input on the
ADU 204.
1
2
3
4
200 Ω
5
6
7
8
200 Ω
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
200 Ω
16
17
18
19
200 Ω 20
21
22

16 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of ADU 204/254 specifications.

Specifications
Module Topology Number of Channels 4
Isolation Non-isolated, channel-to-bus or channel-
to-channel
Signal types supported Two-pole voltage inputs
Four-pole RTD inputs
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001
Power Supply Internally provided source 5 V, less than 50 mA from I/O bus
DIN Rail Less than 0.1 ohms
Grounding
Voltage Input Linear Measuring Range +/-0.5 V nominal
Capabilities Channel over range delay 250 ms at +/-1 V, corresponding to the
maximum negative or positive decimal
value
Input Impedance greater than 10M ohms
Input Voltage 24 V maximum
Wire Size One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
RTD Input PT100 RTD Impedance 18.49 ... 390.26 ohms
Capabilities Range
Temperature Measuring -200 ... +850 degrees C
Range
Resolution 0.25 degrees C
A/D Conversion Conversion Time @4096 in 80 ms/input (max) @
50 Hz suppression
@2048 in 66.6 ms/input (max) @
60 Hz suppression
60 ms/input (max) @
50 Hz suppression
50 ms/input (max) @
60 Hz suppression
Resolution 12 bits recommended range (+1)
In-range Error Limit 0.4% of input value @ 0 ... 60 degrees C
Nonlinearity +/-2 counts @ 0 ... 60 degrees C

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 17

ADU 204/254 Analog Input Module

Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C for ADU 204

Characteristic -40 ... +70 degrees C for ADU 254
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 4 in/0 out
Dimensions (WxHxD) 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
.5 lb
Agency Approvals ADU204: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2
Standards.
ADU254C: Railway standard EN 50 155; and European Directive EMC
89/336/EEC Standards. UL 508; CSA 22.2 No. 142; FM Class I, Div 2
pending.

18 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ADU 205 Analog
Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the ADU 205 analog input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the ADU 205 Analog Input Module? 20
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges 21
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Switch Settings 24
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Field Wiring 25
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Calibration 27
ADU 205 Analog Input Module Specifications 29

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 19

ADU 205 Analog Input Module

What is the ADU 205 Analog Input Module?

Brief Product The ADU 205 is a four-channel analog input module without opto-isolation. It
Description performs dual-slope integrating A/D conversions, converting analog values into 12-
bit digital values plus sign. It can handle either voltage inputs in the range of +/- 20
V or current inputs in the range of +/-40 mA. The linear input data range is from 2049
... 6143.

20 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 205 Analog Input Module

ADU 205 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges

Introduction The ADU 205 is a four-channel analog input module without isolation. It performs
dual-slope integrating A/D conversions, converting analog values into 12-bit digital
values plus sign. It can handle either voltage inputs in the range of +/- 20 V or current
inputs in the range of +/-40 mA. The linear input data range is from 2049 ... 6143.
The PLC model determines the available ranges. Refer to the tables below.

A984-1xx, E984- A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255 PLC Models

24x/251/255 PLC
Input Signals
Models
Voltage Current Data Count Operating Results
(Decimal)
<= -20 V <= -40 mA 0 Under Range
-19.99 ... -10.001 V -39.99 ... -20.1 mA 1 ... 2048
-10 V -20 mA 2049 ↑
... ... ... ...
0V 0 mA 4096 Recommended
... ... ... operating range
+10 V +20 mA 6143 ...
↓
10.001 ... 19.99 V 20.1 ... 39.99 mA 6144 ... 8191
>= +20 V >= 40 mA 8192 Over range

+/-20 mA, +/-40 +/-20 mA, +/-40 mA for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC Models
mA for E984-258/
Input current 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits 15-bits Range
265/275/285 PLC
(mA) + sign + sign
Models
<-20/-40 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
-20/-40 0 0 0 -4095 -32000 Nominal range
0 2048 4096 32768 0 0
+20/+40 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>+20/+40 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 21

ADU 205 Analog Input Module

+/- 10 VDC, +/- 20 +/- 10 VDC, +/- 20 VDC for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC Models
VDC for E984-
Input current 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits 15-bits Range
258/265/275/285
VDC + sign + sign
PLC Models
<-20/-40 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
-10/-20 0 0 0 -4095 -32000 Nominal range
0 2048 4096 32768 0 0
+10/+20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>+10/+20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

0 ... 10 VDC, 0 ... 0 ... 10 VDC, 0 ... 20 VDC for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC Models
20 VDC for E984-
Input current 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits 15-bits Range
258/265/275/285
VDC + sign + sign
PLC Models
<0 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
10/20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>10/20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

0 ... 20 mA for 0 ... 20 mA for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC Models

E984-258/265/
Input current 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits 15-bits Range
275/285 PLC
mA + sign + sign
Models
<0 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

22 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 205 Analog Input Module

4 ... 20 mA for 4 ... 20 mA for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC Models

E984-258/265/
Input current 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits 15-bits Range
275/285 PLC
mA + sign + sign
Models
< 0 ... 2 0 0 0 0 0 Wire breakage
2.1 ... 3.61 0 0 0 0 -32768 Under-range
3.62 ... 3.99 0 0 0 0 Tolerable
4 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
> 20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

ADU 205 The ADU 205 operates off the 5 V supply voltage provided internally over the I/O
Operation bus.
When the module goes out of range—either over or under range—and then returns
to a valid operating range, the module will resume proper operations unless your
out-of-range condition reaches or exceeds the safety range of +/-30 Vdc.

CAUTION
Do not operate at extreme ranges.
Operating at an extreme out-of-range voltage—at or beyond +/-30
Vdc—will cause permanent damage to the module.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

LED The ADU 205 has one green LED opposite terminal screw 1. This LED is used to
indicate the presence of the 5 V power supply from the backplane.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 23

ADU 205 Analog Input Module

ADU 205 Analog Input Module Switch Settings

Introduction Two two-position DIP switches are located on the back of the ADU 205.

Changing the Switch 2 is used to specify whether the inputs are voltage or current inputs; switch
Switch Settings 1 is used to set external noise interference protection for the module.
The following illustration shows the switches on the rear of the ADU 205.

LR

Switch 1
Position R = 50 Hz Noise Suppression
Position L = 60 Hz Noise Suppression

Switch 2
Position R = Current Inputs
Position L = Voltage Inputs

24 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 205 Analog Input Module

ADU 205 Analog Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The module will be field wired differently, depending on whether the field device
provides voltage or current inputs.

Wiring Diagram The following illustration is a wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the ADU
205 analog input module (voltage mode).
I/O Bus
Voltage Mode Interface
1
2
3
Voltage Input 1 V 4 MUX A/D
5 CVTR
6
7
Voltage Input 2 V 8
9
10
11
12
13 MUX
14
15
16
17
18
Voltage Input 4 V 19 +5 Vdc
20 Green
21 LED

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 25

ADU 205 Analog Input Module

The following illustration is a wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the ADU
205 analog input module (current mode).
I/O Bus
Interface
1
2
Current Input 1 3
4 A/D
5 MUX CVTR
6
7
Current Input 2 8
9
10
11
12
13
MUX
14
Current Input 3
15
16
17
18
Current Input 4
19 Green +5 Vdc
20 LED
21
22

Note: The jumpers at terminals 5-6, 9-10, 16-17, and 20-21 are factory set to
reference the input source(s) to ground. If the source(s) that you use are already
grounded, remove the associated jumper(s) to omit ground looping problems and
possible module failure.

CAUTION
Operation Failure Hazard
When the installed jumpers reference a ground on the negative input
and using a grounded power supply, the full loop supply voltage causes
the module to fail. We recommend that you wire the loop supply to the
negative input side of your module.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

ADU 205 Analog The ADU 205 has one green LED opposite terminal screw 1, used to indicate the
Input Module presence of the 5 V power supply from the backplane.
LED

26 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 205 Analog Input Module

ADU 205 Analog Input Module Calibration

Introduction By adjusting a single potentiometer on the top of the ADU 205, you can calibrate the
four analog input channels to an accuracy of +/-3 counts over the recommended
linear count range of the module (2049 ... 6143).

Calibrating the The following illustration shows the location of the potentiometer on the ADU 205.
Analog Input
Channels
Potentiometer

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 27

ADU 205 Analog Input Module

The following procedure is for voltage inputs. The process is nearly identical for
current inputs, except that the input signals applied to each channel must be -20 mA,
0 mA, and +20 mA. To adjust the potentiometers:
Step Action
1 Using the DIP switch on the back of the module, set it for the desired noise
suppression.
2 Calibrate analog channel 1 by wiring terminal 3 to the positive side, and terminals
5 and 6 to the negative side, of a voltage standard - as shown in the following
figure.

V = ±10 V ±2 mV

6
3 Connect terminals 7, 9, 10, 14, 16, 17, 18, 20, and 21 to each other.
4 Set the voltage standard to +10 V and adjust the potentiometer until you get a
reading of 6143 counts.
5 Set the voltage standard to -10 V, and adjust the potentiometer until you get a
reading of 2049 +/-1 count.
6 Check the accuracy of your midrange setting by setting the voltage standard to
0 V; the reading should be at or within a count of 4096 counts. Then recheck
your high range count by setting the voltage standard to +10 V; the reading
should be within 3 counts of 6143.
7 Verify the calibration adjustment on the other three analog channels: for channel
2, wire terminals 7, 9, and 10 to the voltage standard; for channel 3, use
terminals 14, 16, and 17; and for channel 4, use terminals 18, 20, and 21. If you
make any fine tuning adjustments on any of these channels, verify their effects
on channel 1.
8 When you are satisfied with the readings on all four channels, drop a bead of
sealing varnish on the potentiometer to secure its setting.

28 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 205 Analog Input Module

ADU 205 Analog Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of system-specific specifications for the ADU 205
Specifications Analog Input Module.
Module Topology Number of Channels 4
Isolation Non-isolated, channel-to-bus or channel-
to-channel
Signal types supported Two-pole voltage inputs
Power Supply Internally provided source 5 V, less than 50 mA from I/O bus
Voltage Input Linear Measuring Range Nominal +/-10 V
Capabilities Maximum +/-19.99 V
Input Impedance 50 ohms
Absolute Maximum Input +/-30 V
Voltage
Wire Size One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
A/D Conversion Conversion Time Each input @ 80 ms (max) @ 50 Hz
4096 in 66.6 ms (max) @60 Hz
Each input @ 60 ms (max) @ 50 Hz
2048 in 50 ms (max) @ 60 Hz
Resolution 12 bits recommended range (+1)
In-range Error Limit 0.5% of input value @ 0... 60 degrees C
Nonlinearity +/-2 counts @ 0... 60 degrees C
Noise Normal Mode Rejection 40 dB minimum
Suppression Common Mode Rejection 86 dB minimum
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 4 in/0 out

The following table gives general specifications for the ADU 205 Analog Input
Module.
Dimensions 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
(WxHxD) 1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
.5 lb.
Agency ADU204: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2
Approvals Standards.
VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 Standards.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 29

ADU 205 Analog Input Module

30 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ADU 206/256
Analog Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the ADU 206/256 analog input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module? 32
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges 33
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics 36
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Configuration 38
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Programming Modes 40
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Calibration 47
ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Specifications 50

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 31

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

What is the ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module?

Brief Product The ADU 206/256 is a four-channel analog input module with opto-isolation. It
Description performs dual-slope integrating A/D conversions, converting analog input signals
into digital values based on the principle of successive approximation. The ADU 256
functions just like the ADU 206, except that the ADU 256 operates at extended
temperature.

Note: The ADU 256 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is ADU 256C, which meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

WARNING

The ADU 206/256 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

32 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges

Introduction The ADU 206/256 is a four-channel analog input module with opto-isolation. It
performs dual-slope integrating A/D conversions, converting analog input signals
into digital values based on the principle of successive approximation. The ADU 256
functions just like the ADU 206, except that the ADU 256 operates at extended
temperature.

Note: The ADU 256 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is ADU 256C, which meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

WARNING
Faulty operation.
The ADU 206/256 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 33

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

Conversion The ADU 206/256 module has the following characteristics:

Ranges l Voltage/current input selection is made using jumpers; range values are set in the
software.
l Operates off the 5 V supply voltage provided internally over the I/O bus, along
with a user-supplied 24 VDC external power source.
l Resolution is 11 Bit + sign or 12 Bit, depending on the input range selected.
l Out-of-range status indication is software selectable.
The PLC model determines the ranges. A table is provided below for each of the
following:
l 0... 10 VDC/2... 10 VDC, 0... 20 mA/4... 20 mA for E984-258/265/275/285
l +/-10 VDC/ +/-20 mA for E984-258/265/275/285

Note: See the Specifications section for the ranges for the A984-1xx, E984-24x/
251/255 PLC models

The following table lists the input ranges for voltage/current input selection.
Voltage Current
+/-1 V +/-20 mA
+/-10 V 4... 20 mA
0... 1 V 0... 20 mA
0... 10 V
0.2... 1 V
2... 10 V

The ranges for 0... 10 VDC/2... 10 VDC, 0... 20 mA/4... 20 mA for E984-258/265/
275/285 PLC models are:
Input Current 12-bits 16-bits 11-bits + 15-bits + Measuring
voltage (mA) sign sign step/value
(VDC) range
0 0 0 0 Under range
0 0 0 0 Neg. tolerance
range
0/2 0/4 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
10 20 4000 64000 +2000 +32000
10.01... 20.02... 4001 64016 +2001 +32016 Pos. tolerance
range
greater than/ greater than/ 4095 65520 +2047 +32760 Over range
equal to equal to
10.24/10.19 20.48/20.39

34 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

The ranges for +/-10 VDC/ +/-20 mA for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC models are:
Input Current 12-bits 16-bits 11-bits + 15-bits + Measuring
voltage (mA) sign sign step/value
(VDC) range
less than or less than or 0 0 -2048 -32768 Under
equal to - equal to - range
10.24 20.48
-10.01 -20.02 47 -2001 -32016 Neg.
tolerance
range
-10.00 -20 48 768 -2000 -32000 Nominal
0 0 2048 32768 0 0 range
+10.00 +20 4048 64768 +2000 +32000
+10.01 +20.02...
10.01... 20.02... 4049 +2001 +32016 Pos.
tolerance
range
greater than greater than 4095 65520 +2047 +32752 Over range
or equal to or equal to
10.24 20.48

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 35

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics

Illustration The ADU 206/256 can be installed in any slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201,
and 202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and peripheral connections on
the front. The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be filled in with
relevant information (signal values, etc.) in the spaces provided.
A front view with ADU 206 label is provided below.

ADU-206
ADU 206
1 U
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
2
9
10
11 M
12 ready U
13
14
15 3
16
17
18
19 4
20
21
22 M
card

36 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

LEDs The ADU 206/256 has two green LEDs:

l The LED opposite field wiring terminal #1 indicates the presence of 24 Vdc power
from the external source (ON = power supplied; OFF = power off.
l The LED opposite field wiring terminal #12 indicates the condition of the
processor/module (ON = fault-free operation; OFF = fault condition).

Note: The controller must be running for the READY LED to illuminate.

Simplified A simplified schematic for the ADU 206/256 is provided below.

Schematic 5V
BIT 14
SOC3
BIT 13
-15V 0V +15V -15V 0V +15V
BIT 12
SERIAL BIT 11
MUX PA-
RAM
A/D

BIT 0

+24VDC 1
REF
2
3

1 4
5
6
7 GN “ready”
8
2
9
10
GND 11

12
13
GN
14
15 +15V
3
16 0V

17 -15V
18

4 19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 37

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Configuration

Introduction The following items must be addressed when configuring the ADU 206/256:
l The module must be I/O mapped as five 3x input registers and one 4x output
register. Binary must be set for data type.
l Make connections and assignments of input addresses.
l Identify overall mode of operation, type of input, and error indication.
l Cabling guidelines.

Cabling l Shielded, twisted pair cable (2 or 4 x 0.5mm per channel) should be used. All
channels can be connected with a common shielded cable.
l Connect shield to ground (GND) on one side with a short cable (less than 8 in).
l Observe a minimum distance of 20 in. between the module and power lines or
other sources of electrical disturbance.

Connection and
Assignment of
Note: Detailed Compact 984 cabling and installation instructions are found in the
Input Addresses
User Guide.

Connection and For current inputs:

Assignment for l Jumper 3-4 for input 1
Current Inputs l Jumper 7-8 for input 2
l Jumper 14-15 for input 3
l Jumper 18-19 for input 4

Connection and For voltage inputs:

Assignment for l Jumper 5-6 for input 1
Voltage Inputs l Jumper 9-10 for input 2
l Jumper 16-17 for input 3
l Jumper 20-21 for input 4
Corresponding input signal names or addresses can be entered on the blank label
(supplied).

38 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

Wiring Diagram An ADU 206/256 wiring diagram and associated registers for inputs are provided
below.
+24 VDC
COMMON

0.16 A

1
2
3 3
4 4
5 5
I1 V1 3XXXX + 1
6 6
7 7
8 8

9 9
I2 V2
10 3XXXX + 2
10
11

12
13
14
15 15
16 16
V3 I3
17 17 3XXXX + 3
18
19 19
20 20
V4 I4
21 21 3XXXX + 4
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 39

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Programming Modes

Introduction The ADU 206/256 is a four-channel analog input module. Its field connector is wired
depending on the type of input to be measured, either voltage or current. Any of the
four inputs can be either voltage or current, and any combination of the four may be
used if levels are within the programmed range for the channel.
The module can operate in one of several modes, and the input channel ranges are
individually selectable. The mode and ranges are set by an I/O mapped 4x register.
Five sequential 3x registers must also be I/O mapped. The first register is used to
read module operating status, and the remainder contain data representing voltage
or current levels at the four channel inputs. Channel input data is updated every 10
ms.

4x Control The operating mode of the module and individual channel ranges are set using the
Register lower 7 bits of the 4x register.
Options are:
Bit Operating Mode Setting
000X Bipolar mode without overrange indication
001X Unipolar mode without overrange indication
002X Bipolar with offset and extended resolution without overrange indication
003X Unipolar with offset and extended resolution without overrange indication
004X Bipolar mode with overrange indication
005X Unipolar mode with overrange indication
006X Bipolar with offset and extended resolution with overrange indication
007X Unipolar with offset and extended resolution with overrange indication

Note: These values are in Hexadecimal.

where the X value determines the individual channel range:
1 = expanded voltage range (10 V)
0 = normal voltage range (1 V)

40 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

The following diagram illustrates bits in the ADU 206/256 control word and their
meanings.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

[15-7] Not Used

[6] If set, requests an indication in

the status word (input word 1) when the input to a
channel is above the top end (+ or -) of its
measurement range. [See the status word
description for more information.]

[5] If set, the module measures current or

voltage with an offset over a restricted range,
i.e., 4 ... 20 mA, 0.2 ... 1 V, or 2 ... 10 V.

[4] If set, the module measures current

or voltage in 12 bit unipolar mode.

[3] Defines the measuring range of Channel

4. If = 1, the upper range will be 10 V. Must
be set to 0 for current mode operation.

[2] Defines the measuring range of Channel

3. If = 1, the upper range will be 10 V. Must
be set to 0 for current mode operation.

[1] Defines the measuring range of Channel

2. If = 1, the upper range will be 10 V. Must
be set to 0 for current mode operation.

[0] Defines the measuring range of Channel

1. If set, the upper range will be 10 V. Must
be set to 0 for current mode operation.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 41

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

4x Control A quick reference diagram of the ADU 206/256 4x Control Register is provided
Register Quick below.
Reference

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

NOT USED
CH 1
CH 2
EXPANDED RANGE SELECT CH 3
(Chs 1 ... 4; set to a “1” if over CH 4
1 V will be input.)

0 0 Bipolar
0 1 Unipolar
MODULE MODE SELECT 1 0 Bipolar w/Offset and Ext Res
1 1 Unipolar w/Offset and Ext Res

1 Add this bit for overrange

conditions to be displayed in
the common 3x Stat Register

EXAMPLE:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0

NOT USED

CH 3 and CH 4
Expanded Ranges

Module set to
Unipolar Mode

Overrange Indication
Requested

42 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

3X Status and The bit significance of the first 3x input register, which displays the module status, is
Data Registers displayed in the following illustration. The next four registers contain data represen-
tative of the individual channel input values. Refer to the rest of the information in
this map for more detail about the values that may be expected.
Data values are the result of the type of input selected, the field connector wiring,
the module operating mode selected, and the range selected for the channel
(normal or expanded).
I/O Map Registers Data
3x Module status information
3x + 1 Input #1 data
3x + 2 Input #2 data
3x + 3 Input #3 data
3x + 4 Input #4 data

The following diagram illustrates bits in the ADU 206/256 status word and their
meanings.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

[15-8] Not Used

[7] Set until the processor within the module is ready. After the
processor is operational this bit will be set if any of bits 0 - 3 of
the status word are set or if a processor fault occurs.

[6] Set if the external supply voltage to the module is

disconnected.

[5] Reflects the state of Bit 5 of the control word.

[4] Reflects the state of Bit 4 of the control word.

[3] If set, indicates that the input to Channel 4 has exceeded

the anticipated +/- limit, or indicates an open circuit in
4 ... 20 mA operation (unipolar and bipolar with offset).
[2] If set, indicates that the input to Channel 3 has exceeded
the anticipated +/- limit, or indicates an open circuit in
4 ... 20 mA operation (unipolar and bipolar with offset).

[1] If set, indicates that the input to Channel 2 has exceeded

the anticipated +/- limit, or indicates an open circuit in
4 ... 20mA operation (unipolar and bipolar with offset).

[0] If set, indicates that the input to Channel 1 has exceeded

the anticipated +/- limit, or indicates an open circuit in
4 ... 20mA operation (unipolar and bipolar with offset).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 43

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

30xxx Status A quick reference diagram of the ADU 206/256 30xxx Status Register is provided
Register Quick below.
Reference
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

NOT USED
CH 1
CH 2
OUT OF RANGE/ CH 3
OPEN CIRCUIT INDICATOR CH 4
(Channels 1- 4)

0 0 Bipolar
0 1 Unipolar
MODULE OPERATING MODE 1 0 Bipolar w/Offset
and Ext Res
1 1 Unipolar w/Offset
and Ext Res
X Set if External Supply Bad

X Set on Fault

EXAMPLE:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

NOT USED
CH 3 and CH 4
Out of Range

Unipolar Mode

External Supply OK

Fault Bit

44 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

Types of Modes When power is first applied to the module, it will be in a state equivalent to all of the
and Their control bits being 0. As long as power to the unit is maintained, the operating mode
Functions of the module will be unchanged through a stop/start cycle.
When the module goes out of range-either over or under range-and then returns to
a valid operating range, the module will resume proper operations unless your out-
of-range condition reaches or exceeds the safety range of +/-30 VDC.

WARNING
Extreme out-of-range voltage.
Operation at an extreme out-of-range voltage-at or beyond +/-30 VDC-
will cause permanent damage to the module.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

Bipolar (000X, 004X)

Bipolar mode is selected by setting the control word to the value 000X, where X
defines the range of any channels used for voltage measurement. In this mode, if
out of range indication is requested (control word = 004x), it will turn on at voltages/
currents exceeding the +/- maximum value. Refer to status word description.
The following table describes the current/voltage values in bipolar mode.
Current Normal Voltage Expanded Voltage Value
-20 mA -1 V -10 V 48
0 mA 0V 0V 2048
+20 mA +1 V +10 V 4048

Unipolar (001X, 005X)

This mode is selected by setting the control word to the value 001X, where X defines
the range of any channels used for voltage measurements. In this mode, if
overrange indication is requested (i.e., control word = 005X), it will turn on if an input
exceeds the maximum range value. Refer to status word description.
The following table describes the current/voltage values in unipolar mode.
Current Normal Voltage Expanded Voltage Value
0 mA 0V 0V 0
20 mA +1 V +10 V 4000

Bipolar with Offset and Extended Resolution (002X, 006X)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 45

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

This mode is selected by setting the control word to the value 002X, where X defines
the range of any channels used for voltage measurements. In this mode, the out of
range indication is set whenever the inputs are less than 10% of the range maximum
value (i.e., 2 mA, 0.1 V or 1 V). This serves as a broken wire detector in addition to
being a low input indicator. The out of range indication request bit does not have to
be set, and the indication will reset once the input returns to the active range. In this
mode, if overrange indication is requested (control word = 006X), it will turn on if an
input exceeds the maximum range value. Refer to status word description.
The following table describes the current/voltage values in bipolar mode with offset
and extended resolution.
Current Normal Voltage Expanded Voltage Value
4 mA 0.2 V 2V 2048
20 mA 1V 10 V 4048

Unipolar with Offset and Extended Resolution (003X, 007X)

This mode is selected by setting the control word to the value 003X, where X defines
the range of any channels used for voltage measurements. In this mode, the out of
range indication is set whenever the inputs are less than 10% of the range maximum
value (i.e., 2 mA, 0.1 V or 1 V). This serves as a broken wire detector in addition to
being a low input indicator. The out of range indication request bit does not have to
be set, and the indication will reset once the input returns to the active range. In this
mode, if overrange indication is requested (control word = 007X), it will turn on if an
input exceeds the maximum range value. Refer to status word description.
The following table describes the current/voltage values in unipolar mode with offset
and extended resolution are.
Current Normal Voltage Expanded Voltage Value
4 mA 0.2 V 2V 0
20 mA 1V 10 V 4000

46 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Calibration

Introduction By adjusting the two potentiometers located on the top of the ADU 206/256, you can
independently calibrate both the normal and expanded ranges for the four input
channels.

CAUTION
Return units requiring calibration.
Modicon recommends that units requiring recalibration be returned to
the factory, since inaccuracies could be due to faulty components.
However, users who wish to perform their own calibration should use
the following procedure.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 47

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

Calibrating the In the procedure that follows, R65 is used to calibrate the normal ranges, and R64
Analog Input is used to calibrate the expanded ranges. Items required for calibration are:
Channels l A 1 VDC Power Supply (+/-0.1 mV)
l A 10 VDC Power Supply (+/-1.0 mV)
l A voltmeter with appropriate scales and accuracy of 0.2... 0.5 parts/million
The following illustration shows the location of the potentiometers on the
ADU 206/256.

ADU-206
ADU 206
1 U
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
2
9
10
11 M
12 ready U
13
14
15 3
16
17
18
19 4
20
21
22 M
card

48 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

Adjusting the Use the following procedure to adjust the potentiometers.

Potentiometers
Step Action
Procedure
1 Connect a 1 VDC source (+/-0.1 mV), verified with the voltmeter, to the four
voltage inputs. Set the module for Unipolar mode and all channels for Normal
range. Adjust R65 for a reading of 4000 counts on Channel 1. Channels 2... 4
should read 4000, +/-2 counts.
2 Set the module to Bipolar mode and check all channels for a reading of 4048 +/
-2 counts.
3 Reverse the 1 VDC supply polarity and check all channels in Bipolar mode. All
channels should read 48 +/-2 counts.
4 Set the module for Unipolar mode and all channels for Expanded range. Connect
a 10 VDC source (+/-1.0 mV), verified with the voltmeter, to the four voltage
inputs. Adjust R64 for a reading of 4000 counts on Channel 1. Channels 2 to 4
should read 4000, +/-2 counts.
5 Set the module to Bipolar mode and check all channels for a reading of 4048 +/
-2 counts.
6 Reverse the 10 Vdc supply polarity and check all channels in Bipolar mode. All
channels should read 48 +/-2 counts.
7 When satisfied with the readings on all four channels, drop a bead of sealing
varnish on both potentiometers’ adjusting screws to secure their settings.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 49

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of ADU 206/256 specifications.

Specifications
Module Topology Number of Channels 4
Data Format Two-pole as voltage or current inputs
Isolation Channel-to-bus 500 V
Channel-to-external supply 500 V
Nonisolated channel-to-channel
Power Supply External 24 Vdc Typical 70 mA
Maximum 100 mA
Internal Source (from I/O bus) 5 Vdc Typical 60 mA
Maximum

Power Dissipation Typical 2Ω

Maximum 3Ω
Voltage Input Linear Measuring Range
A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255 PLC Models
Analog Value Current Inputs (mA) Decimal Ext. Resolution Comments
Voltage Inputs (V) Value
+/-1 V +/-10 V 2...10 V +/-20 mA 4...20 mA
-1.024 ... -10.24 -20.48 ... 0 Under range in dication in
status word
-1.015 -10.15 20.30
-1.001 -10.01 ... -20.02 47
-1.00 -10.00 -20.00 48
-0.50 -5.00 -10.00 1048
-0.10 -1.00 -2.00 1848
-0.050 -0.50 -1.00 1948
-0.01 -0.10 -0.20 2028
-0.001 -0.01 -0.02 2046 Linear Range
-0.0005 -0.005 -0.01 2047
0.00 0.00 +2.00 0.00 +4.00 2048 0
+0.0005 +0.005 +2.004 +0.01 +4.008 2049
+0.001 +0.01 +2.008 +0.02 +4.016 2050
+0.01 +0.10 +2.08 +0.20 +4.16 2068
+0.050 +0.50 +2.40 +1.00 +4.80 2148

50 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

+0.10 +1.00 +2.80 +2.00 +5.60 2248

+0.50 +5.00 +6.00 +10.00 +12.00 3048
+1.00 +10.00 +10.00 +20.00 +20.00 4048 4000
+1.015 +10.15 +10.155 ... +20.30 ... +20.30 ... Over range Indication in
... ... Status Word
+1.024 +10.24 +10.19 +20.47 +20.38 4095

Absolute Max. Input Voltage +/-30 V

Input Impedance greater than 1 M ohms
Wire Size One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
Current Input Linear Measuring Range See the table above
Capabilities Absolute Maximum Input Current (continuous) 40 mA/input
Input Impedance 50 ohms
Wire Size One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
A/D Conversion Conversion Time ( maximum) 10 ms for all 4 inputs
Resolution 11 bits plus sign
In-range Error Limit Voltage Maxi mum 0.4% of input value @ 0 ... 60 degrees C
Current Maxi mum 0.56% of input value @ 0 ... 60 degrees C
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C for ADU 206
Characteristics -40 ... +70 degrees C for ADU 256
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 5 in/1 out
Noise Suppression Common Mode Rejection (minimum) 60 dB @ 1 kHz
Dimensions (W x H x D) 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 330 g
0.725 lb
Agency Approvals ADU206: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 Standards.

ADU256C: Railway standard EN 50 155; European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC Standards. UL

508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 pending.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 51

ADU 206/256 Analog Input Module

52 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ADU 210 Isolated
Analog Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the ADU 210 isolated analog input
module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module? 54
ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics 55
Installing the ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module 57
ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Operation 59
ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Specifications 63

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 53

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

What is the ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module?

Brief Product The ADU 210 is a four-channel analog input module with opto-isolation. It performs
Description analog-to-digital conversions using a delta-sigma conversion method, converting
analog input signals into digital values. The ADU 210 module has the following
characteristics:
l Voltage/Current input selection is made by appropriate wiring; the range values
are set via the panel software.
l Operates off the 5 V supply voltage provided internally over the I/O bus, along
with a user-supplied 24 VDC external power source.
l Provides 300 volts maximum channel-to-channel isolation.
l Provides a 15-bit + sign resolution.
l Errors are noted via the Concept I/O Map Status Word.
l Input selection and range can be set independently.
Input ranges are:
Voltage Current
+/-10 V
0 ... 10 V
1 ... 5 V 4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 5 V 0 ... 20 mA
2 ... 10 V
+/-5 V +/-20 mA

54 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics

Illustration The ADU 210 can be installed in any slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201, and
202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and peripheral connections on the
front. The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be filled in with relevant
information (signal values, etc.) in the spaces provided.
A front view with ADU 210 label is provided below.

ADU-210
ADU-210
1 U
2 U
3
4
1
5
6
7
8 2
9
10
11 M
ready| U
12
13
14
15 3
16
17
18
19 4
20
21
22 M
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 55

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

LEDs The ADU 210 has two green LEDs.

LED# LED Function
Name
1 Power Pertains to the 24 VDC:
(U) ON = Power supply is available
OFF = Power supply is NOT available.
12 Ready Pertains to the processor operation:
ON = Processor operating between the ADU 210 and the PLC without fault
OFF = Fault in processor operation

Simplified A simplified schematic for the ADU 210 is provided below.

Schematic
+5V

80C31 PAB
First of 4 Input Circuits
serial
U 1
2
3 A/D
1 4
5 PAB
6
7
2 8
9 Channel 2,3,4 GN “ready”
10 TOTUSN
M 11
U 12
PAB
13 GN “U”
14
3 15 +15 V
16
0V
17
18 -15 V
4 19
20
21
M 22

56 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

Installing the ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

Introduction The following procedures are necessary when installing the ADU 210:
l Make connections and assign input addresses.
l Map the I/O module as 4-3x input registers.
l Identify the overall mode of operation and type of input.

Make The selection of current (I) or voltage (U) input is determined primarily on the
Connections and connections and the panel software. However, for the 20mA current range you
Assign Input MUST use the jumpers as noted. Mixed ranges are allowed among the four
Addresses channels.
The following table outlines jumper placement for a 20 mA current range.
20mA Channel Selection Jumper Placement
Input 1 3 and 4
Input 2 7 and 8
Input 3 14 and 15
Input 4 18 and 19

Note: The ADU 210 ships with the four jumpers installed.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 57

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

Wiring Diagram The following illustration is an ADU 210 wiring diagram.

+24 VDC
COMMON
0.16 A
ADU 210
1 U 1
2 ADUU210 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
1
5 5 5
1 I U

input
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 2
9
2 I 10 U 10 10
11 M 11
12 ready U 12
13 U 13
14 14
15 15 15
16 3
16 16
3 U I

input
17 17 17
18 18
19 19 19
4
20 20 20
4 U 21 I
21 21
22 M 22 *Apply Jumpers to select
Appl
A
card 20mA range per channel

58 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Operation

Introduction The ADU 210 is a four-channel analog input module. Its field connector is wired
depending on the type of input to be measured, either voltage or current. Any of the
four inputs can be either voltage or current, and any combination of the four may be
used if levels are within the programmed range for the channel.
The module can operate in one of several modes, and the input channel ranges are
individually selectable. The mode and ranges are set via the panel software.
Channel input data is updated every 270mS. When power is first applied to the
module, its inputs are inactive.

I/O Map The ADU 210 requires 4-3x input registers. These four registers contain data
representative of the individual channel input values.
I/O Map Registers Data
3x Input #1 data
3x + 1 Input #2 data
3x + 2 Input #3 data
3x + 3 Input #4 data

Note: Inputs that are NOT used MUST be set to inactive. This avoids error
messages and reduces the conversion time.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 59

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

Error Detections After system start-up a measured value remains 0, until the ADU 210 is addressed.
and Limits Next, the ADU 210 displays a parameter error (-32 768) until the value is changed
by selecting a valid range. Then the valid range is displayed. Changing the
measuring range displays a parameter error (-32 768) in the following cycle, until the
valid range is shown after subsequent cycles. It may take up to 300mS maximum.
Input voltages (currents) of up to -1.6% of the rated value in unipolar mode and
limiting value 0 result in a digital value (0) without causing an error. When input
voltage (currents) fall below this limit an error results and a measured value (-32
767) is displayed.
Negative input voltage (current) in unipolar mode and limiting value -1.6% produce
an appropriate digital value (up to -512) without causing an error - up to a input
voltage of -1.6% of the rated value. When the measured value falls below this limit
an error results and a measured value (-32 767) is displayed.
When measuring ranges with a 20% offset (live-zero) the error limit for value
measure underflow is about 10% of the rated value.
When errors occur simultaneously in several inputs the error with the lowest input
number is displayed until debugged. Next, the error with the next highest input
number is displayed and so on.
When an input error occurs the transferred measured value of that input is set to the
defined constants of:
Transferred Measured Values after an Error Detection are listed in the following
table.
Measured Values Descriptions
-32 768 Inactive input (invalid measuring range)
+32 767 Measuring range overflow
-32 767 Measuring range underflow

60 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

Conversions The following tables detail the various voltage and current conversions for the ADU
210 module.

Note: Brackets denote range with limiting value -1.6%. No brackets denotes range
with limiting value 0.

The conversion values of voltage inputs are listed in the following table.
Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Decimal Notes
value value value value value value value
0 ... 5 V 0 ... 10V 1 ... 5 V 2 ... 10 V +/-5 V +/-10 V
<-0.080 <-0.16 <+0.52 <+1.04 <-5.12 <-10.24 -32 767 underflow error
-5.119 ... -10.239... -32 766... overload range
-5.00 -10.00 -32 001
+0.52 ... +1.04 .. 0 (-3 840) overload range
-0.08 ... -0.16 ... +0.936 ... +1.87 ... 0 (-512)
-0.00 -0.00 +0.99 +1.99 0 (-1)
-5.00 -10.00 -32 000 linear
-2.50 -5.00 -16 000 linear
-0.50 -1.00 -3 200 linear
-0.25 -0.50 -1 600 linear
-0.05 -0.10 -320 linear
-0.005 -0.01 -32 linear
-0.0025 -0.005 -16 linear
0 0 1 2 0 0 0 linear
0.0025 0.005 1.002 2.004 +0.0025 +0.005 +16 linear
0.005 0.01 1.004 2.008 +0.005 +0.01 +32 linear
0.05 0.10 1.04 2.08 +0.05 +0.10 +320 linear
0.25 0.50 1.20 2.40 +0.25 +0.50 +1 600 linear
0.50 1.00 1.40 2.80 +0.50 +1.00 +3 200 linear
2.50 5.00 3.00 6.00 +2.50 +5.00 +16 000 linear
5.00 10.00 5.00 10.00 +5.00 +10.00 +32 000 rated value
5.000... 10.000... 5.00... 10.00... +5.000.. +10.00... +32 001... overload range
5.119 10.239 5.09 10.19 +5.119 +10.239 +32 766
>5.12 >10.24 >5.09 >10.19 >+5.20 >+10.24 >+32 767 overflow error

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 61

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

The conversion values of current inputs are listed in the following table.
Analog value Analog value Analog value Decimal value Notes
0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA +/-20 mA
<-0.32 <+2.08 <-20.479 -32 767 underflow error
-20.478 ... -32 766 ... overload range
-20.000 -32 001
-0.32 ... +2.08 ... 0 (-3 840) overload range
-0.00 +3.74 ... 0 (-512)
+3.99 0 (-1)
-20.00 -32 000 linear
-10.00 -16 000 linear
-2.00 -3 200 linear
-1.00 -1 600 linear
-0.20 -320 linear
-0.02 -32 linear
-0.01 -16 linear
0 +4 0 0 linear
+0.01 +4.008 +0.01 +16 linear
+0.02 +4.016 +0.02 +32 linear
+0.20 +4.16 +0.20 +320 linear
+1.00 +4.80 +1.00 +1 600 linear
+2.00 +5.60 +2.00 +3 200 linear
+10.00 +12.00 +10.00 +16 000 linear
+20.00 +20.00 +20.00 +32 000 rated value
+20.000 ... +20.00 ... +20.000 ... +32 001 ... overload range
+20.478 +20.38 +20.478 +32 766
>+20.479 >+20.38 >+20.479 >+32 767 overflow error

62 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of specifications for the ADU 210 module.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of channels 4
Data Format Unipolar and Bipolar as voltage or current
inputs
Isolation channel to 300 Vdc maximum
channel
Isolation channel to bus 500 Vac maximum
Power Supply Internal Source (from I/O 5 VIO; 90mA maximum, 40mA typical
bus)
External 24 Vdc; 120 mA maximum, 60 mA typical
Power Dissipation 3Ω maximum, 2Ω typical
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 4 in/0 out
Voltage Inputs Linear Measuring Range Unipolar: 1 ... 5V, 0 ... 5V, 2 ... 10V, 0 ... 10V
Bipolar: +/-5V, +/-10V,
Input Impedance ≥ 1 M ohms
Resolution Brief Product Description, p. 54
Absolute accuracy error @ Maximum 0.1% of full scale
25 degrees C
Absolute accuracy error @ Maximum 0.25% of full scale
60 degrees C
Typical accuracy error ≤0.5 of above maximum error
Maximum overvoltage +/-30 V static (1 input for each module)
+/-50 V dynamic for max. 100 ms
Conversion values ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module
Operation, p. 59
Current Inputs Linear Measuring Range +/-20 mA (+/- 5 V),
0 ... 20mA (0 ... 5 V),
4 ... 20 mA (1 ... 5 V)
Input Impedance 250 ohms
Resolution Brief Product Description, p. 54
Absolute accuracy error @ Maximum 0.1% of full scale
25 degrees C
Absolute accuracy error @ Maximum 0.25% of full scale
60 degrees C
Typical accuracy error 0.5 of above maximum error
Critical values 48 mA, maximum overvoltage from 12 V

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 63

ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

Conversion values ADU 210 Isolated Analog Input Module

Operation, p. 59
Dynamic Conversion time for all 270 mS maximum
Characteristics of inputs
Inputs Time constant for HF 0.4 mS typical
suppression
Interference voltage n=1,2 ...
suppression (main
suppression) for f=nx50 or
60Hz
Common-mode rejection ≥105 dB
Processor/ Processor Type Intel 80C31 (8-bit)
Memory Memory 32 kByte EPROM for firmware
Physical Format 1 slot
Characteristics Dimensions (W x H x D) 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 320 g, 0.710 lb.
Wire Size 1-14 AWG, 2-20 AWG
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C
Characteristics Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and
European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC (See
Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Standards

64 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ADU 211/212
Universal Analog Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the ADU 211/212 universal analog input
module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module? 66
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module "J" Thermocouple Quick Start 67
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Inputs 68
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Installation 69
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Switch Settings 70
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Field Wiring 74
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Field Wiring Examples 77
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Application Notes 84
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Configuration 87
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Output Registers 88
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Input Registers 94
Sequentially Reading ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Channel Data 96
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Troubleshooting 103
ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Specifications 105

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 65

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

What is the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module?

Brief Product
Description
Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/
211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft. Refer to Installing the Loadables for A120 Series I/O Modules, p. 791

The ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module is a highly versatile module that
digitizes up to eight analog inputs into a Modicon Compact 984 or Micro PLC
(programmable logic controller). The module accepts thermocouple, RTD
(resistance temperature device), voltage, and current loop inputs, and (through
automatic channel sequencing or ladder logic) provides these inputs to the PLC
using only three 30XXX registers. Commands to the module are processed through
three 40XXX registers.

CAUTION
Note difference between ADU 211 and ADU 212.
The difference between the ADU 211 and the ADU 212 is how they are
powered. The ADU 211 requires a external 24 Vdc power supply and
draws less than1 mA from the internal +5 Vdc. In contrast, the ADU 212
only draws power from the internal +5 Vdc (450 mA typical, 600 mA
maximum) and does not require an external power supply.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: For application specific concerns refer to ADU 211/212 Universal Analog
Input Module Application Notes, p. 84

66 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module "J" Thermocouple Quick Start

Introduction This section is provided as a reference only for users who are familiar with the ADU
211/212 module. Until you have become completely familiar with the ADU 211/212
module, do not try to follow these steps.

Note: For application specific concerns, refer to ADU 211/212 Universal Analog
Input Module Application Notes, p. 84

Procedure for "J" The following table describes the procedure for "J" Thermocouple Quick Start
Thermocouple
Step Action
Quick Start
1 Ensure that DIP switch poles 1, 3, and 9 (both top and bottom DIP switches) are
turned ON (closed), while the others are turned OFF (open). This step configures
the module for thermocouple inputs.
2 Attach a "J"-type thermocouple to the field wiring terminal block: connect the
thermocouple white wire (+) to Terminal 2 and the red wire (-) to Terminal 3.
3 Install the ADU 211/212 in the rack. +24 VDC power and common need to be
connected on the ADU 211.
4 I/O map the module slot as 30001-30003 and 40001-40003 BIN.
5 With the controller in RUN mode, in the panel software reference screen,
configure the Control Words as follows:
l 40001 = 1660 HEX (degrees F display of "J" Thermocouple)
l 40002 = 0F6A HEX (internal cold junction compensation, 100 ms integration
time and Floating Point data format)
6 Display 30001 in Floating Point format and 30003 hex. The Registers should
appear as:
l 30001 = Room temperature in degrees F
l 30003 = 8000 HEX, indicating valid data on Channel 1

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 67

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Inputs

Introduction Built into the module’s firmware are automatic calibration, linearization of
thermocouple and RTD inputs, and internal diagnostic tests.

Channels The module provides two groups of four isolated input channels. Each group can
be configured independently for:
l 100 ohms Platinum RTDs, 385 or 392 alpha
l Type J, K, T, E, R, S, or B thermocouples (ungrounded type)
l +/-0.050, 0.5, 2, 5, or 10 VDC inputs
l 4-20 or +/-20 mA current loops

Formats The module can provide data to the PLC in these formats:
l 12-bit (0 to 4095)
l signed 15-bit (-32768 to +32767)
l unsigned 16-bit (0 to 65535)
l IEEE 754 floating point

68 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Installation

Before You Before installing the ADU 211/212 module, you should:
Install the l Set the DIP switches to correspond to your application.
Module l Field wire the module’s terminal block for your application.

Note: For application-specific concerns refer to ADU 211/212 Universal Analog

Input Module Application Notes, p. 84

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 69

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Switch Settings

Introduction Before installing the ADU 211/212 module, you should:

l Set the DIP switches to correspond to your application.
l Field wire the module’s terminal block for your application.

70 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Setting the DIP Prepare the ADU 211/212 for operation by setting the DIP switches on the top and
Switches bottom of the module. In general, the switches on the top of the module configure
Group 1, and the switches on the bottom of the module configure Group 2. See the
following illustrations and tables for DIP switch locations and settings.
A top view of the module -- the Group 1 DIP switch location -- is provided below.

A bottom view of the module -- the Group 2 DIP switch location -- is provided below.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 71

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

DIP Switch DIP switch settings for Groups 1 and 2 are listed in the following table.
Settings
For this type of application... Turn these DIP switch poles ON
(ON = closed)
Thermocouple with internal CJC 1, 3, and 9 only
with external CJC* 1, 9 and see table below
Voltage +/-0.05, 0.5, 2.0, or 5.0 VDC 1, 3, and 9 only
+/-10.0 VDC 1 and 3 only
Current 1, 3, and 5 through 9**
RTD 2, 4, and 9 only
* You need external CJC (cold junction compensation) only if the ADU 211 will be operating
under extreme temperatures.
** If you want to use your own current shunts (instead of the internal shunts provided), see
the table provided for that purpose later in this section.

DIP switch settings for external CJC* are listed in the following table.
For external CJC Turn this DIP switch pole ON... And turn these DIP switch poles OFF
on this Group... ON = closed OFF = open
Group 1 4 on bottom 3 and 4 on top, and 3 on bottom
Group 2 4 on top 3 on top, and 3 and 4 on bottom
* If external CJC is needed, these settings for DIP switch poles 3 and 4 (only) take
precedence. This is the only time when DIP switch settings for one group affect the other

Note: Only one Group may be configured with external Cold Junction
Compensation (CJC). If external CJC is needed with both groups (e.g., when
thermocouples are used with both groups), configure Group 1 for external CJC.
The module will use the external CJC value from Group1 for both groups of
thermocouples. See the Field Wiring examples for more information.

72 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Set the DIP switches as follows to disable the internal 250 ohm shunts.
To disable the shunt on this channel... Turn this DIP switch pole OFF.
OFF = open
Group 1 DIP switch: 1 8
2 7
3 6
4 5
Group 2 DIP switch: 5 8
6 7
7 6
8 5

Note: For current applications, you should enable the internal 250 ohm current
shunts, unless you want to connect your own.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 73

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction Before installing the ADU 211/212 module, you should:

l Set the DIP switches to correspond to your application.
l Field wire the module’s terminal block for your application.

Field Wiring
WARNING
Possible Injury Hazard
When in hazardous location, turn off power before replacing or wiring
modules.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

Power, input, and output (I/O) wiring must be in accordance with Class 1, Division
2, wiring methods [Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70] and
accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.
For field wiring, use shielded, twisted-pair cable (such as Belden 9418 for voltage
and current applications), and ground each cable's shield wire at one end only. At
the opposite end of each cable, tape the exposed shield wire to insulate it from
electrical contact. A good shield wire ground is a rack assembly mounting bolt or
stud.
When wiring the terminal block, keep the length of the unshielded hookup wires as
short as possible. Use 60/75 copper (Cu) for the power connections and 4.5 in-lb of
torque for the set screws. See the table below for the terminal block assignments.

Note: The ADU 211 requires power from an external 24 Vdc source to operate.
The ADU 212 draws power from the A120 rack's +5 Vdc internal supply. Ensure
that 450 mA of rack power is available for the ADU 212.

Note: The ADU 212 draws power from the A120 rack's +5 Vdc internal supply.
Ensure that 450 mA of rack power is available for the ADU 212.

Note: For application specific concerns refer to the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog
Input Module Application Notes, p. 84

For an unused channel, you should short the unused channel's terminals (that is, run
a wire from the channel's + terminal to the channel's - terminal).

74 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

CAUTION
Connection Hazard
If during installation you hear a high pitched audible sound, ensure that
power and ground are properly wired.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

When configured for RTD operation, only one two-wire, three-wire, or four-wire RTD
is allowed per group. Connect the sense lines to Channel 1 (for Group 1) or Channel
5 (for Group 2) only. Leave the other channels unconnected.
For a four-wire RTD (the most accurate), the excitation line resistance should never
exceed 40 ohms. For a three-wire RTD (the next most accurate), the excitation line
resistance should never exceed 20 ohms. For a two-wire RTD (the least accurate),
the excitation line resistance should be kept as low as possible.

Note: For thermocouple wiring, the U.S. convention is to use red wire for negative,
so when connecting thermocouples, always check the manufacturer’s color-coding
tables.

After wiring the module, route all signal wires as far as possible from potential
sources of electrical noise, such as motors, transformers, contactors, etc.,
(especially ac devices). As a general rule, allow 15.2 cm (6 in) of separation for every
120 V of power. Signal wires must never share the same conduit with ac wiring. Also,
when you must route signal wires past ac wiring, do so at right angles.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 75

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

The following table lists the ADU 211/212 terminal block assignments.
Group Terminal Channel Function
One* 1 +24 Vdc External Power (required for the ADU 211): No
connection (for the ADU 212)
2 1 TC, Voltage, Cur rent, or RTD Sense +
3 Channel 1 Common or RTD Sense -
4 2 TC, Voltage, or Current +
5 Channel 2 Common
6 4 TC, Voltage, or Current +
7 Channel 3 Common
8 4 TC, Voltage, or Current +
9 Channel 4 Common
10 Open TC circuit detection or RTD 200 micro A Ex citation +
11 External CJC Thermistor or RTD Excitation -
Two* 12 24 VDC Common required for the ADU 211; no connection
for the ADU 212
13 5 TC, Voltage, Cur rent, or RTD Sense +
14 Channel 5 Common or RTD Sense -
15 6 TC, Voltage, or Current +
16 Channel 6 Common
17 7 TC, Voltage, or Current +
18 Channel 7 Common
19 8 TC, Voltage, or Current +
20 Channel 8 Common
21 Open TC circuit detection or RTD 200 micro A Ex citation +
22 External CJC Thermistor or RTD Excitation -
* Signal types may not be mixed within a group.

ADU 211/212 The ADU 211/212 module has two front-panel LEDs (light-emitting diodes). When
Universal Analog ON, the Amber LED signifies that the module is powered-up and has passed power-
Input Module up diagnostics, and the Green LED signifies that the module has established
LEDs communication with the PLC and is ready to run. More information on the LEDs is
provided in ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Troubleshooting, p. 103

76 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Field Wiring Examples

Cautions and
Warnings
CAUTION
Unit Failure Hazard
Do not run PLC without power applied to the ADU 211.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

WARNING
Unit Wear Hazard
It is not recommended to leave unpowered modules in the rack.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 77

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Voltage and The following figure shows Group 1 configured for voltage and Group 2 configured
Thermocouple for thermocouple inputs.
Combination
ADU 21X .5 A Slo-Blo Recommended

Amber LED 1 +24 VDC (ADU211 ONLY)

Green LED 2 +
Channel 1
3
4 +
Group 1 showing Channel 2
Voltage Configu- 5
6 +
ration
Channel 3
7
8 +
Channel 4
9
10
11

12 24 V Common (ADU211 ONLY)

13 +
TC Channel 5
14
15 +
Group 2 showing TC Channel 6
Thermocouple 16
17 +
Configuration
with Open Circuit TC Channel 7
18
Detection 19 +
20 TC Channel 8
21
22

NOTE: To detect an open thermocouple (TC) circuit,

connect Terminal 10 (if Group 1) or Terminal 21 (if
Group 2) to any TC+ channel. To detect individual
open circuits, add 22-47 M· to each + side.

78 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Two Groups of The following illustration shows the module wired for thermocouples on both groups
Thermocouples and external Cold Junction Compensation (CJC).
with External
CJC ADU 21X .5 A Slo-Blo Recommended

Amber LED 1 +24 VDC (ADU211 ONLY)

Green LED 2 +
TC Channel 1
3
4 +
Group 1 showing TC Channel 2
5
Thermocouple +
Configuration 6
with External CJC 7 TC Channel 3
Configuration 8 +
9 TC Channel 4
10
11

12 24 V Common (ADU211 ONLY)

13 +
TC Channel 5
14
15 +
Group 2 showing TC Channel 6
Thermocouple 16
17 +
Configuration
with External CJC 18 TC Channel 7
and Open Thermo- 19 +
couple Detection 20 TC Channel 8
21
22
Optional thermistor for both
groups external Cold Junction
Compensation (Betatherm
10K3A1 or equivalent)

NOTE: To detect an individual open thermocouple (TC) circuit, connect Terminal 10

(if Group 1) or Terminal 21 (if Group 2) to any TC + channel. To detect individual open
circuits, add 22-47 M· to each + side.

All thermocouples require CJC to work correctly. (RTDs do not require CJC.) In the
ADU 211/212, CJC can be performed by the module internally. However, if the ADU
211/212 will be operating under extreme temperatures, or if remote sensing is
needed, an external thermistor (a Betatherm 10K3A or equivalent) can be
connected as shown to improve CJC accuracy. This external thermistor provides
CJC for both Groups 1 and 2.
When using external CJC with two groups of thermocouples, you should set bits 11
and 12 of Control Word 40XXX+1 to 1 (see ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input
Module Switch Settings for more information on proper CJC configuration).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 79

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Note: The ADU 211/212 is a differential analog input module and, for most
applications, this is the best operation mode for reasons of signal accuracy and
noise reduction, but in some cases it maybe desirable to have single ended
(common ground) operation for either one or both groups of channels to share a
common ground.

To set up the module to a single-ended mode for a group, voltage or current:

l Leave all of the signal connections for the group open (TB 1 ... 3, 5, 7 and 9 for
Group 1 or TB 1 ... 14, 16, 18 and 20 for Group 2).
l Open DIP switch 1 for the group (this floats the channel analog grounds).
l Close DIP switch 4 for the group (this places an analog module ground at TB 1
... 11 or TB 1 ... 22).
l Connect the group signal common ground to TB 1 ... 11 for group 1 or TB 1 ...
22 for Group 2.
It is recommended that the entire module be utilized in either differential or single
ended mode (common ground mode).

80 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Three-wire RTD The following illustration shows a three-wire RTD configuration for Group 1 and a
and thermocouple configuration for Group 2.
Thermocouple
Combination ADU 21X .5 A Slo-Blo Recommended

Amber LED 1 +24 Vdc (ADU211 ONLY)

Green LED 2 Sense +
3 Sense -
4
Group 1 showing
5
three-wire RTD
Configuration 6
7
8
9 Excitation +
10
11 Excitation -

12 24 V Common (ADU211 ONLY)

13 +
- TC Channel 5
14
15 +
Group 2 showing - TC Channel 6
16
Thermocouple
Configuration 17 +
18 - TC Channel 7
19 +
20 - TC Channel 8
21
22

In this illustration, the RTD excitation current is sourced from Terminal 11 (Terminal
22 is used if Group 2 is configured for RTDs). For thermocouple configurations, the
module can detect open thermocouple circuits with the addition of external pull-up
resistors.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 81

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Two- and Three- The following illustration shows the ADU 211/212 wired for two-wire RTD operation
wire in Group 1 and three-wire RTD operation in Group 2.
Combination
ADU 21X .5 A Slo-Blo Recommended

Amber LED 1 +24 Vdc (ADU211 ONLY)

Green LED 2 Sense +
3 Sense -
4
Group 1 showing
5
two-wire RTD
Configuration 6
7
8
9 Excitation +
10 Excitation -
11

12 24 V Common (ADU211 ONLY)

13 Sense +
14 Sense -
15
Group 2 showing
three-wire RTD 16
Configuration 17
18
19
20 Excitation +
21
22 Excitation -

82 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Current and The following illustration shows the ADU 211/212 wired for current in Group 1 and
Four-wire RTD four-wire RTD operation in Group 2.
Combination
ADU 21X .5 A Slo-Blo Recommended

Amber LED 1 +24 Vdc (ADU211 ONLY)

+
Green LED 2
-
3
+
4
Group 1 showing -
5
Current +
Configuration 6
-
7
8 +
9 -
10
11

12 24 V Common (ADU211 ONLY)

13 Sense +
14 Sense -
15
Group 2 showing
four-wire RTD 16
Configuration 17
18
19
20
21 Excitation +
22 Excitation -

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 83

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Application Notes

Introduction This section contains application notes and usage recommendations in the following
categories:
l General
l Current and Voltage Ranges
l RTD Ranges
l Thermocouple Ranges

General l Power the ADU 211/212 module from the same 24 Vdc power supply as the PLC,
the unit has an approximate 2 times nominal (4 VA maximum) inrush current for
approximately 10 ms during power up.
l Do not leave the module unpowered in the PLC rack.
l Ensure the SVI.DAT DX loadable is installed and is the latest revision.
l Do not install or remove the module when the rack or module is powered.
l Use the on line help file for reference in the configuration screen by using <ALT
H>.
l Ensure correct units of measure are selected for temperature, e.g. degrees C or
degrees F. This configures all eight channels.
l Use the highest integration setting possible for your application, this ensures the
most stable and accurate readings.
The following table lists integration time settings.
For operation at: 50 Hz 60 Hz
Set integration time to: 40 ms 33.3 ms
60 ms 50 ms
100 ms 100 ms
200 ms 200 ms
NOTE: Integration rates of less than 33.3 ms are not recommended.

l An asterisk in the rack ID indicates that the module is not correctly identified to
the PLC; check DX loadable and module power.
l A flashing green RUN LED means the module has not established
communications with the PLC.
l The signal inputs are optical/magnetic isolated from rack 500 V 25 micro A
maximum at 60 Hz.
l Channel to channel isolation is +/- 30 V at 68 dB typical.
l For unused voltage, current or thermocouple channels, short the positive to
negative terminals. For unused RTD channels, short the sense negative to sense
positive terminals.
l Field wiring blocks are not interchangeable due to power and ground, employ
keys.

84 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

l Observe good field wiring shield termination, typically only at the module end.
l In the temperature mode only, allow a warmup time of up to 10 minutes. During
warmup temperature readings from 0 to 10 degrees above actual thermocouple
readings may be seen.

Current and l The ADU 211/212 module normally operates in a pseudo-differential mode.
Voltage Ranges However, for some voltage sensing applications it may be preferred to configure
for common ground. To set this mode of operation:
l open DIP SW1 for the group (this floats differential ground)
l close DIP SW4 for the group (this supplies a ground to TB1-11 for group 1 or
TB1-22 for group 2)
l connect all signal commons (grounds) to TB1-11 for group 1 or to TB1-22 for
group 2
l As protection to the ADU 21X the module uses an active signal clamp that
engages when signal levels are 3-12.5 Vdc or . +12.5 Vdc. Resistance between
input terminals will decrease as voltage levels increase in magnitude.
l To reduce the effects of noise on field wiring, external capacitance may be added
to the terminal block. A good capacitor for starters would be a 0.1 micro F 50 ...
100 V disc capacitor.
l Use high quality 100 percent shielded twisted-pair field wiring, Belden 8760 or
equal.

Resistance l Ensure that the format type is correctly selected, e.g. 2/4 or 3 wire mode.
Temperature l Ensure the total excitation lead resistance is under 10 ohms, in 3 and 4 wire
Detector (RTD) modes.
Range l Use high quality 100 percent shielded field wiring.
l The 250 ohms internal current shut resistors maybe used to test or simulate a
400 degrees C 392 alpha.
l RTD excitation current is -200 micro A typical, be aware of RTD self heating.
l The RTD and field wiring should be isolated and floating from system grounds,
etc.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 85

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Thermocouple l Ensure the thermocouple type is correctly selected and that CJC is enabled.
Range l Verify thermocouple color coding and terminal block connections, because some
thermocouples use red for the negative lead.
l The 250 ohms internal current shut resistors maybe used to simulate a short
thermocouple thus yielding CJC/ambient rack temperature.
l Use isolated and shielded thermocouples whenever possible. The shield maybe
connected to the thermocouples negative lead.
l Only use thermocouple extension grade wire because other choices may
introduce additional thermocouple junctions.
l When possible, use a suitable thermocouple bead forming machine to weld the
thermocouple wire.
l Total system accuracy = Thermocouple A/D conversion accuracy + Cold Junction
Compensation (CJC) accuracy + thermocouple accuracy (available from the
thermocouple manufacturer). The thermocouple A/D conversion accuracy and
CJC accuracy specifications are in the last section of this chapter.
Example - For a Type J thermocouple with +/- 0.5 C accuracy, the total system
accuracy with internal CJC is:
A/D conversion accuracy (Type J) +/-1.5 degrees C (+/-2.7 degrees F)
+ CJC accuracy +/-1.7 degrees C (+/-3.0 degrees F)
+ Thermocouple accuracy +/-0.5 degrees C (+/-0.9 degrees F)
_______________________________________________________________
Total system accuracy +/-3.7 degrees C (+/-6.6 degrees F)
l For more than one thermocouple open detection circuit, external 22 M ohms ...
47 M ohms resistors must be used.
l Open thermocouple wiring without open circuit detection resistors will read large
over-range or under-range values due to the high input impedance of the ADU
21X. Open thermocouple wiring with open circuit detection resistors will yield a
high positive reading.
l The ADU 211/212 requires a warm-up period of about 10 minutes for readings to
stabilize. Extreme variations in ambient temperature over short time causes
module readings to drift as much as 10 degrees C.
l Ensure correct units are selected for modes of temperature, e.g. degrees C or
degrees F.
l Do not select different temperature units for each channel or group, all channels
must be either degrees C or degrees F.

86 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Configuration

Introduction The ADU 211/212 uses three 4x output registers and three 3x input registers, I/O
mapped as binary (BIN) data.
You can call up the built-in help screens at any time by highlighting "ADU 211" and
then pressing <ALT><H> for more information about the module. Both the ADU 211
and ADU 212 are I/O mapped as an "ADU 211" module.

Note: For application-specific concerns refer to the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog
Input Module Application Notes, p. 84

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 87

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Output Registers

Introduction The output registers control how the ADU 211/212 operates.
The output registers for the ADU 211/212 are:
Register Function
4x Control Word
4x + 1 Control Word
4x + 2 Reserved for Future Use (do not use in user logic)

Control Word Register 4x is the control word. It is used to:

l Select the type of field device to be used in each of the terminal block groups.
l Manually set the input channel to be displayed or enable auto-sequencing
through all channels at a fixed interval.
l Select either Fahrenheit or Centigrade display.
l Enable the built-in test functions.
Control Word 4x is defined in the illustrations that follow.
The following figure illustrates Control Word 4x: Bits 1 ... 4 and 13 ... 16.

88 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Channel Select These bits manually select the channel to be displayed in input registers 3x and 3x
(Bits 1 ... 3) + 1. If auto-sequence is enabled (bit 4 = 1), it overrides these bit settings. When the
auto-sequence bit is released (bit 4 = 0), the module returns to manual operation.

Note: For RTD applications, use only the data provided by Channel 1 (for Group
1) or Channel 5 (for Group 2); the module will use the other channels for its own
calculations.

Auto-Sequence This bit instructs the ADU 211/212 to automatically scan the input channels and
Enable (Bit 4) present the data to the PLC at fixed intervals. When enabled (1), the module
controls the active channel bits (bits 1 ... 3) of input register 3x + 2.

Temperature If this bit is turned OFF (= 0), TC and RTD inputs will be displayed in degrees
Unit Display Centigrade. If this bit is turned ON (= 1), temperature data will be displayed in
(Bit 13) degrees Fahrenheit. Temperature data can be displayed in any data format, but it
can only be displayed in degrees C or degrees F when in IEEE 754 floating point
mode.
The following illustration shows the control word 4x: bits 5 ... 8.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 89

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

The following illustration shows the control word 40XXX: bits 9 ... 12.

Input Type and Register 4x + 1 is a second control word, used to select:

Range Select l Data format
(Bits 5 ... 8, l Integration time
Group 1; Bits 9 ... l CJC type
12, Group 2) l RTD type
The following figure illustrates the control word 40XXX + 1 - Bits 1 ... 4 and 11 ... 16.

90 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Data Format (Bits The data format you should select depends on your application. The available data
1 and 2, Group 1; formats are shown in the illustration(s) that follow.
Bits 3 and 4,
Group 2)

CJC Type (Bit 11, All thermocouples require Cold Junction Compensation (CJC) to work correctly.
Group 1; Bit 12, The only time you should select no CJC for a group is when you want to apply the
Group 2) CJC value of one group to the other, as explained in Section 6.3.3 for two groups of
thermocouples with external CJC.

RTD Type (Bit 14) When configured for RTD operation, only one two-wire, three-wire, or four-wire RTD
is allowed per group.
The following illustration shows the control word 4x + 1 - Bits 5 ... 10.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 91

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Integration Time Shorter integration times should be used in areas with low electrical noise, and
(Bits 5 ... 7, longer integration times should be used in areas with high electrical noise.
Group 1; Bits 8 ... Typically, 33.3 ms (minimum) is used with 60 Hz noise, and 40.0 ms (minimum) is
10, Group2) used with 50 Hz noise.
A211/212 display mode ranges are listed in the following table.
Range Display Modes
12-Bit 15/16-Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point (16-bit)
+/- 50 mVDC 4095 32767 5.0 E-02 VDC <- high value
2048 0 0 <- middle value
<- low value
0 -32768 -5.0 E-02
+/- 500 mVDC 4095 32767 0.5 VDC
2048 0 0
0 -32768 -0.5
+/- 2000 mVDC 4095 32767 2.0 VDC
2048 0 0
0 -32768 -2.0
+/- 5000 mVDC 4095 32767 5.0 VDC
2048 0 0
0 -32768 -5.0
+/- 10,000 4095 32767 10.0 VDC
mVDC 2048 0 0
0 -32768 -10.0
4 to 20 mA 4095 N/A N/A
2048
0
-20 to +20 mA N/A 32767 +2.0 E-02 A
0 0
-32768 -2.0 E-02
J Type 4095 65535 7.60 E02 de grees C 1.400 E03 de grees F
2048 32768 3.80 E02 7.16 E02
0 0 0 3.2 E01
K Type 4095 65535 1.000 E03 de grees C 1.832 E03 de grees F
2048 32768 5.00 E02 9.32 E02
0 0 0 3.2 E01

92 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

T Type 4095 65535 4.00 E02 de grees C 7.52 E02 de grees F

2048 32768 1.50 E02 3.02 E02
0 0 -1.00 E02 -1.48 E02
E Type 4095 65535 1.000 E03 degrees C 1.832 E03 degrees F
2048 32768 5.00 E02 9.32 E02
0 0 0 3.2 E01
R Type 4095 65535 1.750 E03 degrees C 3.182 E03 degrees F
2048 32768 1.125 E03 2.057 E03
0 0 5.00 E02 9.32 E02
S Type 4095 65535 1.750 E03 degrees C 3.182 E03 degrees F
2048 32768 1.125 E03 2.057 E03
0 0 5.00 E02 9.32 E02
B Type 4095 65535 1.800 E03 degrees C 3.272 E03 degrees F
2048 32768 11.150 E03 2.102 E03
0 0 5.00 E02 9.32 E02
100 ohms RTD 4095 65535 8.00 E02 de grees C 1.472 E03 degrees F
385m 2048 32768 3.00 E02 5.72 E02
0 0 -2.00 E02 -3.28 E02
100 ohms RTD 4095 65535 8.00 E02 de grees C 1.472 E03 degrees F
392m 2048 32768 3.00 E02 5.72 E02
0 0 -2.00 E02 -3.28 E02

WARNING
Extreme out-of-range voltage.
Operating the ADU 21X at an extreme out-of-range voltage (many
times greater than the specified range) can permanently damage the
module.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 93

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Input Registers

Introduction The input registers provide channel and status information to the PLC:
The input registers for the ADU 211/212 are:
Input Register Function
3x Read Data, Channels 1-8, Integer or IEEE 754 (LowWord)*
3x + 1 Read Data, Channels 1-8, IEEE 754 (High Word)*
3x + 2 Status Word
* Using IEEE 754 floating point notation requires two 3x input registers (3x and 3x + 1).

Status Word This register is a module operating status word, used to:
3x + 2 l Inform the PLC which input channel is active
l Indicate range errors for each of the eight channels
l Monitor the auto-sequence mode
l Indicate module memory faults
l Indicate faults in module hardware
Status word 3x + 2 is shown below:
CH 1 = 0 0 0
CH 2 = 0 0 1
CH 3 = 0 1 0
Active Channel CH 4 = 0 1 1
CH 5 = 1 0 0
CH 6 = 1 0 1
CH 7 = 1 1 0
CH 8 = 1 1 1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

Range Error (1 = error)
1 = Auto Channel Sequence
1 = Module Memory Fault
1 = Module Hardware Fault
Not Used
1 = Active Channel Data Valid

94 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Read Data These registers display the data collected from the field source. Data from each
Registers 3x and channel may be displayed on demand (through ladder logic) or in auto-sequence
3x + 1 mode by the ADU 211/212 module. See Sequentially Reading ADU 211/212
Universal Analog Input Module Channel Data, p. 96

Channel Range These bits go ON (= 1) if the associated channel experiences one of these
Error (Bits 4... 11) conditions:
l A thermocouple input is open (only if a pull-up resistor is used) or over- or under-
range
l an RTD input is over-range or has open excitation
l a 12-bit Current input is less than or equal to 3.6 mA or greater than 20 mA +2
percent minimum
l a signed 15-bit or IEEE 754 floating point Current input is less than -20 mA -2
percent minimum, or greater than 20 mA +2 percent minimum
l a Voltage input is over- or under-range
An input is out-of-range if it exceeds the specified range by at least 2 percent.

Auto-Sequence The ADU 211/212 module can scan and display the data for each input channel
Mode (Bit 12) automatically. Bit 12 monitors the auto-sequence mode: when ON (= 1), the module
is cycling through the eight input channels at a fixed interval. See Sequentially
Reading ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Channel Data, p. 96 for more
information.

Module Memory This bit is used to inform the PLC that the module has detected a memory parity/
Valid (Bit 13) checksum error in its firmware. If this bit is OFF (0), all memory conditions are
normal. If this bit is ever ON (1), the module’s data or configuration is in question and
you should initiate a self-test, power cycle the module, or replace the module.

Module Error This bit is turned ON (1) when a hardware failure is detected within the module (the
(Bit 14) amber LED may also be flashing). If this bit is ON (1), the module must be power
cycled. If the bit does not clear (0) after a power cycle, the module should be
replaced.

Channel Data If ON (1), the data from the active channel (identified in bits 1... 3) is ready to be read
Ready (Bit 16) by the PLC. In Auto-Sequence Mode, the Channel Data Ready Bit cycles ON and
OFF as new data values are written to the input registers. Any ladder logic acquiring
data in the Auto-Sequence Mode should ensure that the Channel Data Ready Bit is
set when data is read. See the following section for an application example.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 95

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Sequentially Reading ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Channel Data

Auto Sequence Setting the Control Word 4x auto-sequence enable bit (bit 4) ON (1) causes the ADU
Mode 211/212 to scan all eight input channels at a fixed rate: every 240 msec (per
channel) if the Group 1 integration time is 2, 5, 33.3, or 40 msec (total cycle time is
2 seconds); 520 ms if the integration time is longer (total cycle time is 4 seconds).
The Channel Active bits (bits 1... 3) in Status Word 3x + 2 identify which channel the
module is currently reading. Before accepting this data, you should verify that the
Channel Data Ready Bit (bit 16) in Status Word 3x + 2 is ON (1). A ladder logic
example is shown below. Register(s) 3x (and 3x + 1 for IEEE 754 Floating Point)
provide the actual data to the processor for the channel being scanned.

Note: For RTD applications, use only the data provided by Channel 1 (for Group
1) or Channel 5 (for Group 2); the module will use the other channels for its own
calculations. Therefore, the Auto Sequence mode should not be used for RTD
applications.

User-Defined Some users may prefer to read input channel data at a faster or slower rate than is
Scan Mode provided by Auto-Sequence. For example, you may want to scan Channels 1... 4
only, and read Channels 5... 8 less frequently or directly. The ladder logic shown in
Figure 39 through Figure 45 is one way to do this.

Note: In user-defined scan mode, the auto-sequence enable bit (bit 4) in Control
Word 4x must be disabled (0).

Note: For application specific concerns refer to the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog
Input Module Application Notes.

96 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Ladder Login Ladder Logic Screen #1 is shown below.

Screen #1

00100

40101 40110
00102
40109 40001
T->R BLKM

#0008 #0001
00101

00101
30003

0001

BLKM
#0001

The first two rungs of ladder in Figure 39 can be used independently to sequence
through the input channels. In this example, a T R move is shown. Note that
the Source Table must be entered by the user; here, the desired configurations have
been loaded into registers 40101. 40108. Each of these registers must contain the
proper bit settings to select one of eight input channels on the ADU 21X, as well as
to define the group range. In this example, the Type J thermocouple mode will be
used.
Loading 0662 hex into Control Word 40001 selects channel 3 and configures
Groups 1 and 2 for Type J thermocouple. The corresponding binary bit pattern is
0000-0110-0110-0010. The appropriate words from the source table are transferred
into register 40110.
The contents of register 40110 are then block moved into Control Word 40001. This
happens eight times, moving the eight predefined configuration words into Control
Word 40001 of the ADU 211, effectively selecting and moving all eight input
readings into holding registers.
The remaining ladder shown (Figure 40 through Figure 45) illustrates a way to move
validated data into independent holding registers. This lets you view and use all
channel data at once. In this example, the processor continuously refreshes and
loads validated data into the holding registers. In this fashion, ladder logic effectively
de-multiplexes the ADU 211/212, making it appear as though each channel really
had its own 3x data register.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 97

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Ladder Login Ladder Logic Screen #2 is shown below.

Screen #2
P 30001

00016 00015 00014 00001 40011 00017

BLKM
#0002

P 30001

00016 00015 00014 00001 40013 00018

BLKM
#0002

Register 30003 defines the ADU 211/212 Operating Status Word. Using the BLKM
function to transfer this word into discrete outputs 00001... 00016 lets you monitor
the Channel Active Bits and the Data Ready Bit. Properly decoding bits 00014...
00016 and the Data Ready bit 00001 lets you transfer register 30001 data (the data
currently being read) into holding registers for each unique input channel. In this
example, two consecutive words are moved for each channel, enabling you to
display floating point data if desired. For all other data formats, you only need to
move one word.
In Ladder Logic Screen #3, the block move for Channel 1 uses three normally closed
contacts, corresponding to the channel select bits (bits 00014... 00016). When these
three bits are OFF (0), Channel 1 is the active channel. When the Data Ready bit is
ON (1), the contents of registers 30001 and 30002 are moved into holding registers
40011 and 40012.

98 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Ladder Login Ladder Logic Screen #3 is shown below.

Screen #3
P 30001

00016 00015 00014 00001 40011 00019

BLKM
#0002

30001
P
00016 00015 00014 00001 40017 00021

BLKM
#0002

Ladder Login Ladder Logic Screen #4 is shown below.

Screen #4
P 30001
00016 00015 00014 00001 40019 00021

BLKM
#0002

P 30001
00016 00015 00014 00001 40021 00022

BLKM
#0002

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 99

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Ladder Login Ladder Logic Screen #5 is shown below.

Screen #5
P 30001
00016 00015 00014 00001 40023 00023

BLKM
#0002

P 30001
00016 00015 00014 00001 40025 00024

BLKM
#0002

00100

Ladder Login Ladder Logic Screen #6 is shown below.

Screen #6

00017 00025

00018

00019

00020

00021

00022

00023

100 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Ladder Login Ladder Logic Screen #7 is shown below.

Screen #7

Source and The source table and results of de-multiplexing are shown below.
Results

Format: Decimal Online Range: 1

The source table is shown above for this example in Registers 40101... 40108. The
results of the demultiplexing are shown in Registers 40011, 40013, 40015, 40017,
40019, 40021, 40023, and 40025 for input Channels 1... 8, respectively. You can
move the data to any eight consecutive registers for integer data formats. If floating
point data is desired, then two consecutive destination registers are required for
each input.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 101

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

In this example, the ADU 211/212 was configured for Type J thermocouples as
defined by register 40001. The demultiplexed holding registers for the eight input
channels are displaying temperature in degrees Fahrenheit using the floating point
data format.
The ADU 21X is I/O mapped as: 30001-30003 input registers, 40001-40003 output
registers, and binary. You can call up the built-in help screens at any time by
highlighting "ADU 211" and then pressing <ALT><H> for more information about the
module.

102 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Troubleshooting

Introduction This section provides instructions for detecting and correcting ADU 211/212
operating problems. The following topics are covered in this section:
l LEDs
l Invalid Data
l Testing the System
l Built-in Tests

Amber LEDs The amber LED on the front of the module provides module status information about
the health of the module. A blinking amber LED indicates one of these faults:
l Module watchdog fault
l Module watchdog fault at startup
l Module RAM failure at startup
l Bus interface failure at startup
l Module ROM failure
l Module processor fault at startup
l General module error
If the amber LED begins blinking, try restarting the ADU 21X. If the blinking
continues, call Technical Support at 1-800-468-5342.

Green LEDs The green LED provides status information about the module’s readiness. After the
module is powered up, the green LED should begin blinking. If not, check the power
connections.
After the module has established communications with the PLC, the green LED
should stop blinking and remain ON. If not, ensure that the PLC has been powered
up.

Note: Do not run PLC without power applied to the module.

Note: For application specific concerns refer to the ADU 211/212 Universal Analog
Input Module Application Notes, p. 84

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 103

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Invalid Data If the module seems to be providing invalid data to the PLC, check:
l Field wiring connections, DIP switch settings, and register settings.
l Integrity of the source device and connections.
l Signal cables are not placed on or near high voltage (120 Vac or higher) control
wiring. If the signal cables must pass high voltage cables, make sure that the
signal cables pass the high voltage cables at 90degree angle.
If electrical interference seems to be the problem, try to place the module as far as
possible from the P120 power supply and relay output modules. These products
may generate electrical interference during operation. This won’t affect the ADU 21X
but may induce noise on the incoming channel wiring.

Testing the For thermocouple applications, you can test the system by temporarily short
System circuiting each thermocouple at the terminal block-use some wire to connect the +
lead to the - lead. Short circuiting a thermocouple channel should cause that channel
to read the ambient temperature-i.e., the temperature at the CJC thermistor if CJC
is enabled-if not, check the terminal connections and DIP switch settings.
For RTD applications, you can test the system by enabling the internal 250 ohms
shunts. Shunting an RTD channel should cause that channel to read approximately
409 degrees C (768 degrees F).

Built-in Tests The ADU 21X has built-in tests that can be enabled to check out the module’s control
electronics. These tests are performed automatically every time the module is
powered up, but they can also be run after the module is on-line. Setting the
appropriate bits ON (1) will cause the module to enter a self-test mode.

Note: When bits 16, 15, or 14 are set ON, the green LED blinks continuously until
these bits are set OFF. When bits 16... 14 are set OFF, the module may need to
be restarted.

To terminate the self-test mode, simply reset the Built-in Test Enable bit (bit 14 in
Control Word 4x) OFF (0). Bits 15 and 16 determine the type of test that will be
executed.
BIT 16 BIT 15 BIT 14 Elements Tested
0 0 0 None (tests disabled)
0 1 1 ADU 21X Microprocessor, Dual-Port RAM, ROM, Watchdog
Circuit, Ready and Run LEDs, Power Supply
1 0 1 EEPROM, Bus Interface Unit, Analog signal conditioning, Isolation
communications, Power Supply, Module firm ware

If the ADU 21X fails any of these tests (amber LED blinks), restart the module. If it
continues to fail, call Technical Support at 1-800-468-5342.

104 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of ADU 211/212 specifications.

Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 8 (2 for RTD)
Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 4 (1 for RTD)
Isolation Channel-to-bus: 500 volts, 25 micro A max.
leakage at 60 Hz. Channel-to-channel: +/- 30
Vdc max.
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001
Power Supplies Ext. Source 20-30 Vdc for the ADU 211: none for the ADU
Requirement 212
Consumption 2.5 VA typical, 4.0 VA (167 mA at 24 Vdc
nominal) maxi mum for the ADU 211
Power Dissipation 2.5 VA typical, 3.0 VA maxi mum for the ADU 212
Internal 5 V from less than 80 mA (TTL loading) for the ADU 211:
PAB 450 mA typical, 600 mA maximum for the ADU
212
DIN Rail Grounding less than 0.1 ohms
Input protection Analog multiplexer resident clamps and FETs
Input Impedance 10 M ohms typical
Signal Inputs Thermocouple
J: 0 to 760 degrees C (32 to 1400 degrees F)
K: 0 to 1000 degrees C (32 to 1832 degrees F)
T: -100 to 400 degrees C (-212 to 752 degrees F)
E: 0 to 1000 degrees C (32 to 1832 degrees F)
R: +500 to 1750 degrees C (932 to 3182 degrees F)
S: +500 to 1750 degrees C (932 to 3182 degrees F)
B: +500 to 1800 degrees C (932 to 3272 degrees F)
RTD 3- or 2/4-wire 100 ohms, 385 or 392 alpha
-200 to 800 degrees C
Voltage +/-50, 500, 2000, 5000, and 10,000 mVDC
Current 4-20 mA (12 bit)
+/- 20 mA (16-Bit and IEEE 754)
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 3 in/3 out

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 105

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Integer Resolution 1 part in 4096 counts (12-bit display) 1 part in +32767 to -32768
counts (16-bit)
IEEE754 FP Thermocouple: 0.7 degrees C or better
resolution (use non-
(engineering units) grounded type
TCs)
RTD: 0.15 degrees C or better
Voltage: 0.035 percent of full scale or better
Current: 0.035 percent of full scale or better
Accuracy Thermocouple at module with fixed 0 degrees C CJC
J: +/- 1.5 degrees C (2.7 degrees F)
K: +/- 2.0 degrees C (3.6 degrees F)
T: +/- 3.0 degrees C (5.4 degrees F)
E: +/- 1.2 degrees C (2.2 degrees F)
R: +/- 7.0 degrees C (12.5 degrees F)
S: +/- 7.0 degrees C (12.6 degrees F)
B: +/- 15.0 degrees C (27.0 degrees F)
RTD at module 100 ohms Platinum, 385 alpha: +/- 0.40 degrees
C typical, +/- 1.0 degrees C maximum
100 ohms Platinum, 392 alpha: +/- 0.40 degrees
C
Voltage at module 50 mVDC: +/- 0.40 percent of full scale
0.5, 2, 5 & 10 VDC: +/-0.11 percent of full scale
Current 4 to 20 mA: +/- 0.20 percent of full scale
+/- 20 mA: +/- 0.20 percent of full scale
Linearization Thermocouple: IPTS-68 Standard, NBS MN-125
RTD: JIS C 1604, DIN 43760 and IEC 751
Open Circuit Detect Thermocouple (external 22-47 M ohms resistors required for
individual open circuit detection)
Cold Junction 10 k ohms internal or external thermistor or fixed value, +/-1.7 degrees
Compensation C (3.1 degrees F) typical, +/-4.1 degrees C (7.4 degrees F) maximum
accuracy
RTD Excitation 200 micro A typical
Signal Integration 2, 5, 33.3, 40, 50, 60, 100 and 200 msec (group selectable)
Time
Single Channel (Integration x 1.5) + 10.0 msec typical
Update Time

106 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

Common Mode 68 dB typical at 50 or 60 Hz with integration time set at greater than

Rejection 100 msec
Calibration Automatic and continuous
Temperature Operating: 0 to 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F)
Storage: -40 to 85 degrees C (-40 to 185 degrees F)
Relative Humidity 0 to 95 percent at 60 degrees C, non-condensing
Vibration 3 rotational axes 2G RMS, 10 to 57 Hz 15-minute scan (1 octave per
minute)
Shock 30G for 11 msec, 1/2 sine, 3 orthogonal axes
Packaged Free Fall 3 feet (1 meter), 5 iterations each side
Cooling Free air convection
EMI Susceptibility 27 to 500 mHz 10 volt/meter (per subset IEC 801-3)
Fast Transient +/- 1.0 kV (per subset IEC 801-2)
Electrostatic 8 kV, 10 discharges, no damage
discharge
Dimensions (W x H x D) 1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in. 40.3 x 145.0 x 117.5 mm
Weight 0.80 lb (360 g) max.
Power Connections 60/75 copper (Cu)
Torque 4.5 inch-pounds on set screws
Agency Approvals ADU 211 & ADU UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; FM Class I, Div 2**;
212 and European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC
Standards
**This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D, or non-
hazardous locations only.

WARNING
Substitution Warning
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division
2.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 107

ADU 211/212 Universal Analog Input Module

108 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose This Chapter gives an overview of the ADU 214 Analog Input Module. This is
followed by the physical characteristics of the module; installation and configuration
procedures; and, lastly, the specifications of the ADU 214 Module.

WARNING
Operative Failure Alert
The ADU 214 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/

211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
Overview of the ADU 214 Analog Input Module 110
Conversion Values 113
Configuration - Concept 123
Installation 130
ADU 214 Input Module Specifications 133

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 109

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Overview of the ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Physical The ADU 214 module is used for measuring analog data, and provides up to 8 non-
Characteristics isolated inputs. The main characteristics of the module follow.
Tip: This module is suitable for use on Compact 984 with memory size of 4K or
more.
l Four 4-wire analog inputs. These inputs can be used for 2-wire measurement,
thus allowing up to 8 unipolar inputs, 4 bipolar voltage inputs, or combinations of
both.
l Several measuring ranges that may be individually selected and mixed for each
input:
The following Measuring Ranges apply to the ADU 214 Analog Input Module.
Voltage measurement 0 ... 0.5, 0 ... 1, 0 ... 5, 0 ... 10 V, 0.1 ... 0.5, 0.2 ... 1, 1 ...
5, 2 ... 10 V, 0.5, 1, 5, 10 V
Current measurement (External 0 ... 5, 0 ... 10, 0 ... 20 mA, 1 ... 5, 2 ... 10, 4 ... 20 mA, 5,
precision resistor required) 10, 20 mA
RTD Temperature measurement -160/-60 ... +160 degrees C (resolution ≤ 0.02 degrees C)
-200 ... +320 degrees C (resolution ≤ 0.04 degrees C) -200
... +640 degrees C (resolution ≤ 0.08 degrees C)
Resistance measurement 0 ... 100, 0 ... 200, 0 ... 500 Ω,, 0 ... 1000, 0 ... 2000 Ω

The PLC model determines the available ranges. Refer to the tables in this chapter.

Note: Only the 15 Bit + sign resolution is supported when using the E984-258/265/
275/285 PLC models. The 12, 13 and 15 Bit + sign resolutions are all supported
when using the A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255 PLC models.

110 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

The following illustration is of the Front View and Label of the ADU 214 Module

ADU 214
ADU 214
1 U 1
2 U 2
3 1 3
4 2 4
2
5 2 5
6 1 6
7 3 7
8 4 8
4
9 4 9
10 3 10
11 M 11
12 ready U 12
13 U 13
14 5 14
15 6 15
6
16 6 16
17 5 17
18 7 18
19 8 19
8
20 8 20
21 7 21
22 M 22
card

l Broken wire testing of all 4-wire lines and self-calibration using built-in reference
resistances and reference voltages
l Measuring ranges for voltage, current, temperature, and resistance can be set
individually for each input
l Switch-selectable 50 ... 60 Hz operation noise suppression

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 111

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Simplified The following is a simplified schematic for the ADU 214 Module.
Schematic

2 of 8 Input Circuits -15V +15V

+ 5V

MUX +15V

A/D
24 VDC 1
2
3
REF
4
1,2
5
6
7
0V
8
3,4 AGND GN “Ready”
9
10
COMM 11
12 System Bus
13
14 GN “U”
15 +15 V
5,6 16
0V
17
18 -15 V
19
7,8 20
21
22

LEDS The ADU 214 has two front panel LEDs:

l One green LED opposite Terminal 1 indicating the module is receiving 24 V
power
l One green LED opposite Terminal 12 indicating the module’s processor is
running

112 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion Values

Overview The following tables provide ADU 214 conversion values for unipolar voltage inputs,
bipolar voltage inputs, current inputs, temperature inputs, and resistance inputs.

Conversion The following table shows Conversion Values of Unipolar Voltage Inputs.
Values of
0...0.5 V 0...1 V 0...5 V 0...10 V 0.1...0.5 V 0.2...1 V 1...5 V 2...10 V
Unipolar Voltage
Inputs, Part 1 <-0.008 <-0.016 <-0.08 <-0.16 <+0.052 <+0.104 <+0.52 <+1.04
+0.052 +0.104 +0.52 +1.04
-0.008... -0.016... -0.08.. -0.16.. +0.094... +0.187... +0.936. +1.87...
..
-0.000 -0.000 -0.00 -0.00 +0.099 +0.199 +0.99 +1.99
0 0 0 0 0.1 0.2 1 2
0.000 02 0.000 03 0.000 16 0.000 31 0.100 0 0.200 0 1.000 1 2.000 3
0.000 25 0.000 5 0.002 5 0.005 0.100 2 0.200 4 1.002 2.004
0.000 5 0.001 0.005 0.01 0.100 4 0.200 8 1.004 2.008
0.005 0.01 0.05 0.10 0.104 0.208 1.04 2.08
0.025 0.05 0.25 0.50 0.12 0.24 1.20 2.40
0.05 0.10 0.50 1.00 0.14 0.28 1.40 2.80
0.25 0.50 2.50 5.00 0.30 0.60 3.00 6.00
0.50 1.00 5.00 10.00 0.50 1.00 5.00 10.00
0.500 0... 1.000 0... 5.000... 10.000... 0.500... 1.000... 5.00... 10.00...
0.511 9 1.023 9 5.119 10.239 0.509 1.019 5.09 10.19
≥0.512 ≥1.024 ≥5.12 ≥10.24 >0.509 >1.019 >5.09 >10.19
NOTE: Numbers not in parentheses = range with + limit.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 113

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion Conversion Values of Unipolar Voltage Inputs continue in the following table.
Values of
15-BIT 13-BIT 12-BIT NOTES
Unipolar Voltage
Inputs, Part 2 -32,767 underflow error
0 (-3,840) overload range
0 (-512)
0 (-1)

0 4096 2048 rated value

+1
+16
+32
+320 Linear Range
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 8096 4048 rated value
+32 001...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 8191 4095 overflow error
NOTE: Numbers in parentheses = range with ± limit.

114 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion The following table shows Conversion Values of Bipolar Voltage Inputs:
Values of Bipolar
0.5 V 1V 5V 10 V
Voltage Inputs,
Part 1 ≤–0.512 ≤–1.024 ≤–5.12 ≤–10.24
–0.511 9 ... –1.023 ... –5.119 ... –10.239 ...
–0.500 0 –1.000 –5.000 –10.000
–0.50 –1.00 –5.00 –10.00
–0.25 –0.50 –2.50 –5.00
–0.05 –0.10 –0.50 –1.00
–0.025 –0.05 –0.25 –0.50
–0.005 –0.01 –0.05 –0.10
–0.000 5 –0.001 –0.005 –0.01
–0.000 25 –0.000 5 –0.002 5 –0.005
0 0 0 0
+0.000 02 +0.000 03 +0.000 16 +0.000 31
+0.000 25 +0.000 5 +0.002 5 +0.005
+0.000 5 +0.001 +0.005 +0.01
+0.005 +0.01 +0.05 +0.10
+0.025 +0.05 +0.25 +0.50
+0.05 +0.10 +0.50 +1.00
+0.25 +0.50 +2.50 +5.00
+0.50 +1.00 +5.00 +10.00
+0.500 0 ... +1.000 0 ... +5.000 ... +10.000 ...
+0.511 9 +1.023 9 +5.119 +10.239
≥+0.512 ≥+1.024 ≥+5.12 ≥+10.24

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 115

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion Conversion Values of Bipolar Voltage Inputs continue in the following table:
Values of Bipolar
*15-BIT 13-BIT 12-BIT NOTES
Voltage Inputs,
Part 2 –32 767 underflow error
-32 766 overload range
-32 001
-32 000 96 48 rated value
-16 000
-3 200
-1 600
-320
-32
-16
0 4096 2048 Linear Range
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 8096 4048 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 8191 4095 overflow error

Note: *Only the 15 Bit + sign resolution is supported when using the E984–258/
265/275/285 PLC models. The 12, 13, and 15 Bit + sign resolutions are supported
when using the A984–1xx, E984--24x/251/255 PLC models.

116 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion The following table shows Conversion Values of Current Inputs:

Values of Current
0...10 mA 0...20 mA 2...10 mA 4...20 mA 20 mA
Inputs, Part 1
<–0.16 <–0.32 <+1.04 <+2.08 ≤–20.479
–20.478 ...
–20.000
+1.04 ... +2.08 ...
–0.16... –0.32... +1.87 ... +3.74 ...
–0.00 –0.00 +1.99 +3.99
–20.00
–10.00
–2.00
–1.00
–0.20
–0.02
–0.01
0 0 +2 +4 0
+0.005 +0.01 +2.004 +4.008 +0.01
+0.01 +0.02 +2.008 +4.016 +0.02
+0.1 +0.20 +2.08 +4.16 +0.20
+0.5 +1.00 +2.40 +4.80 +1.00
+1 +2.00 +2.80 +5.60 +2.00
+5 +10.00 +6.00 +12.00 +10.00
+10.0 +20.00 +10.00 +20.00 +20.00
+10.000... +20.000... +10.00... +20.00... +20.000...
+10.239 +20.478 +10.19 +20.38 +20.478
≥+10.24 ≥+20.479 >+10.19 >+20.38 ≥+20.479

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 117

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion Conversion Values of Current Inputs continue in the following table:

Values of Current
*15-BIT 13-BIT 12-BIT NOTES
Inputs, Part 2
–32 767 underflow error
-32 766 overload range
-32 001
0 (-3 840)
0 (-512)
0 (-1)
-32 000 96 48 rated value
-16 000
-3 200
-1 600
-320
-32
-16
0 4096 2048 Linear Range
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 8096 4048 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 8191 4095 overflow error
NOTE: Numbers in parentheses = range with ± limit

Note: *Only the 15 Bit + sign resolution is supported when using the E984–258/
265/275/285 PLC models. The 12, 13, and 15 Bit + sign resolutions are supported
when using the A984–1xx, E984--24x/251/255 PLC models.

118 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion The following table shows Conversion Values of Temperature Inputs:

Values of
-60 ... +160°C -160 ... +160°C -200 ... +320°C -200 ... +640°C
Temperature
Inputs, Part 1 <–60 <–160 <–200 <–200
–160
–100 –200
–60 –60 –120
–50 –50 –100 –200
–16 –16 –32 –64
0 0 0 0
+0.005 +0.005 +0.01 +0.02
+0.08 +0.08 +0.16 +0.32
+0.16 +0.16 +0.32 +0.64
+8 +8 +16 +32
+16 +16 +32 +64
+80 +80 +160 +320
+160 +160 +320 +640
+160.005 ... +160.005 ... +320.01 ... +640.02 ...
+163.83 +163.83 +327.66 +655.32
≥+163.84 ≥+163.84 ≥+327.67 ≥+655.34

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 119

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion Conversion Values of Temperature Inputs continue in the following table:

Values of
*15-BIT 13-BIT 12-BIT NOTES
Temperature
Inputs, Part 2 –32 767 measuring range underflow (error)
-32 000 96 48 rated value
-22 000
-12 000
-10 000
-3 200
0 4096 2048 Linear Range
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 8096 4048 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 8191 4095 measuring range overflow error

Note: *Only the 15 Bit + sign resolution is supported when using the E984–258/
265/275/285 PLC models. The 12, 13, and 15 Bit + sign resolutions are supported
when using the A984–1xx, E984--24x/251/255 PLC models.

120 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion The following table shows Conversion Values of Resistance Inputs:

Values of
0...100Ω 0...200Ω 0...500Ω 0...1000Ω 0...2000Ω
Resistance
Inputs, Part 1 <–1.6 <–3.2 <–8 <–16 <–32
0...–1.6 0...–3.2 0...–8 0...–16 0...–32
0 0 0 0 0
0.003 0.006 0.015 0.03 0.06
0.05 0.1 0.25 0.5 1
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2
1 2 5 10 20
5 10 25 50 100
10 20 50 100 200
50 100 250 500 1000
100 200 500 1000 2000
100.00 ... 200.00 ... 500.01 ... 1000.03 ... 2000.06 ...
102.39 204.78 511.97 1023.94 2047.88
≥102.40 ≥204.79 ≥511.98 ≥1023.97 ≥2047.94

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 121

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Conversion Conversion Values of Resistance Inputs continue in the following table:

Values of
*15-BIT 13-BIT 12-BIT NOTES
Resistance
Inputs, Part 2 –32 767 underflow error
0 overload range
0 4096 2048 rated value
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600 linear range
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 8096 4048 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 8191 4095 overflow error
NOTE: Numbers in parentheses = range with ± limit.

Note: *Only the 15 Bit + sign resolution is supported when using the E984–258/
265/275/285 PLC models. The 12, 13, and 15 Bit + sign resolutions are supported
when using the A984–1xx, E984--24x/251/255 PLC models.

122 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Configuration - Concept

Configured The ADU 214 module requires two sequental 4X command registers and 3
Registers - sequental 3X status registers all Traffic Copped as BIN. Selecting a channel
Modsoft number higher than 8, or one already included in a channel pair measurement, will
result in an ILLEGAL 4X COMMAND" bit to be set in the 3X register response.
The following table shows Configured Registers for the ADU 214 Module.
Registers Contents
4x 50x Decimal, with x = Channel 1 ... 8
4x + 1 Configuration Command
(Refer to Register Configuration Commands - Modes - Modsoft, p. 124)
3x Configure Command Response (see Invalid Commands - Modsoft, p. 127
3x ,+ 1 0
3x + 2 0

4X output register commands, and resultant 3X register formats are:

l For unipolar measurements, select Channel 1 ... 8 and enter decimal 1 ... 28 for
the configuration code in register 4x + 1.
l For bipolar measurements, channel pairs are wired on the field connector, and
are also configured in pairs. Either channel of the pair may be selected. For
these measurements, the even channel must be used in the 4x read command.
The odd channel will be indicated not active or not valid in the 3x status register,
and will display zero in its data register. For example, channel pairs are 1/2, 3/4,
5/6, and 7/8. To configure the top input for bipolar operation, select either 1 or 2
for the x value in the 50x command, and enter decimal 33 to 36 for the
configuration code in register 4x + 1.
l For RTD or resistance measurements, channel pairs are wired on the field
connector and are also configured in pairs. Either channel of the pair may be
selected. For these measurements, the even channel must be used in the 4x
read command. The odd channel will be indicated not active or valid in the 3x
status register, and will display zero in its data register. For example, channel
pairs are 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8. To configure the top input for these
measurements, select either 1 or 2 for the x value in the 50x command, and enter
decimal 64 ... 95 (RTD) or 96 ... 116 (Ω) for the configuration code in register 4x
+ 1.
l If backplane or field power is lost, the module must be reconfigured.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 123

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Register The following tables indicate the 4X+1 Register Configuration Commands, for the
Configuration ADU 214 Module, in its various modes.
Commands -
Commands Ranges
Modes - Modsoft
(Decimal)
Two-wire Unipolar Mode
1 0 ... 10 V
2 0 ... 5 V
3 0 ... 1 V 0 ... 20 mA* 0 ... 10 mA**
4 0 ... 0.5 V 0 ... 10 mA* 0 ... 5 mA**
9 2 ... 10 V
10 1 ... 5 V
11 0.2 ... 1 V 4 ... 20 mA* 2 ... 10 mA**
12 0.1 ... 0.5 V 2 ... 10 mA* 1 ... 5 mA**
17 0 ... 10 V
18 0 ... 5 V
19 0 ... 1 V 0 ... 20 mA* 0 ... 10 mA**
20 0 ... 0.5 V 0 ... 10 mA* 0 ... 5 mA**
25 2 ... 10 V
26 1 ... 5 V
27 0.2 ... 1 V 4 ... 20 mA* 2 ... 10 mA**
28 0.1 ... 0.5 V 2 ... 10 mA* 1 ... 5 mA**
Note: When using Commands 17 ... 28, the message CHANNEL INVALID is displayed if
READ 15 BIT command is used.
Two-wire Bipolar Mode
33 + 10 V
34 +5V
35 +1V + 20 mA* + 10 mA**
36 + 0.5 V + 10 mA* + 5 mA**
* = 50Ω required across input ** = 100Ω required across input

124 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Register The table below gives Register Configuration Commands for the ADU 214 Module,
Configuration by Four-Wire Temperature Detector.
Commands -
Four-wire Temperature detector
Detectors -
Modsoft 64 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 100
65 -160 ... +160 ο C with Pt 100
66 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 100
67 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 100
68 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 200
69 -169 ... +160 ο C with Pt 200
70 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 200
71 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 200
72 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 500
73 -160 ... +160 ο C with Pt 500
74 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 500
75 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 500
76 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 1000
77 -160 ... +160 ο C with Pt 1000
78 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 1000
79 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 1000

Register Configuration Commands follow, for Two- and Three-wire Temperature

detector - with wire compensation (10 Ω)
80 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 100
81 -160 ... +160 ο C with Pt 100
82 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 100
83 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 100
84 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 200
85 -160 ... +160 ο C with Pt 200
86 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 200
87 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 200
88 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 500
89 -160 ... +160 ο C with Pt 500
90 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 500
91 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 500
92 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 1000
93 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 100

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 125

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

80 -60 ... +160 ο C with Ni 100

94 -200 ... +320 ο C with Pt 1000
95 -200 ... +640 ο C with Pt 1000

Register The following table provides Register Configuration Commands for the ADU 214
Configuration Module, by form of resistance measuring.
Commands -
Four-wire Resistance measuring
Resistance
Measuring - 96 0 ... 500 Ω
Modsoft 97 0 ... 500 Ω
98 0 ... 500 Ω
99 0 ... 1000 Ω
100 0 ... 2000 Ω
Two-wire Resistance measuring
with wire compensation (10 Ω)
112 0 ... 100 Ω
113 0 ... 200 Ω
114 0 ... 500 Ω
115 0 ... 1000 Ω
116 0 ... 2000 Ω

Register The following table addresses Read Configuration Values for the ADU 214 Module.
Configuration
Read Configuration
Commands -
Read Values - 4X 4YX Decimal, with Y and X = Channels to be read (1 ... 8)
Modsoft 4X+1 Not used
3X Configure Command Response (Refer to Invalid Commands - Modsoft, p. 127)
3X+1 Channel X Configuration
3X+2 Channel Y Configuration

Read Values Table appears next.

Read 12-bit Value
4X 4YX Decimal, with Y and X = Channels to be read (1 ... 8)
4X+1 Not used
3X Configure Command Response (Refer to Invalid Commands - Modsoft, p. 127)
3X+1 Channel X Measurement
3X+2 Channel Y Measurement

126 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Read 13-bit Value

4X 2YX Decimal, with Y and X = Channels to be read (1 ... 8)
4X+1 Not used
3X Measure Command Response (Refer to Invalid Commands - Modsoft, p. 127)
3X+1 Channel X Measurement
3X+2 Channel Y Measurement
Read 15-bit Value
4X 3YX Decimal, with Y and X = Channels to be read (1 ... 8)
4X+1 Not used
3X Measure Command Response (Refer to Invalid Commands - Modsoft, p. 127)
3X+1 Channel X Measurement
3X+2 Channel Y Measurement

The Read Module Status table for the ADU 214 follows.
Read Module Status
4X 000 Decimal
4X+1 Not used
3X Configure Command Response (Refer to Invalid Commands - Modsoft, p. 127)
3X+1 0
3X+2 0

Invalid Invalid 4X register commands, and valid commands other than "READ MODULE
Commands - STATUS" - that are issued when the module is not ready - result in the responses
Modsoft described below.
The following is a table of invalid commands, for the ADU 214 Module.
Invalid Commands
3X General Status (Bits 9 - 16 only, Bits 1 - 8 = 0);
refer to Invalid Commands - Modsoft, p. 127
3X+1 0
3X+2 0

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 127

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

The following figure represents the 3x Status Register.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CONFIGURE OR MEASURE
COMMAND RESPONSE*

1 = I/O Mapped Registers Not BIN

1 = Illegal 4X+1 Configuration Command
1 = Module Not Active
1 = Module Not Installed
Not Used, Always Zero

Not Used, Always Zero

Not Used, Always Zero
1 = Illegal 4X+1 Command
* Refer to Figure 43 or 44

The following illustration is the Configure Command Response for the ADU 214
Analog Module.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Channel 1 Active
1 = Channel 2 Active

1 = Channel 3 Active
1 = Channel 4 Active

1 = Channel 5 Active

1 = Channel 6 Active

1 = Channel 7 Active

1 = Channel 8 Active

128 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Next is the MEASURE COMMAND Response.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = 3X+1 Channel Overflow

1 = 3X+1 Channel Invalid

1 = 3X+2 Channel Overflow

1 = 3X+2 Channel Invalid

Not Used, Always 0

Not Used, Always 0

Not Used, Always 0

Not Used, Always 0
* For inactive channels: Overflow = 0, Invalid = 1

The following figure is the Data Input Register Structure for the ADU 214 Analog
Module.
3x + 1 Data Input Register

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3x + 2 Data Input Register

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 129

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Installation

Introduction The following information describes how to install the ADU 214.

Installation installing the ADU 214 module consists of:

Overview l Field wiring the module for the application selected
l Setting the DIP switches for appropriate AC noise suppression and contact
fretting requirements
l I/O mapping and configuring the module to fit its application

Field Wiring The following illustration is a Wiring Diagram for the ADU 214 Module.
24 VDC

0.16 A

1
2
3 3
4 4
1) V V
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
3) I 2) V
9 9
0...10 Ω
10 10
11
12
13
14 14
+ 15 15
V I 2)
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
4) I 2) I
20 20
2)
21 21
0...10 Ω 22
GND
1) Four-wire RTD (Pt 100 ... 1000, Ni 100 ... 1000) or resistance (0 ... 2000 Ω)
2) External reference resistance 50 or 100Ω, 0.1%, 0.125Ω for current measurement
3) Two-wire RTD (Pt 100 ... 1000, Ni 100... 1000) with 10Ω compensation
4) Three-wire RTD (Pt 100 ... 1000, Ni 100 ... 1000) with 10Ω compensation

130 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Note: For general wiring and set-up instructions, refer to the 984-A120 Compact
Programmable Controllers User Guide (GM-A984-PCS).
l Foil-shielded cables (2 or 4 x 0.5 mm twisted pair per channel) must be used for
connections. All channels can be run within one joint shielded cable.
l If RTD detectors are connected with 4 wires (e.g., Ni 100, Pt 100), conductors
for current and voltage path must be twisted in pairs.
l The connections between the shield and ground must be as short as possible
(<20 cm) at one end. If higher noise levels exist, the cable shield must be
grounded at both ends.
l The cable must be kept a minimum distance of >0.5 m away from power lines
or similar sources of electrical interference.
l When using two- or three-wire RTD configurations, the ADU 214 requires an
external adjustable 10 Ω series resistor in the RTD loop. This compensates for
the unknown lead resistance, since the normal compensatory lead pair is
missing. To calibrate the channel for the RTD configurations with 10 Ω
compensation (configuration commands 80-95 decimal), perform the steps in
the following procedure.

Note: Refer to Configuration - Concept, p. 123 for information on how to select the
two- or three-wire RTD operating mode.

Calibrating the To calibrate the channel for the RTD configurations with 10 Ω compensation.
Channel for RTD
Step Action
Configurations
Procedure 1 Set up the RTD loop with the adjustable 10 Ω in the circuit and short the end of
the wire run.
2 Configure the appropriate ADU 214 channel for 0-100 Ω input (configuration
command decimal 96).
3 Adjust the 10 Ω potentiometer for a channel input reading of 3200 in the 15-bit
mode-i.e., read 15 BIT VALUE, or the 4x Function Code Register = 3YX.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 131

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

Accuracy Errors For PT100 measurements, if lead resistance is known to be less than 1 Ω, the
uncompensated 4-wire configuration commands 64 ... 79 may be used and the 10
Ω adjustable resistor left out of the circuit. No calibration is required, but the
accuracy errors listed in the following table can be expected.
Accuracy Errors
Lead Resistance Error
1.0 Ω +2.605 C
0.10 Ω +0.255 C
0.01 Ω +0.0255 C

DIP Switch The following illustration shows the locations of the DIP Switches.
Settings

B2
B1

OFF ON
B1 50 Hz noise suppression (as shipped)

B1 60 Hz noise suppression

B2 Fretting switched on (as shipped)

B2 Fretting switched off

Noise The ADU 216 provides suppression of ac power frequencies on the peripheral lines.
Suppression The module is shipped with 50 Hz suppression, and can be switched to 60 Hz
(DIP Switch B1) suppression with DIP switch B1.

Fretting (DIP Fretting prevents an increase of contact resistance on peripheral connections.

Switch B2) Fretting is accomplished by outputting 10 V across the contacts at defined time
intervals. The resulting current (flowing for 1 ms) is limited to < 8 mA. The contacts
of the active inputs are fretted cyclically every 30 min. The fretting process is
selected with DIP switch B2.

132 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

ADU 214 Input Module Specifications

Specifications The following information describes the ADU 214 Input Module specifications.
The following table provides ADU 214 Specifications for: Power Supply; Required
Loadable; Inputs; and I/O Map.
Power External Supply 24 Vdc typical 70 mA, maximum 150 mA
Supply Internal Power Supply 5 Vdc typical 45 mA, maximum 100 mA
(via system bus)
Power Dissipation 2 Ω typical, maximum 3 Ω
Required SW-IODR-001 (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Loadable
Inputs Number 4 Inputs (4-pole/2-pole) temperature/resistance 4
Inputs, two-wire current/voltage bipolar or 8 Inputs, two-
wire current/voltage unipolar; inputs may be mixed
Potential Isolation Non-isolated, channel-to-channel
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 3 in/2 out

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 133

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

The following table shows the Voltage Measurements for the ADU 214 Module.
Voltage Input Impedance >1 M Ω
Measurement Unipolar Measuring 0 ... 0.5 V, 0 ... 1 V, 0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 10 V, 0.1 ... 0.5
Ranges V, 0.2 ... 1 V, 1 ... 5 V, 2 ... 10 V
Bipolar Measuring +0.5 V, +1 V, +5 V, +10 V
Ranges
Resolution approx. 0.003% of final value, 15-bit plus sign
Measuring Fault at For measuring ranges ±0.02% of Measuring
25°C 0.5 V / 1 V Range Final Value
(MFV), ±0.15% of
Measured Value (MV)
For measuring ranges 5 ±0.01% of MFV, ±0.02%
V/10 V of MV
Measuring Fault at 0 ... For measuring ranges ±0.10% of MFV, ±0.35%
60°C 0.5 V/1 V of MV
For measuring ranges 5 ±0.02% of MFV, ±0.11%
V/10 V of MV
Typical Measuring ≤0.5 above maximal errors
Error
Inphase Voltage Range ≤+11 V
(Differential input for
voltage measuring)
Voltage of each input
against GND
In-phase suppression ≥60 dB
Maximum Overvoltage +30 V (24V power supply ON) +20 V (24V power
Static (1 Input for each supply OFF)
module)
Maximum Overvoltage +50 V for ≤100 ms
Dynamic

134 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

This table gives the Current Measurements for the ADU 214 Module
Current Measuring ranges with external 0 ... 10 mA (0 ... 0.5 V), 0 ... 20 mA (0 ... 1
Measurement 50 Ω reference resistance V), 2 ... 10 mA (0.1 ... 0.5 V), 4 ... 20 mA
0.1%, 0.1 Ω, TC 25 ppm (0.2 ... 1 V), ±10 mA (+0.5 V), ±20 mA (±1 V)
Measuring ranges with external 0 ... 5 mA (0 ... 0.5 V), 0 ... 10 mA (0 ... 1 V),
100 Ω measuring resistance 1 ... 5 mA (0.1 ... 0.5 V), 2 ... 10 mA (0.2 ...
0.1%, 0.1 Ω, TC 25 ppm 1 V), ±5 mA (±0.5 V), ±10 mA (±1 V)
Resolution Approximately 0.003% of final value, 15-bit
plus sign
Critical values See the various tables that descirbe
Voltage Ranges. Load capacity of reference
resistance must be considered, i.e., 50 Ω
0.1 Ω maximum 40 mA continuous

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 135

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

The following table describes Temperature Measurement for the ADU 214 Module
Temperature Input >1 M Ω
Measurement impedance
(RTD 4-wire
Resolution < 0.012% of Final Value ≥ 13 Bit + sign
wire)
Measuring -160 ... +160°C, resolution ≤0.02°C -200 ... +320°C, resolution ≤0.04°C -200 ...
ranges with +640°C, resolution ≤0.08°C
Pt 100 Pt 200,
Pt 500, Pt
1000
Measuring Measuring Fault at 25°C with Pt 100 ... Pt 1000 ±0.35°C (= ±0.22 % of
ranges with (excluding inaccuracy of Measuring Range Final
Ni 100 Ni 200, detector) for measuring Value MFV)
Ni 500, Ni ranges -60 / -160 ... ±0.3°C (= ±0.2 % of MFV)
with Ni 100 ... Ni 1000 for
1000 +160°C
measuring range -200 ...
+320°C
with Pt 100 ... Pt 1000 for ±0.5°C
measuring range -200 ... (= ±0.16 % of MFV)
+640°C
with Pt 100 ... Pt1000 ±0.8°C
(= ±0.13% of MFV)
Measuring Fault at 0 ... with Pt 100, Ni 100 ±0.8°C (= ±0.5 % of MFV)
60°C for measuring
with Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt ±0.65°C
ranges -60 / -160 ...
1000 (= ±0.4 % of MFV)
+160°C
with Ni 200 ±0.5°C
(= ±0.32 % of MFV)
with Ni 500, Ni 1000 ±0.45°C
(= ±0.3 % of MFV)
Measuring Fault at 0 ... with Pt 100 ±1.1°C
60°C for measuring range (= ±0.35 % of MFV)
-200 ... +320°C ±0.95°C
with Pt 200
(= ±0.3 % of MFV)
with Pt 500, Pt 1000 ±0.9°C
(= ±0.28 % of MFV)
Measuring Fault at 0 ... with Pt 100 ±1.6°C
60°C for measuring range (= ±0.25 % of MFV)
-200 ... +640°C ±1.5°C
with Pt 200
(= ±0.23 % of MFV)
with Pt 500, Pt 1000 ±1.4°C
(= ±0.22 % of MFV)

136 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 214 Analog Input Module

The following table displays Resistance Measurement (4-wire wire), for the ADU 214
Module.
Resistance Input Impedance >1 M Ω
Measurement Measuring Ranges 0 ... 100 Ω, 0 ... 200 Ω, 0 ... 500 Ω, 0 ... 1000 Ω, 0
(4-wire wire) ... 2000 Ω
Resolution ≤ 0.005% of final value, >14 Bit
Measuring Fault at ±0.1% of Measuring Range Final Value (MFV)
25°C for measuring
range 100 ... 2000 Ω
Measuring Fault at 0 ... for measuring range ±0.30% of MFV
60°C 100 Ω
for measuring range ±0.25% of MFV
200 Ω
for measuring range ±0.20% of MFV
500...2000 Ω
Constant current Approx. 1.5 mA for measuring range 0 ... 2000 Ω;
approx. 2.5 mA for measuring ranges 0 ... 100 Ω,
0 ... 200 Ω, 0 ... 500 Ω 0 ... 1000 Ω

The following table addresses various aspects of the ADU 214 Module: Input
Characteristics; Connections; Weight; and Agency Approvals.
Dynamic Conversion time for all 8 inputs 300 ms max
Characteristics Input Delay Time constant for HF 0.12 ms, typ
of Inputs suppression
Measurement Integration Time 20 or 16.66 ms switchable
Selectable AC Power Interference n = 1, 2 ...push-pull interferences>60
Suppression for f = n x 50/ 60 Hz dB (peak value of interference
voltage and measuring voltage ≤ final
value x 1.1)
Connections 4-wire Cable Length max. 50 m for voltage detector
2-wire Cable Length max. 100 m for voltage detector
4-wire Line Resistance max. 25 Ω for each conductor
4-wire Line Capacitance max. 10 nF for each conductor
Weight .5lb (.22kg)
Agency UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142
Approvals

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 137

ADU 214 Analog Input Module

138 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes the ADU 216 analog input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What Is the ADU 216 Analog Input Module? 140
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges 141
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics 142
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Configuration 145
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Programming Modes 147
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Calibration 152
ADU 216 Analog Input Module Specifications 154

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 139

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

What Is the ADU 216 Analog Input Module?

Brief Product The ADU 216 is an eight-channel analog input module with opto-isolation, designed
Description to be used in thermocouple temperature and low-voltage measurement
applications. It performs analog-to-digital conversions using a dual-slope
integrating conversion method, converting analog input signals into digital values
based on the principle of successive approximation.

Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/

211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW—IODR—
001) for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984—1xx, E984—24x/251/
255) with Modsoft.

The ADU 216 module has the following features:

l Operates off the 5 V supply voltage provided internally over the I/O bus, with no
user-supplied external power source required.
l 16-bit resolution
l All eight channels are periodically strobed with a 1 mA current pulse to detect and
report open circuits.

Note: You may use an ADU 257 module with its DIP switch set to the ADU 216
mode. In this mode the ADU 257 module performs just like an ADU 216 module.

WARNING
Compatibility Warning
The ADU 216 module will operate properly only when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

140 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

ADU 216 Analog Input Module Conversion Ranges

Introduction The PLC model determines the ranges.

Conversion A table is provided below for each of the following:

Ranges l A984-1xx and E984-24x/251/255
l E984-258/265/275/285
The ranges for A984-1xx and E984-24x/251/255 are listed below.
Signal Conversion Resolution
K Thermocouple (NiCrNi, IEC 584) 0.05 degrees C
J Thermocouple (FeCuNi, IEC 584) 0.05 degrees C
Unipolar voltage (linear) 1.11 micro V

The ranges for A984-1xx and E984-24x/251/255 are listed below.

Input (J TC Input (K TC Input (L TC C) Decimal Value Operating
degrees C) degrees C) 15bits+sign Results
<-210 <-270 <-200 0 Under range
-270 27368 Rated value
range
-210 -210 28568
-200 -200 -200 28768
0 0 0 32768
+900 +900 +900 50768
+1200 +1200 56768
+1370 60168
>+1200 >+1370 >+900 +65535 Over range

Selection of the correct input conversion algorithm is done via the application
program and the 4x holding register that is I/O mapped to this module (see ADU 216
Analog Input Module Programming Modes, p. 147.

Note: The ADU 216 module has open wire detection. If a channel is not wired, the
READY (fault) LED will illuminate.

Note: The ADU 216 does not support bipolar mode.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 141

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

ADU 216 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics

Front View The ADU 216 can be installed in any slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201, and
202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and peripheral connections on the
front. The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be completed with
information such as the signal values, etc., in the spaces provided.
The following illustration shows a front view of the ADU 216 including the label.

ADU 216 ADU 216

A ready 1
1
2 2
3 3
1
4 4
5 5
2

input
6 6
7 7
3
8 8
9 9
10 4
10
11
11
12 run +AD592 12
13 -AD592 13
14
14
5
15 15
16 16
17 6
input

17
18
19 18
7
20 19
21 20
8
22 21
22
card

142 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

LEDs The ADU 216 has two green LEDs.

l READY (fault): One LED opposite terminal #1, if on or flashing, indicates that the
on-board processor detected a fault condition, such as over range, open circuit,
and so forth. For more information, see the Note.
l RUN: One green LED opposite terminal #12, if on, indicates that the on-board
processor was initialized properly and is operating normally (i.e., continuously
resetting the watchdog timer controlling the LED), and that the PLC is
communicating with the module.

Note: Although the LED opposite terminal #1 is labeled READY, it actually

indicates a fault condition. Note that this LED may be either green or red, but its
function remains the same regardless of its color.

Simplified The following illustration is a simplified schematic for the ADU 216.
Schematic
1 of 4 Input Circuits
-5 V 0 V +5 V

MUX
0V Broken
Wire
+5 V Detect

-5 V
1
2 Difference
3
Input 1
4
5
Input 2
6
0V
7
Input 3 Current
8 Supply
+5 V
9
Input 4
10
0V
11
Current/Voltage
AD592 12 Converter
Reference Sensor
13 (Protective
(Cold Junction)
14 Circuit)
Input 5
15
16
Input 6
17
18
Input 7
19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 143

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

Block Diagram The following illustration is a block diagram for the ADU 216.

Green RUN

Green READY (fault) EPROM

+5 V

80C31 Watch-Bit 14
Bit 13
dog
-5 V 0 V +5 V -5 V 0 V +5 V Bit 12
Bit 11
Inter-
MUX Param.
serial face
A/D

Broken
Wire
Defect

Difference Bit 0

Current/Voltage

144 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

ADU 216 Analog Input Module Configuration

Introduction The following items must be addressed when configuring the ADU 216:
l The module must be I/O Mapped as five 30XXX Input Registers and one 40XXX
Output/Control Register, and Binary data type.
l Make connections and assignments of input addresses.
l Identify overall mode of operation, type of input, and error indication.
l Cabling guidelines.

Note: You may not use both type J and type K thermocouples with the same
module.

Note: The measured temperatures using type J or type K thermocouples must be

higher than the reference sensor (cold junction) temperature to produce proper
results.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 145

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

Cabling Shielded, twisted pair cable (2 or 4 x 0.5mm per channel) should be used. All
channels can be connected with a common shielded cable.

Note: Unused inputs must be short circuited (jumper supplied).

An ADU 216 wiring example and associated registers for inputs is provided below.

Equalizing Line Cooper Twisted Pair

Group I/O Map Input # Cold Junction ADU 216

Register 1
2
3000x +1 Input 1 3
4
3000x +2 Input 2 5
1 6
3000x +3 Input 3 7
8
9
3000x +4 Input 4 10
AD592 11
12
13
14
3000x +1 Input 5
15
16
3000x +2 Input 6
17
2
3000x +3 Input 7 19
3000x +4 Input 8 21
22

Note: Voltages induced into cables (noise, etc.) must not exceed + 0.5 V measured
at the input terminal versus GND.

Note: The reference sensor (cold junction) is factory-installed between terminals

12 and 13. For greater distances between the ADU 216 and the object of
temperature measurement, the sensor can also be mounted at the remote terminal
as shown (remember to observe correct polarity). The cable should be shielded
twisted-pair to reduce susceptibility to induced noise signals.

146 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

ADU 216 Analog Input Module Programming Modes

Raw Module Data The ADU 216 module provides unipolar data.
Data modes are outlined below.
Modes Unipolar
Full Scale 0 ... 65535 Dec
0 ... FFFF Hex
Analog Value 0 ... 728.155 V
Value per Digit 1.11 micro V

Binary Example relates to the module. Modsoft loadables may change these
values.

BINARY EXAMPLES:
15 3 2 1 0 Unipolar

0 ... 0 1 1 0 = 6 x 1.11 µV
= 6.66 µV

0 ... 1 0 0 1 = 9 x 1.11 µV
= 9.99 µV

General The ADU 216 is an 8-channel analog input module. The module operates in one of
several modes, and the type of input signal that it processes is software selectable.
The mode and signal type are set by the Traffic Copped 40XXX output register.
Five sequential 30XXX registers must also be Traffic Copped. The first register is
used to read module operating status, and the remainder contain data from four of
the eight channel inputs (the control register determines which inputs are reflected
in the 30XXX input registers). Channel input data is updated every 1.5 seconds.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 147

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

40XXX Control Bits in the ADU 216 control word and their meanings are shown in the following
Register illustration.

40XXX CONTROL WORD

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

[15-5] Must always = 0

Type K Thermocouple 0 0 0
Type J Thermocouple 0 1 0
Voltage (linear) 1 1 1

Channel 8 = Input to terminals 20 & 21 0

Channel 8 = Input from reference sensor 1

Data Registers 30XXX = Channel 1 to Channel 4 0

Data Registers 30XXX = Channel 5 to Channel 8 1

Bits 2 ... 4 must not be changed during operation. However, bits 0 and 1 may be
changed during operation. Bits 5 ... 15 must always be set to 0.

Example:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

Not Used Read Ch. 5...7 and reference

sensor (Ch. 8)
Type J Thermocouple

Temperatures above and

below reference

148 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

30XXX Status The figure above (bits in the ADU 216 control word and their meanings) describes
and Data the bit significance of the first 30XXX input register which displays the module
Registers status. The next four registers contain data representative of the individual channel
input values. Refer to Types of Modes and Their Functions, p. 151 for information
on the values that may be expected.
Data values are the result of the type of input signal selected and the module
operating mode selected.
Traffic Cop Registers Data
30XXX Module Status Information
30XXX + 1 Ch #1 Data/Ch #5 Data
30XXX + 2 Ch #2 Data/Ch #6 Data
30XXX + 3 Ch #3 Data/Ch #7 Data
30XXX + 4 Ch #4 Data/Ch #8 Data

Channel #8 data can be either the result of the input signal applied to terminals 20
and 21, or the reference sensor (cold junction) connected to terminals 12 and 13
depending on the bit settings in the 40XXX control register. To use Channel #8
(30xxx + 4) as the reference sensor (cold junction) value, ensure Bits 0 and 1 are
set to a one.

Note: The module scan rate is 1.5 seconds when you change the control word. It
may take up to 1.5 seconds until the requested information is available in the status
word. Therefore, the measured values taken within this time frame is invalid.

Note: The values of the 3x register(s) always reflect the reference sensor value
(cold junction) of unused (jumpered) inputs.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 149

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

Bits in the ADU 216 status word and their meanings are illustrated below.

3x Status Register

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

[15-8] Not Used

Module not ready/defect 0

Module ready 1

Reference sensor connected 0

Open circuit reference sensor or over temperature 1

All input channels connected 0

Open circuit input channel or over temperature 1

Channel 1 0 0 0
Channel 2 0 0 1

*Open circuit detected in

*NOTE: Only the lowest numbered channel
with an open circuit is displayed. Channel 8 1 1 1

Channel 8 = Input to terminals 20 & 21 0

Channel 8 = Input from reference sensor 1

Data Registers 30XXX +1... 30XXX +4 = Channel 1 to Channel 4 0

Data Registers 30XXX +1... 30XXX +4 = Channel 5 to Channel 8 1

The following figure shows the Bits in the ADU 216 Control Word and their meanings

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
Not Used
Data read is from Ch. 5... 7
and reference sensor
Open circuit detected
in Channel 4
Open circuit input channel
detected
Reference sensor connected
Module ready

150 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

Types of Modes When power is first applied to the module, it will be in a state equivalent to that
and Their before power down. As long as power to the unit is maintained, the operating mode
Functions of the module will be unchanged through a stop/start cycle.
When the module goes out of range-either over or under range-and then returns to
a valid operating range, the module will resume proper operations unless your out-
of-range condition reaches or exceeds the safe operating range of +30 VDC.

CAUTION
Unit Overload Hazard
We do not recommend measuring high ohmic voltage sources,
because the ADU 216 may heat up the sensor.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

WARNING
Unit Damage Hazard
Operation at an extreme out-of-range voltage - at or beyond +30 Vdc -
will cause permanent damage to the module.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 151

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

ADU 216 Analog Input Module Calibration

Introduction
CAUTION
Calibration caution.
Modicon recommends that units requiring recalibration be returned to
the factory, since inaccuracies could be due to faulty components.
However, users who wish to perform their own calibration should use
the following procedure.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

By adjusting the two potentiometers on the top of the ADU 216 module, you can
calibrate the signal conversion of the eight input channels and the reference sensor.
In this procedure, R76 is used to calibrate the input channels, and R79 is used to
calibrate the compensation by the reference sensor. Items required for calibration
are:
l A dc Power Supply (+ 72.8 mV)
l A precision thermometer

152 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 216 Analog Input Module

Calibrating the The following illustration shows the location of the potentiometers on the ADU 216.
Analog Input
Channels R79
R76

Procedure for The following is the procedure for adjusting the potentiometers:
Adjusting
Step Action
Potentiometers
1 Connect a DC source (+72.800 mV) to one input channel. Set the module for
Voltage Input (linear). Adjust R76 for a reading of FFF2 Hex.
2 Set the module read the reference sensor input at Channel 8.
3 Measure the exact temperature of the AD592 reference sensor element.
4 Adjust the reading for Channel 8 with R79 to the temperature measured in Step
3 (divide the reading by 20 for the module resolution of 0.05 degrees C/digit).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 153

ADU 216 Analog Input Module

ADU 216 Analog Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of ADU 216 specifications.

Specifications
Module Number of Channels 8
Topology
Data Format Voltage or temperature value
Isolation Channel-to-Bus: +/- 300 Vdc Non-isolated channel-to-channel
Required SW-IODR-001
Load able
Power Supply Internal Source (from I/O bus) 5 Vdc, 100 mA typ., 150 mA max.
Power Dissipation 0.5 Ohm typical; 1 Ohm max.
Voltage and Linear Measuring Range Unipolar 0 to 72.8 mV (1.1 micro V/digit)
Thermocouple
Ranges Type J: Ambient ... 1100degrees C
Input
Type K: Ambient ... 1370 degrees C
Capabilities
Compensated Measuring Type J, K Thermocouple; resolution 0.05 degrees C
Range
Max. Input Impedance ≤ 500 ohms for Thermocouple and cold junction sensor
Cold Junction Sensor Type AD 592 CN, -26 degrees C ... +106 degrees C
Noise Voltage of the in put to +/- 0.5 V maximum
Common
Wire Size, Max. One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 5 in/1 out
A/D Conversion Conversion Time 1.5 seconds for all 8 inputs, maximum
Resolution 16-bit, unipolar
In-range Error Limit @ 25 degrees C ambient 0.1% of input value +/- 0.15 degrees C
@ 0 ... 60 degrees C ambient +/- 0.3% of input value +/- 0.75 degrees C
(with calibration of compensation by
reference sensor input)
Noise Common Mode Rejection 55 dB @ 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 1 kHz minimum
Suppression
Operating 0 ... 60 degrees C (32 ... 140 degrees F)
Temperature
Relative 0 ... 95% (non-condensing) @ 60 degrees C
Humidity
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 330 g (.725 lb.)
Agency UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards
Approvals

154 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ADU 257 Analog
Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the ADU 257 analog input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the ADU 257 Analog Input Module? 156
ADU 257 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics 157
Installing the ADU 257 Analog Input Module 159
ADU 257 Isolated Analog Input Module Operation 161
ADU 257 Analog Input Module Specifications 169

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 155

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

What is the ADU 257 Analog Input Module?

Brief Product The ADU 257 is an eight-channel thermocouple or four-channel RTD input module
Description with opto-isolation. The ADU 257 provides linearization for Thermocouples and
Resistance Temperature Device inputs. The ADU 257 operates at extended
temperature and has the following characteristics:
l Thermocouple types B,E,J,K,N,R,S,T are supported.
l RTD types Pt100,200,500,1000 American, Pt100,200,500,1000, and
Ni100,200,500,1000 are supported.
l 2-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire RTD connections are supported.
l Linear ranges include 0... 4000 Ohms and +/-100mV.
l 12-bit, 16-bit, 15-bit plus sign, and 32-bit resolutions are available for all inputs.
l Both Celsius and Fahrenheit temperature units are available.
l Factory installed CJC sensors (AD592) provide ambient temperature at the ADU
257s location. The CJC sensor temperature values are stored in two 3x input
registers for your application needs.
l Errors noted via the Concept I/O Map Status Word.
l The module may be used in two different modes via a DIP switch -- either as an
ADU 257, or as an ADU 216.

Note: The ADU 257 mode requires Concept 2.2 (or higher) panel software. The
ADU 216 mode requires Modsoft 2.6.1 (or higher) panel software and the ADU
216.DAT Loadable (available on the Modicon.com website).

l Input selection and range can be set independently via the panel software.

156 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 257 Analog Input Module

ADU 257 Analog Input Module Physical Characteristics

Illustration The ADU 257 can be installed in any I/O slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201,
and 202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and peripheral connections on
the front. The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be filled in with relevant
information (signal values, etc.) in the spaces provided.
A front view with the ADU 257 label is provided below.

ADU 257 ADU 257

fault 1
1
2
2
3
3 1
4
4
5 5
2
input
6 6
7 7
3
8 8
9 9
4
10 10
11
11
12 run +AD592 12
13 -AD592 13
14 14
5
15 15
16 16
17 6
input

17
18
18
19 7
19
20
20
21 8
22 21
22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 157

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

LEDs The following table contains descriptions of the ADU 257 LEDs.
LED# LED Name Color Function
1 Fault Red Pertains to a fault:
ON= Fault detected (over range, under range, broken wire)
OFF=No fault detected
12 Run Green Pertains to the processor operation:
ON=Processor operating between the ADU 257 and the PLC
without fault
OFF=Fault in processor operation

Block Diagram A block diagram for the ADU 257 is provided below.
DC/DC
Analog PAB
Inputs Backplane
1 Analog
Solid
2 Supply
3 F Current Source
4 i State
l
5 t
e Isolation
6
r Relays
7
Amp
Micro
ADC
MUX
Controller DPM
CJC Input

158 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Installing the ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Introduction The following procedures are necessary when installing the ADU 257:
l Set DIP switches.
l Make connections and assign input addresses.
l I/O map the module as 20-3x input registers.
l Identify overall mode of operation and type of input.

Setting Switches The module may be used in two different modes (ADU 216 or ADU 257). Switch 1
is used to set the mode. The ADU 257 is shipped with Switch 1 in the OFF position
-- in ADU 257 mode.
The module may be used with broken wire detection activated or deactivated.
Switch 2 is used to activate or deactivate broken wire detection.The ADU 257 is
shipped with Switch 2 in the OFF position -- with broken wire detection active.
The following illustration shows the ADU 257, with both switches OFF (S1 OFF =
ADU 257 mode, S2 OFF = broken wire detection activated).

S2
S1 DIP Switch Settings for S1 and S2:

OFF

Broken wire detection active=OFF or No broken wire detection=ON

OFF ON ADU 257 mode=OFF or ADU 216 mode=ON

S2
S1 (When input is configured as 100mV range, the broken wire detection
is ALWAYS OFF)

To change to ADU 216 mode, move Switch 1 to the ON position. For details on the
ADU 216 Analog Input module, refer to the chapter for that module.

Note: The ADU 257 mode requires Concept 2.2 (or higher) panel software. The
ADU 216 mode requires Modsoft 2.6.1 (or higher) panel software and the ADU
216.DAT Loadable (available on the Modicon.com website).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 159

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Wiring Diagram An ADU 257 wiring diagram is provided below.

1
2
3
4 Thermocouple
5
U Voltage
6
7
8 RTD or Resistor
9 4 Wire Connection
10
11
12 +CJC
AD592
13 -CJC
14
15 RTD or Resistor
16 3 Wire Connection
17
18
19 RTD or Resistor
20 2 Wire Connection
21
22

Note: The factory installed cold junction sensor located between terminals 12 and
13 may be mounted at a remote terminal for greater distances between the ADU
257 and the object of temperature measurement. Please observe correct polarity.

160 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 257 Analog Input Module

ADU 257 Isolated Analog Input Module Operation

Introduction The ADU 257 is an eight-channel analog input module. Its field connector is wired
depending on the type of input to be measured, either TC or RTD. Two connections
are used per RTD; therefore, only four channels may be used. Otherwise, you have
eight channels available for TC devices or linear measurements. Any of the inputs
may be either TC, linear, or RTD, and any combination of the three may be used.
The module can operate in one of several modes, and the input channel ranges are
individually selectable. The mode and ranges are set via the panel software.
Channel input data is updated every 800 ms. When power is first applied to the
module, its inputs are inactive.

I/O Map The ADU 257 requires 20-3x input registers addressed in sequence, beginning with
two module status 3x registers, 16 data channel 3x registers (channels 1... 8), and
two cold junction sensor 3x registers
I/O Map Registers Data
3x Input status word
3x + 1 Input status word
3x + 2 Input #1 data (low word)
3x + 3 Input #1 data (high word)
... ...
... ...
3x + 17 Input #8 data (low word)
3x + 18 Input #8 data (high word)
3x + 19 Input #9 data (cold junction sensor) (low word)
3x + 20 Input #9 data (cold junction sensor) (high word)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 161

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Conversions The following tables detail the various voltage and current conversions for the ADU
257 module.
+/- 100mV Range and Data Display Format
Millivoltage 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign high IEEE 754 Range
resolution floating point
<+102.4mV +4095 +65535 +32767 +1.024 E02 Overrange
>+100mV... +4095 +65535 +32001... +32766 +1.0 E02... Pos. tolerance
+102.4mV +1.024 E02 range
+100mV +4095 +65535 +32000 +1.0 E02
0mV +2048 +32768 0 0 Nominal
-100mV 0 0 -32000 -1.0 E02
<-100mV... 0 0 -32001... -32766 <-1.0 E02... - Neg. tolerance
-102.4mV 102.4 E02 range
<-102.4mV 0 0 -32767 -1.024 E02 Underrange

0... 4000Ω 0... 4000Ω Range and Data Display Format

Resistance 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign high IEEE 754 floating Range
resolution point
>4095Ω +4095 +65535 +32767 +4.096 E03 Overrange
>4000... +4095 +65535 +32001... +32766 >+4.0 E03... Pos. tolerance
4095Ω +4.095 E03 range
4000Ω +4095 +65535 +32000 +4.0 E03 Nominal
0Ω 0 0 0 0
0 0 -2 -2.0 E00 Broken wire

162 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 257 Analog Input Module

IEC 751 IEC 751 Pt100,200,500,1000 -200... +850 C (-328... +1562 F) Range and Data
Pt100,200,500,10 Display Format
00 -200... +850 C
RTD 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating point Range
0.1C (0.1F)
>+850C +4095 +65535 +8501 (+15621) 8.501 E02 (1.5621 E03) Overrange
(+1562F)
+850C +4095 +65535 +8500 (+15620) 8.500 E02 (1.562 E03)
(+1562F)
0 (+32F) +780 +12483 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-200C (-328F) 0 0 -2000 (-3280) -2.00 E02 (-3.28 E02)
<-200C 0 0 -2001 (-3281) -2.001 E02 (-3.281 E02) Underrange
(-328F) 0 0 -2002 (-3282) -2.002 E02 (-3.282 E02) Broken wire

SAMA (US) SAMA (US) Pt100,200,500,1000 -200... +650 C (-328... +1112 F) Range and Data
Pt100,200,500,10 Display Format
00 -200... +650 C
RTD 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+600C (+1112F) +4095 +65535 +6001 (+11121) 6.001 E02 Overrange
(1.113 E03)
+600C (+1112F) +4095 +65535 +6000 (+11120) 6.000 E02
(1.112 E03)
0C (+32F) +1024 +16384 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-200C (-328F) 0 0 -2000 (-3280) -2.00 E02
(-3.28 E02)
<-200C (-328F) 0 0 -2001 (-3281) -2.001 E02 Underrange
(-3.281 E02)
0 0 -2002 (-3282) -2.002 E02 Broken wire
(-3.282 E02)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 163

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

DIN43760 DIN43760 Ni100,200,500,1000 -60... +250 C (-76... +482 F) Range and Data
Ni100,200,500,10 Display Format
00 -60... +250 C
RTD 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+250C (+482F) +4095 +65535 +2501 (+4821) 2.501 E02 Overrange
(4.821 E02)
+250C (+482F) +4095 +65535 +2500 (+4820) 2.500 E02
(4.820 E02)
0C (+32F) +793 +12684 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-60C (-76F) 0 0 -600 (-760) -6.00 E01
(-7.6 E01)
<-60C (-76F) 0 0 -601 (-761) -6.01 E01 Underrange
(-7.61 E01)
0 0 -602 (-762) -6.02 E01 Broken wire
(-7.62 E01)

Thermocouple Thermocouple Type R,S -50... +1768 C (-58... +3214.4 F) Range and Data Display
Type R,S -50... Format
+1768 C
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+1768C +4095 +65535 +17681 (+32146) 1.7681 E03 Overrange
(+3214.4F) (3.2146 E03)
+1768C +4095 +65535 +17680 (+32144) 1.7680 E03
(+3214.4F) (3.2144 E02)
0C (+32F) +113 +1802 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-50C (-58F) 0 0 -500 (-580) -5.00 E01
(-5.80 E01)
<-50C (-58F) 0 0 -501 (-582) -5.01 E01 Underrange
(-5.82 E01)
0 0 -502 (-584) -5.02 E01 Broken wire
(-5.84 E01)

164 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Thermocouple Thermocouple Type B +50... +1800 C (+122... +3272 F) Range and Data Display
Type B +50... Format
+1800 C
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+1800C +4095 +65535 +18001 (+32722) 1.8001 E03 Overrange
(+3272F) (3.2722 E03)
+1800C (+3272F) +4095 +65535 +18000 (+32720) 1.8000 E03 Nominal
(3.2720 E03)
50C (+122F) 0 0 +500 (+1220) 5.00 E01
(1.220 E02)
<50C (+122F) 0 0 +499 (+1218) 4.99 E01 Underrange
(1.218 E02)
0 0 +498 (+1216) 4.98 E01 Broken wire
(1.216 E02)

Thermocouple Thermocouple Type J -210... +1200 C (-346... +2192 F) Range and Data Display
Type J -210... Format
+1200 C
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+1200C +4095 +65535 +12001 (+21922) 1.2001 E03 Overrange
(+2192F) (2.1922 E03)
+1200C (+2192F) +4095 +65535 +12000 (+21920) 1.2000 E03
(2.1920 E03)
0C (+32F) +610 +9761 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-210C (-346F) 0 0 -2100 (-3460) -2.100 E02
(-3.460 E02)
<-210C (-346F) 0 0 -2101 (-3462) -2.101 E02 Underrange
(-3.462 E02)
0 0 -2102 (-3464) -2.102 E02 Broken wire
(-3.464 E02)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 165

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Thermocouple Thermocouple Type T -270... +400 C (-454... +752 F) Range and Data Display
Type T -270... Format
+400 C
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+400C (+752F) +4095 +65535 +4001 (+7522) 4.001 E02 Overrange
(7.522 E02)
+400C (+752F) +4095 +65535 +4000 (+7520) 4.000 E02
(7.520 E02)
0C (+32F) +1650 +26410 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2700 (-4540) -2.700 E02
(-4.540 E02)
<-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2701 (-4542) -2.701 E02 Underrange
(-4.542 E02)
0 0 -2702 (-4544) -2.702 E02 Broken wire
(-4.544 E02)

Thermocouple Thermocouple Type E -270... +1000 C (-454... +1832 F) Range and Data Display
Type E -270... Format
+1000 C
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+1000C +4095 +65535 +10001 (+18322) 1.0001 E03 Overrange
(+1832F) (1.8322 E03)
+1000C (+1832F) +4095 +65535 +1000 (+18320) 1.0000 E03
(1.8320 E03)
0C (+32F) +871 +13933 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2700 (-4540) -2.700 E02
(-4.540 E02)
<-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2701 (-4542) -2.701 E02 Underrange
(-4.542 E02)
0 0 -2702 (-4544) -2.702 E02 Broken wire
(-4.544 E02)

166 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Thermocouple Thermocouple Type K -270... +1372 C (-454... +2501.6 F) Range and Data Display
Type K -270... Format
+1372 C
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+1372C +4095 +65535 +13721 (+25018) 1.3721 E03 Overrange
(+2501.6F) (2.5018 E03)
+1372C +4095 +65535 +13720 (+25016) 1.3720 E03
(+2501.6F) (2.5016 E03)
0C (+32F) +673 +10776 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2700 (-4540) -2.700 E02
(-4.540 E02)
<-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2701 (-4542) -2.701 E02 Underrange
(-4.542 E02)
0 0 -2702 (-4544) -2.702 E02 Broken wire
(-4.544 E02)

Thermocouple Thermocouple Type N -270... +1300 C (-454... +2372 F) Range and Data Display
Type N -270... Format
+1300 C
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+1300C +4095 +65535 +13001 (+23722) 1.3001 E03 Overrange
(+2372F) (2.3722 E03)
+1300C (+2372F) +4095 +65535 +13000 (+23720) 1.3000 E03
(2.3720 E03)
0C (+32F) +704 +11270 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2700 (-4540) -2.700 E02
(-4.540 E02)
<-270C (-454F) 0 0 -2701 (-4542) -2.701 E02 Underrange
(-4.542 E02)
0 0 -2702 (-4544) -2.702 E02 Broken wire
(-4.544 E02)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 167

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

Cold Junction Cold Junction Sensor AD592 -25... +105 C (-13... +221 F) Range and Data Display
Sensor AD592 - Format
25... +105 C
CJC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+125C (+257F) +4095 +65535 +1051 (+2212) 1.051 E02 Overrange
(2.212 E02)
+125C (+257F) +4095 +65535 +1050 (+2210) 1.050 E02
(2.210 E02)
0C (+32F) +683 +10923 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
-25C (-13F) 0 0 -250 (-130) -2.50 E01
(-1.30 E01)
<-25C (-13F) 0 0 -251 (-132) -2.51 E01 Underrange
(-1.32 E01)
0 0 -252 (-134) -2.52 E01 Broken wire
(-1.34 E01)

168 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ADU 257 Analog Input Module

ADU 257 Analog Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of ADU 257 specifications.

Specifications
Module Number of channels 8 TC, 4 RTD
Topology Data Format TC, RTD, mV linear, Ohms linear inputs
Isolation test voltage channel to 400Vdc maximum via solid state relays
channel
Isolation test voltage channel to 500Vac maximum
bus
Isolation test voltage channel to 500Vac maximum
earth
Power Supply Internal Source (from I/O bus) 5VIO; 120mA typical
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 20 in/0 out
TC Inputs TC types B,E,J,K,N,R,S,T
Linear Measuring Range +/-100mV
CJC sensor Factory installed reference sensor to
terminals 12 and 13
Cold junction sensor type AD 592 CN, -26 degrees C ... +106
(factory installed) degrees C
Overload protection +30Vdc continuously
Resolution 12Bits, 16Bits, 15Bits plus sign, 32Bits
Accuracy for TC ranges @ 0 ... For J,K,N,E,T types:
60 degrees C, includes CJC, +/-2 degrees C +/-0.1 percent of reading
offset, gain error (+/-1.5 degrees C for temp. less than 100)
(assumes no delta between CJC and CJ
sensor)
Accuracy for TC ranges @ 0 ... For S,R,B types:
60 degrees C, includes CJC, +/-4 degrees C +/-0.1 percent of reading
offset, gain error (assumes no delta between CJC and CJ
sensor)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 169

ADU 257 Analog Input Module

RTD Inputs RTD types 2/3/4 wire IEC Pt100/200/500/1000,

2/3/4 wire American Pt100/200/500/1000,
2/3/4 wire Ni100/200/500/1000
Linear Measuring Range 0 ... 4000 ohms
Overload protection +30Vdc continuously
Resolution 12Bits, 16Bits, 15Bits plus sign, 32Bits
Accuracy for RTD ranges @ 25 0.5 degrees C
degrees C ambient temperature
Accuracy for RTD ranges @ 60 0.9 degrees C
degrees C ambient temperature
Derating of accuracy for -25 ... 1.25C
+70 degrees C
Dynamic Conversion time for all inputs 800mS maximum
Characteristics Interference voltage n=1,2 ...
of Inputs suppression (main
suppression) for f=nx50 or
60Hz
Common-mode rejection less than 110dB
Physical Format 1 slot
Characteristics Dimensions (W x H x D) 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 320g, 0.710 lb
Wire Size 1-14AWG, 2-20AWG
Environmental Operating Temperature -40 ... +70 degrees C
Characteristics
Agency ADU 257: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and European Directive
Approvals EMC 89/336/EEC (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Standards
ADU 257C: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and European Directive
EMC 89/336/EEC (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Standards

170 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 AS-BDEA 203 Profibus-DP
Coupler Module Description

At a Glance

Overview This chapter describes the AS-BDEA Profibus-DP Coupler Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
Configuration 172
Features and Functions 176
Diagnosis 178
Technical Specifications 179

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 171

AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Configuration

Overview To configure the AS-BDEA the following tasks must be performed

Settings (Slave Slave Address-The slave address (node address) is to be set on the front panel
Address, "x10, x1" rotary switches. Addresses from 1 ... 99 are allowed (0=as shipped ).
Disconnection Disconnection Behavior- See the following figure for disconnection behavior.
Behavior) Switches S0 and S1are meaningless.

Off On Off On
S3 S3
S2 Forced cutoff S2 Halt with value retention
S1 S1 (outputs remain unchanged)
S0 S0

S3 Firmware Standard* S3 Reserved for AEG service specialists

S2 S2 (Test bay setting)
S1 S1
S0 S0

* As shipped

172 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

I/O Expansion Arbitrary I/O combinations are only possible with discrete I/O modules. Use of
Limitations analog I/O modules restricts total data volume to a particular level. Total data
volume is the sum of data from the PROFIBUS master to the AS–BDEA 203 (D out),
and from the AS–BDEA 203 to the PROFIBUS master (D in).The feasibility of a
particular combination can be verified with the followingtables. The first table lists
data volume by respective module (D out / D in) in bytes.The data volume of all
employed modules through the AS–BDEA 203 to the PROFIBUS master (D in
sums) must </= 244 bytes.
In accordance with the (D in) data volume, this table permits the data volume
calculation for PROFIBUS master to AS–BDEA 203 (D out). With the second table
the (D out) data volumes of all employed modules is to be checked against the max.
permissible (D out) data volume.
Data volume by module
Module D In Data D Out Data
Volume (Bytes) Volume (Bytes)
DEP 208, DEP 210, DEP 211 1 0
DAP 204, DAP 208, DAP 210 0 1
DAP 212, DAP 220, DAP 292 1 1
DEO 216, DEP 214, DEP 215, DEP 216, DEP 217, 2 0
DEP 218, DEP 220, DEP 296, DEP 297, DEX 216
DAO 216, DAP 216, DAP 217, DAP 218, DAX 216 0 2
DAU 202 0 4
DAU 208 0 16
ADU 204, ADU 205 10 0
ADU 206,ADU 216 10 1
ADU 210 10 4
ADU 214 18 8

Max permissible "D Out" data volume in respect to "D In" data volume.
Data In Data volume Sums (Bytes) Max Data Out Volume Sums (Bytes)
241...244 144
233...240 152
225...232 160
217...224 168
209...216 176
0...208 184

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 173

AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Subtrack Enter system relevant power supply information in the label inlay.Noise immunity
Mounting Slot can be improved when by–pass capacitors are installed at the power supply module
U and M terminals.

Power Supply
Connection
CAUTION

The module’s integrated power supply is non–isolated. Improper

connection, e.g. absence of the M2 connection, can lead to module
destruction.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Enter system relevant power supply information in the label inlay. Noise immunity
can be improved when by–pass capacitors are installed at the power supply module
U and M terminals.

UB (24 VDC)
M2

1.25 A medium
time-lag fuse

174 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Profibus The PROFIBUS port utilizes varied Sub–D9 plug connectors:

Connection l 490 NAD 911 02 for transmission rates up to 12 Mbps.
l PBS1 for transmission rates up to 500kbps.
The individual installation steps are to be carried out in adherence with the
accompanying user documentation.

Pin Signal Function

3 RxD/TxD-P Receive/transmit data (+)

5 DGND Signal ground
6 VP +5 VDC supply
8 RxD/TxD-N Receive/transmit data negated (-)

Pin occupied
N/C

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 175

AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Features and Functions

Overview The AS–BDEA 203 is a PROFIBUS–DP coupling module adhering to DIN 19 245
Parts 1 and 3 with integrated (non–isolated) power supply. It is used to drive the
remote I/O modules of the Modicon TSX Compact family. It provides a 5 VDC supply
at 1.6 A for the modules on the parallel I/O bus.
The AS–BDEA 203 can address a maximum of 18 I/O modules (288 I/Os) via the
subracks DTA 200, DTA 201 or DTA 202. With the exception of intelligent modules,
all analog and discrete Compact I/O modules can be employed. When analog
modules are utilized, there is a particular total data volume which may not be
exceeded.
The device master data file from the 381 SWA 000 00 diskette must be utilized for
AS-BDEA 203 configuration.

176 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Features l Standardized, isolated PROFIBUS Port

l Transmission rates of up to 12 Mbps
l Automatic adaptation to master transmission rate setting
l Slave address adjustment per rotary switch
l DIP switch adjustment of disconnection behavior

Functional The AS–BDEA 203 serves as the coupling element between the PROFIBUS–DP
Details and the internal I/O bus.
The set disconnection behavior is activated by watchdog when PROFIBUS
communication is interrupted longer then the supervision time set by the master.
The AS–BDEA 203 collects messages from the associated modules and reports
these further to the master as diagnostic information.

Profibus-DP

Sub-D9
Identcode
Slave Address RS-485
DC-DC Converter
Mode switch
+5 VDC +5 VDC

Interfac
SPC3 48 MHz
Clock

INT

Address
12 MHz Decoder
Clock 24 KB
RAM

80C152 Data Bus

Micro-
controller
CPU
A8...A15
64 KB
Address Bus EPROM

A0...A7

I/O Bus ASIC

+5 VDC Power
Supply
24 VDC
+5 VDC

I/O Bus

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 177

AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Diagnosis

Overview The module front plate contains the following displays:

No Label Inlay Color Function

Identifier
18 (left) U Green 24 VDC supply prsent
19 (left) ready 5V Green module ready for service, 5VDC output voltage present
3 (right) ready Green Coupler ready
4 (right) BF Red Bus coupling faulty (bus failure), Probable cause: The
AS–BDEA is not parameterized and in-itialized, the
PROFIBUS–DP protocol is not running

178 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Technical Specifications

AS-BDEA 203 Assignment

System TSX Compact (A120, 984)
Module Area Slot 0 of DTA 200 primary backplane
Identicode Hex A203, entry through the device master data file type 381 SWA 000 00

Power Supply
External input voltage UB = 24 VDC, max. 0.85 A
Primary fusing 1.25 A medium time–lag fuse
Power on current 20 A, time constant = 1 ms
Tolerances, limiting values Refer to the TSX Compact User Manual, "Technical
Specifications"
Reference potential M M2
Protective earth PE
Secondary voltage 5.15 VDC, max. 1.6 A, non–isolated
Buffering time Typically 5 ms for 24 VDC
Overload protection Through current limiting

Data Interface
Profibus-DP Through a potential–free RS–485 interface up to 12 Mbps
Pin assignments Refer to PROFIBUS Connection Figure
Back plane Parallel I/O bus, refer to TSX Compact User Manual, "Technical
Specifications"

Processor
Processor type Intel 80C152 / 12 MHz
Data memory 32 KB RAM
Firmware 64 KB EPROM

Mechanical Design
Module Standard double–size module
Format 3 HE, 16 T
Weight Approx. 500 g

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 179

AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Connection Styles
Power Supply 5–pole screw/plug–in terminal block
Profibus Sub–D9 socket, matching to 490 NAD 911
Back plane 2 plug connectors 1/3 C30M, 1 socket connector 1/3 R30F

Environmental Characteristics
Regulations Meets VDE 0160, UL 508
System data Refer to TSX Compact User Manual,
"Technical Specifica-tions"
Permissible ambient temperatures 0 ... +60 degrees C.
Power dissipation Typically 6 W

180 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

Profibus- DP Specifications for the AS-BDEA 203 on the Profibus-DP.

Transmission Specifications
Nodes per bus Max. 32
Bus lengths, l max 1.2 km at 9.6 kbps or at 19.2 Kbps or at 93.75 Kbs
transmission rates l max 1 km at 187.5 Kbps
l max 0.5 km at 500 Kbps
l max 0.2 r at 1.5 Kbps
l max 0.1 km at 3 Mbps or at 6 Mbps or at 12 Mbps rigid
Bulk transmission media Shielded twisted pair (S–UTP)KAP PROFIB, PROFIBUS cable up
to 12 Mbps, rigid
Connection interface Adhering to EIA RS–485
Cable termination As per Norm 390 / 220 / 390 W
Stub cabling None
Data security Hamming distance, HD = 4

Bus Specifications
Node type Slave
Node Addresses 1...99

Operation
DP Bus Output reference 0x (Boolean, packed
Byte Output Output Reference 4x (Integer8, unpacked; Unsigned8, un-packed;RAW,
packed e.g. ASCII)
DP Bus Input Reference 1x (Boolean, packed)
Byte Input Input Reference 3x (Integer8, unpacked; Unsigned8, un-packed; RAW, packed
e.g. ASCII)
Bus Word Output Reference 0x (Boolean)
Output Output Reference 4x (Integer16 = Unsigned16 = RAW)
Bus Word Input Reference 1x (Boolean)
Input Input Reference 3x (Integer16 = Unsigned16 = RAW)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 181

AS-BDEA 203 Profibus -DP

182 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S
Master Module

At a Glance

Introduction The information in this chapter describes the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S
Master Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What Is the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module? 184
Physical Characteristics of the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master 185
Module
Switch Settings for the BKF 201 188
Installation of the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) Interbus Master Module 189
Operation of the BKF 201 Master Module: I/O Map 191
Example of Hardware and I/O Mapping for the BKF 201 198
Specifications 199

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 183

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

What Is the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module?

Brief Product The BKF 201 links the Compact PLC and the Remote bus nodes. The following lists
Description describes the key features of the BKF 201:
l Up to 63 3x input register and 63 4x output register data words can be addressed
for a total of 126 TIOs (63 input TIOs and 63 output TIOs), with 16 Bits each
within an Interbus frame
l Supports up to 15 BKF 201 modules in the BKF 201 (16) (Ident Code 92) mode
or up to 3 BKF 201 modules in the BKF 201 (64) (Indent Code 93) mode
l Use and Programming for the BKF 201 is done via the RS 232C-port of the PLC,
therefore saving a port on the BKF 201
l All outputs are automatically set to 0 (zero) upon detection of configuration errors
or other bus problems
l A restart can be performed manually or automatically after error correction
l Changes to the Interbus S configuration are easy (Fast "Plug and Play")
l Monitoring of the module using a watchdog function
l Mode settings using two DIP switches
l The Interbus S status is shown via the modules LEDs
Interbus loop nodes are not supported.
Modules with Peripheral Communication Protocol (PCP) Channel (1, 2, and 4 PCP
words within the Interbus loop) can be used in the BKF 201. However, the BKF 201
does not support the PCP Channel.

Note: Interbus loop nodes are not supported.

Note: Modbus with Peripheral Communication Protocol (PCP) Channel (1, 2, and
4 PCP words within the Interbus loop) can be used in the BKF 201. However, the
BKF 201 does not support the PCP Channel.

184 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Physical Characteristics of the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Overview The following information describes the physical characteristics of the BKF 201.

Front View and The following figure shows the front view of the BKF 201 and the label.
Label

BKF 201
BKF 201
ready

InterBus-S IBS ready

remote bus IBS run
IBS error
module error
config. error

error 1
error 2
error 4
error 8
error 10
error 20
error 40
error 80

card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 185

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

LEDs The following table describes the BKF 201 LED displays.
LED # LED Name Color Function
1 ready Green Module ready for service
3 IBS ready Green Interbus ready for service
4 IBS run Green Interbus transmission active
5 IBS error Red Interbus transmission error
6 Module Red Module error (on Interbus slave device)
error
7 config. Red The configuration changed during operation, or an error
error occurred during loading of the configuration.
14 error 1 Red Displays the physical number of the Interbus node with
15 error 2 error condition (BCD, Node # = sum of error numbers
16 error 4 displayed).* See also, the Front View and Label, p. 185.
17 error 8 No display: Neither error nor node number can be found.
18 error 10
19 error 20
20 error 40
21 error 80

Note: *For example, if device#6 (node#6) has a error condition LED#15 (error 2)
and LED#16 (error 4) turn red. Add the two together (error 2 + error 4= 6). This
indicates that the error condition pertains to device#6 (node#6).

186 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Block Diagram of The following figure describes the architecture of the BKF 201.
the BKF 201
Compact PLC
CPU

Compact I/O Bus

Dual-Post-
RAM 1 KB
32KB

EPROM Controller
64 KB 80C320<

LED status displays,

DIPs
RS-485

InterBus-S (remote bus)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 187

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Switch Settings for the BKF 201

Operating Mode The following figure shows the DIP Switch Settings for the operating mode. The
switches are located on the rear of the BKF 201.

S0
S1
OFF ON

DIP Switch Setting for S0 and S1:

Ident- 3x Input 4x Output Programming

OFF ON Code Module words words with
S0
99 reserved reserved reserved reserved
S1

S0 92 BKF201(16) 1 3x status word & 1 4x control word & Concept 2.1 and higher
S1 15 3x data words 15 4x data words

S0
93 BKF201(64) 1 3x status word & 1 4x control word & Concept 2.1 and higher
S1
63 3x data words 63 4x data words

S0 not used (default settings for field testing by manufacturer only)

S1

188 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Installation of the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) Interbus Master Module

Overview The following information describes how to install the BKF 201.

Operating Mode If the operating mode for the BKF 201 module is set to BKF 201 (16) (Indent Code
92), the module can reside in any I/O slot in any backplane (DTA 201 or DTA 202).
In contrast, if the operating mode for the BKF 201 module is set to BKF 201 (64)
(Indent Code 93), the module can reside only in an I/O slot in the primary backplane
(DTA 200).

Interbus Refer to the Interbus S Quantum 140 NOA 611 00 User Manual (P/N 840 USE 419
Connection 00).
The following diagram shows the pin assignments as viewed from the solder side.
Interbus
remote bus

5
9
4
8 Pin present
3
7 No pin present
2
6
1

The following table shows the pinout assignments.

Socket Signal Function
1 DO Transmit data (+)
2 DI Receive data (+)
3 GND Reference ground
5 5 V Out For Fiber Optic Interface
6 DO Transmit data (-)
7 DI Receive data (-)

Note: When using branch interfaces, it is not possible to group and to handle errors (that is,
turning off the branch in case of error).
For example, a branch interface is useful when using a fiber-optic interface because most
slaves do not provide power for this type of interface. Additionally, a branch interface is
required to connect slaves to peripheral buses, or to install remote buses.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 189

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Hardware The following figure illustrates an example BKF 201 hardware layout showing
Configuration of nodes.
the BKF 201
BKF 201
Remote bus

170 BAM 096 00

170 BAM 096 00
170 BAM 096 00 Node # 1
170 BAM 096 00

.....
Remote bus

remote bus branch remote bus branch

Remote bus

Node # 2 Node # 3 Node # 4 Node # 5

DEA 202

Node # 6 (DEA Station)

BKI 601 DEP 608 DAP 608

Remote bus

Installation Installation
remote bus remote bus
Node # 7 Node # 8 Node # 9
Remote bus

DAP 664
DAP 654 Node # 10
DAP 664

190 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Operation of the BKF 201 Master Module: I/O Map

BKF 201(16) The BKF 201(16) (Ident Code 92) module requires a total of 16 3x input registers
Operating Mode and a total of 16 4x output registers. The first 3x input register is the Status Word
and the following 3x input registers are Data Words starting with 3x+1 and ending
with 3x+15. The first 4x output register is the Control Word and the following 4x
output registers are Data Words starting with 4x+1 and ending with 4x+15. Refer to
the other information in this map.

BKF 201(64) The BKF 201(64) (Ident Code 93) module requires a total of 64 3x input registers
Operating Mode and a total of 64 4x output registers. The first 3x input register is the Status Word
and the following 3x input registers are Data Words starting with 3x+1 and ending
with 3x+63. The first 4x output register is the Control Word and the following 4x
output registers are Data Words starting with 4x+1 and ending with 4x+63. Refer to
the other information in this map.

3x Input The following table describes the 3x Input Registers (1 3x Status Word & Up to 15
Registers 3x Data Words) or (1 3x Status Word & Up to 63 3x Data Words).
State RAM Bit 15-8 Bit 7-5 Bit 4-0
3xxxxx Config. Checksum; see 3x 0 Status; see 3x Configuration
(Status Word) Configuration Checksum Byte not used Checksum Byte Structure
Structure (High Byte), p. 192 (High Byte), p. 192
3xxxxx +1 Process data - Input word 1
3xxxxx +2 Process data - Input word 2
3xxxxx +3 Process data - Input word 3
3xxxxx +4 Process data - Input word 4
: :
3xxxxx + Process data - Input word 15 BKF201 (16) mode
15BKF201 (16)
: :
3xxxxx + Process data - Input word 63 BKF201 (64) mode
15BKF201 (64)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 191

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

3x Configuration The following table describes the 3x Status Word, High Byte for Configuration
Checksum Byte Checksum Error #. For information about the meanings of the LEDs, see LEDs,
Structure p. 186.
(High Byte)
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Function
15 14 13 12
8 4 2 1 Decimal value of block 1 (max.
9), same meaning as LEDs #14
... #17
80 40 20 10 Decimal value of block 2 (max.
90), same meaning as LEDs
#18 ... #21

Note: For example, if device#6 (node#6) has a error condition, LED#15 (error 2)
and LED#16 (error 4) turn red. Add the two together (error 2 + error 4= 6). This
indicates that the error condition pertains to device#6 (node#6).

192 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

3x Status Byte The following table describes the 3x Status Word, Low Byte for Status. For
Structure information about the meanings of the LEDs, see LEDs, p. 186.
(Low Byte)
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Function
1 "IBS ready"
(same meaning as LED#3) Interbus ready to use (no "IBS
error" or "config. error")
1 "IBS run"
(same meaning as LED#4) Process data exchange on the
Interbus
1 "IBS error"
(same meaning as LED#5)A bus error occurred. Possible
causes: Broken cable, short circuit, a node lost power, data
transfer was interrupted. In case of a permanent
interruption, the BKF will trace the node, which was
interrupted.
1 "Module error"
(same meaning as LED#6) Module error of a node (slave).
Current error does not stop the Interbus.
1 "config. error"
(same meaning as LED#7) Interbus configuration error.
Possible causes: The configuration could not be determined
after power-on of the BKF 201 (node not ready for
operation, cabling wrong, etc.) The configuration was
changed during operation. An example would be the
removal of a node. The standard configuration checksum
does not concur with the actual configuration checksum,
when Bit 6 was set in the control byte.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 193

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

4x Output The following table describes the4x Output Registers (1 4x Control Word and up to
Registers 15 4x or (1 4x Control Word & up to 63 4x Data Words).
State RAM Bit 15-8 Bit 7-0
4xxxxx (Control Word) Config. Checksum; see 4x Control Status; see 4x Control Byte
Byte Structure (Low Byte), p. 195 Structure (Low Byte), p. 195
4xxxxx +1 Process data - Input word 1
4xxxxx +2 Process data - Input word 2
4xxxxx +3 Process data - Input word 3
4xxxxx +4 Process data - Input word 4
: :
4xxxxx + 15 BKF201 (16) Process data - Input word 15 BKF201 (16) mode
: :
: :
4xxxxx + 63 BKF201 (64) Process data - Input word 63 BKF201 (64) mode

4x Standard The following table describes the 4x Control Word, High Byte for Configuration
Configuration Checksum.
Checksum Byte
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Function
Structure
(High Byte) x x x x x x x x Enter your bus configuration
checksum returned by the BKF
201 upon initialization into this
register and set Bit 6 =1 (check
config.) in (4x control word low
byte) to compare configuration
input (3x status config. check
sum, high byte) to (4x control
word low byte check sum).
When they do not match Bit 4
(config. error) results in (3x
status low byte).

194 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

4x Control Byte The following table shows the 4X Control Word, Low Byte for Control.
Structure
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Function
(Low Byte)
0 Not used
1 "alarm-stop"
Setting Bit 1 stops the Interbus
immediately, and all outputs are set to
zero. While this Bit is set, all other control
bits have no effect. Inputs are held in last
state.
1 "start-cycle"
Starts the data transfer to the nodes. If
the bit is cleared, no more data cycles
are performed through the BKF master,
and the outputs of the nodes are
"frozen", meaning that the input
information will stay resident in the signal
memory. If alarm-stop Bit1=1, then the
bus stops and all outputs are turned off.
1 "quit-error"
Confirms errors occurred ("IBS error",
"module error", "config. error"). Setting
this bit permanently results in immediate
error acknowledgment. Therefore, it
should not be used during normal
operation. When an error occurs and the
network problem is corrected, this bit
needs to be set to confirm and clear the
error condition. If alarm-stop Bit1=1,
then quit-error is not active.
0 Not used
1 1 "get-configuration"
Determine new Interbus configuration.
This is useful, if for example a node is
removed/added to the Bus, meaning Bit
4 of status byte (config. error) = 1. When
checking for a new configuration, all
other bits must be = 0, except you must
set Bit 3=1.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 195

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Function

1 "check-configuration"
When Bit 6 is set, the BKF compares the
checksum of the 4x control high byte and
the standard configuration (3x status
word, high byte checksum). In case of
no match, the INTERBUS is stopped and
Bit 4 (config. error) is set in the (3x status
word, low byte for status). Make sure,
the standard configuration checksum
was entered into the (4x control word,
high byte for standard config. checksum)
prior to setting bit 6(check-config). The
checksum is determined by reading the
checksum of the actual configuration in
the (3x status word, high byte
checksum).
1 "show-configuration"
Display of: Number of Interbus nodes,
total number of Input/Output words,
Identcode and the number of the
process data words of the nodes in the
signal memory (3x data words, up to 15
for BKF202(16) (Ident code 92), and up
to 63 for BKF202(64) (ident code 93)).
NOTE: All other bits must be=0.

196 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Show The following table is an example using the show configuration feature. This function
Configuration is available only if the 4x control word bits are set as follows: Bit 7=1 (show
configuration), Bit 1=0 (alarm-stop), Bit 2=0 (start-cycle)
State RAM Bit 15-8 Bit 7-5 Bit 4-0
3xxxxx Config. Checksum; see 3x Status 0 Status; see 3x Status Byte
(Status Word) Byte Structure (Low Byte), p. 193 (not used) Structure (Low Byte), p. 193
3xxxxx +1 0 Number of IBS nodes
(slaves)
3xxxxx +2 Number of process 3x input data Number of process 4x input
words data words
3xxxxx +3 Number of process data words of Ident code of slave 1
slave 1
3xxxxx +4 Number of process data words of Ident code of slave 2
slave 2
3xxxxx + Number of process data words of Ident code of slave 13
15BKF201 slave 13
(16)
3xxxxx + Number of process data words of Ident code of slave 61
15BKF201 slave 61
(64)

Note: The number of process data words also includes the Peripheral
Communication Protocol (PCP) communication words, if slaves with PCP Channel
are used. Unlike other Interbus masters, these PCP communication words are also
reflected in the signal memory.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 197

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Example of Hardware and I/O Mapping for the BKF 201

BKF 201 Module This is an example of how to use three TIO modules as nodes off the BKF 201
Using TIO module. Notice the correlation between the hardware and I/O mapping structure
Modules as shown in the tables that follow the figure.
Nodes
BKF 201
Remote bus

Node # 1 Node # 2 Node # 3

In / Out (16 Bit each) Out(16 Bit) In (16 Bit)

The following tables show the data structure of the 3x input registers and 4x output
registers, as well as the hardware configuration for the three TIO devices/nodes
shown in the figure.
The following table describes the 3x Input I/O Mapping Presentation.
Config. -checksum Status byte
Inputs 1 ... 16 of node 1
Inputs 1 ... 16 of node 3

The following table describes the 4x Output I/O Mapping Presentation.

Stand. config. -checksum Control byte
Outputs 1 ... 16 of node 1
Outputs 1 ... 16 of node 2

198 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

Specifications

Specifications The following table lists specifications for the BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S
Master Module.
Power supply
Internally through I/O-Bus 5VDC I/O Bus, 190mA typically, 250mA max.
(w/o fiber-optic Interface)
Data Interface
Field bus as RS 485 port, non-isolated (150Ohm)
Processor
Processor type Dallas 80C320 / 32 MHz
Data memory 32KB RAM
Firmware 64KB EPROM
I/O Map
Register 3x/4x 16 in/16 out BKF-201 (16W)
64 in/64 out BKF-201 (64W)
Physical Structure
Module Standard-size module
Format I Slot
Weight 210 g
Type of Connection
Remote bus Sub-D9 socket (9 pins)
Backplane Plug connector1/3 C30M
Environmental Characteristics
Regulations VDE 0160, UL 508
Power dissipation 1.3W max., typically 1W

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 199

BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S Master Module

200 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

At a Glance

Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to describe the BKF 202 InterBus S slave Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What Is the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module? 202
Physical Characteristics of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module 203
Switch Settings for the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module 205
Installation of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module 206
Operation of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module 209
Specifications of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module 212

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 201

BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

What Is the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module?

Brief Product The BKF 202 links the Compact PLC and the Remote Bus nodes. The following list
Description describes the key features of the BKF 201:
l Up to 15 3x input register and up to 15 4x output register data words can be
exchanged with an Interbus S master.
l Monitoring of the module using a watchdog function.
l Mode settings using a rotary switch and two DIP switches.
l The Interbus S status is shown via the module’s LEDs.
l Supports up to 15 BKF 202 modules in the BKF 202 (Indent Code 94) mode.

Note: The BKF 202 module does not support Peripheral Communication Protocol
(PCP) channels.

202 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Physical Characteristics of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Overview The following information describes the physical characteristics of the BKF 202.

Front View and The following figure shows the front view of the BKF 202 and the label.
Label

BKF 202
BKF 202
ready

INTERBUS BA
IN RC
RD

OUT

card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 203

BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

LED Displays The following table describes the LED displays for the BKF 202.
LED # LED Color Function
Name
1 READY Green Operating mode
on: Current power for internal logic within the allowable range
and the module has not been reset to mode
off: Current power missing or outside of the allowable range, or
module has been reset
3 BA Green bus active
on: Data telegrams are transmitted
off: Data telegrams are not transmitted
4 RC Green Remote Bus Check
on: incoming remote bus connection is correct and the Bus
Reset of the Busmaster is inactive
off. incoming remote bus connection is wrong/not corrected or
the Bus Reset of the Bus Reset of the Busmaster is active
5 RD Red Remote Bus Disabled
on: Extended remote bus is switched off
off: Extended remote bus is not turned off

Block Diagram of The following block diagram provides an overview of the BKF 202 architecture.
the BKF 202
Compact PLC

Compact I/O Bus

Dual-Port-
RAM 2 KB
32 KB

EPROM Controller SmPI SRE SRE

64KB 80C32

LEDs,
DIPs RS-485 RS-485

IN Out
InterBus-S (remote bus)

204 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Switch Settings for the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Operating Mode The following figure shows the Rotary Switch settings and the Dip Switch settings
for the operating mode. The switches are located on the rear of the BKF 202.

56 Rotary Switch Settings for S2:

2 34
Switch position Number of words

78
9 1 S2
0 1 2 words
2 4 words
S2
S0
S0 3 6 words
S1 S1 4 8 words
5 10 words
6 12 words
7 14 words
8 16 words (15 data words)
9 not used
0 not used

DIP Switch Setting for S0 and S1:

Ident- 3x Input 4x Output Programming
OFF ON Code Module words words with
S0 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved
S1

S0 94 BKF202 1 3x status word & 1 4x control word & Concept 2.1 and higher
S1 15 3x data words 15 4x data words

S0
S1 reserved

S0
not used (default settings for field testing by manufacturer only)
S1

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 205

BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Installation of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Overview The following information describes how to install the BKF 202.

Interbus The BKF 202 modules located at the inline sites on the Interbus remote bus cable
Connection have two connections. One connection is for the incoming bus cable; the other is for
the outgoing bus cable. BKF 202 modules located at the end sites on the network
cable have only one connection. This is for the incoming bus cable.
You should have a complete cabling diagram for your network installation, showing
the cable routing path and methods of securing the cables. It should identify
incoming and outgoing cables at each BKF 202 module site.

Pin Placements The following figure shows the pin placements as viewed from the solder side.

Pin Signal Meaning

1 5 1 DO Transmit data (+)

6 9 2 DI Transmit data (+)
2 4
7 8 3,4 GND reference ground
3 3 5,8 (5 V Out) for Opto. Sub.
8 7 6 DO Transmit data (-)
4 2 7 DI Receive data (-)
9 6 9* RBST Plug identifier
5 1
*) incoming remote bus = not used
Sub-D9 Port Sub-D9 Port
“in” (top) “out” (bottom) Pin present
No pin present

206 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Cabling Modicon provides two prefabricated Interbus cables (170 MCI 101 00, 1m, 39
inches) and (170 MCI 007 00, 11.5cm, 4.5 inches). Each cable has two connectors
for direct interconnection between two modules. Modicon also provides a connector
kit (170 XTS 009 00) for use with user supplied cables. The kit contains one pin and
one socket connector.
Please note the following general requirements.
l The maximum remote bus cable length is 13 km (8mi.). The cable length between
two remote bus nodes must not exceed 400 m (1200 ft).
l The connectors for the outgoing bus are always pins, those for the incoming
remote bus are always sockets.
l Connect the cable shield to the connector.
l You need a 5 wire cable, twisted pair type, shielded cable for the remote bus. We
recommend a Belden 8103 cable or equivalen; this cable is available by the
meter (KAB 3225 LI).
Wire the connectors of the remote bus cable as shown in the following figure.

Outgoing Remote Bus (pins) Incoming Remote Bus (sockets)

1 1
6 6
2 2
7 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
5 5

The following tables show the pinouts for the Interbus cable construction. The
information in the first table describes pinouts for an outgoing remote bus
connection; the second table describes the pinouts for an incoming remote bus
connection.
Pin Wire Color Connection outgoing remote bus
1 yellow DO: Data Out
2 grey DI: Data In
3 brown Common
4 GND: Reference conductor, fiber optic adapter
5 Vcc: Power supply for fiber optic adapter.
6 green DO_N: Data Out Negated
7 pink DI_N: Data In Negated
8 Vcc: Additional power supply for fiber optic adapter
9 Plug identification

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 207

BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Pin Wire Color Connection incoming remote bus

1 yellow DO: Data Out
2 grey DI: Data In
3 brown Common*
4 GND*: Reference conductor, fiber optic adapter
5 Vcc*: Power supply for fiber optic adapter.
6 green DO_N: Data Out Negated
7 pink DI_N: Data In Negated
8 Vcc*: Additional power supply for fiber optic adapter
9 (not used)
* = physically isolated

Hardware The following figure illustrates an example BKF 202 hardware layout showing
Configuration of nodes.
the BKF 202
BKF 201
or other PLC & Interbus S masters
Remote bus

BKF202

CPU

Substation with additional expansion racks

Remote bus

Peripheral devices from third parties (remote bus devices)

208 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Operation of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

I/O Map The BKF 202 module requires a total of 16 3x input registers and a total of 16 4x
output registers. The first 3x input register is the Status Word, and the following 3x
input registers are Data Words starting with 3x+1 and ending with 3x+15. The first
4x output register is the Control Word, and the following 4x output registers are Data
Words starting with 4x+1 and ending with 4x+15. Refer to the other information in
this map.

3x Input The following table describes the 3x Input Registers (1 3x Status Word & Up to 15
Registers 3x Data Words) or (1 3x Status Word & Up to 63 3x Data Words).
State RAM Bit 8-15 Bit 7-4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
3xxxxx Number of words; 0 RD RC BA
(Status Word) see Front View and (not used) For more information, see 3x Status
Label, p. 203 Word Byte Structure, p. 209
3xxxxx +1 Process data - Input word 1
3xxxxx +2 Process data - Input word 2
3xxxxx +3 Process data - Input word 3
3xxxxx +4 Process data - Input word 4
: :
3xxxxx + 15 Process data - Input word 15

3x Status Word The following table describes the 3x Status Word Byte Structure.
Byte Structure
State RAM Bit 7-4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Function
3xxxxx 0 1 BA; see LED Displays, p. 204
(Status Word) (not used)
1 RC; seeseeLED Displays, p. 204
1 RD; see seeLED Displays, p. 204

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 209

BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

4x Output The following table describes the4x Output Registers (1 4x Control Word & Up to 15
Registers 4x or (1 4x Control Word & Up to 63 4x Data Words)
State RAM Bit 15 : Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
4xxxxx - PLC-Stop Module Faults Module Error)
(Control Word) See 4x Control Word Byte Structure, p. 210
4xxxxx +1 Process data - Output word 1
4xxxxx +2 Process data - Output word 2
4xxxxx +3 Process data - Output word 3
4xxxxx +4 Process data - Output word 4
: :
4xxxxx +15 Process data - Output word 15

4x Control Word The following table shows the 4x Control Word Byte Structure.
Byte Structure
State RAM Bit 15-2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Function
4xxxxx (not 1 Module Error
(Control Word) used) Setting Bit 0 transmits a "Module-Error" to the
Interbus master.
1 PLC-Stop Module Faults:
Setting of Bit 1 transmits a "Module-Error" to
the Interbus master, when the PLC is stopped.

210 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Interbus Bi- The following figure shows the process data exchange between the PLC and the
Directional Interbus.
Communication E984 PLC - OUT BKF 202 - IN
between the
E984 PLC and Check word (4x)
the BKF 202 IBS Data word 1 (4x+1) 1
Slave Module
2 2

Data word 15 (4x+15) 15

0 16

E984 PLC-IN BKF 202-OUT

Status word (3x)

Data word 1 (3x+1) 1

2 2

Data word 15 (3x+15) 15

16

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 211

BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Specifications of the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module

Specifications The following table lists specifications for the BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module.
Power supply
Internally from I/O-Bus 5VDC, 300 mA max. (w/o fiber-optic Interface)
Data Interface
Field bus as RS 485 Interface
remote in: potentialfree 150 Ohm
remote out: potentialbound 150 Ohm
Processor
Processor type 80C32 16 MHz
Data memory 32KB RAM
Firmware 64KB EPROM
I/O Map
Register 3x/4x 16 in/16 out
Physical Characteristics
Module in standard-size case
Format I Slot
Weight 250 g
Type of Connection
Remote bus 9-pin DSUB socket/connector bar
Backplane Connector bar 1/3 C30M
Environmental Characteristics
Regulations VDE 0160, UL 508
Permissible ambient temperature 0 ... +60 degrees C.
Power dissipation max. 1.5W
Option Fiber-optic adapter

212 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAO 216 discrete output module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAO 216 Discrete Output Module? 214
DAO 216 Discrete Output Module Physical Characteristics 215
Protecting the DAO 216 Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back EMF 218
DAO 216 Discrete Output Module Specifications 219

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 213

DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

What is the DAO 216 Discrete Output Module?

DAO 216
Discrete Output
WARNING
Module
Operational Hazard
The DAO 216 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

The DAO 216 is a discrete output module with 16 independent 24 Vdc output
circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves, solenoids and other
similar loads. The module is structured in one group of 16 outputs. The outputs are
not isolated.
The DAO 216 can be installed in any slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201, and
202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and field connections on the front.
The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be filled in with relevant
information (signal values, etc.) in the spaces provided. Refer to the diagram in
LEDs, p. 215

214 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

DAO 216 Discrete Output Module Physical Characteristics

LEDs The DAO 216 has 17 LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw #1 indicates
presence of external working voltage to the 16 outputs (ON = voltage available; OFF
= voltage not available). There are 16 red LEDs opposite terminal screws 3 ... 10
and 14 ... 21, indicating when ON that 24 Vdc is present at the adjacent discrete
output.
Front View and Fill-in Label of the DAO 216 Module

DAO 216
DAO 216
1 U
2 input
3 1
4 2
5 3
6 4
7 5
8 6
9 7
10 8
11 M
U
12
13
9
14
15 10
11
16
17 12
18 13
19 14

20 15
21 16
22 M
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 215

DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

Simplified Simplified Schematic for the DAO 216 Output Module

Schematic
24 VDC I/O Bus
Interface
24 V Common
Red
1 LED
2
Out1 3 Output
Out2 4 Driver
5 D-Flop/8
Out3
Out4 6
Out5 7
Out6 8 15 V
Out7 9
Out8 10
11
12
13
Out9 14 *Terminal 11 should be
Out10 15 connected in the shortest pos-
sible way to the functional
Out11 16 ground. In case of connection
Out12 17 failure compensating currents
Out13 18 can occur via M2>0V path, that
Out14 19 leads to the destruction of the
Out15 20 protective resistor.
Green
Out16 21
LED
22

216 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

Wiring Diagram Wiring the DAO 216

24 Vdc
GND

4A

1
2
3
A1
4
5
6
7
8
9
A8
10
11

12
13
14
A9
15
16

18

20
A16

22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 217

DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

Protecting the DAO 216 Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions If you have inductive loads on longer lines with logic elements located in the output
loads, it is essential to install an external clamping diode in parallel with the
operating coil to protect the module from reverse EMF.

Clamping Diode Clamping Diode on an Inductive Load

1
Clamping Diode 2
Inductive 3
dc Load 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

218 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

DAO 216 Discrete Output Module Specifications

DAO 216 The following table contains a list of DAO 216 specifications
Specifications
Module Number of Outputs 16
Topology Number of Groups 1
Points/Group 16
Isolation No isolation provided
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 24 Vdc (20 to 30 Vdc), 5 A @30 Vdc
Internally Provided Source 5 V from I/O bus, 30 mA max.
Internal Power Dissipation 5 W (typical)
Electrical Operating Mode True High
Characteristics ON State Signal Level Source voltage minus 3 V
OFF State Signal Level 0 ... +2 V, less than 1mA
Load Current/Output 10 mA ... 500 mA
Max Load Current/Module 4A
Response Time less than 1 msec.
Reverse-EMF Protection Built-in circuitry limits inductive spikes to a
maximum of -15 V
Switch Capacity for Bulbs Max. 5 W (Surge current = Nor mal current
x 10)
OFF-ON Operations 1000/hour for inductive load @ maximum
load current
Wire Size/Terminal One wire = 14 AWG
Two wires = 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/16 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 250 g (.55 lb)
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 Stan dards
Approval

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 219

DAO 216 Discrete Output Module

220 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 204 Relay
Output Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 204 Relay Output Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 204 Relay Output Module? 222
DAP 204 Relay Output Module LEDs 223
DAP 204 Relay Output Module Field Wiring 224
Protecting the DAP 204 Relay Output Module from Inductive Back EMF 225
DAP 204 Relay Output Module Specifications 227

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 221

DAP 204 Relay Output Module

What is the DAP 204 Relay Output Module?

Brief Product The DAP 204 is a four point relay output module. It utilizes logic signals within the
Description PLC to activate four independent, individually isolated, normally open relay
contacts. Source voltage for any output load may be 24 ... 154 Vdc or 24 ... 250 Vac.
Wiring Diagram and Simplified Schematic for the DAP 204 Output Module
24 VDC
Green
24 V Common LED I/O Bus
Interface
0.16A

1
2
3
4
V
5 Red
Load1 6 LED
7
8 Relay
V Driver
9
Load2 10
Opto-Coupler
11
12
13
14
15
V
16
Load3 17
18
19
V 20
21
Load4
22

222 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 204 Relay Output Module

DAP 204 Relay Output Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 204 has five LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw 1 indicates
the presence of relay coil voltage when ON. Four red LEDs opposite terminal
screws 3, 7, 14, and 18 indicate when ON that the relay coils are energized at
outputs 1 ... 4, respectively, and suggest that the contacts are closed and the loads
energized. These LEDs are in parallel with the relay coils, not the load.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 223

DAP 204 Relay Output Module

DAP 204 Relay Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction Field wiring to each output connects to a double screw terminal. This module
requires power from an external 24 Vdc source to support the relay driver (even if
all the outputs switch ac power).

DAP 204 Relay A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAP 204 relay output module is
Output Module provided below.
24 VDC
Green
24 V Common LED I/O Bus
Interface
0.16A

1
2
3
4
V
5 Red
Load1 6 LED
7
8 Relay
V Driver
9
Load2 10
Opto-Coupler
11
12
13
14
15
V
16
Load3 17
18
19
V 20
Load4 21
22

224 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 204 Relay Output Module

Protecting the DAP 204 Relay Output Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions In order to increase the service life of your contacts and protect the DAP 204 module
from potential reverse-EMF damage, externally connect a clamping diode in parallel
with each inductive dc load and externally connect an RC snubber circuit in parallel
with each inductive ac load.

Illustration of The following illustration is an example of clamping diode and snubber circuit on
Clamping Diode inductive loads.
and Snubber
Circuit − + 1
2
24 V
3
4
Clamping Diode 5
Inductive 6
DC Load 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
R C
230 V 15
16
Inductive 17
AC Load 18
19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 225

DAP 204 Relay Output Module

Suggested The clamping diode forward current rating must be equal to or greater than load
Component current. Diode PIV rating must be three or four times greater than supply voltage at
Values 24 Vdc and 8 ... 10 times greater than supply voltage at 110 Vdc. The unpolarized
(ac) snubber capacitor should have a voltage rating two or three times greater than
the supply voltage.
Values may be:
25 ... 70 mH .50 microF
70 ... 180 mH .25 microF
180 mH .10 microF

Snubber resistors may be 1 ... 3 ohms, 2 W. Resistor values should be increased

up to 47 ohms, 1/2 W for RL exceeding 100 ohms.
Operational range options are shown in the following diagram.

A +Vcc = 140 Vdc Calculations:

BDAP Contact Given: Vcc = 140Vdc
I (Max) = .15 A
Load 1K ohm (Min) 20 Henries (Max) Then: R(L)(Min) = 140/.15 = 1Kohm
Since L/R = .02 Sec, and R = 1Kohm
Then L(Max) = (.02) X 1000 = 20H

Voltage rating of diode = 1.5 X Vcc

B Current rating of diode = 2 X I (Max)
Must be “slow,” rectifier, vs logic
Suppression Diode (1N4003)

C RCL
RCL = Current Limiting Resistor (.5 Load R)
Here, 470 ohms
If carbon film, .25 watt,
If metal film, .50 watt

A shows the consequences of ohmic load and L/R ratios

B shows the application of the suppression diode
C shows the application of a current limiting resistor in series with the diode to protect
the diode from contact bounce

226 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 204 Relay Output Module

DAP 204 Relay Output Module Specifications

DAP 204 The following table contains a list of DAP 204 relay output module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Relay 4
Topology Outputs
Number of Groups 4
Points/Group 1
Isolation Four individually isolated relay contacts
Power External Source 24 Vdc, 150 mA maximum
Supplies Requirement
Internally Provided 5 V from I/O bus @ 25 mA max.
Source
Internal Power 2 W (typical)
Dissipation
Electrical Output Voltage 24 ... 154 Vdc; 24 ... 250 Vac
Characteristics Ranges
Operating Mode Normally Open
Response Time 10 ms (typical)
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Environmental Operating -25 ... +70 degrees C (-13 ... +158 degrees F)
Characteristic Temperature
Output Load Currents @ 2 A continuous (maximum, resistive load)
Characteristics 230 Vac
4 A instantaneous (maximum, resistive load)
1 A continuous (maximum, Cos = 0.5)
Load Current @ dc Working Voltage 2 A continuous maximum
@ 24 Vdc (resistive load)
4 A instantaneous maximum
(resistive load)
1 A continuous maximum (L/R* =
30 ms)
Working Voltage 1 A continuous maximum
@ 60 Vdc (resistive load)
0.6 A maximum (L/R* = 30 ms)
Working Voltage 0.3 A continuous (resistive load)
@ 140 Vdc 0.15 A (L/R* = 20 ms)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 227

DAP 204 Relay Output Module

Wetting Current 5 mA for closed contacts

Leakage 1 mA
Internal Protective 68 ohms +15 nF in parallel with each contact
Circuitry
* L = Load Inductance in Henries; R = Load Resistance in ohms
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/8 out
Service Life of Mechanical 20,000,000
Contacts switching cycles
Electric switching 10,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.2 A
cycles
(Resistive Loads) 7,000,000 @ 230 VAC / 0.5 A
8,000,000 (typical) @ 30 VDC / 2
A, with clamping diode
1,000,000 (typical) @ 60 VDC / 1
A, with clamping diode, 3000
cycles/hr max
Electric switching 5,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.5 A
cycles
(Inductive Loads, Cos = 0.5*)
Overload Should be provided externally
Protection

228 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 204 Relay Output Module

Service Life for Resistive Loads

107
8
6

4
# OF OPERATIONS

106
8
6

0 0.2 0.6 1 1.4 1.8

DEVICE RATING
(kVA)

The maximum number of switching cycles is reduced when inductive loads are
encountered. Reference the load device manufacturer’s catalog for steady state
and inrush VA ratings to determine the number of operations derating factor. If the
frequency of operations is relatively high, use the inrush VA to calculate Cos f:
Effective number of operations = # of operations (resistive load) x reduction factor:

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 229

DAP 204 Relay Output Module

Reduction Factor for Inductive Loads

0.9
REDUCTION FACTOR

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5
1 0.9 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
COS φ

Cos = Watts divided by VA.

Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 240 g (0.52 lb)
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

230 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 208/258
Relay Output Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 208/258 relay output module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module? 232
DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module LEDs 233
DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module Field Wiring 234
Protecting the DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module from Inductive Back EMF 235
DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module Specifications 237

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 231

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

What is the DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module?

Brief Product The DAP 208/258 is an eight point relay output module. It utilizes logic signals within
Description the controller to activate eight individually isolated, normally open relay contacts.
Source voltage for any output load may be 24 ... 154 Vdc or 24 ... 250 Vac.

232 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 208/258 has nine LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw 1
indicates the presence of relay coil voltage when ON. Eight red LEDs opposite
terminal screws 3, 5, 7, 9, 14, 16, 18, and 20 indicate when ON that the relay coils
are energized at outputs 1 ... 8, respectively, and suggest that the contacts are
closed and the loads energized. These LEDs are in parallel with the coils, not the
load.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 233

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction Field wiring to each output connects to a double screw terminal. This module
requires power from an external 24 Vdc source to support the relay driver (even if
all the outputs use ac power). The DAP 258 functions just like the DAP 208 except
that the DAP 258 operates at extended temperature.

Note: DAP 258 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal coating
model is DAP 258C and it meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

DAP 208/258 A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAP 208/258 relay output module
Wiring Diagram is provided below.
and Simplified 24 VDC Green
Schematic 24 V Common LED I/O Bus
0.16A Interface

1
2
3
V
Load1 4
5
V Red
Load2 6 LED
7
V 8 Relay
Load3
9 Driver
V 10
Load4 Opto-Coupler
11
12
13
14
Load5 15
16
V 17
Load6
18
Load7 19
20
V 21
Load8
22

234 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

Protecting the DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions To increase the service life of your contacts and protect the DAP 208/258 module
from potential reverse-EMF damage, externally connect a clamping diode in parallel
with each inductive dc load and externally connect an RC snubber circuit in parallel
with each inductive ac load.

Clamping Diode The following illustration is an example of clamping diode and snubber circuit on
and Snubber inductive loads.
Circuit
_ + 1
2
24 V
Clamping Diode 3
Inductive 4
dc Load 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
230 V R C 13
14
Inductive 15
ac Load 16
17
18
19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 235

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

Suggested The clamping diode forward current rating must be equal to or greater than load
Component current. Diode PIV rating must be three or four times greater than supply voltage at
Values 24 Vdc and 8 ... 10 times greater than supply voltage at 110 Vdc. The unpolarized
(ac) snubber capacitor should have a voltage rating two or three times greater than
the supply voltage.
Values may be:
Load Inductance Capacitance
25 ... 70 mH .50 microF
70 ... 180 mH .25 microF
180 mH .10 microF

Snubber resistors may be 1 ... 3 W, 2 W. Resistor values should be increased up to

47 ohms, 1/2 W for RL exceeding 100 ohms.
Operational Range Options Using 140 Vdc Example

236 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module Specifications

DAP 208/258 The following table contains a list of DAP 208/258 relay output module
Tables and specifications.
Diagrams
Module Number of Relay Outputs 8
Topology Number of Groups 8
Points/Group 1
Isolation Eight individually isolated relay contacts
Power Supplies External Source 24 Vdc, 150 mA maximum
Requirement
Internally Provided Source 5 V, less than 60 mA from I/O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Electrical Output Voltage Ranges 24 ... 154 Vdc; 24 ... 250 Vac
Characteristics Operating Mode Normally Open
Response Time 10 ms (typical)
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C for DAP 208
Characteristic -40 ... +70 degrees C for DAP 258
Output Load Currents at 230 Vac 2 A continuous (maximum, resistive load)
Characteristics
4 A instantaneous (maximum, resistive load)
1 A continuous (maximum, Cos = 0.5)
Load Current at dc Working Voltage 2 A continuous maximum
@ 24 Vdc (resistive load)
4 A instantaneous
maximum (resistive load)
1 A continuous (maximum,
Cos = 0.5)
Working Voltage 1 A continuous maximum
@ 60 Vdc (resistive load)
0.6 A maximum (L/R* = 30
ms)
Working Voltage 0.3 A continuous (resistive
@ 140 Vdc load)
0.15 A (L/R* = 20 ms)
Wetting Current 5 mA for closed contacts

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 237

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

Leakage 1 mA
Internal Protective 68 ohms +15 nF in parallel with each contact
Circuitry
Overload Protection Should be provided externally
* L = Load Inductance in Henries; R = Load
Resistance in ohms
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/8 out
Service Life of Mechanical switching 20,000,000
Contacts cycles
Electric switching cycles 10,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.2 A
(Resistive 7,000,000 @ 230 VAC / 0.5
Loads) A
8,000,000 (typical) @ 30
VDC / 2 A, with clamping
diode
1,000,000 (typical) @ 60
VDC / 1 A, with clamping
diode, 3000 cycles/hr max
Electric switching cycles 5,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.5 A
(Inductive Loads, Cos = 0.5)

238 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

The following graph shows Service LIfe for Resistive Loads.

107

8
6

4
# OF OPERATIONS

106
8
6

0 0.2 1 2
DEVICE RATING
(kVA)

SERVICE LIFE FOR RESISTIVE LOADS

The maximum number of switching cycles is reduced when inductive loads are
encountered. Reference the load device manufacturer’s catalog for steady state
and inrush VA ratings to determine the number of operations derating factor. If the
frequency of operations is relatively high, use the inrush VA to calculate Cos:
Effective number of operations = # of operations (resistive load) x reduction factor:

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 239

DAP 208/258 Relay Output Module

The chart below shows Reduction Factor for Inductive Loads.

1

0.9
REDUCTION FACTOR

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
COSφ

REDUCTION FACTOR FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS

Cos = Watts divided by VA.

Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 240 g (0.52 lb)
Agency DAP 208: VDE 0160; UL 50; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2
Approvals Standards
DAP 258C: Railway standard EN 50 155: EMC 89/336/EEC (See
Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779). UL 50; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM
Class I, Div 2 pending

240 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 209 Output
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 209 output module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 209 Output Module? 242
DAP 209 Output Module LEDs 243
DAP 209 Output Module Field Wiring 244
DAP 209 Output Module Specifications 245

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 241

DAP 209 Output Module

What is the DAP 209 Output Module?

Brief Product The DAP 209 is a discrete output module with eight independent 120 Vac output
Description circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves, solenoids and other
similar loads of up to 1 A/channel. The module is structured in one group of eight
outputs, each output electrically isolated from the I/O bus by an opto coupler.

242 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 209 Output Module

DAP 209 Output Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 209 has nine LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw 1 indicates
the presence of AC line voltage when ON. Eight red LEDs opposite terminal screws
3, 5, 7, 9, 14, 16, 18, and 20 indicate an AC ON condition for load at the field wiring
side of the system for outputs 1 ... 8, respectively. Depending on local conditions,
users may notice LEDs on unused outputs exhibiting a dim glow. To eliminate this
condition, connect a 39K ohms, 1/2 W resistor from the unused output terminal to ac
neutral.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 243

DAP 209 Output Module

DAP 209 Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DAP 209 is a discrete output module with eight independent 120 Vac output
circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves, solenoids and other
similar loads of up to 1 A/channel. The module is structured in one group of eight
outputs, each output electrically isolated from the I/O bus by an opto coupler.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAP 209 output module is
for DAP 209 provided below.

AC Neutral
AC Hot Red First of 8
LED Output Circuits
1
8A 2 Solid State
Out1 3 Relay
4
Out2 5
Zero Opto
6
Xing Coupler
Out3 7
8
Out4 9
10
11
12 Gnd
13
Out5 14 Green
15 LED
Out 6 16
17
Out7 18
19
Out 8 20 I/O Bus
21 Interface
22

244 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 209 Output Module

DAP 209 Output Module Specifications

DAP 209 Tables The following tables contain DAP 209 output module specifications.
of Specifications
Module Number of Outputs 8
Topology Number of Groups 1
Points/Group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each output point
Power External Source Requirement 120 Vac
Supplies Internally Provided Source 5 V from I/O bus; 55 mA max.
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Electrical Working Voltage Range 85 ... 138 Vac continuous, 47 ... 63 Hz
Characteristics Output Voltage 150 Vac RMS maximum for 10 s 200 Vac
RMS maximum for 1 cycle
Operating Mode True High
OFF State Leakage Current 1.9 mA maximum
ON State Voltage Drop 1.5 Vac RMS maximum
Load Current Up to 1 A/channel 5 mA mini mum
Response Time 8.34 ms maximum @ 60 Hz
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/8 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 450 g (1 lb)
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards
Approvals

DAP 209 Load Current (Amps)@60 Degrees C, Ambient

Number of Outputs in Use Max. Allowable Load/Output @ 60 degrees, Ambient
8 0.6 A
6 0.67A
4 0.71 A
2 0.87 A
1 1.0 A

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 245

DAP 209 Output Module

DAP 209 1 A Load Current vs. Temperature

Number of Outputs @ 1 A Allowable Ambient Temperature
8 35 degrees C
6 40 degrees C
4 45 degrees C
2 51 degrees C
1 60 degrees C

246 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 210 Output
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 210 output module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
DAP 210 Output Module LEDs 248
DAP 210 Output Module Field Wiring 249
DAP 210 Output Module Specifications 250
What is the DAP 210 Output Module? 252

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 247

DAP 210 Output Module

DAP 210 Output Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 210 has nine LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw 1 indicates
the presence of system power to the module. Eight red LEDs opposite terminal
screws 3, 5, 7, 9, 14, 16, 18, and 20 indicate that the output points have been
enabled on the module’s logic side.

CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Each output group is fused to protect against catastrophic failure. For
protection against triac failure, each output must be individually fused
with a fast-acting fuse rated at 1.5 times user continuous current (fuse
must not exceed 2 A).
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

The following diagram illustrates bit assignment for the DAP 210 output module.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Not Used

Output #1

Output #2
Output #3
Output #4
Output #5
Output #6
Output #7

Output #8

248 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 210 Output Module

DAP 210 Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DAP 210 is a discrete output module with two independent groups of four 24 ...
230 Vac output circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves,
solenoids and other similar loads of up to 1 A/channel. The module outputs are
optically isolated from the system.

DAP 210 Wiring A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAP 210 output module is
Diagram provided below.

AC Neutral First of 8
AC Hot Green System +5V Output Circuits
1 LED
2 Solid State
Out1 3 Gnd
Relay
4
Out2 5 Zero Opto
6
Xing Coupler
Out3 7
8
Red
Out4 9
LED
10
11
12 6.3A Gnd
13
Out5 14
15
Out6 16
17
Out7 18
19
Out8 20 I/O Bus
21 Interface
22 To Group Two
6.3A

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 249

DAP 210 Output Module

DAP 210 Output Module Specifications

DAP 210 The following table and illustrations contain DAP 210 output module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Outputs 8
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 4
Isolation Field to bus; 1500 Vac RMS @ 47 ... 63
Hz, 2500 Vdc, both for a period of 60 s
without breakdown
Power *External Source Requirement 24 ... 230 Vac, 47 ... 63 Hz
Supplies Internally Provided Source 5 V, less than 70 mA from the I/O bus
Power Dissipation 7.2 W with all points ON
Fusing (per group) One 250 Vac, 6.3 A time-lag fuse
(Wickmann TR5-T Fuse; Modicon Part
# 57-0110-000)
Electrical *Working Voltage Range 24 ... 230 Vac continuous, 47 ... 63 Hz
Characteristics Maximum Output Voltage 300 Vac RMS maximum for 10 s 400
Vac RMS maximum for 1 cycle
Operating Mode True High
OFF State Leakage Current 3.75 mA maximum
ON State Voltage Drop 1.5 Vac RMS maximum
Maximum Load Current Up to 1.0 A/channel (see graph)
Maximum Surge Current 15 A/1 cycle, 1 surge/min maximum
Minimum Load Current 50 mA RMS
Response Time 8.34 ms maximum OFF to On and ON
to OFF @ 60 Hz
Maximum Rate of 400 V/msec
Applied DV/DT
Maximum Rate of Commutating 5 V/micros
DV/DT
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/8 out
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C
Storage Temperature -40 ... +80 degrees C
Humidity 0 ... 95 percent relative humidity @ 0 ...
60 degrees C

250 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 210 Output Module

Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5

in)
Weight 1 lb (.45kg)
*Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and European Directive EMC 89/336/
Approvals EEC (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779) Standards
*The module is labelled both as a 24 VAC to 115 VAC or 24 VAC to 230 VAC. When used
in a VDE 0160 environment the voltage range is reduced to 24 VAC to 115 VAC. When used
in a non VDE 0160 environment the module meets specification IEC 1131; UL 508; and CSA
22.2 No.142 and operates over the full range of 24 VAC to 230 VAC.

The graph below shows DAP 210 Power Output.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 251

DAP 210 Output Module

What is the DAP 210 Output Module?

Brief Product The DAP 210 is a discrete output module with two independent groups of four 24 ...
Description 230 Vac output circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves,
solenoids and other similar loads of up to 1 A/channel. The module outputs are
optically isolated from the system.

WARNING
Operational Hazard
The DAP 210 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

252 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 211
Combined I/O Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 211 combined I/O module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 211 Combined I/O Module? 254
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Logical Input Routine 255
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Error Checking Procedure for Output States 256
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Setup Options 257
DAP 211 Combination I/O Module LEDs 258
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring 259
DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Specifications 260

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 253

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module

What is the DAP 211 Combined I/O Module?

Brief Product
Description
Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/
211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

The DAP 211 is a 120 Vac, mixed I/O (4 binary isolated input points/4 binary isolated
short-circuited protected Triac output points) module. An external operating voltage
of 120 Vac for sensor supply (inputs) and an external working voltage of 120 Vac for
the outputs must be provided.
The DAP 211 module is unique in its design. It may be used in two different
applications:
1. Non-voted (single) application, where the DAP 211 monitors its own outputs
using a single module.
2. Voted (dual) application, where the output of the first DAP 211 is monitored
through an input of the second DAP 211 using a two-module configuration.
When used for voted (dual) applications, such as clutch and brake, the modules
operate in pairs. That is, the interconnection of two modules makes it possible for
the output of the first module to be monitored through an input of the second module.
This results in logical states.

Note: This module corrects a current problem of false indication of inputs being in
the on" state due to leakage currents in monitored output systems as applied in
safety circuits like clutch and brake I/O circuits.

254 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 211 Combined I/O Module

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Logical Input Routine

Logical States The five possible outputs for module 1 appear at the top of the table. The five
for Voted (Dual) possible outputs for module 2 appear on the left side of the table. The input states
Operations for module 2 and module 1 appear in the center as noted.
Module 1
Output States Triac On Triac as Diode AUX Broken Load Broken Triac Off
Module 2 Triac On Module2=H Module2=H Module2=L Module2=H Module2=H
Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H
Triac as Diode Module2=H Module2=H Module2=H Module2=H Module2=H
Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H
AUX Broken Module2=H Module2=H Module2=H Module2=L Module2=H
Module1=L Module1=H Module1=H Module1=L Module1=H
Load Broken Module2=H Module2=H Module2=L Module2=H Module2=H
Module1=H Module1=H Module1=L Module1=H Module1=H
Triac Off Module2=H Module2=H Module2=H Module2=H Module2=L
Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H Module1=H Module1=L
KEY: H=High, L=Low, Triac On= Traic is on or defected (shorted), Triac as Diode= Triac is defected, works as a diode
(any direction), AUX Broken= AUX connection between the 2 modules is broken, Load Broken= Load connection
between the 2 modules is broken.

For voted (dual) applications, ensure the two modules are wired as shown in DAP
211 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring. The logical states table is an absolute
MUST in programming/configuration, since only those modules with a defined
operating state have a "LOW-LOW" combination.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 255

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Error Checking Procedure for Output States

Error Checking Perform the following steps to ensure you have no output errors:
Procedure
Step Action
1 Set all outputs to OFF. Input 1 and Input 2 must be low, if not you have an error.
2 Test Output 1: Output 1 is set to ON, Output 2 remains at OFF. Result Input 1 is
HIGH (input 2 is not tested in this step), if not, you have an error.
3 Test Output 2: Output 2 is set to ON, Output 1 remains at OFF. Result Input 2 is
HIGH (input 1 is not tested in this step), if not, you have an error.
4 Set all outputs to OFF: Input 1 and Input 2 must be low, if not, you have an error.
5 If no error, start the press.

256 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 211 Combined I/O Module

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Setup Options

Setup Options The way you setup your DAP 211 depends upon the application. Refer to the wiring
diagram for Non-Voted (Single) applications. This application requires one PLC and
one DAP 211 module. Refer to the wiring diagram for Voted (Dual) applications. This
application requires two PLCs and two DAP 211 modules.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 257

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module

DAP 211 Combination I/O Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 211 module has LEDs opposite terminal screws 1 ... 22.
Location of LED Label Color Description
1 Ready Green Working voltage of 4 out puts:
On: Working voltage exist
Off: No working voltage
3, 8, 14, 19 Out1 ... Out4 Red Output signals:
On: Output=1
Off: Output=0
5, 10, 16, 21 In1 ... In4 Red Input signals:
On: Input=1
Off: Input=0

A front view with DAP 211 label is provided below.

DAP 211
DAP 211
1 ready L1 1
2 X1 2
3 out 1 3
4 out 1 4
5 in 1 5
6 L2 6
7 X2 7
8 out 2 8
9 out 2 9
10 in 2 10
11 11
12 L3 12
13 X3 13
14 out 3 14
15 out 3 15
16 in 3 16
17 L4 17
18 X4 18
19 out 4 19
20 out 4 20
21 in 4 21
22 22
card

258 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 211 Combined I/O Module

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring

Setup Options The way you setup your DAP 211 depends upon the application. Non-voted (single)
applications require one PLC and one DAP 211 module. Voted (dual) applications
require two PLCs and two DAP 211 modules.

Wiring Diagrams A DAP 211 wiring diagram for voted (dual) applications is provided below.
for DAP 211 F DAP 211
L LIN
1
AUX
2 IN
OUT 3 OUT
OUT I/O-1
4
IN
5
6
7 IN
8 OUT
L 9 I/O-2
10
11

DAP 211
N LIN
AUX 1
2 IN
OUT OUT
3
OUT I/O-1
4
IN
5
6
7 IN
8 OUT
I/O-2
9
10
11

A DAP 211 wiring diagram for non-voted (single) applications is provided below.
DAP 211
F
LIN 1
L AUX 2
OUT IN
3 OUT
OUT I/O-1
4
IN
L LIN 5
N 6
AUX 7
OUT IN
OUT
OUT 8 I/O-2
IN 9
10
11

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 259

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module

DAP 211 Combined I/O Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DAP 211 combined I/O module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Inputs 4 (separated from logic through optical
for DAP 211
Topology coupler)
Number of Triac Outputs 4
Number of Groups 4
Points/Group 1 in/1 out
Required SW-IODR-001
Loadable (for Isolation One group is isolated from the other
Modsoft ONLY) group. Within a group there is no
isolation between inputs and outputs.
Power Supplies External Sensor Requirement 120 Vac
External Working Requirement 120 Vac
Internally Provided Source 5 V from I/O bus; 35 mA typical
Power Dissipation 5 W typical
Input Sensor Power Supply 120 Vac -15 percent, +10 percent @ 47
Characteristics ... 63 Hz
Signal Rated Value 120 Vac
Input Delay 1 period
Type of Networking Potential isolation per group (group=1
input/1output)
Output Working Voltage 120 Vac -15 percent, +10 percent @ 47
Characteristics ... 63 Hz for all 4 outputs
Allocation Short-circuit protection by internal fuse
Type of Networking Potential isolation per group (group=1
input/1output)
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 4 in/4 out
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C
Characteristics
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5
in)
Weight 190 g (.4 lb.)
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No. 142, European Directive EMC 89/336/
Approvals EEC (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779) Standards

260 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 212/252
Combined I/O Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 212/252 combined I/O module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module? 262
DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module LEDs 263
DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module Field Connections 264
Protecting the DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF 266
DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module Specifications 268

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 261

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

What is the DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module?

Brief Product The DAP 212/252 is a 24 Vdc, mixed I/O (8 points in/4 relays out) module. It senses
Description eight discrete input signals received by field sensing devices-such as pushbuttons,
limit switches, or other 24 Vdc sources-and converts those signals into logic that can
be used by the controller. It utilizes logic signals within the controller to activate four
independent and individually isolated normally open relay contacts. The module
requires power from an external 24 Vdc source to operate. The DAP 252 functions
just like the DAP 212 except that the DAP 252 operates at extended temperature -
40 ... +70 degrees C.

Note: DAP 252 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal coating
model is DAP 252C and it meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

262 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 212/252 module has two green LEDs opposite terminal screws 1 and 12;
when one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates power available to the input or output
points directly below it. Below terminal screw 1 are four red LEDs opposite terminal
screws 3, 5, 7, and 9 indicating relay output points 1 ... 4, respectively. Below
terminal screw 12 are eight red LEDs opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21 indicating
inputs 1 ... 8, respectively.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 263

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module Field Connections

DAP 212/252 A wiring diagram for the DAP 212/252 combined I/O module is provided below.
Wiring Diagram
24 ... 110 VDC; 24 ... 250 VAC HOT
24 ... 110 VDC; Common; 24...250 VAC Neutral
24 VDC
24 V COMMON
24 VDC
24 V COMMON

0.15A 4A 4A 0.15A

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
22

264 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DAP 212/252 combined I/O module is provided below.
Schematic

RED
First of 4 Output Circuits
47Ω

15nF

1
24 VDC PAB
2
3
Output 1
4

Output 2 5
6 GREEN or AMBER
Output 3 7
8
Output 4 9
10
11
24V Common
12
24 VDC
13 FIRST OF 8 INPUT CIRCUITS
1 14
GREEN or AMBER
2 15
3 16
4 17

5 18
PAB
19
6
20 RED
7
21
8
22
24V Common

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 265

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

Protecting the DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions To increase the service life of the relay output contacts and protect the DAP 212/252
module from potential reverse-EMF damage, externally connect a clamping diode in
parallel with each inductive dc load and externally connect an RC snubber circuit in
parallel with each inductive ac load.

Illustration of The following illustration is an example of clamping diode and snubber circuit on
Clamping Diode inductive loads.
and Snubber
Circuit 1
2
24 V Clamping Diode 3
Inductive 4
DC Load 5
6
7

230 V 8
R C
9
10
Inductive 11
AC Load 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

266 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

Suggested The clamping diode forward current rating must be equal to or greater than load
Component current. Diode PIV rating must be three or four times greater than supply voltage at
Values 24 Vdc and 8 ... 10 times greater than supply voltage at 110 Vdc. The unpolarized
(ac) snubber capacitor should have a rating two or three times greater than the
supply voltage.
Values may be:
Snubber Values
Load Inductance Capacitance
25 ... 70 mH .50 microF
70 ... 180 mH .25 microF
180 mH .10 microF

Note: To I/O Map the DAP 252 module in Modsoft you must select DAP 212. Both
modules share a host driver and have similar characteristics.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 267

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module Specifications

Module The following tables and diagrams contain DAP 212/252 combined I/O module
Specifications specifications.
Module Number of Inputs 8
Topology
Number of Relay Outputs 4
Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 8 in/4 out
Isolation Relay output contacts are individually isolated; the
input group is isolated from the out put group
Power Supplies External Source 24 Vdc, 150 mA maximum
Requirement
Internally Provided Source 5 V from I/O bus; 25 mA max.
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Input Working Voltage Range 20 ... 30 Vdc
Characteristics
Signal Rated Value +24 V
ON State Signal Level +12 V ... +30 V
OFF State Signal Level -2 V ... +5 V
Input Wetting Current 7 mA
Input Current 4 mA @ 24 V; 6 mA @ 37 V
Response Time 4 ms (typical) for DAP212
7 ms (typical) for DAP252
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Output Output Voltage Ranges 24 ... 110 Vdc; 24 ... 250 Vac
Characteristics
Operating Mode Normally Open
Response Time 10 ms (typical)
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Load Currents at 115/230 2 A continuous (maximum, resistive load)
Vac
4 A instantaneous (maximum, resistive load)
1 A continuous (maximum, Cos = 0.5)
Load Current at 24 Vdc 2 A continuous maximum (resistive load)
4 A instantaneous maximum (resistive load)
1 A continuous maximum (L/ R* = 30 ms)

268 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

DAP 212/252 Specifications (continued)

Output Load Current at 60 Vdc 1 A continuous maximum (resistive load)
Characteristics 0.6 A maximum (L/R* = 30 ms)
(continued)
Load Current at 110 Vdc 0.45 A continuous maximum (resistive load)
0.25 A maximum (L/R* = 30 ms)
Wetting Current 5 mA for closed contacts
Leakage 1 mA
Internal Protective Circuitry 68 ohms +15 nF in parallel with each contact
Overload Protection Should be provided externally
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C for DAP212
Characteristics -40 ... +70 degrees C for DAP252
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/4 out
* L = Load Inductance in H R = Load Resistance in ohms
Service Life of Mechanical switching cycles 20,000,000
Relay Contacts Electric switching cycles (Re 10,000,000 @ 230 VAC / 0.2 A 7,000,000 @
sistive Loads) 230 VAC / 0.5 A, 8,000,000 (typical) @ 30
VDC / 2 A, with clamping diode, 1,000,000
(typical) @ 60 VDC / 1 A, with clamping
diode, 3000 cycles/hr max
Electric switching cycles (In 5,000,000 @ 230 VAC / 0.5 A
ductive Loads, Cos = 0.5)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 269

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

This chart shows the Service Life for Resistive Loads.

10 7
8

4
# OF OPERATIONS

10 6

8
6

10 5
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

Device Rating
(KVA)
The maximum number of switching cycles is reduced when inductive loads are
encountered. Reference the load device manufacturer’s catalog for steady state and
inrush VA ratings to determine the number of operations derating factor. If the
frequency of operations is relatively high, use the inrush VA to calculate Cos:
Effective number of operations = # of operations (resistive load) x reduction factor:

270 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

This chart shows the Reduction Factor for Inductive Loads.

1
REDUCTION FACTOR
0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3

COS φ
REDUCTION FACTOR FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS

Cos = Watts divided by VA.

Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 190 g (.4 lb)
Agency DAP 212: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2
Approvals Standards
DAP 252C: Railway standard EN 50 155: EMC 89/336/EEC. UL 50; CSA 22.2
No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 pending

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 271

DAP 212/252 Combined I/O Module

272 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 216/216N
Discrete Output Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 216/216N discrete output
module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module? 274
DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module LEDs 275
DAP 216/216N Field Wiring 276
Resetting the DAP 216 Module After an Overload of Short Circuit 277
Protecting the DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back 278
EMF
DAP 216N Discrete Output Module Differences 279
DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module Specifications 281

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 273

DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

What is the DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module?

Brief Product The DAP 216/DAP216N is a discrete output module with 16 independent 24 Vdc
Description output circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves, solenoids and
other similar loads. The module is structured in two group of eight outputs, each
output electrically opto-isolated from the I/O bus, and each group is protected
against short circuit and overload.

Note: The AS-BDAP-216 has been enhanced. The enhancements have resulted
in the AS-BDAP-216 being superseded by the AS-BDAP216N.

274 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 216/DAP216N has 20 LEDs. Two green LEDs opposite terminal screws 1
and 12 indicate when ON that working voltage is available to the two groups of eight
discrete outputs below them. Two amber LEDs opposite terminal screws 2 and 13
go ON to indicate a short circuit or overload problem in the output group below them.
There are 16 red LEDs opposite terminal screws 3 ... 10 and 14 ... 21, indicating
when ON that the adjacent discrete output is in an ON condition.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 275

DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

DAP 216/216N Field Wiring

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplifed schematic for the DAP 216/DAP216N is provided
and Simplified bleow.
Schematic for
DAP 216/216N
24 VDC
Reset Amber I/O Bus
24 V Common LED
2A 2A Fault Interface
Detection
1
Isolation
2
Out1 3 Output
4 D-Flop/8
Out2 Driver
Out3 5
Out4 6
Out5 7 Opto-Coupler
Red LED
Out6 8
Out7 9
Out8 10
Green LED
11
12
13
Out9 14
Out10 154
Out11 16
Out12 17
Out13 18
Out14 19
Out15 20
Out16 21
22

276 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

Resetting the DAP 216 Module After an Overload of Short Circuit

Instructions A short circuit or overload condition will cause an output point to turn itself off. The
degree of overcurrent that causes the device to shut off is determined by thermal
characteristics unique to the individual point switching device. When overheated
due to overload conditions, the device turns off to protect itself.
The two amber LEDs display short circuit or overload conditions on the two discrete
output groups. After you have taken corrective measures to remove the cause of the
overload or short circuit, push the yellow reset button on the front of the module to
reactivate it.

Front View of A front view with DAP 216 label is provided below.
DAP 216/DAP
216N Module Reset Button DAP 216
DAP 216 Only
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Note: No reset button exists on DAP 216N.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 277

DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

Protecting the DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions If you have inductive loads on longer lines with logic elements located in the output
loads, install an external clamping diode in parallel with the operating coil to protect
the module from reverse EMF.

Clamping Diode The following illustration is an example of clamping diode on inductive loads.
on an Inductive
1
Load
Clamping Diode 2
Inductive 3
dc Load 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Suggested The clamping diode forward current rating must be equal to or greater than load
Component current. Diode PIV rating must be 70 ... 100 V.
Values

278 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

DAP 216N Discrete Output Module Differences

Introduction
Note: The AS-BDAP-216 has been enhanced. The enhancements have resulted
in the AS-BDAP-216 being superseded by the AS-BDAP216N.

WARNING
Over Current Hazard.
In the event of an enabled output sensing an over current condition, the
output will disable, until the over current condition is removed. The
output will then re-enable itself, if still set ON in the logic program.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

1. The manual reset button of the BDAP-216 has been replaced by a solid state
retry on a shorted output.
2. The module restarts field devices automatically when the output is set ON in the
User Logic and the detected field over current condition is removed. Refer to the
user logic example in the figure below if detection and manual reset is still
desired.
3. You may now apply the full 0.5A per point for 4A per Group and 8A per Module.
4. The input impedance of the electronic circuity that handles the 24Vdc power for
the outputs was lowered to accommodate long runs of the power supply cable.
As a result, the inrush current draw from the power supply is increased from about
6A for 2 microseconds to 54A for 12 microseconds. This increase, however, is
well below the inrush current that the module draws from the external power
supply when outputs are switched on.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 279

DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

User Logic A user logic example to detect module overload condition is provided below.
Example

40001 5

40012
STAT
12 0513
SENS
01

0513 1000X

Each Compact I/O Module returns a Health Bit to the controller when in use. This bit
is a single bit in a register that shows the slot position of the module and its status.
When the module is functioning correctly this bit is set to "1". User logic can be
attached to the state of this bit to hold the logic associated with this module in an
OFF condition until an operator pushes a switch to reactivate the user logic.
In the illustration above, a STAT function is used to read 12 registers of which
register 12 is the status word for the modules in the primary rack 1. The BDAP216N
has been placed in slot number 5, so a SENS function block is used to sense bit 5
of this register. The output is tied to coil 0513 which turns OFF when the module
becomes unhealthy. To trap this condition even if coil 0513 turns ON again, it is
latched into coil 0514. This coil can then be used by the programmer as an enable/
disable to ladder logic associated with the BDAP216N in this particular slot and
particular process. The user logic is restarted by the operator pressing a button
attached to input 1000X.

Note: The BDAP216N will automatically restart and reset the Health Bit when the
overload condition is removed. This network only holds the reset condition of any
user logic programmed OFF under the control of coil 0514 in the above example.

280 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module Specifications

DAP 216/216N The following table contains a list of the DAP 216/216N discrete output module
Specifications specifications.
Module Number of Outputs 16
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 8
Isolation Each point opto-isolated from the I/O bus
Each output group isolated from the other
Power External Source Requirement 24 Vdc
Supplies Internally Provided Source 5 V,less than 50 mA from the I/O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 1 W (typical)
Electrical Operating Mode True High
Characteristics ON State Signal Level External supply -3V
OFF State Signal Level 0 ... +2 V, less than 1mA
Load Current/Output 0.5 A max.
Max Load Current/Group 2 A (DAP 216),
4 A (DAP 216N)
Response Time less than 1 ms
Reverse-EMF Protection Clamping diode recommended across
inductive loads.
Switch Capacity for Bulbs 5 W (surge current = normal current x 10)
OFF-ON Operations at Maxi 1000/h (inductive load @ maximum load
mum Power current) 100/s (resistive load) 8/s (max
imum lamp load)
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/16 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 220 g (.5 lb)
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; and cUL Standards
Approval

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 281

DAP 216/216N Discrete Output Module

282 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 217 Discrete
Output Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 217 discrete output module.

Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/

211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 217 Discrete Output Module? 284
DAP 217 Discrete Output Module LEDs 285
DAP 217 Discrete Output Module Field Wiring 286
Protecting the DAP 217 Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back EMF 288
DAP 217 Discrete Output Module Specifications 289

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 283

DAP 217 Discrete Output Module

What is the DAP 217 Discrete Output Module?

Brief Product The DAP 217 is a discrete output module with 16 independent 5 ... 24 Vdc sink
Description output circuits. It can operate relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves, solenoids
and other similar loads. The module is structured in two group of eight outputs, each
output electrically opto-isolated from the I/O bus.

284 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 217 Discrete Output Module

DAP 217 Discrete Output Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 217 has 18 LEDs. Two green LEDs opposite terminal screws 1 and 12
indicate when ON that working voltage is available to the two groups of eight
discrete outputs below them. There are 16 red LEDs opposite terminal screws 3 ...
10 and 14 ... 21, indicating when ON that the adjacent discrete output is in an ON
condition.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 285

DAP 217 Discrete Output Module

DAP 217 Discrete Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DAP 217 is a discrete output module with 16 independent 5 ... 24 Vdc sink
output circuits. It can operate relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves, solenoids
and other similar loads. The module is structured in two group of eight outputs, each
output electrically opto-isolated from the I/O bus.

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DAP 217 is provided below.

Schematic

48 Vdc 1
2 FIRST OF 16 INPUT CIRCUITS
1 3
2 4
3 5
4 6
5 7
Green
6 8 PAB
7
9
Red
8
10
48 V COMM 11

48 Vdc 12
13
9 14
10 15
11 16
12 17
13 18
14 19
15 20
16 21
48 V COMM 22

286 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 217 Discrete Output Module

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the DAP 217 is provided below.

48 Vdc
48 V COMMON

0.15A

DEP 297

U 1
1 U 2
2 1 3
1 3 2 4
2 4 3 5
3 5 6
4

Input
4 6
5 7
5 7
6 8
6 8
7 9
7 9
8 10
8 10
M 11
11
U 12
12 U 13
13 9 14
9 14 15
10
10 15 16
11
11 16 17
12
Input

12 17
13 18
13 18
14 19
14 19
15 20
15 20
16 21
16 21
M 22
22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 287

DAP 217 Discrete Output Module

Protecting the DAP 217 Discrete Output Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions If you have inductive loads on longer lines with logic elements located in the output
loads, install an external clamping diode in parallel with the operating coil to protect
the module from reverse EMF.

Clamping Diode The following illustration is an example of a clamping diode on an inductive load.
on an Inductive
Load 1
Clamping Diode 2
Inductive 3
DC Load 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Suggested The clamping diode forward current rating must be equal to or greater than load
Component current. Diode PIV rating must be 70 ... 100 V.
Values

288 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 217 Discrete Output Module

DAP 217 Discrete Output Module Specifications

DAP 217 The following table contains a list of DAP 217 discrete output module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Outputs 16
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 8
Isolation Each point opto-isolated from the I/O bus
Each output group isolated from the other
Required SW-IODR-001 (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Loadable
Power External Source Requirement 5 ... 24 VDC
Supplies Internally Provided Source 5 V, 60 mA max. from the I/O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 3.5 W (typical)
Electrical Operating Mode True Low
Characteristics Output OFF 5 Vdc (External Source)
Output ON less than or equal to 0.7V @ 4 mA
Load Current/Output 0.1 A up to 0.3 A when the total current of
0.8 A per group is not exceeded
Max Load Current/Group 0.8 A max.
Off State Leakage Current less than or equal to 100 mi croA/point
Response Time less than 1 ms
Reverse-EMF Protection Clamping diode recom mended across
inductive loads.
Switch Capacity for Bulbs Surge current = normal cur rent x 10 2/s
OFF-ON Operations at (inductive load @ maximum load current)
Maximum Power 100/s (resistive load) 8/s (maximum lamp
load)
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/16 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 220 g (.5 lb)
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards
Approval

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 289

DAP 217 Discrete Output Module

290 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 218 Output
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 218 output module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 218 Output Module? 292
DAP 218 Output Module LEDs 293
DAP 218 Output Module Field Wiring 294
DAP 218 Output Module Specifications 295

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 291

DAP 218 Output Module

What is the DAP 218 Output Module?

Brief Product The DAP 218 is a discrete output module with two independent groups of eight 24
Description ... 240 Vac output circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves,
solenoids and other similar loads of up to 0.5 A/output. The module outputs are
optically isolated from the system.

WARNING
Operational Hazard
The DAP 218 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

292 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 218 Output Module

DAP 218 Output Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 218 has 17 LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw 1 indicates the
presence of bus power to the module. Sixteen red LEDs opposite terminal screws 3
... 10 and 14 ... 21 indicate that the output points have been enabled on the module’s
logic side.

CAUTION
Fuse Protection Hazard
Each output group is fused to protect against catastrophic failure. For
protection against triac failure, each output must be individually fused
with a 1 A fast-acting fuse.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

4x Bit A bit assignment diagram for the DAP 218 output module is provided below.
Assignment
4x Bit Assignment

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

OUTPUT #1
OUTPUT #2
OUTPUT #3
OUTPUT #4
OUTPUT #5
OUTPUT #6
OUTPUT #7

OUTPUT #8

OUTPUT #9

OUTPUT #10
OUTPUT #11
OUTPUT #12
OUTPUT #13
OUTPUT #14
OUTPUT #15

OUTPUT #16

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 293

DAP 218 Output Module

DAP 218 Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DAP 218 is a discrete output module with two independent groups of eight 24
... 240 Vac output circuits. It can drive relays, motor starters, pilot lamps, valves,
solenoids and other similar loads of up to 0.5 A/output. The module outputs are
optically isolated from the system.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAP 218 is provided below.
and Simplified
Schematic
AC Hot
AC Neutral
1
2 Solid State
Output 1 3 Relay
2 4
3 5 10Ω
Zero Opto
4 6
7 Xing Coupler
5 O/R
6 8
7 9 Red
8 10 .01 µF
11
12 6.3A SloBlo Gnd
13 5 Vdc
9 14
10 15 Green
11 16
12 17
13 18
14 19
15 20 I/O Bus
16 21 Interface
22 To Group Two
6.3A SloBlo

294 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 218 Output Module

DAP 218 Output Module Specifications

DAP 218 Table of The following table contains a list of DAP 218 output module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Outputs 16
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 8
Isolation Field to bus; 1780 Vac RMS @ 47-63 Hz, or
2500 VDC, both for a period of 60 s without
breakdown
Power *External Source 24 ... 230 Vac, 47 ... 63 Hz
Supplies Requirement
Internally Provided Source 5 Vdc from I/O bus; 175 mA maximum
Power Dissipation 13 W with all points ON
Fusing (per group) One 250 Vac, 6.3 A time-lag fuse (Wickmann
TR5-T Fuse; Modicon Part # 57-0110-000)
Electrical *Working Voltage Range 24 ... 240 Vac continuous, 47 ... 63 Hz
Characteristics Maximum Output Voltage 300 Vac RMS maximum for 10 s 400 Vac
RMS maximum for 1 cycle
Operating Mode True High
OFF State Leakage Current 3.75 mA maximum
ON State Voltage Drop 1.5 Vac RMS maximum
Maximum Load Current Up to 0.5 A/channel
Maximum Surge Current 15 A/output, 1 cycle max., 1 surge/min
Minimum Load Current 30 mA RMS
Response Time 8.34 ms maximum OFF -> ON and ON -> OFF
@ 60 Hz
Switch Point +/- 10 Vac of zero line crossing
Maximum Rate of Applied DV/DT 400 V/micros
Commutating DV/DT 5 V/micros
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 0 in/16 out
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C
Storage Temperature -40 ... +80 degrees C
Humidity 0 ... 93 perc ent relative humidity,
noncondensing, @ 0 to 60 degrees C

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 295

DAP 218 Output Module

Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)

Weight 900 g (2 lb)
*Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards; and European
Approvals Directive EMC 89/336/EEC (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Standards
*The module is labelled both as a 24 VAC to 115 VAC or 24 VAC to 230 VAC. When used
in a VDE 0160 environment the voltage range is reduced to 24 VAC to 115 VAC. When used
in a non VDE 0160 environment the module meets specification IEC 1131; UL 508: and CSA
22.2 No.142 and operates over the full range of 24 VAC to 230 VAC.

Illustration A DAP 218 power output graph is provided below.

4 POINTS PER GROUP MAX

700

Load/Output
in mA
16 POINTS
500

50 60
Ambient Temperature in Degrees Centigrade

296 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 220/250
Combined I/O Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 220/250 combined I/O module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module 298
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module LEDs 299
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring 300
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Recovery After Error 302
DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Specifications 304

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 297

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

What is the DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

Brief Product The DAP 220/250 is a 24 Vdc, discrete mixed eight-point input/eight-point output
Description module. The DAP 250 functions just like the DAP 220 except that the DAP 250
operates at extended temperature.

Note: DAP 250 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal coating
model is DAP 250C and it meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

CAUTION
Equipment Hazard
Modicon recommends using two separate power sources with the DAP
220/250-one for outputs and one for inputs-in order to avoid electrical
switching noise.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: Inputs do not work if output supply is disconnected.

298 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 220/250 module has 19 LED displays. It has two green LEDs, one
opposite terminal screw 1, which indicates when ON that working voltage is
available to the group of eight discrete outputs directly below it, and one opposite
terminal screw 12, which indicates when ON that working voltage is available to the
group of eight discrete inputs below it. There is also an amber LED opposite terminal
screw 2 that goes ON to indicate a short circuit or overload problem in the output
group below it.
There are 16 red LEDs. Eight LEDs are opposite terminal screws 3 ... 10; when ON,
they indicate that the discrete outputs adjacent them are in an ON condition, and
eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21 which indicate when ON that the discrete
inputs adjacent to them are in an ON condition.

WARNING
Operational Hazard
If the short/overload protection device in the DAP 220/250 senses an
error condition, the module becomes "unhealthy." When Executive
Software Prom Combination 1001, Revision B, is installed in the 984
C951 PCB, all other outputs will retain their last healthy status, except
the shorted/overloaded channel, until the failure is cleared. If Prom
Combination 1002 or higher is installed, the healthy outputs may be
manipulated at will.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 299

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DAP 220/250 is a 24 Vdc, discrete mixed eight-point input/eight-point output
module. The DAP 250 functions just like the DAP 220 except that the DAP 250
operates at extended temperature.

Note: DAP 250 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal coating
model is DAP 250C and it meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Modicon recommends using two separate power sources with the DAP
220/250-one for outputs and one for inputs-in order to avoid electrical
switching noise.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: Inputs do not work if output supply is disconnected.

300 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAP 220/250 is provided below.
and Simplified
24 Vdc
Schematic for 24 V Common
I/O Bus
DAP 220/250 Amber LED Interface
10 A
Fault
1 Detection
2
Out1 3 Output
Out2 4 Driver D-Flop/8
Out3 5
Out4 6
Out5 7 Red Opto-Coupler
Out6 8 LED
Out7 9
Out8 10 Green LEDs
11
24 Vdc 12
0.16 A 13
In1 14
In2 15
In3 16
In4 17
In5 18 Opto
In6 19 Coupler
In7 20
In8 21 Red LED
24 V Common 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 301

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Recovery After Error

Instructions The protective device will eventually recover from the fail state if the cause of failure
is removed, and the module will become healthy. If the error condition still exists, it
will cause the module to shut down again. To avoid damage to the module, the logic
shown in the following diagrams may be used to clear the failed output.

Ladder Logic The following diagram is a DAP 220/250 Ladder Logic Example for Prom
Examples Combination 1001.

40001
The STAT block will put the module health infor-
mation for the 4 racks in registers 40012 ... 40015.
STAT
15

40001 Coil 99 is turned ON when the module in Rack 2,

Slot 3 becomes healthy.
00099
SENS
3

0
If register 40100 is traffic copped to the DAP 220 in
0 Rack 2, Slot 3, when it becomes healthy again the 0
00099 in register 40100 will be written to the module.
ADD
40100

302 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

The following illustration is a DAP 220/250 Ladder Logic Example for Prom
Combination 1002.

40001
The STAT block will put the module health infor-
mation for the 4 racks in registers 40012 ... 40015.
STAT
15

40013 Coil 99 is turned OFF when the module in Rack 2,

Slot 3 becomes unhealthy.
00099
SENS
3

0
If register 40100 is traffic copped to the DAP 220 in
0 Rack 2, Slot 3, when it becomes unhealthy, the 0 in
00099
register 40100 will be written to the module.
ADD
40100

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 303

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of DAP 220/250 combined I/O module
Specifications specifications.
for DAP 220/250
Module Number of Inputs 8
Topology
Number of Outputs 8
Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 8
Isolation Each point opto-isolated from the I/O bus.
Power External Source 20 ... 30 Vdc
Supplies Requirement
Internal Source Requirement less than 60 mA @ 5 V from I/O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Input ON State Signal Level +12 V ... +30 V
Characteristics
OFF State Signal Level -2 V ... +5 V
Input Wetting Current 7 mA @ 24 Vdc; 8.5 mA @ 30 Vdc
Response Time 4 ms (typical)
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Output Operating Mode True High
Characteristics ON State Signal Level External Supply - 0.4V
OFF State Signal Level 0 ... 2 V, less than 1mA
Load Current/Output 10 mA ... 2 A
Max Load Current/Group 8A
Response Time less than 1 ms
Reverse EMF Protection Clamping diode recommended across
inductive loads, or if load current exceeds 1A
Switch Capacity for Bulbs 10W (Max Surge Current = Nor mal Current
OFF -> ON Operations @ x 10) 1000/hour inductive load 100/s
Maxi mum Power resistive load 10/s bulb load
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C for DAP220
Characteristics -40 ... +70 degrees C for DAP250
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/8 out

304 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)

Weight 220 g (.48 lb.)
Agency DAP 220: VDE 0160; UL 50; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2
Approvals Standards
DAP 250C: Railway standard EN 50 155: EMC 89/336/EEC (See
Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779). UL 50; CSA 22.2 No.142; and
FM Class I, Div 2 pending

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 305

DAP 220/250 Combined I/O Module

306 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 253
Combined I/O Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 253 combined I/O module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 253 Combined I/O Module? 308
DAP 253 Combined I/O Module LEDs 309
DAP 253 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring 310
Protecting the DAP 253 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF 312
DAP 253 Combined I/O Module Specifications 314

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 307

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

What is the DAP 253 Combined I/O Module?

Brief Product The DAP 253 is an extended temperature, 110 Vdc +/-40 percent, eight-point
Description isolated input/four-point relay output module. The full operational range of this
module is 66 ... 154 Vdc for inputs. Relay voltage and current ratings are
documented in the specifications of this module. It senses eight discrete input
signals received by field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit switches, or
other dc input sources and converts those signals into logic that can be used by the
PLC. It utilizes logic signals within the PLC to activate four independent and
individually isolated normally open relay contacts.
The module requires power from an external 24 Vdc source to operate the relay
outputs. The operating temperature range of this module, -25 ... +70 degrees C (-13
... +158 degrees F), exceeds typical module operating temperatures of 0 ... 60
degrees C.

Note: The DAP 253 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is DAP 253C.

308 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module LEDs

DAP 253 LEDs The DAP 253 module has two amber LEDs opposite terminal screws 1 and 12; when
one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates power available to the input or output points
directly below it. Below terminal screw 1 are four red LEDs opposite terminal screws
3, 5, 7, and 9 indicating the signal condition of relay output points 1 ... 4, respectively.
Below terminal screw 12 are eight red LEDs opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21
indicating the signal condition of inputs 1 ... 8, respectively.
A front view with DAP 253 label is provided below.

DAP 253 DAP 253

U 1
1 U 2
2 1 3
3 4
4 2 5
5

output
6
6
3 7
7
8
8
4 9
9
10
10
M 11
11
U 12
12 U 13
13 1 14
14 2 15
15 3 16
16 4 17
input

17
5 18
18
6 19
19 7 20
20
8 21
21
M 22
22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 309

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the DAP 253 combined I/O module is provided below.
for DAP 253
24...154 Vdc; 24...250 Vac HOT
24...154 Vdc Common; 24...250 Vac Neutral
24 Vdc
24 V Common
110 Vdc +/-40%
dc COMMON

0.15A 4V 4V 0.15A

1
2
3
Load
1 4
5
Load
2 6
7
Load 8
3
9
Load 10
4
11

12
13
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
22

310 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DAP 253 combined I/O module is provided below.
Schematic for
DAP 253

RED
FIRST OF FOUR
47Ω OUTPUT CIRCUITS

15nF

24 Vdc 1
2 PAB

3
Output 1
4
5
Output 2
6
AMBER
Output 3 7
8
9
Output 4
10
24 V Common 11

110 Vdc 12 AMBER

+/-40%
13 FIRST OF EIGHT INPUT CIRCUITS
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19 PAB

7 20
RED
8
21
dc Common 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 311

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

Protecting the DAP 253 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions for In order to increase the service life of the relay output contacts and protect the DAP
DAP 253 253 module from potential reverse-EMF damage, externally connect a clamping
diode in parallel with each inductive dc load and externally connect an RC snubber
circuit in parallel with each inductive ac load.

Illustration of The following illustration is an example of clamping diode and snubber circuit on
Clamping Diode inductive loads.
and Snubber
Circuit
1
24 V 2
Clamping Diode 3
Inductive 4
dc Load 5
6
7
230 V 8
R C 9
10
Inductive 11
ac Load 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

312 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

Suggested The clamping diode forward current rating must be equal to or greater than load
Component current. Diode PIV rating must be three or four times greater than supply voltage at
Values 24 Vdc and 8 ... 10 times greater than supply voltage at 110 Vdc. The unpolarized
(ac) snubber capacitor should have a rating two or three times greater than the
supply voltage.
Values may be:
Snubber Values
Load Inductance Capacitance
25 ... 70 mH .50 microF
70 ... 180 mH .25 microF
180 mH .10 microF

An example of Operational Range Options Using 140 Vdc is provided below.

+Vcc= 140 Vdc Calculations:

A BDAP Contact Given: Vcc= 140Vdc
I (Max)= .15 A
Load 1K ohm (Min) 20 Henries (Max) Then: R(L) (Min)= 140/.15=1Kohm
Since L/R=.02 Sec, and R=1Kohm
Then L(Max)= (.02) X 1000=20H

B Voltage rating of diode = 1.5 X Vcc

Current rating of diode = 2 X I (Max)
Must be “slow”, rectifier, vs logic
Suppression Diode (1N4003)

RCL=Current Limiting Resistor (.5 Load R)

C RCL Here, 470 ohms
If carbon film, .25 watt,
If metal film, .50 watt

A shows the consequences of ohmic load and L/R ratios

B shows the application of the suppression diode
C shows the application of a current limiting resistor in series with the diode to protect
the diode from contact bounce

Snubber resistors may be 1 ... 3 ohms, 2 W. Resistor values should be increased up

to 47 ohms, 1/2 W for RL exceeding 100 ohms.

Note: To I/O Map the DAP 253 module in Modsoft you must select DAP 212. Both
modules share a host driver and have similar characteristics.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 313

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module Specifications

DAP 253 The following tables and diagrams contain DAP 253 combined I/O module
Specifications specifications.
Module Number of Inputs 8
Topology Number of Relay Outputs 4
Number of Groups 1 in/4 out
Points/Group 8 in/1 out
Isolation Relay output contacts individually isolated
Input group isolated from output group
Power External Source 110 Vdc+40 percent, 20 mA @ 24 Vdc, 70 mA
Supplies Requirement
Internally Provided Source 5 V from I/O bus @ 15 mA maxi mum
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Input Working Voltage Range 66 ... 154 Vdc
Characteristics ON State Signal Level 55 ... 170 V
OFF State Signal Level -2 ... +10 V
Input Current 2.2 mA (typical) @ 110 Vdc
Response Time 6 ms (typical)
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Environmental Operating Temperature -25 ... +70 degrees C
Characteristic (-13 ... +158 degrees F)

314 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

DAP 253 Specifications (continued)

Output Output Voltage Ranges 24 ... 154 Vdc; 24 ... 250 Vac
Characteristics Operating Mode Normally Open
Response Time 10 ms (typical)
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Load Currents @ 230 Vac 2 A continuous (maximum, resistive load) 4
A instantaneous (maximum, resistive load)
1 A continuous (maximum, Cos = 0.5) 1.5 A
/ 240 V max (AC11, VDE 0660, part 200)
Load Current @ 24 Vdc 2 A continuous maximum (resistive load) 4
A instantaneous maximum (resistive load) 1
A continuous maximum (L/R* = 30 ms) 1.5
A / 240 V max (DC11, VDE 0660, part 200)
Load Current @ 60 Vdc 1 A continuous maximum (resistive load) 0.6
A maximum (L/R* = 30 ms)
Load Current @ 140 Vdc 0.3 A continuous maximum (resistive load)
0.15 A maximum (L/R* = 20 ms)
Wetting Current 5 mA for closed contacts
Leakage 1 mA
Internal Protective Circuitry 68 ohms +15 microF in parallel with each
contact
Overload Protection Should be provided externally
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/4 out
* L = Load Inductance in H; R = Load Resistance in ohms
Service Life of Mechanical switching cycles 20,000,000
Relay Contacts Electric switching cycles 7,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.5 A 8,000,000
(Resistive Loads) (typical) @ 30 Vdc/2 A, with clamping diode
1,000,000 (typical) @ 60 Vdc/1 A, with
clamping diode, 3000 cycles/hr maximum
Electric switching cycles 5,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.5 A
(Inductive Loads, Cos = 0.5)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 315

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

Diagram of Service Life for Resistive Loads.

7
10
8
6

4
# OF OPERATIONS

10 6
8
6

10 5
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

DEVICE RATING
(kVA)

SERVICE LIFE FOR RESISTIVE LOADS

The maximum number of switching cycles is reduced when inductive loads are
encountered. Reference the load device manufacturer’s catalog for steady state and
inrush VA ratings to determine the number of operations derating factor. If the
frequency of operations is relatively high, use the inrush VA to calculate Cos:
Effective number of operations = # of operations (resistive load) x reduction factor:

316 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

Graph of Reduction Factor for Inductive Loads.

1

0.9
REDUCTION FACTOR

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
COSΦ
REDUCTION FACTOR FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS

Cos = Watts divided by VA.

I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/8 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 240 g (.52 lb.)
Agency DAP 253: European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC Standards
Approvals DAP 253C: Railway standard EN 50 155: European Directive EMC 89/336/
EEC Standards.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 317

DAP 253 Combined I/O Module

318 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DAP 292
Combined I/O Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAP 292 combined I/O module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAP 292 Combined I/O Module? 320
DAP 292 Combined I/O Module LEDs 321
DAP 292 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring 322
Protecting the DAP 292 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF 324
DAP 292 Combined I/O Module Specifications 326

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 319

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

What is the DAP 292 Combined I/O Module?

Brief Product The DAP 292 is a 60 Vdc, eight-point isolated input/four-point relay output module.
Description It senses eight discrete input signals received by field sensing devices-such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, or other 60 Vdc sources-and converts those signals into
logic that can be used by the PLC.
It utilizes logic signals within the PLC to activate four independent and individually
isolated normally open relay contacts. The module requires power from an external
24 Vdc source to operate.

320 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module LEDs

LEDs The DAP 292 module has two amber LEDs opposite terminal screws 1 and 12; when
one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates power available to the input or output points
directly below it. Below terminal screw 1 are four red LEDs opposite terminal screws
3, 5, 7, and 9 indicating the signal condition of relay output points 1 ... 4, respectively.
Below terminal screw 12 are eight red LEDs opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21
indicating the signal condition of inputs 1 ... 8, respectively.
A front view with DAP 292 label is provided below.

DAP 292
DAP 292
1 U 1
2 U 2
3 1 3
4 4
6
5 2 5
6 6
output

7 3 7
8 8
9 4 9
10 10
11 M 11
12 U 12
U 13
13
14 1 14
15 2 15
3 16
16
17 4 17
5 18
input

18
19 6 19
20 7 20
21 8 21
22 M 22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 321

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module Field Wiring

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the DAP 292 combined I/O module is provided below.
for DAP 292
24... 110 Vdc; 24...250 Vac HOT
24... 110 Vdc Common; 24...250 Vac Neutral
24 Vdc
24 V COMMON
60 Vdc
60 V COMMON

0.15A 4A 4A 0.15A

1
2
3
4
O1
5
O2 6
7
8
O3
9
O4 10
11

12
13
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
22

322 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DAP 292 combined I/O module is provided below.
Schematic for
DAP 292

RED

47Ω FIRST OF FOUR

OUTPUT CIRCUITS

15nF

24 Vdc 1
PAB
2
3
Output 1
4
5
Output 2
6
GREEN
7
Output 3
8
9
Output 4
10
24 V Common 11

60 Vdc 12
13 FIRST OF EIGHT INPUT CIRCUITS

1 14
2 15 GREEN
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19 PAB
7 20
RED
8 21
60 V Common 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 323

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

Protecting the DAP 292 Combined I/O Module from Inductive Back EMF

Instructions In order to increase the service life of the relay output contacts and protect the DAP
292 module from potential reverse-EMF damage, externally connect a clamping
diode in parallel with each inductive dc load and externally connect an RC snubber
circuit in parallel with each inductive ac load.

Illustration of The following illustration is an example of clamping diode and snubber circuit on
Clamping Diode inductive loads.
and Snubber
Circuit for DAP
292 1
2
24 V Clamping Diode 3
Inductive 4
dc Load 5
6
7
230 V 8
R C 9
10
Inductive 11
ac Load 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

324 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

Suggested The clamping diode forward current rating must be equal to or greater than load
Component current. Diode PIV rating must be three or four times greater than supply voltage at
Values 24 Vdc and 8 ... 10 times greater than supply voltage at 110 Vdc. The unpolarized
(ac) snubber capacitor should have a rating two or three times greater than the
supply voltage.
Values may be:
Snubber Values
Load Inductance Capacitance
25 ... 70 mH .50 microF
70 ... 180 mH .25 microF
180 mH .10 microF

Snubber resistors may be 1 ... 3 ohms, 2 W. Resistor values should be increased up

to 47 ohms, 1/2 W for RL exceeding 100 ohms.

Note: To I/O Map the DAP 292 module in Modsoft you must select DAP 212. Both
modules share a host driver and have similar characteristics.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 325

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module Specifications

DAP 292 Tables DAP 292 Specifications

and Diagrams
Module Number of Inputs 8
Topology Number of Relay Outputs 4
Number of Groups 2
Points/Group 8 in/4 out
Isolation Relay output contacts individually isolated
Input group isolated from output group
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 60 Vdc, 150 mA maximum; 24 Vdc, 150
mA maximum
Internally Provided Source 5 Vdc from I/O bus; 25 mA maximum
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Input Working Voltage Range 60 Vdc
Characteristics Signal Rated Value +60 V
ON State Signal Level 35 ... 70 V
OFF State Signal Level -4 ... +13 V
Input Current 7 mA at 60 V
Response Time 4 ms (typical)
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG

326 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

DAP 292 Specifications (continued)

Output Output Voltage Ranges 24 ... 110 Vdc; 24 ... 250 Vac
Characteristics Operating Mode Normally Open
Response Time 10 ms (typical)
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Load Currents @ 230 Vac 2 A continuous (maximum, resistive load) 4 A
instantaneous (maximum, resistive load) 1 A
continuous (maximum, Cos = 0.5) 1.5 A/240
V max (AC11, VDE 0660, part 200)
Load Current @ 24 Vdc 2 A continuous maximum (resistive load) 4 A
instantaneous max maximum (resistive load)
1 A continuous maximum (L/R* = 30 ms) 1.5
A/240 V max (DC11, VDE 0660, part 200)
Load Current @ 60 Vdc 1 A continuous maximum (resistive load) 0.6
A maximum (L/R* = 30 ms)
Load Current @ 110 Vdc 0.45 A continuous maximum (re resistive
load) 0.25 A maximum (L/ R* = 30 ms)
Wetting Current 1 mA
Internal Protective Circuitry 68 ohms +15 microF in parallel with each
contact
Overload Protection Should be provided externally
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/4 out
* L = Load Inductance in Henries; R = Load Resistance in Ohms
Service Life of Mechanical switching cycles 20,000,000
Relay Contacts Electric switching cycles 10,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.2 A 7,000,000 @
(Resistive Loads) 230 Vac/0.5 A 8,000,000 (typical) @ 30 Vdc/
2 A, with clamping diode 1,000,000 (typical)
@ 60 Vdc/1 A, with clamping diode, 3000
cycles/hr max
Electric switching cycles 5,000,000 @ 230 Vac/0.5 A
(Inductive Loads, Cos = 0.5)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 327

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

Service Life for Resistive Loads

10 7
8
6

4
# OF OPERATIONS

6
10
8
6

10 5
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
DEVICE RATING
(kVA)
SERVICE LIFE FOR RESISTIVE LOADS

The maximum number of switching cycles is reduced when inductive loads are
encountered. Reference the load device manufacturer’s catalog for steady state and
inrush VA ratings to determine the number of operations derating factor. If the
frequency of operations is relatively high, use the inrush VA to calculate Cos:
Effective number of operations = # of operations (resistive load) x reduction factor:

328 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

Reduction Factor for Inductive Loads

1

0.9
REDUCTION FACTOR

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
COSΦ
REDUCTION FACTOR FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS

Cos = Watts divided by VA.

I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/8 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 240 g (.52 lb.)
Agency Approvals DAP 253: European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC Standards
VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No. 142 Standards.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 329

DAP 292 Combined I/O Module

330 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 202/252 Analog Output
Module

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes the DAU 202/252 analog output module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What Is the DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module? 332
DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Field Wiring 334
DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Calibration 335
DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Specifications 337

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 331

DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module

What Is the DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module?

Brief Product The DAU 202/252 is a two–channel analog output module. Each channel supports
Description voltages in the range +10 ... -10 V and currents in the range +20 ... -20 mA. The
operations of the DAU 202 and the DAU 252 are alike except for the DAU 252’s
ability to operate at extended temperatures. The output channels can be isolated
individually. The valid output data range is from 0 ... 4000.

Note: The DAU 252 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is DAU 252C, and it meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

332 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module

Conversion Different PLC models support different temperature ranges. The following tables
Ranges present the different PLC models and describe the voltage and temperature ranges
that they support.
The following table lists operating information for the A984- 1XX and E984- 24x/251/
255 PLC models.
Output Signals Output Signals Data Count Operating Results
Voltage Current (decimal
-10 V -20 mA 0 In Range
0V 0 mA 2000
+10 V +20 mA 4000
0V 0 mA 4001 Over Range

The following table lists operating information for the E984-258/265/275/285 PLC
models.
Voltage (VDC) Current (mA) 12-bits 15-bits + sign Range
10.24 ... -20.48 ... 0 -32768 Under-range
-10.005 -20.01 47 -32016
-10.00 -20.00 48 -32000 Nominal range
0 0 2048 0
+10.00 +20.00 4048 +32000
+10.005 ... +20.01 ... 4049 +32016 Overrange
+10.24 +20.48 4095 +32752

LEDs The DAU 202/252 has two green LED indicators on its front panel:
l If the LED opposite terminal screw 1 is ON, user-supplied voltage is present.
l If the LED opposite terminal screw 12 is ON, a D/A conversion has occurred.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 333

DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module

DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DAU 202/252 can be field wired to two current output devices, to two voltage
output devices, or to one current and one voltage device.

Wiring Diagram The following illustration is a wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAU
202/252 analog output module.
24 Vdc I/O Bus
24 V Common Interface
0.16A
1
2
3
V 4
R>5kΩ 5
OR 6 D/A Data 1
7 MUX
REF
R < 500 Ω 8
9
10
11
12
13
14 Data 12
V 15
R>5kΩ 16
OR 17
18
19 24 Vdc -15 Vdc
R < 500 Ω Green
20 Green LED 12
21 LED 1
22

334 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module

DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Calibration

Introduction By adjusting the four potentiometers on the top of the DAU 202/252 module, you can
calibrate the gain and offset on each of the two analog channels over the absolute
count range of the module (0 ... 4000).
The following illustration shows the location of the potentiometers on the ADU 202/
252.

Gain Potentiometers Offset Potentiometers

Channel 2
+10 V adjustment Channel 2
-10 V adjustment
Channel 1
+10 V adjustment Channel 1
-10 V adjustment

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 335

DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module

Procedure for Use the following procedure to adjust the Potentiometers.t

Adjusting the
Step Action
Potentiometers
1 Wire terminal 4 to the positive side and terminal 5 to the negative side of a
voltmeter for analog channel 1 (as shown in the following figure.)

4
M

5
15
M

16

2 Enter 4000 into the module output register and adjust the channel 1 gain
potentiometer (+10 V adjustment) for a reading of +10 V on the meter.
3 Enter 0 into the module output register and adjust the channel 1 offset
potentiometer (-10 V adjustment) for a reading of -10 V on the meter.
4 Check module operation by entering 2000 into the module output register. The
meter reading should be 0 V.
5 To fine-tune the calibration adjustment, you may want to repeat steps 2 ... 4 until
you have your best reading. If you are satisfied with the reading, drop a bead of
sealing varnish on the two readjusted potentiometers.
6 To calibrate analog channel 2, wire terminal 15 to the positive side and terminal
16 to the negative side of the voltmeter, and repeat steps 2 ... 5 of this procedure,
this time making the adjustments to the gain and offset potentiometers for
channel 2.

336 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module

DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module Specifications

Table of The following table lists the DAU 202/252 specifications.

Specifications
Module Topology
Number of Outputs 2 opto-isolated 700 V Channel-to-Channel
700 V Channel-to-Bus
Data Format Two’s complement, left justified
Power Supplies
Internally Provided Source 5 V, less than 60 mA from the I/O bus
External Source Requirement 24 Vdc, 150 mA maximum
Internal Power Dissipation 2 Ω (typical)
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage Output +/- 10 V greater than 5 k ohms
Current Output +/- 20 mA less than 500 ohms
Over Range Approximately 2.4 percent
D/A Resolution 11 bits plus sign
Wire Size One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
Accuracy
Overall +/- .4 percent of full scale
Output Error Range +/- .6 percent @ 0... 60 degrees C
Update Interval Approximately 2 ms/output
Settling Time 25 ms/output
Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C for DAU202
-40 ... +70 degrees C for DAU252
I/O Map
Register 3x/4x 0 in/2 out
Dimensions
WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 300 g (0.6 lb)
Agency Approvals
DAU202: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 Standards.
DAU252C: Railway standard EN 50 155; European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC Standards.
UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 pending.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 337

DAU 202/252 Analog Output Module

338 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes the DAU 204 analog output module.

Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/

211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation if using certain PLCs (A984- -1xx, E984- -24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

WARNING
DAU 204 module must be powered when in rack.
Do not leave this module unpowered in the rack. This may affect the
proper operation of the CPU and other I/O modules.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 339

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What Is the DAU 204 Analog Output Module? 341
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Conversion Ranges 342
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Special Features 343
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Installation 344
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Switch Settings 345
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Field Wiring 348
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Configuration 353
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Custom Calibration 358
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Indicators 361
DAU 204 Analog Output Module Specifications 364

340 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

What Is the DAU 204 Analog Output Module?

Brief Product The DAU 204 is a 4-channel analog output module designed to control adjustable
Description frequency drives, positioning valves, dampers, and so forth. Each channel can
provide either voltage or current loop output, in any one of the following ranges:
l 0 ... 1, 0 ... 5, or 0 ... 10 V and +/-1, +/- 5, or +/-10 V
l 4 ... 20 or 0 ... 20 mA (sourcing)

Note: For proper operation, the module requires power from an external source
(250 mA @ 24 Vdc). If an external source is NOT used, the module pulls power
from the internal bus and gives a false green LED indication.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 341

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Conversion Ranges

Overview Different PLC models require different voltage ranges. The following tables present
the different PLC models and describe their power requirements and capabilities.
Refer to Controlling Output Signal Levels, p. 356 for ranges for A984- 1XX and
E984- 24x/251/255 PLC models.

Conversion The following table lists voltage range information -- 0 ...1 VDC, 0 ... 5 VDC, 0 ...10
Ranges VDC -- for E984- 24x/258/265/275/285 PLC models.
0 ... 1 VDC 0 ... 5 VDC 0 ... 10 VDC 11-bits 12-bits 15-bits + sign 16-bits Range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Nominal
0.5 2.5 5 1024 2048 16000 32768
range
1 5 10 2047 4095 32000 65520

The following table lists voltage range information -- 0/4 ... 20 mA -- for E984- 58/
265/275/285 PLC models.
0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 11-bits 12-bits 15-bits + sign 16-bits Range
0 4 0 0 0 0
Nominal
10 12 1024 2048 16000 32768
range
20 20 2047 4095 32000 65520

The following table lists voltage range information -- +/- 1 VDC, +/- 5 VDC, +/- 10
VDC -- for E984- 258/265/275/285 PLC models.
+/- 1 VDC +/- 5 VDC +/- 10 VDC 11-bits 12-bits 15-bits + sign 16-bits Range
-1 -5 -10 0 0 -32000 0
Nominal
0.5 2.5 0 1024 2048 0 32768
range
+1 +5 +10 2047 4095 +32000 65520

342 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Special Features

Special Features The DAU 204 module provides the following features:
l 4 independently configurable channels (i.e., the DAU 204 can provide any
combination of voltage and current outputs)
l Group-to-group isolation (channel 1 and 2 are optically and magnetically isolated
from channels 3 and 4) to 500 Vac
l True 12-bit resolution (0 ... 4095) on all scales
l High accuracy (+/-0.2 percent of full scale @ 25 degrees C)
l Open current loop (broken wire) detection and warnings via LEDs and registers
l Software calibration (no potentiometers)
l Built-in diagnostics
An additional special feature of the DAU 204 is the outputs. For detailed information,
see Conversion Ranges, p. 342.
The following figure shows a front view with the DAU 204 label.

DAU 204
DAU 204
Amber LED 1 ready U 1
Green LED 2 run +I1 2
3 -I1 3
Red LED 4 open +U1 4
Green LED 5 active -U1 5
6 shield 1 6
7 shield 2 7
Red LED 8 open +I2 8
Green LED 9 active -I2 9
10 +U2 10
11 -U2 11
12 M 12
13 +I3 13
14 -I3 14
Red LED 15 open +U3 15
Green LED 16 active -U3 16
17 shield 3 17
18 shield 4 18
Red LED 19 open +I4 19
Green LED 20 active -I4 20
21 +U4 21
22 -U4 22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 343

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Installation

Overview The following information describes preparatory tasks to complete before you install
the DAU 204.

Before You Before installing the DAU 204, be sure to complete the following items:
Install the l Set the DIP switches.
Module l Field wire the terminal blocks.
For detailed information about how to complete these tasks, see DAU 204 Analog
Output Module Switch Settings, p. 345.

CAUTION
You must observe all rack and module power state requirements.
Never insert or remove the DAU 204 from the rack while the rack is
powered up or while the module is connected to an external power
source or active output device. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in equipment damage.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: After installing the DAU 204, you must load the DAU 204 software driver
(SVI.DAT Rev 3, or higher) and set at least one output range via I/O Mapped
register (40xxx+4). These registers are described in DAU 204 Analog Output
Module Configuration, p. 353.

344 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Switch Settings

Overview Setting DIP switches must be done before the DAU 204 can be installed. The
following information describes how to perform these tasks. For general information
about setting DIP switches on the DAU 204, see DAU 204 Analog Output Module
Installation, p. 344.

CAUTION
You must observe all rack and module power state requirements.
Never change DIP switch settings while the rack is powered or while the
module is connected to an external power source or active field device.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause unintended equipment
operation.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 345

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Setting DIP This procedure describes how the dip switches are set.
Switches
Step Action
1 With the DAU 204 not in the rack, find the DIP switches at the top and bottom of the
module. (Both views are shown in the following illustrations. Note also that the DIP
switches are visible through the vents.) The module ships in current mode.
The following illustration is a bottom view of the module, showing the DIP switch for
channels 3 and 4.
BOTTOM VIEW OF MODULE

1 4

PC Board

Group 2 DIP Switch

(Bottom of Module) OFF (open)

Other DIP switch setting may 1 2 3 4 ON (closed)

produce invalid output ranges.
Ch. 3 output*
Ch. 4 output*

*OFF OFF = Current output

ON ON = Voltage output

The following illustration is a top view of the module, showing the DIP switch for
channels 1 and 2.
Grounding Clip TOP VIEW OF MODULE

1 4

PC Board

Group 1 DIP Switch

(Top of Module) OFF (open)
Other DIP switch settings may 1 2 3 4 ON (closed)
produce invalid output ranges.
Ch. 2 output*
Ch. 1 output*
*OFF OFF = Current output
ON ON = Voltage output

346 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Step Action
2 Select the output mode for each channel by properly setting the DIP switches (Refer
to the preceding figures.)
The DIP switch poles located at the top of the module control channels 1 and 2. The
switches located on the bottom of the module control channels 3 and 4. Notice that
channel 1 is set using poles 1 & 2, and channel 2 is set using poles 3 & 4; but channel
4 is set using poles 1 & 2, and channel 3 is set using poles 3 & 4.

Settings for It is recommended that unused channels be set to voltage mode. This setting shuts
Unused off the red LED current loop error indicator and alarm bit. Alternatively, unused
Channels current output channels should be shorted.
You must use both poles together to properly set a channel’s mode; not doing so will
generate invalid results.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 347

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Field Wiring

Introduction For this module, use 60/75 copper (Cu) for the power connections and 4.5 in-lb. of
torque for the set screws.
To prevent errors in field device operation, follow these guidelines:
l Use shielded, twisted-pair cable (such as Belden 9418).
l Ground the shield of each signal cable at the DAU 204 only. At the other end each
signal cable, peel back the shield and insulate it from contact with the signal-
carrying wires.
l Route each signal cable as far as possible from sources of electrical noise (such
as motors, transformers, contactors and especially AC devices).
l Route the signal cables in a conduit different from the AC and power cables.
l If the signal cables must cross AC or power cables, ensure that they cross at right
angles.
l When connecting field devices to the module, keep the unshielded portions of the
signal-carrying wires as short as possible.
After wiring the terminal blocks, use the supplied keys to prevent the blocks from
being switched inadvertently.

WARNING
Module must be powered while in rack.
Do not leave this module unpowered in the rack. This may affect the
proper operation of the CPU and other I/O modules.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

348 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Wiring Diagram The following illustration is a wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DAU
204 analog output module.
24 VDC (required) Amber LED-- I/O Bus
24 V Common (return to P/S) Diagnostic Green Interface
LED--Run
Green LED--Red LED--Error
1 Active
MPU
2 ROM
3 D/A Clock RAM
4 Data Address Dual
Ch. 1 R>20 kΩ CVTR Decode Port
Wired for V 5 Error RAM
6
7 Clock
8 D/A
R<500 Ω Data
9 CVTR Error
Ch. 2
Wired for I 10
11 500V isolation
12 1
13
14 Clock
Ch. 3 15 D/A Data
R>20 kΩ 16 CVTR
Wired for V Error
17
18 Clock
19 D/A Data
R<500 Ω 20 CVTR Error
Ch. 4
Wired for I 21
22 2
500V isolation

CAUTION
Observe all precautions when configuring a channel for current
output.
When you configure a channel for current output, do not connect
anything to that channel’s voltage output terminals (and vice versa).
Failure to observe these precautions can cause unintended equipment
operation.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: We recommend that you connect the DAU 204 to the same 24 Vdc power
supply used to power the PLC (even if the DAU 204 is in the rack but not being
used). If this is not possible, we recommend that you supply power to the PLC
before the DAU 204 using a power supply similar to the P120 (quick startup
voltage). Failure to observe this precaution can cause abnormal operation.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 349

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Note: Ensure that voltage loads driven by the module can tolerate transients during
rack and module startup. During startup, transients as great as 2 V may appear on
the voltage output terminals for as long as 5 ms due to the characteristics of
semiconductor devices. This does not occur with the module’s current output
terminals.

Note: Terminals 3, 5, 9 and 11 (- current out, and - voltage out) are internally tied
as a group. Terminals 14, 16, 20 and 22 (- current out, and - voltage out) are
internally tied as a group. Be sure not to cross groups.

Note: You should short all unused current output terminals to disable the red
current loop LEDs and alarm bits.

The following table lists terminal descriptions.

Terminal Channel Description
1 + 24Vdc (required)
2 + current out
3 - current out
+ voltage out
4 1
- voltage out
5 shield 1
6
7 shield 2
8 + current out
9 - current out
2
10 + voltage out
11 - voltage out
12 24 V common
13 + current out
14 - current out
15 3 + voltage out
16 - voltage out
17 shield 3

350 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Terminal Channel Description

18 shield 4
19 + current out
20 4 - current out
21 + voltage out
22 - voltage out

The following illustration is an example of the DAU 204 wired for voltage output on
channels 1 and 3 and current output on channels 2 and 4.
0.5 A Slo-Blo Fuse Recommended

+24 VDC (required) 1

2
3
4
Ch. 1 Voltage Out 5
Ch. 1 Shield 6
Ch. 2 Shield 7
8
Ch. 2 Current Out 9
10
11
24 V Common 12
13
14
15
Ch. 3 Voltage Out 16
Ch. 3 Shield 17
Ch. 4 Shield 18
19
Ch. 4 Current Out
20
21
22
The DIP switch settings for this configuration are shown in the following illustration.
Group 1 DIP Switch Group 2 DIP Switch
(Top of Module) (Bottom of Module)

OFF (open = 0) OFF (open = 0)

1 2 3 4 ON (closed = 1) 1 2 3 4 ON (closed = 1)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 351

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

An example of the DAU 204 wired for current output on all channels (1 through 4) is
shown in the following illustration. Turn all DIP switch poles off for this configuration.

0.5 A Slo-Blo Fuse Recommended

=24 VDC (required) 1

2
Ch. 1 Current Out 3
4
5
Ch. 1 Shield 6
Ch. 2 Shield 7
8
Ch. 2 Current Out 9
10
11
24 V Common 12
13
Ch. 3 Current Out 14
15
16
Ch. 3 Shield 17
Ch. 4 Shield 18
Ch. 4 Current Out 19
20
21
22
For example, to select current output for channels 1 and 3, and current output for
channels 2 and 4, set the DIP switch poles as shown in the following illustration.
Group 1 DIP Switch Group 2 DIP Switch
(Top of Module) (Bottom of Module)
OFF (open = 0) OFF (open = 0)

1 2 3 4 ON (closed = 1) 1 2 34 ON (closed = 1)

352 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Configuration

Introduction The DAU 204 is configured using the I/O map and its input and holding registers.

I/O Mapping The DAU 204 uses one 30xxx input register and six 40xxx output registers, I/O
mapped as binary (BIN) data.

Note: A software loadable driver (SVI.DAT, Revision 3, or higher) is required to

operate this module.

The registers and their functions used by the DAU 204 are shown in the table below,
with more details following.
Registers and their functions
30xxx Module status word
40xxx Channel 1 data, output signal levels, 12 bit
40xxx + 1 Channel 2 data, output signal levels, 12 bit
40xxx + 2 Channel 3 data, output signal levels, 12 bit
40xxx + 3 Channel 4 data, output signal levels, 12 bit
40xxx + 4 Control word 0, range select (NOT avail able for E984-258/265/275/285 PLCs)
40xxx + 5 Control word 1, fault state

From the I/O Map screen in Modsoft, you can call up the built-in help screens by
highlighting DAU 204 and pressing <ALT><H>.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 353

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Setting Output Output register 40xxx + 4 controls the output range for each channel.
Ranges
Output Register 40XXX + 4 (range select)
Not Used

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1

0 0 0 (0 hex) = 4...20 mA
0 0 1 (1 hex) = 0...20 mA
0 1 0 (2 hex) = 0...1 V
0 1 1 (3 hex) = ±1 V
1 0 0 (4 hex) = 0...5 V
1 0 1 (5 hex) = ±5 V
1 1 0 (6 hex) =0...10 V
1 1 1 (7 hex) =±10 V

Note: When using E984-258/265/275/285 PLCs the output ranges are selected
using the Parma ... screen in Concept, not the 4x+4 register.

354 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Enabling Hold- Bits 9 through 12 of output register 40xxx + 5 control how the DAU 204 responds to
Last-Value the following fault conditions:
l Communications with the PLC is lost for more than 1 second.
l The PLC is in stopped mode or power is lost.
The following is an illustration of the Enable-Hold-Last-Value Register.

Bits 9...12 of Output Register 40XXX = 5

(enable hold-last-value)

calibration test mode calibration

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3 1 = hold last value
Channel 4 0 = set to bottom
of scale

Note: When using E984-258/265/275/285 PLCs the hold-last-value is selected

using the Parma ... screen in Concept.

For example, if channel 1 is configured for 4 ... 20 mA operation, and bit 9 of register
40xxx + 5 is set to 0 (bottom of scale), channel 1 will output 4 mA if communication
with the PLC is lost. However, if bit 9 were set to 1 (hold last value), channel 1 would
output the same signal (value) that was output when communication was lost.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 355

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Controlling Output registers 40xxx through 40xxx + 3 control the output signal levels on
Output Signal channels 1 through 4, respectively.
Levels The table below shows how the data in these registers correspond to the output
signal for each output range. Register values above 4095 are treated as 4095.
A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255 PLC Models
Register Value (decimal) Unipolar Voltage Output Signal
0 ... 1 V 0 ... 5 V 0 ... 10 V
0 0 0 0
2047 0.5 2.5 5
4095 1 5 10
Bipolar Voltage Output Signal
+/-1 V +/-5 V +/-10 V
0 -1 -5 -10
2047 0 0 0
4095 1 5 10
Current Output Signal
0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA
0 0 4
2047 10 12
4095 20 20

CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Before bringing field devices on-line, always ensure that you know the
value in the registers that control each output channel so that the field
devices do not begin operation without your understanding.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

356 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Monitoring the Input register 30xxx can be used to monitor the DAU 204.
Module
Input Register 30XXX (module status)
Not Used

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Module memory error

1 = Module error 1 = Ch. 4 current error

1 = Ch. 3 current error

1 = Ch. 2 current error

1 = Ch. 1 current error

1 = Current error

A current error indicates an open current loop (broken wire) or a high loop
impedance (greater than 500 ohms). Check the field wiring. A module error indicates
a fault within the module. Try restarting the module. If the fault continues, call
Technical Support at 1-800-468-5342.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 357

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Custom Calibration

Introduction This procedure is recommended for expert users only. All DAU 204 modules are
carefully calibrated at the factory, so the procedure described below is needed only
if you want to alter the module’s calibration for a special application.
Depending on the accuracy desired, this procedure should take less than half an
hour. To calibrate the DAU 204, the following materials are needed:
l Processor
l Rack
l Power supply
l Programming software (Modsoft) and computer
l Cable (preferably, shielded, twisted pair cable, such as Belden 9418)
l Multimeter with current measuring capability

Calibrating the To calibrate the DAU 204 analog output module:

Module
Step Action
1 Properly install and configure the module for the intended application See DAU 204
Analog Output Module Installation, p. 344 and Controlling Output Signal Levels,
p. 356.
2 Set the output data register for the channel you want to calibrate to 4095 decimal (for
example, to calibrate channel 1, set output register 40xxx to 4095).
3 Using the multimeter, measure the output for the channel being calibrated.
4 Using output register 40xxx + 5 (defined in the figure below), adjust the output
upward or downward. Refer to the channel gain table below for the op codes to use.
Note: When using E984-258/265/275/285 PLCs the channel calibration is selected
using the Parma ... screen in Concept.
5 When the output equals the top of the desired range (for example, 20 mA for 4 ... 20
mA operation), set output register 40xxx + 5 to 0000 hex to stop the output
movement.
6 Set the output data register for the channel you want to calibrate to 0 (for example,
to calibrate channel 1, set output register 40xxx to 0).
7 Using output register 40xxx + 5, adjust the output upward or downward. Refer to the
channel offset table below for the op codes to use.
8 When the output equals the bottom of the desired range (for example, 4 mA for 4 ...
20 mA operation), set output register 40xxx + 5 to 0000 hex to stop the output
movement.
9 Repeat steps 2 through 8 until you’ve achieved the desire accuracy.
Repeat these steps for each channel, as desired.
To store the calibration in EEPROM, set output register 40xxx + 5 to 8011 hex.

358 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Channel The following is an illustration of the Channel calibration register.

Calibration
Bits 1...8 of Output Register 40XXX + 5
(channel calibration)
test mode hold last value

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Store calibration

1 = Adjust output upward

1 = Adjust output downward
1 = Calibrate gain (span)
1 = Calibrate offset (zero)
1 = Reset to normal defaults (within
10% of FS voltage range)
Calibrate Ch. 1 = 0 0
Calibrate Ch. 2 = 0 1
Calibrate Ch. 3 = 1 0
Calibrate Ch. 4 = 1 1
1 = Enable calibration

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 359

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Code Tables The following table gives Op codes to adjust channel gain (span) upward or
downward.
Upward Downward
Channel 1 00A1 hexadecimal 0061 hexadecimal
Channel 2 00A3 hexadecimal 0063 hexadecimal
Channel 3 00A5 hexadecimal 0065 hexadecimal
Channel 4 00A7 hexadecimal 0067 hexadecimal

The following table gives Op codes to adjust channel offset (zero) upward or
downward.
Op codes to adjust channel offset (zero) upward or downward
Upward Downward
Channel 1 0091 hexadecimal 0051 hexadecimal
Channel 2 0093 hexadecimal 0053 hexadecimal
Channel 3 0095 hexadecimal 0055 hexadecimal
Channel 4 0097 hexadecimal 0057 hexadecimal

Note: When you replace the module, you will need to perform this procedure again.

To return a channel to an uncalibrated state (before factory calibration i.e. within 10

percent of full scale of voltage range), set output register 40xxx + 5 to the
appropriate op code shown in the table below.
Op codes to return channel to uncalibrated state
Channel 1 0009 hexadecimal
Channel 2 000B hexadecimal
Channel 3 000D hexadecimal
Channel 4 000F hexadecimal

360 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Indicators

LEDs The DAU 204 analog output module has three types of LEDs:
l Amber LED -- provides information about the health of the module
l Green LEDs -- provide information about the readiness of the module
l Red LEDs -- provide information about the integrity of each channel (in current
mode only)
This chapter explains how to use these and other diagnostic tools to determine the
status of the DAU 204 module, and to identify and solve problems if necessary.

Amber LED The amber LED on the front of the module provides status information about the
health of the module. A flashing amber LED indicates a fault in at least one of the
following areas:
l Module Watchdog Circuit Fault
l Module Watchdog Circuit Fault at Startup
l Module RAM Failure at Startup
l Bus Interface Failure at Startup
l Module ROM Failure
l Module Processor Fault at Startup
l General Module Error
If the amber LED begins flashing, try restarting the module. If the flashing continues,
call Technical Support at 1-800-468-5342.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 361

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Green LEDs The green LED at the top of the module provides status information about the
module’s readiness. The remaining green LEDs provide status information about
the activity on each channel.
After the module is powered up, the green LED at the top of the module should begin
flashing. If not, check the power source and connections.

Note: The DAU 204 requires power from an external source (250 mA @ 24 Vdc)
to operate. When an external source is NOT used the module pulls power from the
internal bus gives a false green LED indication.

WARNING
Operational Hazard
Do not leave this module unpowered in the rack. This may affect the
proper operation of the CPU and other I/O modules.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

Next, after the module has established communications with the PLC, the green
LED at the top of the module should stop flashing and remain on. If not, ensure that
the PLC has been powered up.
The remaining green LEDs should remain on or flash quickly as data is sent over
each channel. If these green LEDs ever go off, check the power source and
connections.

Red LEDs The red LEDs provide status information about each channel’s integrity in current
mode only. A flashing or steady red LED indicates an open current loop (broken
wire) or a high loop impedance (greater than 500 ohms ). Red LEDs do not function
in voltage mode.

Invalid Data If the module seems to be providing invalid output data:

l Check wiring connections and integrity, DIP switch settings, and register settings.
l Verify the integrity of the field device.
l Make sure the signal cables are not placed on or near high-voltage (120 Vac or
higher) cables. If the signal cables must cross high-voltage cables, ensure that
the signal cables cross the high-voltage cables at right angles.
If electrical interference seems to be the problem, try placing the module as far as
possible from power supplies and relay output modules. These products may
generate electrical interference during operation. This interference would not affect
the module but may induce noise on the channel wiring.

362 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Built-in Tests The DAU 204 has built-in tests that are performed automatically when the module is
powered up, but they can also be performed after the module is on-line by setting
output register 40xxx +5 as shown in the built-in test register (below).

Bits 13...15 of Output Register 40XXX + 5

(built-in tests)

calibration hold last value calibration

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 (0 hex) = No tests
1 0 1 (5 hex) = Category 1
1 1 0 (6 hex) = Category 2 (DAU 204 must be in ±10 V mode)
1 1 1 (7 hex) = Category 3 (DAU 204 must be in 4...20 mA
mode)

To stop the built-in tests, simply reset output register 40xxx + 5 to 0000 hexadecimal.

CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Before performing these tests, disconnect any field devices from the
DAU 204. Failure to observe this precaution can cause unintended
equipment operation.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: When bits 13, 14, or 15 of the output register 40xxx + 5 are set to 1, the green
LED flashes continuously until these bits are reset to 0. After resetting these bits
to 0, the module should be restarted.

Note: When using E984-258/265/275/285 PLCs the built-in tests are selected
using the Parma ... screen in Concept.

If the DAU 204 fails any of these tests (amber LED flashes), restart the module. If it
continues to fail, call Technical Support at 1-800-468-5342.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 363

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

DAU 204 Analog Output Module Specifications

Table of The following table provides DAU 204 Specifications.

Specifications
Module Topology Number of Channels 4
Number of Groups 2
Points per Group 2
Operating Voltage Ranges Bipolar +/-1, +/-5, +/-10 Vdc
Unipolar 0 ... 1, 0 .. 5, 0 ... 10 Vdc
Operating Current Ranges Unipolar 0 ... 20, 4 ... 20 mA
Power Supply External Supply 250 mA @ 24 Vdc
Internal Power Supply (via less than 1 mA (TTL loading)
system bus)
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001
Isolation Channel 1, 2 to Channel 3, 4 500 V @ 60 Hz
Channel to Bus 500 V @ 60 Hz
Channel 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 Not Isolated
Line/Load Impedance Voltage Output greater than or equal to 20,000
ohms
Current Output less than or equal to 500ohms,
less than or equal to 50mH; No
max. capacitance but can slew
output
Resolution 12 bit (0 ... 4095)
Accuracy +/-0.200 percent Full Scale Reading @ 25 degrees C
Accuracy Drift w/ Current Output +/-0.002 percent FSR/ degrees
Temperature C typical
+/-0.005 percent FSR/ degrees
C maximum
Voltage Output +/-0.006 percent FSR/ degrees
C typical
+/-0.0135 percent FSR/ degrees
C maximum
Update Time 5 ms per channel maximum
Fault Detection Open current loop (broken wire in current mode)
MTBF 100,000 hours, minimum, @ 30 degrees C, ground base fixed
EMI Susceptance 27 ... 500 MHz, 10 V/m
Electrostatic Discharge 8 kV

364 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 204 Analog Output Module

Fast Transient (IEC 801-4) +/- 1.0 kV

Surge Withstand 2 kV (Transients, IEC 801-5)
Operating Conditions Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C (32 ... 140
degrees F)
Humidity 95 percent RH noncondensing
@ 60 degrees C
Chemical Interactions Can be damaged by strong
alkaline (pH greater than 7)
solutions
Vibration 10 ... 57 Hz @ 2 Gs
Storage Conditions Temperature -40 ... 85 degrees C (-40 ... 185
degrees F)
Free Fall 1 m (approx. 39 in)
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 1 in/6 out
1 in/5 out for (E984-258/265/275/
285 Only)
Material Lexan (Enclosures and Bezels)
Space Required 1 A120 SMS rack slot
Dimensions (WxHxD) 40.3 x 145.0 x 117.5 mm
1.60 x 5.60 x 4.50 in
Weight, Maximum 453 g,
1 lb.
Agency Approvals UL 508; CUL; FM Class I, Div 2; and European Directive EMC
89/336/EEC (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Standards

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 365

DAU 204 Analog Output Module

366 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of DAU 208 Analog
Output Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DAU 208 analog output module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DAU 208 Analog Output Module? 368
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Conversion Ranges 369
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Physical Characteristics 370
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Configuration 372
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Field Wiring 373
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Calibration 374
DAU 208 Analog Output Module Specifications 377

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 367

DAU 208 Analog Output Module

What is the DAU 208 Analog Output Module?

Brief Product The DAU 208 is an eight-channel +/-10 V analog output module with opto-isolation.
Description Digital-to-analog conversions are performed by a single converter, sequentially
multiplexed to the eight output circuits. Outputs are short circuit-proof, and reset
themselves after the short is removed.
The DAU 208 can be installed in any slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201, and
202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and peripheral connections on the
front. The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be filled in with relevant
information (signal values, etc.) in the spaces provided.

WARNING
Operational Hazard
The DAU 208 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

368 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 208 Analog Output Module

DAU 208 Analog Output Module Conversion Ranges

Introduction The PLC model determines the available ranges. Refer to the table below. The
ranges for the A984-1xx/24x/251/255 PLC models are in DAU 208 Analog Output
Module Specifications, p. 377.

Conversion +/- 10 VDC for E984–258/265/275/285 PLC Models

Ranges
+/- 10 VDC for E984-258/265/275/285 PLC Models
+/- 10 VDC 12-bits 15-bits + sign Range
-10.24 ... 0 -32768 Under-range
-10.005 47 -32016
-10.00 48 -32000
0 2048 0 Nominal range

+10.00 4048 +32000

+10.005 ... 4049 +32016 Overrange
+10.24 4095 +32752

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 369

DAU 208 Analog Output Module

DAU 208 Analog Output Module Physical Characteristics

LEDs The DAU 208 has two green LEDs:

l Opposite terminal #1, indicating the presence of user-supplied 24 Vdc power (ON
= power supplied; OFF = power off)
l Opposite terminal #12, indicating operation of the dc-dc converter that powers the
D/A circuitry (ON = Ready; OFF = Fault)

Front View A front view with DAU 208 label is provided below.

DAU 208
DAU 208
U
1
2
1
3
4
2
5
6
7 3

8
4
9
10
M
11 ready U

12
13 5
14
15
6
16
17
7
18
19
8
20
21 M
22 card

370 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 208 Analog Output Module

Simplified The DAU 208 can be field wired to up to eight voltage output devices.
Schematic

6V
-15 V +15 V -15 V O V +15 V
PAB
REF

+ 24 V 1 BIT 11
2
+ SERIAL
V1 3
- 4
+ 5 PAB
V2 BIT 0
- 6
+ V3 7
MUX D/A
- 8
+ V4
9
- 10
GND 11
PAB
+ 24 V 12
13
+ 14
V5
- 15 +15 V
+ 16 GN
V6 0V
- 17 GN -15 V
+ V7 18
- 19
+ V8
20
- 21
GND 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 371

DAU 208 Analog Output Module

DAU 208 Analog Output Module Configuration

I/O Mapping The DAU 208 must be I/O Mapped as eight 4x output registers, and BIN must be set
for data type.

Cabling l Shielded, twisted pair cable (2 or 4 x 0.5 mm/channel) should be used; all
channels can be connected with a common shielded cable.
l Connect shield to ground (GND) on one side with a short cable (less than 8 in.).
l Observe a minimum distance of 20 in between the module and power lines or
other sources of electrical disturbance.

Connection and
Assignment of
Note: Detailed Compact 984 cabling and installation instructions are found in the
Output
984—A120 Compact Programmable Controllers User Guide (890 USE 108 00
Addresses
formerly GM-A984-PCS).

372 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 208 Analog Output Module

DAU 208 Analog Output Module Field Wiring

Wiring Diagram After conversion by the DAU 208, words 1 ... 8 are shown as analog values at their
for DAU 208 respective addresses 1 ... 8, as shown in the following illustration.
+ 24 V
GND

1A
0.16

1
2
+ 24 V
3
V1
4

V2 5
6
7
V3
8
9
V4
10
11

12
13

12 14
V5
15

V6 16
17

18
V7
19

V8 20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 373

DAU 208 Analog Output Module

DAU 208 Analog Output Module Calibration

Introduction
CAUTION
Calibration Caution
Modicon recommends that units requiring recalibration be returned to
the factory, since inaccuracies could be due to faulty components.
However, users who wish to perform their own calibration should use
the following procedure.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

By adjusting the two potentiometers located on the top of the DAU 208 module, you
can calibrate both the plus and minus ranges for the eight output channels.

374 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 208 Analog Output Module

Location of The following illustration shows the location of the potentiometers on the DAU 208.
DAU 208
Potentiometers R4
R3

In this procedure, R4 is used to calibrate the plus output voltage ranges, and R3 is
used to calibrate the negative ranges and the zero point. The third potentiometer
mounted opposite R3 on a separate PCB is factory preset and should not be
adjusted. Its purpose is to establish voltage outputs of the DC-DC supply that
powers the module’s D/A converter.
Items required for calibration are:
l A 3.3 kW Precision Register
l A Voltmeter with appropriate scale and accuracy of 0.2 ... 0.5 PPM.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 375

DAU 208 Analog Output Module

Calibrating the Take the following steps to calibrate the analog output channels.
Analog Output
Step Action
Channels
1 Connect the 3.3 k ohms Resistor across Channel 1. Connect the voltmeter
across the 3.3 k ohms Resistor and load the Channel 1 register with 4048
decimal. Adjust R4 for a reading of +10 Vdc (+/- 0.5 mV) on the voltmeter.
2 Load the Channel 1 register with 48 decimal. Adjust R3 for a reading of -10 Vdc
(+/- 0.5 mV) on the voltmeter.
3 Load the Channel 1 register with 2048 decimal. Adjust R3 for a reading of 0 Vdc
(+/- 0.5 mV) on the voltmeter.
4 Move the resistor and voltmeter to the other channels and check outputs. Zero
output points should be within +/- 2 mV, and +/-10 Vdc outputs within +/-7 mV.
5 When satisfied with the readings on all eight channels, drop a bead of sealing
varnish on both potentiometers’ adjusting screws to secure their settings.

376 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DAU 208 Analog Output Module

DAU 208 Analog Output Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of DAU 208 specifications.

Specifications
Module Number of Out puts 8
Topology Isolation Channel-to-Bus 700 Vdc
Channel-to-External 700 Vdc
Supply
Voltage Output +/-10 V, greater than 3.3 k ohms
Maximum Load Current 3 mA
Max. Short Circuit Current 20 mA
Power External 24Vdc, 120 mA maximum
Supply Internally Provided Source from 5 Vdc, 30 mA maximum
I/O bus
Power Dissipation 3Ω
Voltage Linear Measuring Range Conversion Values for the DAU208 A984-1xx, E984-
Output 24x/251/255 PLC Models Only
Capabilities Analog Value Decimal Value Comments
-10.24 0
-10.00 48
-5.00 1048
-1.00 1848
-0.50 1948
-0.10 2028
-0.01 2046
-0.005 2047 Linear
0.00 2048 Range

+0.005 2049
+0.01 2050
+0.10 2068
+0.50 2148
+1.00 2248
+5.00 3048
+10.00 4048
+10.24 4095

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 377

DAU 208 Analog Output Module

A/D Conversion Time for All 1 ms maximum

Conversion Outputs
Resolution 11 bits plus sign
Overrange +/-2.4% (maximum +/-10.24 V)
Overall Error +/-0.1% @ 0 ... 605 C
I/O Map Register 1x/0x 0 in/8 out
Dimensions W x H x D 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 350 g (.77 lb.)
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142 and FM Class I, Div 2 Standards
Approvals

Note: If Power is removed from A984 or stopped, the outputs will go to a no output
condition.

378 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEA 202 InterBus S Interface
Module

At a Glance

Introduction This information in this chapter describes the DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
DEA 202 Features and Functions 380
Configuration of the DEA 202 382
DEA 202 LEDs 386
DEA 202 Specifications 387

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 379

DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

DEA 202 Features and Functions

Product The DEA-202 enables A120 series I/O modules to connect to the remote bus in an
Overview INTERBUS configuration. For the INTERBUS master, the DEA module is a remote
node that can address up to 18 I/O modules (288 I/Os) via the subracks AS-
HDTA200, AS- HDTA 201 or AS- HDTA 202.
The DEA 202 comes with an integrated (non-isolated) power supply. It provides a 5
VDC supply at 1.6 A for the modules on the parallel I/O bus.
The following figure shows the DEA 202 InterBus topology.
Remote Bus

DEA Station
DEA 202
Remote Bus

Features The following list identifies key features of the DEA 202.
l Coupling module with integrated power supply.
l With the exception of intelligent modules, all analog and discrete Compact I/O
modules can be employed.
l The DEA 202 requires 1 word of the packet length for private data. Consequently,
a maximum of 31 words remains available for use by the InterBus-S.
l DIP switch default adjustment: Disconnection behavior as well as status and
control word processing.

Functional The module serves as the coupling element between the remote bus (CPU
Details connection) and PAB (connection to the I/O modules).
The undervoltage monitoring signal from the primary and secondary voltages is
evaluated internally by the module.

380 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

Watchdog The watchdog is a self-monitoring feature of the DEA. It consists of a monoflop with
a delay time of about 320 ms. The DEA firmware performs an interrupt triggered
control of the monoflop. After successfully powering on, which includes a successful
EPROM check and initialization, the monoflop is triggered during program
execution.
The delay time of the monoflop cannot be changed. The green "ready" (watchdog)
LED goes off if cycle times are greater than the monoflop’s delay time. This condition
activates the disconnection behavior as determined by DIP switches S2 & S3.

Module Faults The DEA 202 collects messages from the associated modules and reports these to
the master as module faults (refer to the "DEA 202 Status and Fault Messages"
section of the InterBus-S Quantum 140 NOA 611 00 User Manual
(P/N 840 USE 419 00).
The following figure shows the DEA 202 front view and label.

AEG DEA202
DEA 202
DEA 202
ready
ea
remote in
Modicon A120 BA
RC
RD

in

remote out

out

18 U 18
24 VDC

19 ready 5VU
19
20 PE 20
21 M 21
22 M 22
card card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 381

DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

Configuration of the DEA 202

Overview The following information describes how to configure the DEA 202.

DIP Switch The following figure shows the location and settings for the DIP switch.
Location and
Settings
S3
S2
S1
S0

ON

Note: For DEA 202 operation with the 140 NAO 611 00, all DIP switches (S0 ... S3)
must be in the "OFF" position.

Status The following figure shows the status processing switch settings.
Processing (S0)
OFF ON OFF ON
S3 S3
S2 S2
S1 S1
S0 Analog value processing S0 Analog value processing
with status and parameter* without status and parameter
* As shipped

382 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

Control Word The following figure shows the control word processing switch settings.
Processing (S1)

OFF ON OFF ON
S3 S3
S2 S2
S1 DEA control word active. S1 DEA control word inactive
S0 Required setting for 140 NOA 611 00. S0 Required setting for 140 NOA 611 10
Output begins after bus initialization completion.* and other Output begins
immediately after startup.
* Delivery status

Disconnection The following figure shows the disconnection behavior switches and settings.
Behavior (S2, S3)
OFF ON OFF ON
S3 Master defaults are S3 Halt with value retention
S2 in effect (no defaults S2 (outputs remain unchanged)
S1 selected: All outputs S1
S0 are cutoff)* S0

S3 Forced cutoff S3 Reserved for service specialists

S2 of all outputs S2 (Test bay setting)
S1 S1
S0 S0

* As shipped, required setting for operation with a 140 NOA 611 00.

Note: S0 and S1 settings are meaningless.

Subrack The module is installed in DTA 200 primary subrack slot 1-1/1-2.
Mounting Slot When installing the module, be sure to adhere to the installation steps that are
included in the accompanying documentation: Inter-Bus- -S Quantum 140 NOA 611
00 User Manual (P/N 840 USE 419 00).

Compatible A120 The following table lists the A120 I/O modules that are compatible with the DEA 202
I/O Modules module.
Module Type Module Number
Discrete Input, 8 point DEP 208, DEP 209, DEP 210 and DEP 211
Discrete Input, 16 point DEP 214, DEP 215, DEP 216, DEP 217, DEP 218, DEP 220,
DEP 254, DEP 256, DEP 257, DEP 296, DEP 297 and DEO 216,
Discrete Output, 4/8 point DAP 204, DAP 208, DAP 209, DAP 258 and DAP 210
Discrete Output, 16 point DAP 216, DAP 217, DAP 218 and DAO 216

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 383

DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

Module Type Module Number

Discrete Input/Output DAP 212, DAP 220, DAP 250, DAP 252, DAP 253 and DAP 292
Analog Output DAU 202, DAU 208 and DAU 252
Analog Input ADU 204, ADU 205, ADU 206, ADU 216*, ADU 210*, ADU 214*
ADU 254 and ADU 256
* Although these modules are not available in Concept, they can still be used with the DEA
202.

Power Supply The following figure shows a sample DEA 202 power supply connection. You enter
Connection the relevant power supply information in the label inlay.
UB (24 VDC)
M2

1.25 A medium

Modicon A120
time-lag fuse

18 U 18
19 ready5V U 19
24 VDC

20 PE 20
21 M 21
22 M 22
card

384 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

CAUTION
Improper connection danger.
The module’s integrated power supply is non-isolated. Improper
connection (for example, absence of the M2 connection), can lead to
module destruction.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note that the noise immunity can be improved if by-pass capacitors are installed at
the power supply module U and M terminals.

InterBus-S Set up the connection according to the "Remote Bus Node Wiring" section of the
Connection InterBus-S 140 NOA 611 00 User Manual (P/N 840 USE 419 00).
The following figure shows the remote bus port pin assignmentsas viewed from the
solder side.

1 5
6 9 Pin Signal Function
2 4 1 DO Transmit data (+)
7 8 2 DI Receive data (+)
3 3 3 GND Signal ground
5* (5 VDC Out) cannot be used externally
8 7 6 DO Transmit data (-)
4 2 7 DI Receive data (-)
9* RBST Plug identifier
9 6
5 1 *) Incoming remote bus = not used

Sub-D9 “in” plug Sub-D9 “out” socket Pin present

(top) (bottom) No pin present

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 385

DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

DEA 202 LEDs

LED Displays The following table describes the LED displays, which are located on the module
front plate.
No. Label Inlay Color Function
Identifier
18 (left) U Green 24 VDC supply present
19 (left) ready 5 V Green Module ready for service, 5 VDC output voltage present
3 (right) ready Green Coupler ready
4 (right) BA Green Transfer in progress
5 (right) RC Green "Remote bus check", remote bus input monitoring
6 (right) RD Red "Remote bus disabled", remote bus feed-through
terminated (remote bus node diagnosis)

386 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

DEA 202 Specifications

Specifications The following table lists specifications for the DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module.
Assignment
System TSX Compact (A120, 984)
Module area Slot 1-1/1-2 of DTA 200 primary backplane
I/O Map
Register 3x/4x 0 in/ 0 out
Power Supply
External input voltage UB = 24 VDC, max. 0.85 A
Primary fusing 1.25 A medium time-lag fuse
Power on current 20 A, time constant = 1 ms
Tolerances, limiting values 24VDC external power source, 22 ... 30VDC input, peak value= 33VDC
Reference potential M M2
Protective earth PE
Secondary voltage 5.15 VDC, max. 1.6 A, non-isolated
Buffering time Typically 5 ms for 24 VDC
Overload protection Through current limiting
Data Interface
Field bus Through a potential-free RS-485 interface (serial, symmetric)
Processor
Processor type Intel 80C152 / 12 MHz
Data memory 32 KB RAM
Firmware 32 KB EPROM
Mechanical Design
Module Standard double-size module
Format 2 slots
Weight Approx. 500 g
Connections
Power supply 5-pole screw/plug-in terminal block
Remote bus Sub-D9 plug and Sub-D9 socket
Back plane 2 plug connectors 1/3 C30M, 1 socket connector 1/3 R30F
Environmental Characteristics
Regulations VDE 0160, UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142, European Directive on EMC 89/
336/EEC, and Low Voltage Directive 79/23/EEC Standards.
Permissible ambient 0 ... +60 degrees C
temperature
Power dissipation Typically 6 W

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 387

DEA 202 InterBus S Interface Module

388 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEO 216 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEO 216 Input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEO 216 Input Module? 390
Specifications of the DEO 216 Input Module 391

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 389

DEO 216 Input Module

What is the DEO 216 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEO 216 is a 24 Vdc, 16 point discrete input module.
Description It senses input signals received from field sensing devices such as push-button, limit
and proximity switches, or other 24 Vdc input sources and converts those signals
into logic voltage levels that can be used by the controller. Signals are field wired in
two groups, eight signals per group. DEO 216 inputs are not opto–isolated from the
I/O bus.

LEDs The DEO 216 module has one green LED, opposite terminal screw 1, which
indicates when ON that power is available to the 16 inputs below it. The module also
has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws 3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal
screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs are ON, it indicates voltage present
at the corresponding input.
The following figure is a wiring diagram and simplified schematic of the DEO 216
Input module.
24 Vdc
I/O Bus
24 V Common Interface
Green
0.16 A LED Red
1 LED Clamp V
2
In1 3
In2 4
In3 5
In4 6
In5 7
In6 8
In7 9
In8 10
11
12
13
In 9 14
In10 15
In11 16
In12 17
In13 18
In14 19
In15 20
In16 21
22
10Ω

390 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEO 216 Input Module

Specifications of the DEO 216 Input Module

Specifications The following table shows the specifications.

for the DEO 216
DEO216 Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 16
Number of Groups 1
Points/Group 16
Isolation Not isolated from the I/O bus
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 20 ... 30 Vdc for eight inputs
Rated Signal Value +24 Vdc
Internally Provided Source 5 V, < 15 mA from I/O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Electrical ON State Signal Level +12 ... 30 Vdc
Characteristics
OFF State Signal Level -2 ... +5 Vdc
ON State Input Current 7 mA @ 24 Vdc 8.5 mA @ 30 Vdc
Response Time 4 ms (typical)
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
(1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 220 g (.5 lb)
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 391

DEO 216 Input Module

392 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 208 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 208 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 208 Input Module? 394
DEP 208 Input Module LEDs 395
DEP 208 Input Module Field Wiring 396
Using the DEP 208 Input Module wilth Proximity Switches 397
DEP 208 Input Module Specifications 398

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 393

DEP 208 Input Module

What is the DEP 208 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 208 is a discrete input module with eight independent 230 Vac input
Description circuits. It senses input signals from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit
or proximity switches, or other ac input sources and converts those signals into
voltage signals that can be used by the PLC in a logic scan. Signals are field-wired
in one group of eight inputs. Each input is opto-isolated from the I/O bus.

394 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 208 Input Module

DEP 208 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 208 has nine LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw 1 indicates
the presence of 5 V from the I/O bus. Eight red LEDs opposite terminal screws 3, 5,
7, 9, 14, 16, 18, and 20 indicate that voltage is present at inputs 1 ... 8, respectively.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 395

DEP 208 Input Module

DEP 208 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 208 is a discrete input module with eight independent 230 Vac input
circuits. It senses input signals from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit
or proximity switches, or other ac input sources and converts those signals into
voltage signals that can be used by the PLC in a logic scan. Signals are field-wired
in one group of eight inputs. Each input is opto-isolated from the I/O bus.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DEP 208 input module is provided
and Simplified below.
Schematic for ac Neutral I/O Bus
DEP 208 ac Hot Interface
0.16 A
1 Opto First of eight
2 Coupler Input Circuits
In1 3
4
In2 5
Latch
6
In3 7 Red
8 LED
In4 9
10
11
12
13
In5 14
15
In6 16
17
In7 18 Green 5V
19 LED
In8 20
21
22

396 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 208 Input Module

Using the DEP 208 Input Module wilth Proximity Switches

Introduction The leakage current of two-wire proximity switches may be as high as 3 mA. Since
the OFF current rating of the DEP 208 is .5 mA per input, two-wire proximity switches
may trigger false inputs in the module. If you plan to use the DEP 208 in a proximity
switch application, consider the following recommendations to prevent false inputs
from occurring.

Existing To eliminate the possibility of false inputs, place a 10 kOhm resistor between neutral
Installations and each input terminal on the module to shunt off some of the current. See the
diagram below.

New Installations Keep the above current ratings in mind when selecting proximity switches. Three-
wire proximity switches have leakage current levels below .5 mA, and are
recommended in order to avoid the need for the 10 kOhm resistor.
The following diagram illustrates wiring the DEP 208 with a 10 kOhm Resistor.

ac Neutral
ac Hot

0.16 A Fuse

1
10 kΩ Resistor
2
3
4
5
6
Two-wire Proximity Switch
7
8
9
10
11

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 397

DEP 208 Input Module

DEP 208 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of DEP 208 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 8
for DEP 208
Number of Groups 1
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input point
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 230 Vac (+/- 15 percent), 47 ... 63 Hz
Internally Provided Source 5 V, less than 30 mA from the I/O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W (typical)
Electrical Working Voltage Range 195 ... 265 Vac
Characteristics ON Current Minimum 1 mA/input
OFF Current Maximum 0.5 mA/input
0 to 230 V Response Time 25 ms (typical)
230 to 0 V Response Time 50 ms (typical)
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/Terminal One wire: 14 AWG
Two wires: 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/ox 8 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
(1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)
Weight 220 g (.5 lb)
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

398 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 209 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 209 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 209 Input Module? 400
DEP 209 Input Module LEDs 401
DEP 209 Input Module Field Wiring 402
Using the DEP 209 Input Module with Proximity Switches 403
DEP 209 Input Module Specifications 404

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 399

DEP 209 Input Module

What is the DEP 209 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 209 is a discrete input module with eight independent 120 Vac input
Description circuits. It senses input signals from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit
or proximity switches, or other ac input sources and converts those signals into
voltage signals that can be used by the controller in a logic scan. Signals are field-
wired in one group of eight inputs. Each input is opto-isolated from the I/O bus.

400 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 209 Input Module

DEP 209 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 209 has nine LEDs. One green LED opposite terminal screw 1 indicates
the presence of 5 V from the I/O bus. Eight red LEDs opposite terminal screws 3, 5,
7, 9, 14, 16, 18, and 20 indicate that voltage is present at inputs 1 ... 8, respectively.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 401

DEP 209 Input Module

DEP 209 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 209 is a discrete input module with eight independent 120 Vac input
circuits. It senses input signals from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit
or proximity switches, or other ac input sources and converts those signals into
voltage signals that can be used by the controller in a logic scan. Signals are field-
wired in one group of eight inputs. Each input is opto-isolated from the I/O bus.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DEP 209 input module is provided
and Simplified below.
Schematic for
ac Neutral I/O Bus
DEP 209 ac Hot Interface
0.16 A
1 Opto First of Eight
2 Coupler Input Circuits
In1 3
4
In2 5
Latch
6
In3 7 Red
8 LED
In4 9
10
11
12
13
In5 14
15
In6 16
17
In7 18 Green 5V
19 LED
In8 20
21
22

402 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 209 Input Module

Using the DEP 209 Input Module with Proximity Switches

Introduction The leakage current of two-wire proximity switches may be as high as 3 mA. Since
the OFF current rating of the DEP 209 is .5mA/input, two-wire proximity switches
may trigger false inputs in the module. If you plan to use the DEP 209 in a proximity
switch application, consider the following recommendations to prevent false inputs
from occurring.

Existing To eliminate the possibility of false inputs, place a 10 kOhms resistor between
Installations neutral and each input terminal on the module to shunt some of the current.

New Installations Keep the above current ratings in mind when selecting proximity switches. Three-
wire proximity switches have leakage current levels below .5 mA and are
recommended in order to avoid the need for the 10 kOhms resistor.
The following diagram illustrates wiring the DEP 209 with a 10 kOhm resistor.
ac Neutral
ac Hot

0.16 A Fuse

1
10 kΩ Resistor 2
3
4
5
6
Two-wire Proximity Switch
7
8
9
10
11

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 403

DEP 209 Input Module

DEP 209 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of DEP 209 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 8
Number of Groups 1
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 120 Vac (+/- 15 percent)
47 ... 63 Hz
Internally Provided Source from I/O bus 5 V; less than 30 mA
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W typical
Electrical Working Voltage Range 85 ... 138 Vac
Characteristics ON Current Minimum 1 mA/input
OFF Current Maximum 0.5 mA/input
Response Time 0 to 230 V 25 ms typical
230 to 0 V 50 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

404 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 210 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 210 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 210 Input Module? 406
DEP 210 Input Module LEDs 407
DEP 210 Input Module Field Wiring 408
DEP 210 Input Module Specifications 410

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 405

DEP 210 Input Module

What is the DEP 210 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 210 is a 115 Vac, eight-point input module with 1.8 kV isolation between
Description inputs and the bus. The module senses input signals received from field sensing
devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other 115 Vac input
sources and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be used by the
PLC. Signals are field wired in one group of eight signals. Inputs are opto-isolated
from the system bus.

WARNING
Operational Hazard
The DEP 210 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

406 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 210 Input Module

DEP 210 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 210 module has one green LED opposite terminal screw 1. When this LED
is ON, it indicates the presence of working voltage from the PLC. The module also
has eight red LEDs, opposite terminal screws 3, 5, 7, 9, 14, 16, 18, and 20. When
any one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates voltage present at the corresponding input.
Location of the LEDs is shown in the figure below.
A front view and fill-in labels of the DEP 210 is provided below.

DEP 210
DEP 210
1 ready N
2 N
3 1
4
5 2
6
7 3
8
9 4
10
11
N
12
N
13
14 5

15
16 6
17
18 7
19
20 8
21
22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 407

DEP 210 Input Module

DEP 210 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 210 is a 115 Vac, eight-point input module with 1.8 kV isolation between
inputs and the bus. The module senses input signals received from field sensing
devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other 115 Vac input
sources and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be used by the
PLC. Signals are field wired in one group of eight signals. Inputs are opto-isolated
from the system bus.

Wiring Diagram A sample wiring diagram for the DEP 210 input module is provided below.
for DEP 210 AC HOT
AC NEUTRAL

0.2 A

2
Input 1 3

4
Input 2 5
6
Input 3 7
8
Input 4 9
10
11

12
13
Input 5 14

15
Input 6 16
17
Input 7 18
19
Input 8 20

21
22

408 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 210 Input Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 210 input module is provided below.
Schematic for
DEP 210
ac Neutral 1 FIRST OF EIGHT INPUT CIRCUITS

2
1
3
4
Red
5
PAB
6

7
8
9
10
11
5V
12
13 Green

14
0V PAB
15
16
17
18
19
8 20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 409

DEP 210 Input Module

DEP 210 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of DEP 210 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 8
for DEP 210
Number of Groups 1
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
1.8 kV field-to-bus
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 115 Vac
Rated Signal Value 115 Vac
47 ... 65 Hz
Internally Provided Source from I/ 5V
O bus 35 mA maximum
Internal Power Dissipation 3 W typical
Electrical ON State Signal Level 80 ... 132 Vac
Characteristics OFF State Signal Level 0 ... 35 Vac
ON State Input Current 15.5 mA/input @ 115 Vac
6 mA @ 80 V, 20 mA @ 132 V
OFF State Input Current 3 mA maximum
Response Time ON 10 ms typical
OFF 40 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 250 g
0.55 lb
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

410 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 211 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 211 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 211 Input Module? 412
DEP 211 Input Module LEDs 413
DEP 211 Input Module Field Wiring 414
DEP 211 Input Module Specifications 416

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 411

DEP 211 Input Module

What is the DEP 211 Input Module?

Brief Product
Description
Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/
211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

The DEP 211 is a 115 Vac, eight-point isolated input module. The module senses
input signals received from field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 115 Vac sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the controller. Signals are field wired in one group of eight
signals. Inputs are isolated from the system bus and from one another.

WARNING
Operational Hazard
The DEP 211 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

412 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 211 Input Module

DEP 211 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 211 module has one green LED opposite terminal screw 1. When this LED
is ON, it indicates the presence of working voltage from the controller. The module
also has 8 red LEDs, opposite terminal screws 3, 5, 7, 9, 14, 16, 18, and 20. When
any one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates voltage present at the corresponding input.
Location of the LEDs is shown in the figure below.
A front view of the DEP 211 is provided below.

DEP 211

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 413

DEP 211 Input Module

DEP 211 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 211 is a 115 Vac, eight-point isolated input module. The module senses
input signals received from field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 115 Vac sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the controller. Signals are field wired in one group of eight
signals. Inputs are isolated from the system bus and from one another.

Wiring Diagram A sample wiring diagram for the DEP 211 input module is provided below.
for DEP 211
ac Hot
ac Neutral

0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A

1
2
Input 1
3

4
Input 2
5
6

Input 3 7
8
Input 4 9
10
11

12
13

Input 5 14
15

Input 6 16
17
Input 7
18

19
Input 8
20
21
22

414 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 211 Input Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 211 input module is provided below.
Schematic for
DEP 211
1 FIRST OF EIGHT INPUT CIRCUITS

2
1
1 3
4
5 Red
PAB
6
7
8
9
10
11
5V
12
13 Green

14
0V PAB
15
16
17
18
19
8 20
ac Neutral 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 415

DEP 211 Input Module

DEP 211 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of DEP 211 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 8
for DEP 211
Number of Groups 8
Points/group 1
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
1.8 kV between inputs
Power Supplies External Source Requirement None
Rated Signal Value 115 Vac, 47 ... 65 Hz
Internally Provided Source from I/O 5 V
bus 35 mA maximum
Internal Power Dissipation 3 W typical
Electrical ON State Signal Level 80 ... 132 Vac
Characteristics OFF State Signal Level 0 ... 35 Vac
ON State Input Current 15.5 mA/input @ 115 Vac
6 mA @ 80 V; 20 mA @ 132 V
OFF State Input Current 3 mA maximum
Response Time ON 10 ms typical
OFF 40 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 8 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 250 g
0.55 lb
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

416 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 214/254 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 214/254 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 214/254 Input Module? 418
DEP 214/254 Input Module LEDs 419
DEP 214/254 Input Module Field Wiring 420
DEP 214/254 Input Module Specifications 422

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 417

DEP 214/254 Input Module

What is the DEP 214/254 Input Module?

Brief Product
Description
Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/
211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

The DEP 214/254 is a 12 ... 60 Vdc 16-point discrete input module. It senses levels
provided by field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other
dc input sources, and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be
used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight signals/group. Inputs
are optically isolated from the system bus. The DEP 254 functions just like the DEP
214 except that the DEP 254 operates at extended temperature.

Note: DEP 254 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal coating
model is DEP 254C and it meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

418 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 214/254 Input Module

DEP 214/254 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 214/254 can be installed in any slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201,
and 202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and peripheral connections on
the front. The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be filled in with relevant
information (signal values, etc.) in the spaces provided.
A front view with DEP 214 label is provided below.

DEP 214
DEP 214
1 U 1
2 U 2
3 1 3
4 2 4
5 3 5
6 4 Input 6
7 5 7
8 6 8
9 7 9
10 8 10
11 M 11
12 U 12
13 U 13
14 9 14
15 10 15
16 11 16
12 17
Input

17
18 13 18
19 14 19
20 15 20
21 16 21
22 M 22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 419

DEP 214/254 Input Module

DEP 214/254 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 214/254 is a 12 ... 60 Vdc 16-point discrete input module. It senses levels
provided by field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other
dc input sources, and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be
used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight signals/group. Inputs
are optically isolated from the system bus. The DEP 254 functions just like the DEP
214 except that the DEP 254 operates at extended temperature.

Wiring Diagram A sample wiring diagram for the DEP 214/254 input module is provided below.
for DEP 214/254
12 ... 60 Vdc
Common

0.16 A
0.16 A DEP 214
1 U 1
2 U 2
I1 3 1 3
4 2 4
5 3 5

input
6 4 6
7 5 7
8 6 8
9 7 9
I8 10 10
8
11 M 11
12 U 12
13 U 13
I9 14 9 14
15 10 15
16 11 16
17 12 17
18 13 18
19 14 19
20 15 20
I16 21 16 21
22 M 22
card

420 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 214/254 Input Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 214/254 input module is provided below.
Schematic for
DEP 214/254

First of 16 Input Circuits

12 ... 60 Vdc 1 Red
2
I1 3 COMP
4
5
6 Green
7 I
8 K
9
I8 10
COM 11
12 ... 60 Vdc 12
13
I9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
COM 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 421

DEP 214/254 Input Module

DEP 214/254 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 214/254 input specifications.

Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 16
for DEP 214/254
Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 12 ... 60 Vdc for eight inputs
Internally Provided Source from I/O bus 5 V; 22 mA maximum

The following table lists DEP 214/254 switching levels.

Signal Input 12 V 24 V 48 V 60 V
Signal Level OFF -0.6 ... +1.8 V -3 ... +5 V -6 ... +10 V -3 ... +9 V
Signal Level ON +9 ... +15 V +11 ... +30 V +33 ... +60 V +45 ... +75V
Current OFF -0.6 ... +1 mA -1.7 ... +2.9 mA -3.4 ... +2.5 mA -1.7 ... + 2.5mA
Current ON +5.1 ... +7.1 mA +6.0 ... +7.1 mA +2.0 ... +2.5 mA +2.0 ... +2.5mA
Reference Current less than or equal less than or equal less than or equal less than or equal
to 20 mA to 10 mA to 7 mA to 7 mA

DEP 214/254 Specifications (continued)

ON State Input Current 7 mA @ 24 Vdc
8.5 mA @ 30 Vdc
Response Time 4 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/ terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
Temperature Ambient Operating 0 ... 60 degrees C for DEP214
-40 ... +70 degrees C for DEP254
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 260 g
0.57 lb
Agency DEP214: VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards.
Approvals
DEP254C: Railway EN 50 155; EMC 89/336/EEC Standards. UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142;
FM Class I, Div 2 pending

422 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 215 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 215 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 215 Input Module? 424
DEP 215 Input Module LEDs 425
DEP 215 Input Module Field Wiring 426
Unique True Low Characteristics of the DEP 215 Input Module 428
DEP 215 Input Module Specifications 429

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 423

DEP 215 Input Module

What is the DEP 215 Input Module?

Brief Product
Description
Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/
211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

The DEP 215 is a TTL, 16-point discrete input module. It senses levels provided by
field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other TTL input
sources, and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be used by the
PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight signals/group. Inputs are opto-
isolated from the system bus.

424 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 215 Input Module

DEP 215 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 215 module has two green LEDs, opposite terminal screws 1 and 12.
When one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates that power is available to the group
directly below it. The module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws
3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs
are ON, it indicates a -1 ... +2 Vdc level present at the corresponding input.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 425

DEP 215 Input Module

DEP 215 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 215 is a TTL, 16-point discrete input module. It senses levels provided by
field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other TTL input
sources, and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be used by the
PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight signals/group. Inputs are opto-
isolated from the system bus.

Wiring Diagram A sample wiring diagram for the DEP 215 input module is provided below.
for DEP 215
5 VDC
5 V Common
0.16A 0.16A

1
2
In1 3
In2 4
In3 5
In4 6
In5 7
In6 8
In7 9
In8 10
11
12
13
In9
14
In10 15
In11 16
In12 17
In13 18
In14 19
In15 20
In16 21
22

426 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 215 Input Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 215 input module is provided below.
Schematic for
DEP 215 I/O Bus
Interface

First of 16 Input Circuits 5V

Red
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Green
9
GND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 427

DEP 215 Input Module

Unique True Low Characteristics of the DEP 215 Input Module

Introduction This section is intended for DEP 215 16-point TTL input module users who have
installed or are otherwise familiar with 200, 500 or 800 Series I/O TTL input modules.

True Low Module These users should be aware that:

Step Action
1 The DEP 215 is a True Low module; therefore:
l a HIGH (4 ... 5.5 Vdc) input level to the DEP 215 is read as a logic zero (0) by the
system PLC
l a low (-1 ... +2 Vdc) level is read as a logic 1
2 Conversely, other I/O family TTL input modules are traditionally True High; therefore:
l +5 Vdc input levels to other I/O family TTL input modules are read as logic 1
l low or ground input levels are read as logic 0

DEP 215 Input

Module Layout
CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Traffic Copping the DEP 215 as BCD and using input devices
associated with other series traditional True High modules will cause
the controller’s BCD conversion to produce unexpected results.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

For example, refer to the module input layout in the following illustration.

COM 0
COM 1
0 1
+5V 1 +5V 0
1 (LSB) 0 (LSB)
CONVENTIONAL DEP 215

If the DEP 215 were substituted for an older series TTL input module in a system
and I/O Mapped as BCD, the four bottom inputs would be interpreted as an invalid
decimal 12 by the PLC. Since this interpretation is a number greater than 9, the
internal conversion result would be zero. A conventional module’s conversion value
would be decimal 3. In this case, inverting all of the field device inputs to the DEP
215 or changing to a device with complementary outputs results in usable data.

428 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 215 Input Module

DEP 215 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 215 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 16
for DEP 215
Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001 (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 5 Vdc for eight inputs
Rated Signal Value Sinking device
Internally Provided Source from I/O bus 5 V; 25 mA maximum
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W typical
Electrical False Condition Signal Level 4 ... 5 Vdc
Characteristics True Condition Signal Level -1 ... +2 Vdc
True Condition Input Current 3.5 mA @ 0 Vdc
Response Time 1 ms typical
Operating Mode True Low
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb.
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 429

DEP 215 Input Module

430 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 216/256 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 216/256 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 216/256 Input Module? 432
DEP 216/256 Input Module LEDs 433
DEP 216/256 Input Module Field Wiring 434
DEP 216/256 Input Module Specifications 435

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 431

DEP 216/256 Input Module

What is the DEP 216/256 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 216/256 is a 24 Vdc, 16-point discrete input module. It senses input signals
Description received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 24 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight
signals per group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus. The DEP 256
functions just like the DEP 216 except that the DEP 256 operates at extended
temperature.

Note: The DEP 256 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is DEP 256C and it meets Railway standard EN 50 155.

432 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 216/256 Input Module

DEP 216/256 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 216/256 module has two green LEDs, opposite terminal screws 1 and 12.
When one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates that power is available to the eight inputs
directly below it. The module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws
3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs
are ON, it indicates voltage present at the corresponding input.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 433

DEP 216/256 Input Module

DEP 216/256 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 216/256 is a 24 Vdc, 16-point discrete input module. It senses input signals
received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 24 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight
signals per group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus. The DEP 256
functions just like the DEP 216 except that the DEP 256 operates at extended
temperature.

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 216/256 input module is provided below.
Schematic for
DEP 216/256
24 Vdc I/O Bus
24 V Common Interface
0.16A Green

1
2 5V
In1 3
In2 4 First of 16
In3 5 Input Circuits
In4 6
In5 7 Opto
In6 8 Red Coupler
In7 9
In8 10
11 GND
12
13
In9 14
In10 15
In11 16
In12 17
In13 18
In14 19
In15 20
In16 21
22

434 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 216/256 Input Module

DEP 216/256 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 216/256 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Inputs 16
for DEP 216/256
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Power External Source Requirement 24 Vdc for eight inputs
Supplies Rated Signal Value 24 Vdc +25 percent/-15 percent
Internally Provided Source from I/O 5 V; 15 mA
bus
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W typical
Electrical ON State Signal Level 12 ... 30 Vdc
Characteristics
OFF State Signal Level -2 ... +5 Vdc
ON State Input Current 7 mA @ 24 Vdc
8.5 mA @ 30 Vdc
Response Time 4 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 degrees C for DEP216
Characteristics -40 ... +70 degrees C for DEP256
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb
Agency DEP216: VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2
Approvals Standards.
DEP256C: Railway standard EN 50 155; European Directive EMC 89/336/
EEC. UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 pending.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 435

DEP 216/256 Input Module

436 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 217 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 217 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 217 Input Module? 438
DEP 217 Input Module LEDs 439
DEP 217 Input Module Field Wiring 440
DEP 217 Input Module Specifications 441

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 437

DEP 217 Input Module

What is the DEP 217 Input Module?

Brief Product
Description
Note: Some A120 I/O modules (DEP 211/214/215/217, DAP211/217, ADU204/
211/214/216, DAU204, VIC2xx, and MOT20x) require a loadable (SW-IODR-001)
for proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984-1xx, E984-24x/251/255) with
Modsoft.

The DEP 217 is a 24 Vdc, 16-point discrete true low input module. It senses levels
provided by field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other
24 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be
used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight signals/group. Inputs
are opto-isolated from the system bus.

Note: The DEP 217 is a true low module; therefore, a high (greater than or equal
to external source minus 6Vdc) is read by the PLC as a logic 0. Conversely, a low
(less than or equal to external source minus 12Vdc) is read by the PLC as a logic 1.

438 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 217 Input Module

DEP 217 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 217 module has two green LEDs, opposite terminal screws 1 and 12.
When one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates that power is available to the group
directly below it. The module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws
3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs
are ON, it indicates 3 external source minus 12 V at the corresponding input.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 439

DEP 217 Input Module

DEP 217 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 217 is a 24 Vdc, 16-point discrete true low input module. It senses levels
provided by field devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other
24 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be
used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight signals/group. Inputs
are opto-isolated from the system bus.

Note: The DEP 217 is a true low module; therefore, a high (greater than or equal
to external source minus 6Vdc) is read by the PLC as a logic 0. Conversely, a low
(less than or equal to external source minus 12Vdc) is read by the PLC as a logic 1.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DEP 217 input module is provided
and Simplified below.
Schematic for
DEP 217
24 Vdc
I/O Bus
24 V Common Interface
Red
0.16 A
First of 16 Input Circuits 5V
1
2
In1 3
In2 4
In3 5
In4 6
In5 7
In6 8
In7 Green
9 GND
In8 10
11
12
13
In9
14
In10 15
In11 16
In12 17
In13 18
In14 19
In15 20
In16 21
22

440 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 217 Input Module

DEP 217 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 217 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 16
for DEP 217
Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001 (See Requirements for CE Compliance, p. 779)
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 24 Vdc for eight inputs
Rated Signal Value Sinking device
Internally Provided Source from 5 V; 25 mA
I/O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 3 W typical
Electrical False Condition Signal Level greater than or equal to external
Characteristics source minus 6 Vdc
True Condition Signal Level less than or equal to external source
minus 12 Vdc
True Condition Input Current 7 mA @ 0 Vdc
Response Time 4 ms typical
Operating Mode True Low
Wire Size/ One wire 14 AWG
terminal Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb.
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 441

DEP 217 Input Module

442 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 218 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 218 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 218 Input Module? 444
DEP 218 Input Module LEDs 445
DEP 218 Input Module Field Wiring 446
DEP 218 Input Module Specifications 448

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 443

DEP 218 Input Module

What is the DEP 218 Input Module?

Brief Product
Description
WARNING
Operational Hazard
The DEP 218 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

The DEP 218 is a 115 Vac, 16-point input module with 1.8kV isolation between field
devices and the bus. It senses input signals received from field sensing devices
such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other 115 Vac input sources
and converts those signals into logic voltage levels that can be used by the
controller. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight signals/group. Inputs are opto-
isolated from the system bus.

Note: The DEP 218 is designed for capacitive loads. Without any discharge
bypass resistor. When using field devices with resistive loads you should use 120K
1/4 Watt resistors (approximately) across the input terminals of the DEP 218. This
allows accurate switching of phase firing type solid state sensors by ensuring that
the capacitor discharges within the sensor required 50 milliseconds. If your
application permits, a DEP 210 may be substituted for the DEP 218. The DEP 210
has an internal input discharge circuit.

444 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 218 Input Module

DEP 218 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 218 module has one green LED opposite terminal screw 1. When this LED
is ON, it indicates the presence of working voltage from the power supply. The
module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws 3 ... 10 and eight
opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates
voltage present at the corresponding input.
A front view and fill-in labels of the DEP 218 module is provided below.

DEP 218
DEP 218

1 ready N

2 N
3 1
4 2
5 3
6 4
7 5
8 6
9 7
10 8
11
N
12
N
13
9
14
10
15
11
16
17 12
22 13
18
14
19
15
20
16
21

card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 445

DEP 218 Input Module

DEP 218 Input Module Field Wiring

Wiring Diagram A sample wiring diagram for the DEP 218 input module is provided below.
for DEP 218
ac Neutral
ac Hot

ac Hot
ac Neutral
0.16 A 0.16 A

1
2
Input 1 3
Input 2 4
Input 3 5
Input 4 6
Input 5 7
Input 6 8
Input 7 9
Input 8 10
11

12
13
Input 9
14
Input 10
15
Input 11
16
Input 12
17
Input 13 18
Input 14
19
Input 15 20
Input 16 21
22

446 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 218 Input Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 218 input module is provided below.
Schematic for
DEP 218

FIRST OF 16 INPUT CIRCUITS

ac Neutral 1

5 Red
PAB
6

10
11
5V
12
Green
13

14
0V
15
16
17

18

19
20

21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 447

DEP 218 Input Module

DEP 218 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 218 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Inputs 16
for DEP 218
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
point, 1.8 kV field-to-bus
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 115 Vac
Rated Signal Value 115 Vac
47 ... 65 Hz
Internally Provided Source from the I/O bus 5 V, less tghan 50 mA
Internal Power Dissipation 3 W typical
Electrical ON State Signal Level 80 ... 132 Vac
Characteristics OFF State Signal Level 0 ... 35 Vac
ON State Input Current 15.5 mA/input @ 115 Vac
6 mA @ 80 V, 20 mA @ 132 V
OFF State Input Current 3 mA maximum
Response Time ON 10 ms typical
OFF 40 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/ terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 300 g
0.66 lb
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards
Approvals

448 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 220 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 220 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 220 Input Module? 450
DEP 220 Input Module LEDs 451
DEP 220 Input Module Field Wiring 452
DEP 220 Input Module Specifications 454

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 449

DEP 220 Input Module

What is the DEP 220 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 220 is a 24 Vdc +25 percent/-15 percent, 16-point discrete input module
Description similar to the DEP 216 module, with a much faster response time (0.5 ms). It senses
input signals received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and
proximity switches, or other 24 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into
logic voltage levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two
groups, eight signals per group. Inputs are opt-isolated from the system bus.

CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Modicon recommends using two separate power sources with the DEP
220-one for outputs and one for inputs-in order to avoid electrical
switching noise.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: Inputs do not work if output supply is disconnected.

450 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 220 Input Module

DEP 220 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 220 module has two green LEDs, opposite terminal screws 1 and 12.
When one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates that power available to the eight inputs
directly below it. The module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws
3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs
are ON, it indicates voltage present at the corresponding input.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 451

DEP 220 Input Module

DEP 220 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 220 is a 24 Vdc +25 percent/-15 percent, 16-point discrete input module
similar to the DEP 216 module, with a much faster response time (0.5 ms). It senses
input signals received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and
proximity switches, or other 24 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into
logic voltage levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two
groups, eight signals per group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus.

CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Modicon recommends using two separate power sources with the DEP
220-one for outputs and one for inputs-in order to avoid electrical
switching noise.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: Inputs do not work if output supply is disconnected.

452 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 220 Input Module

Wiring Diagram A sample wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DEP 220 input module is
and Simplified provided below.
Schematic
24 Vdc
I/O Bus
24 V Common Interface
0.16 A Green
1
2 5V
In1 3
In2 4
In3 5 Red
In4 6
In5 7 Opto
In6 8 Coupler
In7 9
In8 10 First of 16
11 Input Circuits
GND
12
13
In9 14
In10 15
In 11 16
In12 17
In 13 18
In14 19
In15 20
In16 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 453

DEP 220 Input Module

DEP 220 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 220 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Inputs 16
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 20 ... 30 Vdc for eight inputs
Rated Signal Value +24 Vdc
Internally Provided Source from the I/O bus 5 V; less than 25 mA
Internal Power Dissipation 2 W typical
Electrical ON State Signal Level 12 ... 30 Vdc
Characteristics OFF State Signal Level -2 ... +5 Vdc
ON State Input Current 7 mA @ 24 Vdc
8.5 mA @ 30 Vdc
Response Time 0.5 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb
Agency VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards
Approvals

454 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 257 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 257 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 257 Input Module? 456
DEP 257 Input Module LEDs 457
DEP 257 Input Module Field Wiring 458
DEP 257 Input Module Specifications 459

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 455

Abbreviated title of Chapter

What is the DEP 257 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 257 is an extended temperature( -40 ... +705 C), 110 Vdc 40%, 16-point
Description discrete input module. The full operational range of this module is 66 ... 154 Vdc. It
senses input signals received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit
and proximity switches, or other dc input sources and converts those signals into
logic voltage levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two
groups, eight signals per group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus.

Note: The DEP 257 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is DEP 257C.

456 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Abbreviated title of Chapter

DEP 257 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 257 module has two amber LEDs, opposite terminal screws 1 and 12.
When one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates that power is available to the eight inputs
directly below it. The module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws
3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs
are ON, it indicates voltage present at the corresponding input.

CAUTION
Operational Hazard
Use of SIM 011 with DEP 257 is not allowed.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Note: To I/O Map the DEP 257 module in Modsoft you must select DEP 216. Both
modules share a host driver and have similar characteristics.

A front view with DEP 257 label is provided below.

DEP 257
DEP 257
1 U 1
2 U 2
3 1 3
4 2 4
5 3 5
Input

6 4 6
7 5 7
8 6 8
9 7 9
10 8 10
11 M 11
12 U 12
13 U 13
14 9 14
15 10 15
16 11 16
Input

17 12 17
18 13 18
19 14 19
20 15 20
21 16 21
22 22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 457

Abbreviated title of Chapter

DEP 257 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 257 is an extended temperature( -40 ... +70 degrees C), 110 Vdc +/-40
percent, 16-point discrete input module. The full operational range of this module is
66 ... 154 Vdc. It senses input signals received from field sensing devices such as
pushbuttons, limit and proximity switches, or other dc input sources and converts
those signals into logic voltage levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field
wired in two groups, eight signals per group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the
system bus.

Note: The DEP 257 model is available with conformal coating. The conformal
coating model is DEP 257C.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram and simplified schematic for the DEP 257 input module is provided
and Simplified below.
Schematic

110 Vdc±40% I/O Bus

dc common Interface

0.16 A 0.16 A
1
2 First of 16 Input Circuits
I1 3
4
5
6
7
8 GN
9 RD
I8 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I16 21
22

458 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Abbreviated title of Chapter

DEP 257 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 257 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Number of Inputs 16
Topology Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 110 Vdc +/-40 percent for each group
of eight inputs
External Power 40 mA all points on
Rated Signal Value 66 ... 154 Vdc
Internally Provided Source from I/ 5 Vdc @ 25 mA
O bus
Internal Power Dissipation 3 W typical
Electrical ON State Signal Level 55 ... 170 Vdc
Characteristics OFF State Signal Level -2 ... +10 Vdc
ON State Input Current 2.2 mA @ 110 Vdc
Response Time 6 ms typical
Sensor Supply 110 Vdc +/-40 percent for each group
of 8 inputs each residual ripple max 20
percent
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Environmental Extended Operating Temperature -40 ... +70 degrees C
Range
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb
Agency DEP257: UL 508; cUL; CSA 22.2 No. 142; and European Directive EMC
Approvals 89/336/EEC Standards
DEP257C: Railway standard EN 50 155; UL 508; cUL; CSA 22.2 No. 142;
and European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC Standards

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 459

Abbreviated title of Chapter

460 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 296 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 296 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 296 Input Module? 462
DEP 296 Input Module LEDs 463
DEP 296 Input Module Field Wiring 464
DEP 296 Input Module Specifications 466

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 461

DEP 296 Input Module

What is the DEP 296 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 296 is a 60 Vdc, 16-point isolated input module. It senses input signals
Description received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 60 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight
signals/group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus.

462 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 296 Input Module

DEP 296 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 296 module has two green LEDs, opposite terminal screws 1 and 12.
When one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates that power is available to the eight inputs
directly below it. The module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws
3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21; when any one of these LEDs
are ON, it indicates voltage present at the corresponding input.
A front view with DEP 296 label is provided below.

DEP 296 DEP 296

U 1
1
U 2
2
1 3
3
2 4
4
3 5

Input
5
4 6
6
5 7
7
6 8
8
7 9
9
8 10
10
M 11
11
U 12
12 U 13
13 9 14
14 10 15
15 11 16
Input

16 12 17
17 18
13
18 14 19
19 15 20
20 16 21
21 M 22
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 463

DEP 296 Input Module

DEP 296 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 296 is a 60 Vdc, 16-point isolated input module. It senses input signals
received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 60 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight
signals/group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the DEP 296 input module is provided below.
60 Vdc
60 V COMMON

0.15A

DEP 296
1 U 1
2 U 2
1 3 1 3
2 4 2 4
3 5 3 5
4 6 4 6
Input

5 7 5 7
6 8 6 8
7 9 7 9
8 10 8 10
11 M 11
12 U 12
13 U 13
1 14 9 14
2 15 10 15
3 16 11 16
4 17 12 17
Input

5 18 13 18
6 19 14 19
7 20 15 20
21 16 21
22 M 22

464 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 296 Input Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 296 input module is provided below.
Schematic

60 Vdc 1
2 FIRST OF 16 INPUT CIRCUITS
1 3
2 4
3 5
4 6
5 7 Green
6 8 PAB
7 9 Red
8
10
11
60 V COMM

60 Vdc 12
13
9 14
10 15
11 16
12 17
13 18
14 19
15 20
16 21
60 V COMM 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 465

DEP 296 Input Module

DEP 296 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 296 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 16
Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each in put
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 60 Vdc
125 mA
Internally Provided Source from I/O bus 5 V
25 mA maximum
Internal Power Dissipation 4 W typical
Input Characteristics Rated Signal Value +60 Vdc
ON State Signal Level 35 ... 70 Vdc
OFF State Signal Level -4 ... +13 Vdc
ON State Input Current 7 mA @ 60 Vdc
Response Time 4 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

466 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the DEP 297 Input
Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the DEP 297 input module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the DEP 297 Input Module? 468
DEP 297 Input Module LEDs 469
DEP 297 Input Module Field Wiring 470
DEP297 Input Module Specifications 472

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 467

DEP 297 Input Module

What is the DEP 297 Input Module?

Brief Product The DEP 297 is a 48 Vdc, 16-point isolated input module. It senses input signals
Description received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 48 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight
signals/group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus.

Note: To I/O Map the DEP 297 module in Modsoft you must select DEP 216. Both
modules share a host driver and have similar characteristics.

468 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 297 Input Module

DEP 297 Input Module LEDs

LEDs The DEP 297 module has two green LEDs, opposite terminal screws 1 and 12.
When one of these LEDs is ON, it indicates that power is available to the eight inputs
directly below it. The module also has 16 red LEDs, eight opposite terminal screws
3 ... 10 and eight opposite terminal screws 14 ... 21. When any one of these LEDs
is ON, it indicates voltage present at the corresponding input.
A front view with DEP 297 label is provided below.

DEP 297
DEP 297

1 U 1
2 U 2
3 1 3
4 2 4
5 3 5

Input
6 4 6
7 5 7
8 6 8
9 7 9
10 8 10
11 M 11
U 12
12
U 13
13
9 14
14
10 15
15
11 16
16
12 17
17
Input

18 13 18
14 19
19
15 20
20
21 16 21
22 M 22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 469

DEP 297 Input Module

DEP 297 Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The DEP 297 is a 48 Vdc, 16-point isolated input module. It senses input signals
received from field sensing devices such as pushbuttons, limit and proximity
switches, or other 48 Vdc input sources and converts those signals into logic voltage
levels that can be used by the PLC. Signals are field wired in two groups, eight
signals/group. Inputs are opto-isolated from the system bus.

Note: To I/O Map the DEP 297 module in Modsoft you must select DEP 216. Both
modules share a host driver and have similar characteristics.

Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the DEP 297 input module is provided below.
48 Vdc
48 V COMMON

0.15A

DEP 297

U 1
1 U 2
2 1 3
1 3 2 4
2 4 3 5
3 5 6
4
Input

4 6
5 7
5 7
6 8
6 8
7 9
7 9
8 10
8 10
M 11
11
U 12
12 U 13
13 9 14
9 14 15
10
10 15 16
11
11 16 17
12
12 17 18
13
13 18
14 19
14 19
15 20
15 20
16 21
16 21
M 22
22
card

470 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 DEP 297 Input Module

Simplified A simplified schematic for the DEP 297 input module is provided below.
Schematic

48 Vdc 1
2 FIRST OF 16 INPUT CIRCUITS
1 3
2 4
3 5
4 6
5 7
Green
6 8 PAB
7 9
Red
8 10
48 V COMM 11

48 Vdc 12
13
9 14
10 15
11 16
12 17
13 18
14 19
15 20
16 21
48 V COMM 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 471

DEP 297 Input Module

DEP297 Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains DEP 297 input module specifications.
Specifications
Module Topology Number of Inputs 16
Number of Groups 2
Points/group 8
Isolation Optocoupler on each input
Power Supplies External Source Requirement 48 Vdc
125 mA
Internally Provided Source from I/O bus 5 V
25 mA maximum
Internal Power Dissipation 3 W typical
Input Characteristics Rated Signal Value +48 Vdc
ON State Signal Level 29 ... 56 Vdc
OFF State Signal Level -3 ... +10 Vdc
ON State Input Current 7 mA @ 48 Vdc
Response Time 4 ms typical
Operating Mode True High
Wire Size/terminal One wire 14 AWG
Two wires 20 AWG
I/O Map Discrete 1x/0x 16 in/0 out
Dimensions WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 220 g
0.5 lb
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA 22.2 No.142 Standards

472 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the FRQ 204/254
Frequency Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module? 474
Physical Characteristics of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module 475
Operating Modes of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module 476
Configuration of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module 477
Operation and LED Displays of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module 481
Specifications of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module 482

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 473

FRQ 204/254

What is the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module?

Brief Product The FRQ-204/254 serves the purpose of frequency and speed measurement for the
Description Compact PLCs and has the following features:
l 4Frequency inputs for counting pulse voltages 5 VDC (TTL) or 24 VDC, Counting
frequency up to 1 kHz (1 x up to 50 kHz)
l 4fixed assigned semiconductor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A for Limit monitoring with:
l Short–circuit and overload protection
l Switch–off with value saving
l Group indication of the overload/ short–circuit switch–off
l Group short–circuit signal
l Hardware reset for the acknowledgment of the overload
l 4process inputs 24 VDC for free use
l several LED indicators for function tracking and monitoring

Note: The FRQ 254 functions just like the FRQ 204 except that the FRQ 254
operates at extended temperature.

The FRQ-204/254 can be inserted on any I/O slot in the subracks AS-HDTA-200,
AS-HDTA-201 and AS-HDTA-202.
The power supply is obtained:
l Internally with 5 VDC via the I/O bus
l Externally with 24 VDC for 24 V counter inputs, outputs and enable inputs
l If required, an addition externally with 5 VDC with 5 V input pulses.

474 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 FRQ 204/254

Physical Characteristics of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module

Illustration The module a has bus connection on the rear and peripheral connection via screw/
plug–in terminals on the front. One of the enclosed fill–in labels is inserted in the
detachable cover of the subrack near the viewing field for the LED indicators.
System relevant data should be entered in the provided fields (e.g. signal names).

FRQ 204
FRQ 204
1 U 1
2 U 2
3 1 3
Reset button 4 * 4
5 2 5

frequency
6 * 6
7 3 7
8 * 8
9 4 9
10 * 10
11 M 11
12 ready U 12
13 I>reset U 13
14 1 14
output
15 2 15
16 3 16
17 4 17
18 1 18
19 2 19
input

20 3 20
21 4 21
22 M 22
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 475

FRQ 204/254

Operating Modes of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module

FRQ 204/254 The module comprises 4 independent hardware counters for the following operating
Operating Modes modes:
l Frequency measurement <20 Hz, <1 kHz, <50 kHz
l Speed measurement <1 200 rev/min., <60 000 rev/min., <65 520 rev/min.
The above mentioned operating modes and the required parameters should be
defined in the parameters dialog screen of the panel software.
This module is a I/O bus node with isolation to the process peripherals.
In case of overload or short–circuit the corresponding output is switched off. The
yellow LED indicates the overload. The reset button provides the acknowledgement.
The outputs can be operated only when 24 V supply is available. When the module
is inserted with voltage supply on (24 V and 5 V supply), all the outputs take 0 V
position. The 4 discrete inputs (Input 1 ... 4 with LEDs) are available as free process
inputs for your use. There is no functional assignment to the counter.

FRQ 204/254 The following diagram describes the architecture of the FRQ 204/205 frequency
Block Diagram module.

Process
Inputs

PROCESSOR PAB

Counter PAB
Inputs

Outputs
RESET

476 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 FRQ 204/254

Configuration of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module

I/O Mapping This modules uses 5 3x input registers as detailed here.

1 = Input 4 active (24 VDC)

1 = Input 3 active (24 VDC)

1 = Input 2 active (24 VDC)

1 = Input 1active (24 VDC)

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

1 = Channel 4 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 3 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 2 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 1 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 4 lower limiting value

1 = Channel 3 lower limiting value

1 = Channel 2 lower limiting value

1 = Channel 1 lower limiting value

Bits 12 ... 15 are not used

Note: Bits 4 ... 7 are high when the value is >= the upper limit. Bits 0 ... 3 are high
when the value is <= the lower limit.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 477

FRQ 204/254

The 3x register is shown below.

3x-register 2 (frequency/revolution data)

MSB LSB

3x-register 5 (frequency/revolution data)

MSB LSB

I/O Node Number Select the I/O slot number via the I/O map configuration and set the addressing of
the 3x registers to be used.

Wiring l For the counter input connection please use shielded cables, e.g. JE–LiYCY 2 x
2 x 0.5 mm2 (P/N E–Nr. 424 234 035). All counter inputs can be combined
together in one common shielded cable, e.g. LiYrdf(Cgv)Y 5 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 (P/N
E–No. 424 238 059)
l The maximum cable length is 100 m
l The shield should be connected on one side with a short cable (<20 cm) to earth
ground. The cable shield should be grounded on both sides when higher noise
levels are present.
l The cable should not be combined together with supply lines or similar sources
of electrical interference. Distance >0.5 m.

478 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 FRQ 204/254

Connection and The figure below illustrates a connection example for counter input F1 with 5 V input
Signal Address pulses (left) for systems with higher noise level (right).
Assignment
(+5V) (+5V)
(+24V) (+24V)
(Common) (Common)
(+24V)
2A 0.05A 2A 0.05A filtered
FRQ 204
1 U 1 1
U
2 U 2 2
3 1 3
F1 3

frequency
F1 4
4 * 4
2 5
F2 5 F2 5
6 * 6 6
7 7
F3 3 F3 7
8 * 8 8
9 4 9 9
F4 F4
10 * 10 10
M M
11 M 11 11
U 12 ready U 12 U 12
13 I>resetU13 13
O1 O1
1 14
input output

O2 14 14
O2
15 2 15 15
O3 O3
O4 16 3 16 O4 16
I1 17 4 17 I1 17
1 18
I2 18 18 I2
I3 19 2 19 I3 19
I4 20 3 20 I4 20
21 4 21 21
22 M 22 22
card

Note: The example shows a 5 V pulse generator that requires a supply voltage of
24 VDC. Supply it from terminal 1.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 479

FRQ 204/254

The following figure illustrates a connection example for counter input F1 with 24 V
input pulses.
(+24V)
(Common)

2A
FRQ 204
1 U 1
U 2 U 2
F1 3 1 3
4 * 4
F2

frequency
5 2 5
6 * 6
F3 7
3 7
8 * 8
F4 9
4 9
10 * 10
11 M 11
12 ready U 12
U 13 I>reset U 13
O1 1
14 14

output
O2
15 2 15
O3
16 3 16
O4
17 4 17
I1 18 18
1
I2
19 2 input
I3 20 19
3 20
I4 21
4 21
22 M 22
card

Note: The counter input F1 (TTL) is for the connection of 5 V sensor (max. 50 kHz).

480 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 FRQ 204/254

Operation and LED Displays of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module

Operation and The module comes with the following LED indicators:
LEDs
Color and Name Use LED on LED off
1 x green "U" supply LED for 24 V supply is available supply is not
counter inputs, available
outputs and process
inputs:
1 x green "ready" LED for function Firmware initialization is Module is
completed, PAB interface not ready for
enabled (backplane operation
communication)
1 x yellow "(reset)" LED for overload or short–circuit or overload on faultless
short–circuit of the one or more outputs operation
outputs
4 x red "output 1 ... 4" LEDs for outputs outputs have "1" signal outputs have
"0" signal
4 x red "input 1 ... 4" LEDs for free process signal on input signal on
inputs input

The red LED indicators show the level of voltage of input or output signal (1 or 0).
Thus, the red LED goes on when the voltage level is high (1).
Reset button:
l switches off the stored overload indication
l removes the reclosing lockout of the switched off (overloaded) outputs, when the
overload is no longer present
l switches the group short circuit signal again to 0.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 481

FRQ 204/254

Specifications of the FRQ 204/254 Frequency Module

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the power supply.

Power Supply
External Power Supply For: 24 Vdc, ca. 1.1 A Counter Inputs
Process Inputs
Outputs
5 Vdc, 20 mA Counter Inputs
Internal Power Source via I/O bus Maximum 5 V, 100 mA
Typical 75 mA
Power Loss Typical 1.3 W

FRQ 204/254 I/O The following table describes the I/O map.
Map
Register 3x/4x 5 in / 0 out

482 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 FRQ 204/254

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the frequency inputs.

Frequency
Quantity 4 for input pulses with 5 Vdc (TTL) or 24 Vdc
Inputs
Type of Networking potential free (optical coupler) against I/O bus
Signal Level at 5 V (TTL) ON signal >= 2.3 V
OFF signal 0 ... 1 V
Input Current <= 2.5 mA each at 0 V (current sink)
Signal Level at 24 V (TTL) ON Signal 12 ... 30 V
OFF signal -2 ... +5 V
Input Current <= 6 mA each at 30 V (current source)
Signal Level at 24 V (TTL) ON signal 12 ... 30 V
OFF signal -2 ... +5 V
Input Current (current source) < 6 mA each at 30 V
Minimum Pulse Width 0.35 ms
Pulse Duty Factor 7:13 ... 1:1 ... 13:7, (13:7 = 65% : 35%)
Counting range 0 ... 32,767
Counting Frequency 1 kHz maximum (Input 1 with 5 V pulses 50 kHz
maximum)
Accuracy (Time = 5) at:
5 Hz 0.5%
Operating mode < 20 Hz
20 Hz 2%
25 Hz 4%
100 Hz 1% Operating mode < 1 Hz
1 kHz 0.1%
5 ... 50 kHz 0.05% Operating mode < 50 kHz
Accuracy (Time =1) ca. 10 times lower (use only for fast approximate
measurements)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 483

FRQ 204/254

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the process inputs.

Process Inputs
Quantity 4
Type of Networking potential free (optical coupler) against I/O bus
Rated Signal Value 24 V
Signal Level HIGH Signal 12 ... 30 V
LOW signal -2 ... +5 V
Input Current 7 mA @ 24 V, 8.5 mA at 30 V
Input Delay 4 ms

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the semiconductor outputs.

Semiconductor
Quantity 4
Outputs
Technique with short–circuit and overload protection, Switch–
off with value saving Group indication of the
overload/ short–circuit switch–off Group short–
circuit signal via I/O map status word, Hardware
reset for the overload acknowledgement
Type of Networking potential free (optical coupler) against I/O bus
Consumer Connection Between output and reference potential M1
Working Voltage U US = 24 Vdc
Signal Logic Positive Logic
Signal Output Level 1 signal U = US - 0 ... 2 V
0 signal 0 ... +2 V, < 1 mA
Load Current/Output 500 mA maximum (Current source)
Starting Current for Incandescent Lamp Iein = 10 x IN, max. 5 W
Load Current for All Outputs 1 A maximum (due to 50% simultaneity factor)
Operating Delay < 1 ms
Circuit with Inductive Loads Clamping diode (suppressor diode) locally (parallel
to the operating coil), absolutely necessary when
contact elements are present in the output lines or
the lines to the peripherals are very long.
Switching Cycles 1000 / h (0.28 / s) with inductive load and max.
permissible current per output 100 / s with ohmic
load 8 / s with 1.2 W lamp load

484 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 FRQ 204/254

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the physical characteristics.

Physical
Module Standard Size Case
Characteristics
Format 1 Slot
Weight 300 g

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the connection type.

Type of
Process 2 Pluggable 11 Pole Screw/Plug-in Terminals
Connection
I/O Bus (Internal) 1/3 C30M

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the maximum cable lengths.
Maximum Cable
Counter Inputs max 100 m shielded (longer cables on request)
Lengths
Outputs and Enable Inputs max. 400 m unshielded
max 1000 m shielded

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the environmental characteristics.

Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 ... 60 C for FRQ204
Characteristics
-40 ... +70 C for FRQ254

FRQ 204/254 The following table describes the agency approvals.

Agency
VDE 0160, UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142, European Directive on EMC 89/336/EEC, and Low
Approvals
Voltage Directive 79/23/EEC Standards

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 485

FRQ 204/254

486 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of MOT 20X Motion
Modules

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the MOT 20X Motion modules.

WARNING
Compatibility warning
The MOT 20X module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

Note: The following A120 I/O modules require a loadable (SW--IODR--001) for
proper operation when using certain PLCs (A984--1xx, E984--24x/251/255) with
Modsoft:
l DEP 211/214/215/217
l DAP211/217
l ADU204/211/214/216
l DAU204
l VIC2xx
l MOT20x

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 487

MOT 20X Motion Modules

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What are the MOT 20X Modules? 489
Overview of the MOT 201 Motion Module 490
Overview of the MOT 202 Motion Module 504
MOT 20X Module System Information 522
MOT 20X Motion Module Specifications 525

488 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

What are the MOT 20X Modules?

Brief Description The MOT 20x modules include the MOT 201 single-width I/O module (encoder only)
and the MOT 202 double-width module (resolver and encoder). They are designed
to provide single-axis motion control to the 984-A120 Series PLCs.
The MOT 20x motion modules are designed to control a single axis of motion using
advanced digital brushless motion control. This capability provides optimal control
by eliminating potentiometer adjustments and analog velocity loops. These MOT
modules are designed to operate with an A Series Compact 984 PLC-i.e., a
Compact A984-120, -130, -131, -141, or -145.

Note: The MOT 20X modules are designed to serve a variety of applications with
great accuracy and speed, however certain applications might be outside their
scope. Please consult Modicon for applications information if you intend to use the
module specifically for precise velocity control.

The primary feedback used by the DNP servo system is position information from
either a resolver or an encoder mounted to the motor. Velocity information is derived
from the position information, rather than being received from a velocity transducer.
This leads to some inaccuracies when using the DNP servo as a velocity controller.
Small speed irregularities may result, particularly at slower speeds.

Related The following publications contain detailed information on the MOT 20X modules:
Publications l Single-Axis Software System (SASS) Motion User Guide (GM-MOTN-001)
l Modicon Motion Development Software (MMDS) User Guide (GM-MMDS-002)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 489

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Overview of the MOT 201 Motion Module

Brief Description The MOT 201 is an encoder-only module contained in a single-width housing. It
works with dc motors that use Cyberline drives and other types of dc and brushless
drives from Gettys and other manufacturers. The module contains I/O to interface to
the drive and the machine, including drive enable, drive fault, and a variety of user-
configurable signals. The MOT 201 is not capable of commutating brushless motors.
A front view of the MOT 201 Motion module is provided below.

MOT 201
U
m
comm o
moving d
in pos b
u
drv fault
s
drv enabled
U1 7
N1 8
5 VDC 9
U enc 10
M enc 11
ready
U 13
24VDC 14
1 +lim ok 15
2 -lim ok 16
Input

3 home 17
4 jog+ 18
5 jog- 19
brk/output

M 22

490 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

LEDs Fourteen LEDs are visible on the front panel to indicate various functions and
conditions.
Refer to the following diagram and table for the indicator positions, nomenclature
and a brief explanation of their functions.

MOT 201

Power OK
Comm 2
Moving 3
In pos 4
Drv fault 5
Drv enabled 6
7
8
9
10
11
Ready 12
13
24Vdc 14
Input 1 15
Input 2 16
Input 3 17

Input 5 19
Output
21

The following table describes the meaning of each front panel indicator.
U (POWER OK) Green Backplane power is present
Comm (MODBUS) Amber Blinking = RS-232 serial port communication link active
Moving Amber MOT is still commanding new positions for the motor
In pos Amber Difference between the target position and the actual motor
position less than In Position Band parameter value
Drv fault (DRIVE Red A fault condition exists in the drive controlled by the MOT
FAULT)
Drv enabled (DRIVE Amber Drive enable signal to the drive is active
ENABLED)
Ready (MODULE Green MOT is operational. When not ON, a failure of the module
OK) has been detected. When blinking once every 3 s, module
is in kernel mode and the executive must be downloaded

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 491

MOT 20X Motion Modules

24Vdc Green 24 Vdc for the I/O is present

Input 1 (+LIMIT OK) Red Motor has not reached the maximum limit for clockwise
motion, or user-configured input 1 is active
Input 2 (- LIMIT OK) Red Motor has not reached the maximum limit for
counterclockwise motion, or user-configured input 2 is
active
Input 3 (HOME Red Motor is not at the Home switch, or user-configured input 3
LIMIT) is active
Input 4 (JOG +) Red Jog + switch or user-configured input 4 is active
Input 5 (JOG -) Red Jog - switch or the user-configured input 5 is active
Output 1 (BRAKE) Red Brake control is active(brake released), or user-configured
output 1 is active

Connectors The MOT 201 has five connectors, J1 ... J5. The J1 and J2 connectors are located
on the front of the module.
MOT 201

2
J2 3
MODBUS
CONNECTOR 4
5
6
7
TERMINALS 7-11
8 ANALOG OUTPUT,
9 ENCODER POWER
10 CONNECTOR
11
j1
12
13
14
15
16
TERMINALS 12-22
17
DISCRETE I/O
18 CONNECTOR
19
20
21
22

The J2 connector is a standard 9-pin, D-shell RS-232 serial port. Its operating mode
and communications parameters are set via a DIP switch on the back of the unit
(discussed later in this chapter).

492 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 201 J1 The J1 connector is a 22-terminal screw I/O connector, as shown in the Discrete
Connector I/O, Analog Output, and Encoder Power wiring diagram below.
5Vdc
5V COMMON
R>3KW J1 INTERNAL TO MOT REF
I/O BUS
7 INTERFACE
D/A
8
5V
9
REG
10
11 TO ENCODER CONNECTORS J4, J5
NOTE:
SEE SECTION NO TAG ALTERNATE POWER
12
GREEN
13
14
+LIM
15
RED FIRST OF
-LIM 16 FIVE
HOME 17 INPUT
CIRCUITS
JOG+ 18
JOG- 19

BRAKE OUT 1 20
21
22

24 Vdc
24V COMMON
RED

J1 discrete connections are listed in the following table.

Pin # Function Pin # Function
1 ... 6 Not Used 15 +Travel limit/Aux in 1
7 Analog output 16 -Travel limit/Aux in 2
8 Analog output return 17 Home/Aux in 3
9 +5 Vdc 18 Jog+/Aux in 4
10 Encoder Power 19 Jog-/Aux in 5
11 Encoder power return 20 Aux 1 output/Brake
12 Not Used 21 24 Vdc common
13 24 Vdc power 22 24Vdc common
14 24 Vdc power

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 493

MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 201 Bottom The J3, J4 and J5 connectors are located on the bottom of the module.
Connectors

BACK

6 1
J5 7 2
ENCODER 2 8 3
9 4 5
10 4 9 J3
3 8 Drive
2 7
1 1 6
J4 7 2 2
ENCODER 1 8 3
9 4
10 5

X = Key Pins

FRONT

494 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 201 J3 J3 is a 10-pin motor drive connector.

Connector
I/O BUS
J3 INTERFACE
MOTOR DRIVE INTERNAL TO MOT
+ VEL 1 D/A
>3KΩ
2

- VEL 3

>3KΩ 4
COMMON RED
+5V
10K
FAULT 5
NC
6

7 NO

ENABLE 8 COM YELLOW

SHELL

J3 drive connections are listed in the following table.

Pin # Function W922 Cable Color
1 +Velocity command Black
2 Common White
3 -Velocity command Blue
4 Common Orange
5 Drive fault input Yellow
6 Drive enable contact (N.C.) Red
7 Drive enable contact (N.O.) Brown
8 Drive enable common Green
9 Common Purple
10 Key Gray

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 495

MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 201 J4 and J4 and J5 are 10-pin encoder feedback connections. The pins on these two
J5 Connectors connectors have nearly identical functionality (pins 5 and 6 are different).

PCB
ENCODER 2 J5 INTERNAL TO MOT

6 1 FROM J1
A+
A- 300Ω
+V 7 2
B+
5V DIFF. B-
8 3 220Ω
ENCODER FIRST OF SIX
M+ ENCODER INPUTS
M-
0V 9 4

10 KEY = Pin 5
NOTE: B LEADS A.
FOR CLOCKWISE
(POSITIVE) MOTION
ENCODER 1 J4

1 KEY = Pin 6
A+
+V A-
7 2
B+
5V DIFF. B-
ENCODER 8 3
M+
M-
0V 9 4

FRONT OF MODULE
10 5 BOTTOM VIEW

J4 and J5 encoder feedback connections are listed in the following table.

Pin # Function
1 Encoder power
2 + Phase A
3 + Phase B
4 + Mark
5 Key (J5)
6 Key (J4)
7 - Phase A
8 - Phase B
9 - Mark
10 Encoder Power return

496 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

The Encoder The MOT 201 accepts feedback from one or two +5 V differential encoders. You
Feedback may pick between the following two connection options:
Interface l Option 1 uses an AS-W922-008 or AS-W922-015 generic cable, which is
terminated at one end and unterminated at the other to plug into either encoder
connector on your module
l Option 2 connects to the encoders through a cable and an optional AS-BR85-110
Breakout module.
An AS-W923 encoder breakout cable has a male DB25 connector at one end; the
other end has two connectors to attach to the module’s two encoder connectors.

ENCODER #2 P2
A+ P2-1 CHANNEL A+
A- P2-2 CHANNEL A-
B+ P2-3 CHANNEL B+ ENCODER #2
B- P2-4 CHANNEL B-
M+ P2-5 MARKER +
M- P2-6 MARKER -
P3 SHIELD P2-7 SHIELD
POWER
POWER+ P2-8
COM
POWER COM P2-9
ENCODER #1 P1
A+ P1-1 CHANNEL A+
A- P1-2 CHANNEL A-
B+ P1-3 CHANNEL B+ ENCODER #1
B- P1-4 CHANNEL B-
M+ P1-5 MARKER +
M- P1-6 MARKER -
SHIELD P1-7 SHIELD
POWER
POWER+ P1-8
COM
POWER COM P1-9
POWER CONNECT P4
+5V OUT P4-1
+12V OUT P4-2
EXT PWR IN P4-3
NOTE: WHEN POWER TO ENCODER IS
POWER COM P4-4
SUPPLIED ON J1 CONNECTOR, THIS
JUMPER MUST BE IN PLACE

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 497

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Encoder Cables and breakout modules are listed in the following table.
Connection
Part Number Use Cable Description
Options
AS-W921-XXX Drive Cyberline1000 to 10-position AMP Shielded MT
Connector (008, 015)
AS-W922-XXX Generic 10-pin AMP Shielded MT Connector to Wires
(008, 015)
AS-W923-XXX Encoder Break out Two 10-pin AMP Shielded MT Connectors to
DB25 Connector (Y Cable) (003, 006)
AS-W955-XXX Modbus DB9 to DB25 (012, 025)
AS-W956-XXX Modbus DB9 to DB9 (012, 025)
AS-BR85-110 Breakout Module For use with AS-W923 cable
XXX stands for the cable length.

The breakout module is a DIN rail-mountable terminal block PCB assembly and
accommodates discrete wiring from the encoder(s). It has a female DB25 connector
for the cable attachment and the terminals are clearly marked with the appropriate
encoder connections.

Note: When configuring feedback devices, remember that Channel 1 is not used
by the MOT 201. Encoder 1 (J4) = Channel 2, and encoder 2 (J5) = Channel 3.

An external power supply is typically used with an encoder (see illustration below).
However, when total encoder power (for one or two encoders) requires no more than
75 mA of power, you may use 5 Vdc power from the Compact 984 and thus eliminate
the need for the external power supply.

J1

9 5V
REG
10

11 POWER TO ENCODER

NOTE:
IF USING INTERNAL POWER YOU MUST
ADD THESE EXTERNAL JUMPERS

498 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

Discrete I/O The MOT 201 contains five discrete inputs and one discrete output. The inputs can
be used as either user-defined discrete inputs or as predefined inputs. The discrete
output as well as the inputs are controlled by the I/O command set.
The register bit assignments are shown in the following diagram.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Drive fault
1 = Jog -
1 = Jog +
1 = not home
1 = - limit OK
1 = + limit OK

Note: Module inputs 1 (+ Limit OK), 2 (- Limit OK) and 3 (NOT HOME) default to 1
(predefined) at power-up while inputs 4 (Jog +) and 5 (Jog -) default to 0 (discrete).
Output 1 default condition is user-defined.

Discrete output bit definitions are shown in the following diagram.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Brake

Refer to the Single-Axis Software (SASS) Motion User Guide (GM-MOTN-001), for
details on configuring the I/O.

Analog Output A +/- 10 V analog output is supplied via connector J1 on the front of the module. This
output is configured by you via the analog output setup command; it is available for
diagnostic purposes, or it can be placed under user program control.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 499

MOT 20X Motion Modules

The Motor Drive The interface to the motor drive from the MOT 201 consists of several digital and
Interface analog I/O signals:
l A drive enable signal
l A drive fault signal
l Velocity or current command signals
A form C relay is provided to enable the drive. A true high drive fault signal is
accepted from the drive that must be held at ground to indicate a non-fault condition.
A differential +/- 10 V analog signal is provided to control a dc drive. This signal can
be software configured to be a velocity or current command. Connection for the
motor drive is made to the module through the J3 connector.
Two AS-W922 cables are available. They are terminated to plug into your module at
one end and unterminated at the other end.

Note: Servo motor thermal overload switches should always be monitored to

prevent equipment damage. The MOT 201 does not have a dedicated input for this
function. Either a MOT 201 input or some other system input should be used in your
system design to monitor this condition.

500 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

The DIP Switch The MOT 201 has an RS-232 serial port to connect the module to an IBM PC (or
compatible) running the Modicon Motion Development Software (MMDS). A two-
position DIP switch is located on the rear panel of the module. SW1 is used to
specify the module’s operating mode (984 or MMDS control). SW2 is used to specify
the communication characteristics of the Modbus port upon power-up.
The MOT 201 DIP switch settings are listed in the following table.
DIP Switch Position Function
SW1 Left/Open (factory set) Compact 984 Controlled
Right/Closed MMDS Controlled
SW2 Left/Open (factory set) Programmed baud
Right/Closed Modbus Default

The MOT 201 DIP switch locations are shown in the following illustration.

OPEN CLOSED
1 2

DIP SWITCH
AREA OF DETAIL

2 POSITION
DIP SWITCH

REAR
OF MODULE

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 501

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Setting the The SW1 setting determines which device can write to the MOT 201. The setting is
Operating Mode read at power-up and selects either the MMDS or the Compact 984 to control the
with SW1 operation of the module. This mode selection is a safety feature that prevents you
from accidentally issuing commands to the module using MMDS while it is being
controlled by the Compact 984.
The control priority (SW1) is as follows:
1. When only MMDS is attached to the module, it has write privilege regardless of
the setting on SW1.
2. When only the Compact 984 is communicating via Traffic Cop to the module, it
has write privilege regardless of the setting of SW1.
3. When the Compact 984 has issued the local lockout command, it has write
privileges regardless of the setting of SW1 and whether or not MMDS is attached.
4. When the local lockout command is not issued and both the Compact 984 and
MMDS are communicating to the module, the setting of SW1 controls which
device has write privilege.

Note: Either device may read (i.e. a GET command) at any time. However, reading
the error log (a system command) is not allowed without write privilege because
the log is lost once it is read. Refer to Single-Axis Software System (SASS) Motion
User Guide (GM-MOTN-001) for details.

Setting the Switch#2 controls the Modbus communication characteristics. When the module is
Modbus powered up, SW2 is read. When the switch is closed then the default characteristics
Communication are used. When the switch is open then the communication characteristics last
Characteristics saved in the module are used.
(SW2) Once communication characteristics are initialized, they may be changed at any
time under software control only if SW2 is in the open position. Refer to Single-Axis
Software System (SASS) Motion User Guide (GM-MOTN-001) for details.
When SW2 is closed, the Modbus port default characteristics are as follows:
l 1 start bit
l 7 data bits
l 1 stop bit
l Even parity checking
l 9600 baud rate

502 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

Modbus The 9-pin serial modbus connections are listed in the following table.
Connections
Signal Computer Pin MOT Pin Signal Function
1NC 1NC Shield
TXD 2 3 RXD Serial data
RXD 3 2 TXD Serial data
GND 5 5 GND Ground
DTR 4 6 DSR Control line
DSR 6 4 DTR Control line
RTS *7 / 7* RTS Control line
CTS *8 / 8* CTS Control line
9NC 9NC +5 V Future Use
* These pins are jumpered (7 & 8) on both.

CAUTION
Ensure 5 V power is correct for the application.
Pin 9 supplies 5 V of power (75 mA). Make sure this is the correct pin
for your application before wiring.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

The 25-pin serial modbus connections are listed in the following table.Modbus
Connections for 25-Pin Serial.
Signal MOT Pin Computer Pin Signal Function
1NC 1NC Shield
TXD 2 2 RXD Serial data
RXD 3 3 TXD Serial data
GND 5 7 GND Ground
DTR 4 6 DSR Control line
DSR 6 20 DTR Control line
RTS *7 / 4* RTS Control line
CTS *8 / 5* CTS Control line
+5 V 9NC 9NC +5 Vdc Future Use
* These pins are jumpered, (7&8 on MOT, 4&5 on computer).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 503

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Overview of the MOT 202 Motion Module

Brief Description The MOT 202 is a resolver and encoder designed to interface directly to the Modicon
Cyberline CL1000 series and M100 series of brushless servo amplifiers and
brushless motors in addition to all the MOT 202 capabilities. Control of the MOT 202
can be:
l Through the backplane of the A120 Series I/O system bus interface
l Through the Modbus interface
l By internally stored user programs
The MOT 202 is a double-size module that requires two contiguous slots in an A120
I/O backplane.

Note: The MOT 202 does not fit in the last two (rightmost) slots of a DTA 200 or
DTA 201 backplane.

A front view of the MOT 202 Motion module is provided below.

MOT 202 MOT 202

U drv ph a 1
m
comm o drv ph b 2
moving d drv ph c 3
in pos b drv N 4
u
drv fault drv fault 5
s
drv enabled 6
drv
U1 7 enbl 7
N1 8 8
5 VDC 9 N 9
U enc 10 PE 10
M enc 11 11
ready 12 ref 12
U 13 ref N 13
24VDC 14 N 14
1 + lim ok 15 sin 15
2 - lim ok 16 sin N 16
Input

3 home 17 N 17
4 jog+ 18 cos 18
5 jog- 19 cos N 19
1 brk/output 20 motor OT 20
21 motor OTN 21
M 22 22
card card

504 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

LEDs Fifteen LEDs are visible on the front panel to indicate various functions and
conditions.
Refer to the following diagram and table for the indicator positions, nomenclature
and a brief explanation of their functions.

MOT 202 MOT 202

U 1
Comm 2 2
Moving 3 3
In pos 4 4
Drv fault 5 5
Drv enabled 6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
Ready 12 12
13 13
24Vdc 14 14
Input 1 15 15
Input 2 16 16
Input 3 17 17
Input 4 18 18
Input 5 19 19
Output 1 Motor
20 20 OT
21 21
22 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 505

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Indicator Color Meaning

U (POWER OK) Green Backplane power is present
Comm (MODBUS) Amber Blinking = RS-232 serial port communication link active
Moving Amber MOT is still commanding new positions for the motor
In pos Amber Difference between the target position and the actual motor
position less than In Position Band parameter value
Drv fault (DRIVE Red A fault condition exists in the drive controlled by the MOT
FAULT)
Drv enabled Amber Drive enable signal to the drive is active
(DRIVE ENABLED)
Ready (MODULE Green MOT is operational. When not ON, a failure of the module
OK) has been detected. When blinking once every 3 s, module
is in kernel mode and the executive must be downloaded
24Vdc Green 24 Vdc for the I/O is present
Input 1 (+LIMIT OK) Red Motor has not reached the maximum limit for clockwise
motion, or user-configured input 1 is active
Input 2 (- LIMIT OK) Red Motor has not reached the maximum limit for
counterclockwise motion, or user-configured input 2 is active
Input 3 (HOME Red Motor is not at the Home switch, or user-configured input 3
LIMIT) is active
Input 4 (JOG +) Red Jog + switch or user-configured input 4 is active
Input 5 (JOG -) Red Jog - switch or the user-configured input 5 is active
Output 1 (BRAKE) Red Brake control is active(brake released), or user-configured
output 1 is active
Motor O.T. Red Motor over temperature condition

506 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

Connectors The MOT 202 has 7 connectors (J1, J2, and J8 on the front of module) (J4, J5, J6,
and J7 on the bottom of module).

MOT 202 MOT 202

1
J2 2 2
MODBUS 3 3
CONNECTOR
4 4
5 5 PINS 1-11
MOT 202
6 6 MOTOR
7 7 DRIVE
8 CONNECTOR
PINS 7-11 8
ANALOG OUTPUT, 9 9
ENCODER, POWER 10 10
CONNECTOR 11 11 10
J8
12 12
13 13
J1
14 14
15 15 PINS 12-22
PINS 12-22 16 16 RESOLVER
DISCRETE I/O 17 17 CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR 18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

The J2 connector is a standard 9-pin, D-shell RS-232 serial port. Its operating mode
and communications parameters are set via a DIP switch on the back of the unit
(discussed later in this chapter).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 507

MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 202 J1 The J1 connector is a 22-screw terminal I/O connector, as shown in the Discrete
Connector I/O, Analog Output, and Encoder Power wiring diagram below.

5Vdc
5V COMMON
R>3KΩ J1 INTERNAL TO MOT REF I/O BUS
INTERFACE
7
D/A
8
9 5V
REG
10
11 TO ENCODER CONNECTORS J4,J5
NOTE:
SEE SECTION NO TAG ALTERNATE POWER
12
GREEN
13
14
+LIM
15
- LIM RED
16 FIRST OF
HOME 17 FIVE
INPUT
JOG+ 18 CIRCUITS
JOG- 19
BRAKE OUT 1 20
21
22

24 Vdc
24V COMMON RED

J1 discrete connections are listed in the following table.

Pin # Function Pin # Function
1 ... 6 Not Used 15 +Travel limit/Aux in1
7 Analog output 16 -Travel limit/Aux in 2
8 Analog output return 17 Home/Aux in 3
9 +5 Vdc 18 Jog+/Aux in 4
10 Encoder Power 19 Jog-/Aux in 5
11 Encoder power return 20 Aux 1 output/Brake
12 Not Used 21 24 Vdc common
13 24 Vdc power 22 24Vdc common
14 24 Vdc power

508 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 202 J8 J8 is a 22-screw terminal connector that may be for the motor drive and resolver
Connector wiring. The top half of J8 (terminals 1 ... 11) is for motor wiring.
I/O BUS
INTERFACE
MOTOR DRIVE J8 INTERNAL TO MOT
>3KΩ TYP
PHASE A D/A
1

PHASE B 2

PHASE C D/A
3

COMMON 4 +5V
10K RED
FAULT 5
NC
6

NO
7

ENABLE COM YELLOW

8

10

11

J8 drive connections are listed in the following table.

Pin # Function W922 Cable Color
1 +Velocity command Black
2 Common White
3 -Velocity command Blue
4 Common Orange
5 Drive fault input Yellow
6 Drive enable contact (N.C.) Red
7 Drive enable contact (N.O.) Brown
8 Drive enable common Green
9 Common Purple
10 Key Gray

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 509

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Note: The J6 connector on the bottom of the module performs the same motor
wiring function. If you are using an AS-W922 cable for motor drive wiring, use the
J6 connector. If not, you can choose between J8 or J6.

Bottom Half J8 The bottom half of J8 (terminals 12 ... 22) is for resolver wiring.
Connector I/O BUS
INTERFACE
J8 INTERNAL TO MOT
REF + 3.75 KHZ
12
REF -
13
14
SIN +
15
SIN - 7K
16 R/D
CONVERTER
RESOLVER 17
COS +
18
COS - 7K +5V
19
+5V +5V RED
20

21 3K 3K
T
T
22
3K

J8 Pin # J7 Pin # Function

12 2 Reference output high
13 7 Reference output low
14 4 Shield
15 3 Sine input high
16 8 Sine input low
17 Shield
18 5 Cosine input high
19 10 Cosine input low
20 1 Motor O.T. input high
21 6 Motor O.T. input low
9 Not Used

510 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 202 Bottom

Connectors
Note: The J7 connector on the bottom of the module performs the same resolver
wiring function as terminals 12 ... 22 on J8. If you are using an AS-W922 cable for
resolver wiring, use the J7 connector. If not, you can choose between J8 or J7.

The J4 ... J7 connectors are located on the bottom of the module.

BACK

6 1 5
7 2 4 9
J5 ENCODER 2 8 3 3 8
9 4 2 7
J6 DRIVE
10 1 6

1 5 10
7 2 4 x
J4 ENCODER 1 8 3 3 8
9 4 2 7
J7 RESOLVER 10 5 1 6

X = Key Pins

FRONT

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 511

MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 202 J5 J4 and J5 are 10-pin encoder feedback connections. The pins on these two
Connectors connectors have nearly identical functionality (pins 5 and 6 are different).
PCB
ENCODER 2 J5 INTERNAL TO MOT

6 1
FROM J1
A+
A- 300Ω
+V 7 2
B+
5V DIFF. B- 220Ω
ENCODER 8 3
FIRST OF SIX
M+ ENCODER INPUTS
M-
0V 9 4

10 KEY = Pin 5
NOTE: B LEADS A.
FOR CLOCKWISE
(POSITIVE) MOTION
J4
ENCODER 1
1 KEY = Pin 6
A+
A-
+V 7 2
B+
5V DIFF. B-
8 3
ENCODER
M+
M- 9 4
0V
FRONT OF MODULE
10 5 BOTTOM VIEW

J4 and J5 encoder feedback connections are listed in the following table.

Pin # Function
1 Encoder power
2 + Phase A
3 + Phase B
4 + Mark
5 Key (J5)
6 Key (J4)
7 - Phase A
8 - Phase B
9 - Mark
10 Encoder Power return

512 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 202 J6 and J6 is a 10-pin connector that may be for the motor drive wiring.
J7 Connectors
I/OBUS
J6 INTERFACE
MOTOR DRIVE
>3K Ω TYP INTERNAL TO MOT
PHASE A DA
1
PHASE B
2
PHASE C DA
3
COMMON
4 10K +5
FAULT RED
5
NC
6 NO
7
ENABLE COM YELLOW
8

10

Note: The first 11 terminal screws of the J8 connector on the front of the module
perform the same motor wiring function. If you are using an AS-W922 cable for
motor drive wiring, use the J6 connector. If not, you can choose between J8 or J6.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 513

MOT 20X Motion Modules

J7 is a 10-pin connector that may be used for resolver wiring:

I/O BUS
INTERFACE
J7
REF + Internal to Mot
2 3.75 KHZ
REF - 7
4
SIN +
3
SIN - 8 7K R/D
RESOLVER Converter
COS + 5
COS - 10 7K +5V
+5V +5V RED
1
3K 3K
T 6
T

3K

Note: The J7 performs the same resolver wiring function as terminals 12 ... 22 of
the J8 connector on the front of the module. If you are using an AS-W922 cable for
resolver wiring, use the J7 connector. If not, you can choose between J8 or J7.

514 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

The Encoder The MOT 202 accepts feedback from one or two +5 V differential encoders. You
Feedback may pick between the following two connection options:
Interface l Option 1 uses an AS-W922-008 or AS-W922-015 generic cable, which is
terminated at one end and unterminated at the other to plug into either encoder
connector on your module
l Option 2 connects to the encoders through a cable and an optional AS-BR85-110
Breakout module.
An AS-W923 encoder breakout cable has a male DB25 connector at one end; the
other end has two connectors to attach to the module’s two encoder connectors.

Encoder #2 P2
A+ P2-1 Channel A+
A- P2-2 Channel A-
B+ Channel B+ Encoder #2
P2-3
B- P2-4 Channel B-
M+ P2-5 Marker +
M- P2-6 Marker -
P3 Shield P2-7 Shield
Power + P2-8 Power
Power Com P2-9 Com
Encoder #1 P1
A+ P1-1 Channel A+
A- P1-2 Channel A-
B+ P1-3 Encoder #1
Channel B+
B- P1-4 Channel B-
M+ P1-5 Marker +
M- P1-6 Marker -
Shield P1-7 Shield
Power + P1-8 Power
Power Com P1-9 Com
Power Connect P4
+5V Out P4-1
+12V Out P4-2
Ext Pwr In P4-3 NOTE: When power to encoder is
Power Com P4-4 supplied on J1 connector, this
jumper must be in place.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 515

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Cables and breakout modules are listed in the following table.

Part Number Use Cable Description
100-338-XXX Drive Cyberline1000 to Discrete Wires (008, 015)
AS-W921-XXX Drive Cyberline1000 to 10-position AMP Shielded MT Connector
(008, 015)
AS-W922-XXX Generic 10-pin AMP Shielded MT Connector to Wires (008, 015)
AS-W923-XXX Encoder Two 10-pin AMP Shielded MT Connectors to DB25 Connector
Breakout (Y Cable) (003, 006)
AS-W955-XXX Modbus DB9 to DB25 (012, 025)
AS-W956-XXX Modbus DB9 to DB (012, 025)
AS-BR85-110 Breakout For use with AS-W923 cable
Module
XXX stands for the cable length.

The breakout module is a DIN rail-mountable terminal block PCB assembly and
accommodates discrete wiring from the encoder(s). It has a female DB25 connector
for the cable attachment and the terminals are clearly marked with the appropriate
encoder connections.
An external power supply is typically used with an encoder (see illustration below).
However, when total encoder power (for one or two encoders) requires no more than
75 mA of power, you may use 5 Vdc power from the Compact 984 and thus eliminate
the need for the external power supply.

J1
7
8
9 5V
REG
10
11 Power to Encoder

NOTE:
IF USING INTERNAL POWER YOU MUST
ADD THESE EXTERNAL JUMPERS.

516 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

Discrete I/O The MOT 202 contains five discrete inputs and one discrete output. The inputs can
be used as either user-defined discrete inputs or as predefined inputs. The discrete
output as well as the inputs are controlled by the I/O command set.
The register bit assignments are shown in the following diagram.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Drive Fault
1 = Jog -
1 = Jog +
1 = Not Home
1 = - Limit OK
1 = + Limit OK

Note: Module inputs 1 (+ Limit OK), 2 (- Limit OK) and 3 (NOT HOME) default to 1
(predefined) at power-up while inputs 4 (Jog +) and 5 (Jog -) default to 0 (discrete).

Discrete output bit definitions are shown in the following diagram.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Brake

Refer to the Single-Axis Software (SASS) Motion User Guide (GM-MOTN-001), for
details on configuring the I/O.

Analog Output A +/- 10 V analog output is supplied via connector J1 on the front of the module. This
output is configured by you via the analog output setup command; it is available for
diagnostic purposes, or it can be placed under user program control.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 517

MOT 20X Motion Modules

The Motor Drive The interface to the motor drive from the MOT 202 consists of several digital and
Interface analog I/O signals:
l A drive enable signal
l A drive fault signal
l Three-phase current commands
A form C relay is provided to enable the drive. A true high drive fault signal is
accepted from the drive that must be held at ground to indicate a non-fault condition.
Three +10 V analog current commands are provided to control a three-phase
brushless ac motor. For dc drives, only two of the three phases (phase A and phase
C) are used. Connection for the motor drive may be made to the module through
the connector on the bottom of the module (J6) or to the discrete wiring points on the
front (J8) of the module.
Two AS-W922 cables are available. They are terminated to plug into your module at
one end and unterminated at the other end.

Resolver The MOT 202 may use a resolver to provide feedback for the position, velocity and
Feedback/ commutation of the motor. A resolver is essentially a rotary brushless transformer
Thermal that provides absolute position information to the MOT. The MOT calculates an
Interface absolute position from the continuous signal of the resolver.
The MOT provides a reference output to drive transmit mode resolvers. The drive
signal is a 3.75 kHz, self-compensating sine wave. The amplitude of the reference
is adjusted by the module (if necessary) at power-up to get returned signal strengths
of approximately 2 Vrms at the sine and cosine inputs of the module.
Connection for resolver feedback may be made to the module through the
connector on the bottom of the module (use cable AS-W922-XXX) or to the discrete
wiring points on the front of the module.

Note: If the cable length between MOT and the resolver is more than 100 ft, please
consult with Modicon.

The module can also monitor motor temperature by means of a thermistor or

thermostatic switch. The two-wire input recognizes a high impedance (greater than
3072 or open switch) as an over temperature condition. When the input is not used
it must be shorted. The over-temperature fault is reported to MMDS or the Compact
984 as a drive fault. The over-temperature fault may be distinguished from a normal
drive fault by observing the associated indicator on the front of the module.

518 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

DIP Switches One two-position DIP switch is located on the rear panel of the module. SW1
determines the module’s mode of operation (984 or MMDS control). SW2
determines the communication characteristics of the Modbus port upon power up of
the module.
DIP Switch Position Function
SW1 Left/Open (factory set) Compact 984 Controlled
SW1 Right/Closed MMDS Controlled
SW2 Left/Open (factory set) Programmed baud
Right/Closed Modbus Default

The MOT 202 DIP switch locations are shown in the following illustration.

2
OPEN CLOSE

1
DIP SWITCH
Area of Detail

2 POSITION
DIP SWITCH

REAR OF
MODULE

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 519

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Setting the The SW1 setting determines which device can write to the MOT 202. The setting is
Operating Mode read at power-up and selects either the MMDS or the Compact 984 to control the
with SW1 operation of the module. This mode selection is a safety feature that prevents you
from accidentally issuing commands to the module using MMDS while it is being
controlled by the Compact 984.
The control priority (SW1) is as follows:
1. When only MMDS is attached to the module, it has write privilege regardless of
the setting on SW1.
2. When only the Compact 984 is communicating via Traffic Cop to the module, it
has write privilege regardless of the setting of SW1.
3. When the Compact 984 has issued the local lockout command, it has write
privileges regardless of the setting of SW1 and whether or not MMDS is attached.
4. When the local lockout command is not issued and both the Compact 984 and
MMDS are communicating to the module, the setting of SW1 controls which
device has write privilege.

Note: Either device may read (i.e. a GET command) at any time. However, reading
the error log (a system command) is not allowed without write privilege because
the log is lost once it is read. Refer to Single-Axis Software System (SASS) Motion
User Guide (GM-MOTN-001) for details.

Setting the Switch#2 controls the Modbus communication characteristics. When the module is
Modbus powered up, SW2 is read. When the switch is closed then the default characteristics
Communication are used. When the switch is open then the communication characteristics last
Characteristics saved in the module are used.
(SW2) Once communication characteristics are initialized, they may be changed at any
time under software control only if SW2 is in the open position. Refer to Single-Axis
Software System (SASS) Motion User Guide (GM-MOTN-001) for details.
When SW2 is closed, the Modbus port default characteristics are as follows:
l 1 start bit
l 7 data bits
l 1 stop bit
l Even parity checking
l 9600 baud rate

520 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

The 9-pin serial modbus connections are listed in the following table.
Signal Computer Pin MOT Pin Signal Function
1NC 1NC Shield
TXD 2 3 RXD Serial data
RXD 3 2 TXD Serial data
GND 5 5 GND Ground
DTR 4 6 DSR Control line
DSR 6 4 DTR Control line
RTS *7 / 7* RTS Control line
CTS *8 / 8* CTS Control line
9NC 9NC +5 V Future Use
* These pins are jumpered (7 & 8) on both.

CAUTION
Ensure 5 V power is correct for the application.
Pin 9 supplies 5 V of power (75 mA). Make sure this is the correct pin
for your application before wiring.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

The 25-pin serial modbus connections are listed in the following table.Modbus
Connections for 25-Pin Serial
Signal MOT Pin Computer Pin Signal Function
1NC 1NC Shield
TXD 2 2 RXD Serial data
RXD 3 3 TXD Serial data
GND 5 7 GND Ground
DTR 4 6 DSR Control line
DSR 6 20 DTR Control line
RTS *7 / 4* RTS Control line
CTS *8 / 5* CTS Control line
+5 V 9NC 9NC +5 Vdc Future Use
* These pins are jumpered, (7&8 on MOT, 4&5 on computer).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 521

MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 20X Module System Information

+EOT and -EOT The +EOT and -EOT normally closed limit switches indicate the Ends Of Travel so
Limits the MOT can stop the motor to avoid damage.

DANGER
Mis-wiring Danger
When wiring, ensure that moving positive moves you towards the +, and
negative motion moves you towards the -EOT.
Failure to follow this precaution will result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

The following diagram illustrates a typical MOT 20X installation.

MOTION MODULE

CYBERLINE
DRIVE

EOT SW HOME EOT SW

BRUSHLESS MOTOR

If either of these inputs becomes 0 volts (open in the line), the MOT will generate a
fatal error.

Note: If you reach the limit switches, the MOT disables the drive and stops the
motor. Otherwise system safety may be compromised.

522 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

The MOT also has software programmable end-of-travel limits to provide over-travel
protection. These programmable limits stop the drive and signal a non-fatal error.
The end-of-travel limit switches provide backups for the software limits. The priority
should be as follows:
Use software limits as the primary end-of-travel limit. Allow tolerance so you read
the software limits before striking the limit switches.

Note: If you don’t set the zero position properly, the software end-of-travel limits
won’t be where expected.

The hardware limit switches should be set outside the software limit switches. This
ensures a safe system shut down and thus prevents any over shooting that may
result in mechanical damage.
You may use mechanical stops to limit motion and act as a fail-safe stop. These
back up the software and hardware limit switches. Plan these as you do your
mechanical design.

Home Limit By using a home limit switch, the MOT can send the machine to its home position.
The machine is considered at home when it satisfies two conditions:
l Home limit switch open-this gives the approximate home position
l Encoder or resolver at zero position

Note: In order to ensure that your motor establishes the same home position each
time, always home in the same direction. This approach gives you a reliable and
consistent homing system. It is not completely dependent on a critical switch
setting.

Home works properly even if the machine holds the home switch open for several
feedback revolutions. The MOT always finds the same zero. How it chooses the
resolver (or encoder) zero depends on its approach. Home is the first feedback zero
in the direction of the Home after the switch is open.

Flash Memory The MOT comes with a flash EEPROM that allows storage of application programs
and configuration parameters, such as servo parameters, speed limits, etc. It will
also accept firmware updates as firmware enhancements become available.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 523

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Communications Communications with the MOT is through six pairs of 4x and 3x registers (I/O
Protocol mapped to the MOT), using a very rigid format. The first register sent is always the
control register and the second register is always the command register. The first
register returned is always the current status of the MOT, while the second register
returned is always an echo of the command register. All remaining registers, data
register 1... 4, are reserved for data and are used as necessary. For additional
information refer to Single-Axis Software System (SASS) Motion User Guide (GM-
MOTN-001).

Note: For I/O Map information refer to the 984-A120 Compact Programmable
Controllers User Guide (890 USE 108 00).

On-line/Off-line The Modicon Motion Development Software (MMDS Ver. # 3.00 or higher) is an on-
Development line/off-line software package which runs on a user-supplied IBM PC or compatible
(MMDS) computer. [MMDS is purchased separately.] MMDS lets you connect the computer
with the MOT (through an RS-232 serial interface) to set parameters, check module
diagnostics, and exercise the motor during initial system setup. It also lets you write
motion programs and download them to the Compact 984 to be used with the MRTM
loadable function block, or you can download into the MOT directly.

System Pre- Do this before you apply power to the MOT system:
Check
Step Action
1 Check all wiring-compare your wiring to the previous wiring diagrams
2 Make sure the dc power is within the range specified for the MOT.
3 Inspect the motors and loads-Are the motors securely mounted? Is it safe to run
the motors? If not, remove keys from motor shafts to disconnect the motors from
their mechanical loads.
4 Be sure the Compact 984 is stopped-This prevents an accidental local lockout
command issued from the Compact 984 which cannot be changed by the
MMDS. The MMDS is not capable of changing this setting.

Releasing the The only way to release the MOT is to issue the release lockout command from the
MOT Compact 984. If a Set or Motion Command is issued while the Modbus is locked out
(Compact 984 command), the MOT will reject the command and set a fault bit true.

524 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

MOT 20X Motion Module Specifications

Table of The following table describes MOT 20X Motion Module Specifications
Specifications

Module The following section describes Module Topology and Required Loadable
Topology, Specifications.
Required
Module Topology Number of Discrete Inputs 5
Loadable
Number of Discrete Outputs 1
Number of Analog Outputs 1
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001

Power Supplies, The following section describes Power Supplies and DIN Rail Grounding
DIN Rail Specifications.
Grounding
Power Supplies I/O system bus 5 Vdc MOT 201 300 mA
MOT 202 600 mA
DIN Rail Grounding < 0.1 Ω

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 525

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Input/Outputs, The following section describes Input/Outputs and Drive Interface Specifications.
Drive Interface
Input/Outputs Digital Optically Isolated to 500 Vdc
Output drive capability 150 mA (using customer supplied
20 ... 28 Vdc, true high)
Input impedance 3.5 K Ω (ON @ 15 Vdc minimum,
OFF @ 5 Vdc maximum, true high)
Analog Drive capability +/- 10 Vdc, 3 mA
Resolution 12 bits
Accuracy +/- 100 mVdc (without offsets)
+/- 50 mVdc (with offset)
Drive Interface Drive fault input True high, pulled up internally
Drive enable relay form C contacts, 30 Vdc @ 0.5 A
resistive
dc motors Command signal +/- 10 Vdc @ 3 mA differential
(201/202) Current or velocity Software selectable
command
Phasing Positive voltage for CW motion
ac motors Three phase current +/- 10 Vdc @ 3 mA
(202 only)
Command signal Summing to 0 +/- 0.1 Vdc

526 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

Communications The following section describes Communications and Resolver Feedback

, Resolver Specifications.
Feedback
Communications Modbus 1 RS-232 serial port interface
Baud rate 300 ... 9600, 9600 default, set by
software (for ASCII only)
5 Vdc supply 75 mA maximum
Resolver Resolver reference drive 3.75 +/- 0.05 kHz; 2 +/- 1.0 Vrms
Feedback 100 mA RMS drive capability
200 mW maximum
Resolver sine/cosine inputs 7 K Ω impedance
Resolver 14 bits to 1350 RPM
resolution 12 bits to 6000 RPM
with standard transmit +/- 10 min of arc typical
style resolver
System accuracy 16 bits to 300 RPM
+/- 15 min of arc maximum
System Repeatability +/- 3 min of arc
Cable length Consult Customer Service if over
100 ft

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 527

MOT 20X Motion Modules

Encoder The following section describes Encoder Feedback Specifications.

Feedback
Encoder Differential signal 2 V minimum
Feedback Phase B leads A for CW motion
Input impedance 145 Ω nominal
Maximum encoder 500 kHz square wave
frequency
350 ns minimum time be tween edges from phase A
and B
Encoder feedback loss Detected on phase A and B differential signals. Loss of
marker signal is not to be detected; results in failure to
home the system
Resolution 4 times encoder line count
Marker Positive pulse for proper homing
Power for encoder from 5 V nominal
Compact 984
4.4 V minimum
75 mA maximum
Power for encoder from depends on encoder requirements
external power supply
Cable length Consult Customer Service if over 300 ft

Motion, The following section describes Motion and Thermistor Resistance Specifications.
Thermistor
Motion Absolute positioning range 32 bit resolution, convertible to in, mm,
Resistance
or any other user-definable unit
Speed range 0 ... 6000 RPM
Thermistor Cold Resistance 1 K Ω maximum
Resistance (202 only) Hot Resistance 5 K Ω maximum

528 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 MOT 20X Motion Modules

I/O Map, The following section describes I/O Map and Dimensions Specifications.
Dimensions
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 6 in/6 out
Dimensions MOT201 (W x H x D) 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6x 5.6x 4.5 in
MOT 202 (W x H x D) 86.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
3.4 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
MOT 201 Weight 0.36 kg
0.8 lb
MOT 202 Weight 0.61 kg
1.35 lb
Number of slots MOT 201 1
MOT 202 2
Breakout Module 7.6 x 13.5 x 11.4 mm
3.0 x 5.31 x 4.5 in*

Agency The following section describes Agency Approvals and Environmental

Approvals, Specifications.
Environmental
Agency Approvals MOT 201 VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA C22.2 No.142; and
Characteristics
European Directive EMC 89/336/EEC Standards
MOT 202 VDE 0160; UL 508; and CSA C22.2 No.142 Standards
Environmental Temperature Operating 0 ... 60 degrees C
Characteristics Storage -40 ... +85 degrees C
Humidity Operating 93 percent Rh at 60
Storage degrees C, noncondensing

Vibration 0.075 mm displacement 10 ... 57 Hz

amplitude
1g 57 ... 150 Hz

Note: The double-width MOT 202 module does not fit in the last two (rightmost)
slots in the DTA 200 and DTA 201 backplanes. Select alternate slots in the
backplane when mounting the MOT 202.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 529

MOT 20X Motion Modules

530 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX
Counter Input Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input
Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module? 532
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module LEDs 533
Installation of the VRC/CTR 2XX Module 535
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Field Wiring 536
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Configuration for 16-bit Compact 537
Controllers
Troubleshooting 546
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Specifications 549
VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module for Compact 32-bit Controllers 551

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 531

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

What is the VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module?

Brief Description
Note: The BVIC-200, 205, 212, and 224 modules are now referred to as BVRC-
200, BCTR-205, 212 and 224 respectively. The VRC200 is designed for use as a
Variable Reluctance Counter to be used with AC signals. The Counter modules
(CTR205/212/224) are designed for counting DC input signals at 5, 12 or 24 volts
DC. The VRC and CTR modules are functionally the same as the original VIC
modules except that they are powered off the 984’s power supply instead of an
external supply. The VRC and CTR models numbers also tie in the modules’
applications more closely with their name.

The VRC/CTR series of counter input modules allows you to directly connect up to
four high speed pulse or four VRC inputs (flowmeters, positive displacement meters,
ac waveforms, etc.) to a single module. The module uses input metering Device K
Factor information, and can modify this value to compensate for wear or application
abnormalities.
The four VRC/CTR modules operate identically; each supports a different voltage
input level.
VRC-200 VRC inputs (.025 to 36 Vac Peak typical)
CTR-205 5 Vdc
CTR-212 12 Vdc
CTR-224 24 Vdc

532 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module LEDs

Introduction The front of the VRC/CTR module has LED indicators that provide operational
status, and incoming pulse annunciation.
Amber Module powered-up and passed power-up diagnostics
Green Module is configured
Red Input data present

LED Locations The following diagram illustrates the LED locations and wiring of the VRC/CTR
and Wiring of the module.
VRC/CTR Module
VRC/CTR

Amber LED 1
Green LED 2 Channel 1+
Channel 1 Red LED 3 Channel 1-
4 Shield
5 Channel 2+
Channel 2 Red LED 6 Channel 2-
7 Shield
8
9
10
11

12
13 Channel 3+
Channel 3 Red LED 14 Channel 3-
15 Shield
16 Channel 4+
Channel 4 Red LED 17 Channel 4-
18 Shield
19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 533

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

LED Locations The following diagram illustrates the LED locations and wiring ONLY of the VIC200,
and Wiring of the 205, 212, and 212 modules.
VIC200, 205, 212,
and 212 Modules
VIC2XX

250mA
Amber LED 1 +20 to 30 Vdc
Green LED 2 Channel 1+
Channel 1 Red LED 3 Channel 1-
4 Shield
5 Channel 2+
Channel 2 Red LED 6 Channel 2-
7 Shield
8
9
10
11 DC Common

12
13 Channel 3+
Channel 3 Red LED 14 Channel 3-
15 Shield
16 Channel 4+
Channel 4 Red LED 17 Channel 4-
18 Shield
19
20
21
22

534 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Installation of the VRC/CTR 2XX Module

Overview Installing Installing the VRC/CTR 2XX modules consists of:

l Field wiring the module for the application selected
l Configuring the module to fit its application

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 535

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Field Wiring

Introduction The VRC/CTR module is capable of detecting extremely low voltage signals. It is
very important that you minimize the amount of electrical interference that the
module is exposed to. Also, exercise caution with low signal level wiring (turbine
meters, pulse transducers etc.). Do not mix signal and power wiring, and ensure that
signal wires cross power wiring at 90° angles.
Cables connecting field devices to the VRC/CTR module should be limited to 100 ft
(30.6 m) or less. Specifications for the cable should be equal to or exceed those of
Belden #8760. Grounding of the shield and instrument wires should occur only at the
VRC/CTR module end of the cable. Wiring to the incoming power terminals should
be protected by a field-mounted, slow blow fuse rated at 250 mA.

536 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Configuration for 16-bit Compact

Controllers

Output Registers The VRC/CTR 2XX uses three 4x output registers and three 3x input registers, I/O
mapped as BIN data type.
Output Register Function
4x Factor Data Word
4x + 1 Control Word 1
4x + 2 Control Word 2

Factor Data Word This register is used to send into the module K or Meter factor data for each of the
four input channels. Control Words 1 and 2 are used to load this factor data into the
module.

K Factor Valid Valid K factor values are integer numbers in the range 1 ... 65,535. K factor values
Data are typically located on the meter housing, and should be entered exactly as seen
on the housing. If you want data to be counted as engineering units, this is where
the value would be entered.
Factor data values loaded into each channel inform the module how many pulses to
count before incrementing an on-board counter for each input channel. If a value is
loaded into the K factor location, the module will provide information to the PLC
based on each channel’s K factor.
If a channel’s K factor is zero (0), the module will provide raw or unit counts to the
PLC. To change this value, simply enter a new K factor value into the factor register
and sets the respective bit in output register #2 (bits 13, 14, 15, or 16, respectively,
for input channels 1, 2, 3, or 4).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 537

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Meter Factor Meter factor values are used to apply a corrective offset or calibration value against
Valid Data a K factor. This feature allows a meter’s K factor value to be modified in the field.
This is helpful because a meter or field device’s characteristics may change as it
wears or accumulates material that affects its accuracy.
Typical data used for meter factors are numbers from 0.0001 ... 1.9999, where
1.0000 means no error exists and no correction has been made. To load a Meter
factor value, you must enter a five-digit number between 00001 ... 19999 into output
register 1 and set the appropriate bit in output register 3 (control word 2). Do not
enter a decimal point, since the module assumes a decimal point between the fourth
and fifth digits (the meter factor value has an implied decimal to the right of the most
significant digit.).
This number is multiplied into the K factor value, with the result being used to form
the C factor. Therefore, if you want to calculate the C factor manually,
C factor = (K x M)/10,000
The module as shipped from the factory defaults to a Meter factor of 10000 (unity
gain). To change a Meter factor value, simply place the new value into the factor
register and set the respective bit in output register 3, bits 1, 2, 3, or 4.

Control Word #1 This register is used to:

(4x + 1) l Select the input to be read
l Clear input channel data
l Suspend an input channel’s counting and hold its value
l Load input channel K factor data

Input Channel The following graphic shows the input channel select.
Select
(Control Word 1, 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
bits 1 ... 4)

Select Input Channel 4

Select Input Channel 3

Select Input Channel 2

Select Input Channel 1
Only one of these bits may be ON at any time. If more than one of these bits is ON,
only one channel will be displayed in the input data register. The order of Priority for
determining which channel is displayed when multiple bits are ON is 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Note: If auto sequence is enabled, these bits are ignored.

538 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Clear Channel The following graphic shows the clear channel data.
Data
(Control Word 1, 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
bits 5 ... 8)

Clear Channel 4 Data

Clear Channel 3 Data

Clear Channel 2 Data

Clear Channel 1 Data

To clear a specific channel’s count data, set the appropriate bit to ON (1). If a bit is
set ON, that channel’s data will be reset and held to zero.

Channel Hold The following graphic shows the channel hold.

(Control Word 1,
bits 9 ... 12)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Channel 1 Disable (hold)

Channel 2 Disable (hold)
Channel 3 Disable (hold)
Channel 4 Disable (hold)

To suspend counting and HOLD a channel at a value, set the appropriate bit ON (1).
The VRC/CTR will suspend counting that channel and hold the value until the bit is
released (0), at which time the channel will again monitor the incoming pulses.

CAUTION
Response speed.
The Channel Hold feature is not intended for immediate or
instantaneous control. The ability or speed with which the VRC/CTR
module is capable of holding a value depends on a number of factors:
PLC scan time, incoming pulse speed, module activity, and the status
of other channels. All of these factors may influence how fast the VRC/
CTR module can respond to a HOLD request from the PLC.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 539

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Load K Factor The four bits shown below are used to load K factor data into the VRC/CTR module.
Data (Control
Word 1, bits 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 ... 16)
Load Channel 1 K Factor Data
Load Channel 2 K Factor Data
Load Channel 3 K Factor Data
Load Channel 4 K Factor Data

Control Word 2 This register is used to:

(4x + 2) l Load input channel meter factor data
l Select the channel input data to be accumulated (counts or input frequency)
l Invoke automatic channel sequencing
l Select the factor (K, Meter, or C) to be displayed
l Select raw input frequency display

LOAD METER These four bits load the meter factor data into the VRC/CTR module.
FACTOR DATA
(Control Word 2, 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
bits 1 ... 4)
Load Channel 4 Meter Factor Data
Load Channel 3 Meter Factor Data
Load Channel 2 Meter Factor Data
Load Channel 1 Meter Factor Data

Frequency Mode The module can display, accumulate, or totalize incoming counts, or it can display
(Control Word 2, the data in rate or frequency. Setting bits 5 ... 8 to a 1 causes data frequency to be
bits 5 ... 8) displayed.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Channel 4 Frequency Mode

Channel 3 Frequency Mode
Channel 2 Frequency Mode
Channel 1 Frequency Mode

540 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Auto Scan The VRC/CTR module has the ability to auto scan its input channels. This feature
(Control Word 2, allows you to easily integrate the VRC/CTR module into the Compact 984 PLC
bits 9 ... 16) system with minimal ladder programming.

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Auto Sequence
Display K Factor
Display Meter Factor
BITE Enable
BITE 1
BITE 2
Not Used

Display Frequency

Bit 9—Auto By setting bit 9 ON (1), the module sequentially displays each of the four input
Sequence channels to register 3x. The VRC/CTR module will sequence through each of the
four channels on a 1/2 s time base (2 s total update of all four channels).

Note: This bit will override the manual channel select bits (output word 2, bits
1 ... 4).

Bit 10—Display K By setting bit 10 ON (1), the module displays the K factor data for the enabled
Factor channel in input word 2. If this bit is OFF (0) and the display Meter factor bit is OFF,
the module displays the calculated factor value (C Factor) for each channel in input
word 2.

Bit 11—Display By setting bit 11 ON (1), the module displays the Meter factor data for the enabled
Meter Factor channel in input word 2. If this bit is OFF (0) and the display K factor bit is OFF, the
module displays the calculated factor value (C Factor) for each channel in input
word 2.

Bits 12 ... 14— Refer to Troubleshooting, p. 546 for BITE test information. Set these bits to 0 for
BITE (Built–in normal information. Set to 1 for diagnostic test.
Test Enable)
Note: Bit 15 of control word 2 is unused.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 541

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Bits 12 ... 14— It may be desirable to see the raw frequency being delivered to one of the respective
Display input channels. If bit 16 is set ON (1) and the module is in the rate mode, the data
Frequency input register 1 will reflect raw frequency (Hz) being read at the respective input
channel. The scaled rate and counting will continue in the background.

Input Registers The read field consists of three 3x words that provide data or status information to
the Compact 984 processor.
Input Register Function
3x READ DATA
3x + 1 Factor Value
3x + 2 Status Word

Input Data (3x) Count data for all four channels is displayed in this register. Data may be displayed
on demand (manually) or can be sequentially (automatically) displayed by the VRC/
CTR module.

Factor Value Register 2 is used to display K, Meter, or the C Factor values used by each channel
(3x +1) of the VRC/CTR module. This register provides a means of verifying that the factor
value loaded into each channel of the VRC/CTR module is correct. You must
monitor the active channel bits to accurately determine each channel’s data at any
given moment in time.

C Factor Data C Factor (Calculated Factor) is the result of the K factor being multiplied by the Meter
factor and then being divided by 10,000 prior to being displayed to the PLC. Meter
factor default is 10000 (unity) and K factor default is 0. When K and Meter factors
are in their default state, the C factor will equal the raw frequency delivered to the
VRC/CTR module by the flow meter.

Status Word This register is used to indicate:

(3x + 2) l When an input channel data is valid
l When a channel count has rolled over
l Excessive signal input frequency to a channel
l Whether auto sequencing is selected
l Module hardware failure

542 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Active Channel Whenever one of these bits is ON (1), the data in the READ DATA word is valid.
Status (Status
Word, bits 1 ... 4) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Channel 4 Data Valid

Channel 3 Data Valid
Channel 2 Data Valid
Channel 1 Data Valid

Note: There will only be one bit on at any time.

Channel Rollover The following figure shows the channel roll over bit settings.
(Status Word,
bits 5 ... 8) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Channel 4 Data Rollover

Channel 3 Data Rollover

Channel 2 Data Rollover
Channel 1 Data Rollover

Whenever any of these bits is ON (1), it indicates that the module has incremented
the data past the 32,768 count mark for that respective channel. When any of the
individual channels (1 ... 4) is at 32,767 and one more pulse is detected, the module
will set the appropriate rollover bit ON (1) and clear the accumulated data (00000)
for that channel.
Any pulses that are detected after the rollover bit is set will continue to accumulate
for that channel starting at (00000). After the rollover bit is set and the count
continues, once the count reaches 16,384, the rollover bit will be reset to zero.
The module resets each respective rollover bit to zero (0) whenever the count in a
specific channel increments from 16,383 to 16,384.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 543

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Channel The following figure shows the Channel Overspeed bits.

Overspeed
(Status Word,
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
bits 9 ... 12)

Channel 1 Overspeed
Channel 2 Overspeed
Channel 3 Overspeed
Channel 4 Overspeed

If the module detects pulses that are faster than 12.5 kHz, the module will inform the
ladder program by setting individual bits that correspond to each of the four input
channels. When the overspeed flag is on, the counter is disabled.
If any of these bits is set ON (1), the data for that channel may be invalid. These bits
are only set when the pulse stream exceeds 12.5 kHz. If the signal temporarily
exceeds 12.5 kHz, the bit will be set ON only during that period. If the signal returns
within the design specification, the bit will turn off. If the module is used in an
application that may exceed 12.5 kHz, these bits should be monitored by the ladder
logic program.

Note: Overspeed detection was designed to guard against input devices

exceeding 10 kHz. The overspeed bits apply to all VRC input modes of the VIC-
200, and to the counter input function of the 205, 212, or 224. If the module is
configured for dc pulse applications (CTR-205, –212 or –224), the overspeed bits
will function as stated above, but the frequency data being read in input register 3x
will remain valid until 25 kHz.

Status Word, bits The following figure shows the Auto Sequence Mode bits.
13 ... 16

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Auto Sequence Enabled

1 = Memory Valid
1 = Module Error
Not Used

All channels are read by the PLC in sequence, every 2 s.

544 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Bit 14—Memory If bit 14 is detected in an OFF (0) state, the module’s data or configuration is in
Valid question. If this is the case, you may either initiate a self–test, power cycle the
module, or replace the module.

Bit 15—Module Bit 15 is set (1) when a hardware failure is detected within the module. If this bit is
Error set, the module must be power cycled. If the bit does not clear after a power cycle,
the module should be replaced.

Note: Bit #16 is not used.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 545

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Troubleshooting

Amber LED Module Status is determined when the PLC goes into run mode. The table below
illustrates possible module conditions.
LED Status Description
Steady ON Module Ready (operational)
1 blink Module Watchdog Fault
2 blinks Module Watchdog Fault at Startup
3 blinks Module RAM memory failure at Startup
4 blinks Bus interface failure at Startup
5 blinks Module ROM memory failure
6 blinks Module processor Startup Fault
7 blinks General Module error

When the module detects these conditions, the amber LED blinks the appropriate
number of times. After each sequence of pulses, the LED pauses (each pause is a
new starting point).

Green LED When the PLC goes into run mode communication is established with the module.
The green LED is on when communication has been established properly. The
green LED remains off when communication is not established.

Red LED Each of the four red LEDs illuminates when data is detected. The LEDs for each of
the four channels operate as follows:
LED Status Description
Steady OFF No incoming signal
Blinking Incoming signal detected, < 40 Hz
Steady ON Incoming signal detected, > 40 Hz

Establishing If the LEDs on the front of the module are showing, then the module is
Communication communicating with the PLC processor.
Amber ON
Green ON
Red Blinking or ON

546 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Steps after Refer to table below for steps after establishing communication:
Establishing
Step Action
Communication
1 Monitor the status of READ Word 3 bits 13 ... 16 to determine what channel the
module is displaying.
2 Check the front of the module to determine if the appropriate channel’s red LED
is pulsing or ON.
3 If the above conditions are true, check to make sure the Clear Channel bit (Write
Word 2, bits 8 ... 11) for the appropriate channel is not set.
4 Check that Hold Count bit (Write Word 2, bits 5 ... 8) for the appropriate channel
is not set.
5 If these bits are OFF, check to make sure that the module’s self–test feature is
not enabled (Write Word 3, bit 15 ON).

Invalid Data The module is capable of measuring frequencies up to 25 kHz, and counting pulses
up to 12.5kHz. The counter input mode stops counting inputs if the overspeed bits
are set. This occurs at input frequencies over 12.5kHz.
If the incoming cable must pass high voltage cables, make sure the signal cable
passes the high voltage cable at 90. If electrical interference is being considered,
attempt to locate the VRC/CTR module as far away as possible from the P120
power supply and relay output modules. These products may generate electrical
interference during operation. This does not affect the VRC/CTR module but may
induce pulses on incoming channel wiring.
If the channel is configured for dc operation, the module is capable of counting up to
25 kHz. If the incoming signal is within specifications and data is still not correct,
check that the data values loaded into each channel’s K and Meter factor values are
correct. The K and Meter factor values are used to scale incoming signals for display
purposes. These values are monitored in Read word 2 and are displayed whenever
a channel is enabled and either bit 7 or 6 of Write word 3 are ON.

Overspeed VRC The module is capable of detecting when incoming signals are exceeding the design
Inputs limits of each channel. The module will detect when incoming signals exceed
(Flowmeters, 12.5kHz and set one of four bits (Read word 3, bits 5 ... 8) for PLC use. These bits
Variable Inputs, operate independently (i.e., if a channel exceeds 12.5 kHz, the remaining channels
etc.) are not affected). If overspeed is detected, the respective channel will continue to
operate, but the data is not guaranteed. If the incoming signal returns to less than
12.5 kHz, the overspeed bit will turn OFF.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 547

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Overspeed Each channel on the module is capable of being configured for dc operation on the
Pulsed Inputs VIC-205, 212, and 224 modules. When configured for dc operation, in the frequency
(Square Wave) input mode, each channel is capable of measuring frequencies up to 25kHz. In the
frequency input mode the overspeed bits turn on at 12.5kHz, but the data is valid up
to 25kHz.
When configured for the counter input mode, the count value stops counting when
the overspeed bits are turned on. The counter mode continues to count up to a pulse
rate of 12.5kHz.

Overspeed Built– The VRC/CTR module has built–in diagnostics that can be enabled to check the
in Test Enable module’s control electronics. These tests are automatically run each time the
(BITE) module is powered up but can also be run after the module is on–line. By selecting
one of three test sequences and then setting this bit ON, the module enters a self–
test mode.
To terminate the self-test mode, reset the BITE Enable bit (0). Bits 13 and 14
determine the type of test that will be executed. Available tests and a brief
explanation of what they accomplish are shown in the truth table below.
Truth Table for BITE Tests
Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Description
OFF OFF OFF Test disabled
OFF ON ON Tests VRC/CTR Microprocessor, RAM, ROM, Ready and Run LEDs,
24 Vdc
ON OFF ON Tests EEPROM, Bus Interface, Internal timers, VRC electronics,
Pulse indication, Frequency, and Software products
ON ON ON Overspeed and LED Indicators (requires external input from a
calibrated signal generator)

Note: The two bits select the category of test in binary. If the BITE enable bit is ON,
the module remains in self–test until the BITE enable bit is turned off. The enable
bit and the category bits are currently only read once on entry to the BITE
procedure. If you turn the bit OFF, the module will return to on line soon after the
applicable test is completed. Allow 100 ms minimum for each test.

Currently, the red LED illuminates steady and the green LED flashes if the test is
completed successfully. If a failure is detected, the error bit will illuminate and the
red LED will blink.

548 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module Specifications

Table of The following table contains a list of VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX counter input module
Specifications specifications.
VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX High Speed Input Specifications

Electrical The following section describes Electrical Specifications.

Specifications
Electrical Inputs/module 4
Isolation 30 Vdc
Supply Voltage for BVIC 2xx 24 Vdc, +/-2.4Vdc
ONLY (24 Vdc power supply)
Signal VIC/VRC-200 .025 ... 36 Vac Peak typical
Voltage (VRC inputs)
Range VIC/CTR-205 5 Vdc, +/-.5Vdc
Low <= 0.800, High >= 2.000 Vdc typical @
source Z < 10 ohms
VIC/CTR-212 12 Vdc, +/-1.2Vdc
Low <= .65 1.920,High >= 4.800 Vdc typical @
source Z < 10 ohms
VIC/CTR-224 24 Vdc, +/-2.4Vdc
Logic Low < 3.840, Log ic High > 9.600 Vdc
typical @ source Z < 10 W

Frequency The following section describes Frequency Specifications.

Specifications
Frequency VIC/VRC Inputs 0 ... 10.0 kHz
VIC/VRC/CTR Vdc Inputs- Counter Mode 0 ... 10.0 kHz
VIC/VRC/CTR Vdc Inputs- Frequency Mode 0 ... 25.0 kHz
VIC/VRC/CTR Pulse Width 20 micros minimum
VIC/VRC/CTR Overspeed 12.5 kHz detection

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 549

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Data Formats, The following section describes Data Format and Required Loadable Specifications.
Required
Data Formats Accumulated, Scaled Accumulated, Rate (Hz) Scaled Rate
Loadable
Accuracy VIC/ CTR-205, +/- 1 count over full range
212, 224
VIC/VRC-200 +/- 0.1 percent of full scale, +/- 1 count
Required Loadable SW-IODR-001 (See Appendix B, file SVI.DAT)

Power Required, The following section Power Required and DIN Rail Grounding Specifications.
DIN Rail
Power Required VRC/CTR External Power Source None Required
Grounding
VRC/CTR Internal Power Source from the 275 mA @ 5 Vdc maxi mum
backplane
VIC External Power Source, Regulated or 20 ... 30VVdc
Unregulated
VIC External Power Source, Typical 70mA @ 24VVdc
VIC Internal Power Source from the None Required
backplane
DIN Rail Grounding < 0.1Ohms

Environment, I/O The following section describes Environment and I/O Map Specifications.
Map
Environment Temperature Operational 0 ... 60 degrees C
32 ... 140 degrees F
Storage -40 ... +85 degrees C
-40 ... +185 degrees F
Humidity 0 ... 95 percent @ 60 degrees C, noncondensing
I/O Map Register 3x/4x 3 in/3 out

Dimensions and The following section describes Dimensions and Agency Approvals
Agency
Dimensions WxHxD 40.6 x 142.2 x 114.3 mm
Approvals
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 300 g
0.70 lb
Power Connections 60/75 copper (Cu)
Torque on set screws 0.5 in/lb
Agency Approvals VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; FM Class
I, Div 2 and European Directive EMC 89/336/
EEC Standards

550 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

VIC/CRC/CTR 2XX Counter Input Module for Compact 32-bit Controllers

I/O Map Register In I/O map these modules are configured with nine 3x registers and one 4x register
The 3x register assignements are as follows:
l 3x - Register 1: Input Status Word 3
l 3x - Register 2: Channel 1 Read Data
l 3x - Register 3: Channel 1 Factor Value
l 3x - Register 4: Channel 2 Read Data
l 3x - Register 5: Channel 2 Factor Value
l 3x - Register 6: Channel 3 Read Data
l 3x - Register 7: Channel 3 Factor Value
l 3x - Register 8 : Channel 4 Read Data
l 3x - Register 9 : Channel 4 Factor Value

3x Register 1 Input Status Word Bit Assigment

1=Channel 1 Data Valid

1=Channel 2 Data Valid
1=Channel 3 Data Valid
1=Channel 4 Data Valid
1=Channel 1 Data Rollover
1=Channel 2 Data Rollover
1=Channel 3 Data Rollover
1=Channel 4 Data Rollover

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1=Channel 1 Overspeed
1=Channel 2 Overspeed
1=Channel 3 Overspeed
1=Channel 4 Overspeed
1= Auto Sequence Enable
1= Memory Valid
1= Module Error
Not Used

Factor value registers the display either K or M factor as selected in the I/O map
parameter screen. The value entered in the parameter screen for the associated
channel will be displayed
Real data registers display either count or frequency as selected on the I/O map
parameter screen.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 551

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Control Word 4X Register Control Word

1=Clear Channel 1 Data

1=Clear Channel 2 Data
1=Clear Channel 3 Data
1=Clear Channel 4 Data

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1=Channel 1 Disable (Hold)

1=Channel 2 Disable (Hold)
1=Channel 3 Disable (Hold)
1=Channel 4 Disable (Hold)

I/O Map There is a parameter screen for these modules where the K- Factor, Meter-Factor,
Parameter Mode and common parameters for the module are entered. The following screen
Screen capture illustrates this:

Local TSX Compact Drop

Drop Module
Modules: 1 ASCII Port # none Bits In: 144 Params
Bits In: 144 Bits Out: 16
Bits Out: 16
Status Table:

Prev Next Clear Delete Cut Copy Paste

Rack-Slot Module Detected In Ref In End Out Ref Out End

1-1 CPU
1-2 CPU
1-3
1-4 VIC2xx 300001 300009 400001 400001 High Speed
1-5
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
3-1
3-2
3-3

OK Cancel Help Poll

552 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Input Screen for Enter the K-Factor for each channel:

K-Factor C 2xx 4-Channel High Speed Counter Module
VIC 2xx 4-ChannelHigh Speed Counter Module

K-Factor Meter-Factor Mode Common

Valid range is 0 to 32767

Channel 1 1

Channel 2 1

Channel 3 1

Channel 4 1

OK Cancel

Input Sceen for Enter the Meter-Factor for each channel:

Meter- Factor
VIC 2xx 4-Channel High Speed Counter Module

K-Factor Meter-Factor Mode Common

Valid range is 1 to 19999

Channel 1 10000

Channel 2 10000

Channel 3 10000

Channel 4 10000

OK Cancel

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 553

VIC/VRC/CTR 2XX

Input Screen For each channel, select either Counter or Frequency in the Real Data register:
Module Mode
VIC 2xx 4-Channel High Speed Counter Module

K-Factor Meter-Factor Mode Common

Channel 1 Counter

Channel 2 Counter

Channel 3 Counter

Channel 4 Counter
Counter
Frequency

OK Cancel

Input Screen for Select to display either K or M factor in the Factor Data registers This selection
Module Common applies to a four channels:
Parameters
VIC 2xx 4-Channel High Speed Counter Module

K-Factor Meter-Factor Mode Common

Additional data for all K-Factor

channels displayed as:
K-Factor
Meter-Factor

OK Cancel

554 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ZAE 201 Counter/
Positioner Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter?
Section Topic Page
47.1 Overview of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module 556
47.2 Using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module as a High- 563
Speed Counter
47.3 Using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module as a Positioning 576
Controller
47.4 Specifications of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module 595

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 555

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

47.1 Overview of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner

Module

At a Glance

Purpose This section provides an overview of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:

Section?
Topic Page
What is the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module? 557
LED Indicator Displays of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module 558
Choosing Operating Mode and Input Voltage Level for the ZAE 201 Counter/ 559
Positioner Module
Operating States of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module 560
Representing the ZAE 201 Data Blocks in the I/O Map 561

556 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

What is the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module?

Brief Product The ZAE 201 is a dual-function, user-configurable module that can operate as either
Description a high speed counter or to monitor a simple one–axis positioning application. The
ZAE 201 has two output relays, the operation of which are specified when the
module is parameterized for either counting or positioning functions. Operational
power for the module is 24 Vdc, and position/count signals may be passed to the
module as either 5 V (RS422 compatible) or 24 V inputs.
In the counter mode, the unit acts as a high speed counter. Counting is started and
stopped by activating and deactivating the count gate input. When counting (count
gate activated), two output relays operate based on setup parameters passed to the
unit prior to activating the count gate.
In the positioning mode, the unit monitors a single–axis motion. This is
accomplished by providing quadrature encoder inputs to the ZAE201. When a
motion request is received, the unit will control the state of two output relays based
on the current position relative to the commanded position. During motion, the state
of two relay outputs are maintained such that speed can be controlled as the target
position is approached. The specific operation of these relays is determined by
setup parameters passed to the ZAE 201. Direction of motion and absolute speed
are determined by other devices controlled through user logic.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 557

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

LED Indicator Displays of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

LED Indicators The ZAE 201 has seven LED indicators displayed on the front panel:
l The green LED opposite terminal screw 1 goes ON to indicate the presence of
the 24 V supply voltage
l The amber LED opposite terminal screw 2 may be used as an encoder power
monitor if you are using 24 V input signals; if you remove the jumper between
terminal screws 1 and 2 and add a wire from the encoder supply, the LED will go
ON to indicate a loss of power from the field device. Do not remove the jumper or
use this LED with 5 V input signals.
l The green LED opposite terminal screw 12 is the READY LED; its meaning is
mode dependent. It goes ON in the positioner mode when the module has been
completely parameterized and the reference point trip has been performed. It
goes ON in the counter mode when the module has been completely
parameterized.
l The amber LED opposite terminal screw 13 is the RUN LED; its meaning is mode
dependent. It goes ON in the positioner mode when a motion command is being
executed. It goes ON in the counter mode when the module is parameterized and
the counter gate is open.
l The red LED opposite terminal screw 14 goes ON to indicate an FKE input active
condition.
l The two red LEDs opposite terminal screws 16 and 18 indicate the current
condition of relays 1 and 2, respectively. When an LED is ON, its respective relay
is closed; when an LED is OFF, its relay is open.

558 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Choosing Operating Mode and Input Voltage Level for the ZAE 201 Counter/
Positioner Module

Switch Location The choices of operating mode and input voltage are set via DIP switches on the
and Settings back of the module. The module can operate in only one mode and at only one input
voltage at a time.

LR

B3 B4
B1 B2

Input Voltage Setting

Position R on Switch B1 = 5 V inputs
Position L on Switch B1 = 24 V inputs

Operating Mode Settings

Position R on Switch B2 = Position sensing mode
Position L on Switch B2 = Counter mode

Activity Setting for FKE* Input

Position R on Switch B3 = FKE* input active LOW
Position L on Switch B3 = FKE* input active HIGH

* FKE = count gate or reference trip input, field wired at

terminal screw # 14.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 559

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Operating States of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Operating States After a ZAE 201 module has been installed, its two output relays must be
parameterized for counting or positioning functions. When the Compact-984
Controller is started and begins solving user logic, the ZAE 201 comes up in an
initialized but nonfunctional state called NET IN. In order to bring the module into a
READY state where it can function, information must be sent to the module
identifying how the two relays are to be used and how the FKE input is to be
interpreted. The process of sending this information to the module is called
parameterization, and the specific parameters are dependent upon the module’s
operating mode.
At the beginning of each scan, the ZAE 201 places the latest status and counter or
positioning data in its input data block. The controller uses this information to
determine the next command for the module. Commands are stated in the output
data block. If no new command is appropriate based on the current information in
the input data block, the command byte in the output data block is set to 0.
The ZAE 201’s maximum count cannot exceed 8,388,607.
Typically, the command register in the output data block should be cleared at the
start of a scan, allowing the user logic to define a new command as required. The
command is passed to the module at the end–of–scan. Commands may be given
only when the ZAE 201 is not busy, and a command must be consistent with the
current state of the module. If either of these conditions is not met, an error will be
returned in the input data block.
The ZAE 201 can be reset to a NET IN state at any time. New information can then
be passed to the module, thereby redefining the operating parameters before
returning to the READY state.

560 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Representing the ZAE 201 Data Blocks in the I/O Map

Overview The ZAE 201 is described in the Compact-984 I/O Map as a three-register
bidirectional module. Three consecutive 3x input registers are used to store the
three words in the input data block, and three consecutive 4x output registers are
used to store the three words in the output data block.

Format of the The first word in the (3x) input data block contains input data necessary for user
Input Data Block logic to efficiently control the ZAE 201; it comprises three parts:
l A one–bit module busy flag
l A set of seven error condition bits
l A set of eight mode–specific module status bits
The following diagram shows the first word in the input data block.

First Word in the Data Input Block

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Module Status Bits

Positioner Mode
0 0 0 0 * 1 0 0 = NET IN
0 0 0 0 * 1 0 1 = parameterized
1 * 1 1 * 1 1 1 = READY
0 0 0 0 * 1 1 1 = RUN fast
0 0 0 1 * 1 1 1 = RUN slow
0 0 1 1 * 1 1 1 = RUN hunting
Counter Mode
0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 = NET IN
0 0 * * 0 0 0 1 = READY
0 0 * * 1 0 1 1 = RUN
Error Condition Bits
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = module health failure--replace the module
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 = module communication error stop and restart the
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 = module time-out error controller to clear
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 = invalid request in current mode
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 = invalid request in current state
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 = invalid state RAM pointer
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 = invalid parameter
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 = invalid target value
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = invalid state error

1 = module is busy
0 = new command may be issued

* indicates that the bit value may be either 1 or 0 when the module is in this state.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 561

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

The second and third words in the input data block contain the latest count or
position value, depending on the operating mode of the module. The second word
contains the high order position or count, and the third word contains the low order.
The following is an explanation of bits 10 ... 13 in the above illustration:
Bit 10 In position mode, a 1 in this bit indicates whether the motion is within the specified
target range
Bit 11 The state of relay 2 at terminal 18
Bit 12 The state of relay 1 at terminal 16
Bit 13 The state of FKE input at terminal 14

Note: When in position mode the counts are 4 times those counts when in counter
mode.

Format of the The first 4x word in the output data block passes commands to the ZAE 201
Output Data module. It uses its low byte (bits 9 ... 16) to indicate the command type; the high byte
Block (bits 1 ... 8) is not used. The command types and their output data block implemen-
tations are mode dependent.
The following table is an output data block representation of counter/positioner
commands:
Operating Mode Command Hex Value Low Byte Bit Values
Counter parameterize 01 00000001
reset 02 00000010
clear current count 03 00000011
Positioner parameterize 01 00000001
reset 02 00000010
run reference 04 00000100
run reference + 05 00000101
go to target 06 00000110

These commands initiate a process to be carried out by the module and causes the
module to change state, sometimes permanently and sometimes temporarily.
The second and third words in the output data block are command dependent.
Sometimes they are used to pass needed information to the ZAE 201; other times
they may not be used at all. Some commands require more information than can be
stored in two words, and in these cases the second word is used as a pointer into
state RAM where the requisite number of registers is accessed.

562 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

47.2 Using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module as

a High-Speed Counter

At a Glance

Purpose This section provides an overview of the using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner
Module as a high-speed counter.

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:

Section?
Topic Page
Field Wiring the ZAE 201 for Counting Applications 564
Switch Settings for Using the ZAE 201 as a High-Speed Counter 567
Overview of ZAE 201 Counter Mode Commands and States 568
ZAE 201Counter Mode Commands 569
Example: Using the ZAE 201 as a High-Speed Counter 572

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 563

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Field Wiring the ZAE 201 for Counting Applications

Field Wiring for The ZAE 201 module can be field wired for counting applications in three different
Counting ways—for 5 V inputs and for 24 V inputs with or without the power monitor jumpered
Applications between terminals 1 and 2.

Wiring for The ZAE 201 can be field wired for counting with 5 V inputs as shown below.
Counting with
5 V Inputs
Green

I/O Bus
+5 V Interface
1 Amber
Count Pulse 2
3 VCC
Green Ready
5V 4
Pulse Count 5 VCC Amber Run
Generator Pulse 6
Negated VCC Red Count Gate
7
8
+5 V 9
External
0V 10
5 V Supply
0V 11
12
13
14
Count Gate 15 Red
16
Relay 1 17
18
Relay 2
19
20
0.1A 21
22

24 Vdc
24 V Common

564 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Wiring for The ZAE 201 can be field wired for counting with 24 V inputs, with or without the
Counting with 24 power monitor jumpered between terminals 1 and 2 as shown below.
V Inputs Green
I/O Bus
(a) - with Power Monitor
Interface
1 Amber
2
3 VCC
Count Green Ready
24 V 4
Pulse Pulse VCC Amber Run
5
Generator 6 Red Count Gate
7 VCC
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Count Gate 15 Red
Relay 1 16
17
Relay 2 18
19
20
21
0.1A 22

24 Vdc
24 V Common
Green

I/O Bus
(b) - without Power Monitor
Interface
Count 1 Amber
2
Pulse VCC
3 Green Ready
24 V 4
Pulse 5 VCC Amber Run
Generator 6 Red Count Gate
7 VCC
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Count Gate Red
15
Relay 1 16
17
Relay 2 18
19
20
21
0.1A 22
24 Vdc
24 V Common

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 565

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Facts About
Field Wiring for
Note: When the jumper between terminals 1 and 2 is removed and when both
Counting
terminals are field wired, as they are in panel (a) of the previous figure, the amber
Applications
LED opposite terminal 2 can be used as a power monitor for 24 V input signals. In
all other cases, the jumper should be left installed, thus preventing the LED from
turning on.

For 24 V operations, a pulse source for the count is field wired to terminal screw 3.
For 5 V operations, a differential input is required; pulse source and pulse source
must be field wired to terminal screws 3 and 4, respectively. This source is a series
of pulses generated by the events being counted.
The counter gate is field wired to terminal screw 14. This gate is used to control the
counting operation. When the module is in the READY state and the count gate goes
active, the current count held in the data input block is set to 0 and the module starts
accumulating a new count.
The two relays that will receive your counter control logic are wired at terminal
screws 16 and 18. Counter control logic is very application specific. For example,
relay 1 at terminal screw 16 might be connected to an indicator light that is
programmed to turn ON when a specified count is reached; at the same time, relay
2 at terminal screw 18 might be used to modify some aspect of the operation being
counted when some other count is reached.

566 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Switch Settings for Using the ZAE 201 as a High-Speed Counter

Procedure for To set a ZAE 201 module up as a high speed counter:

Setting Switches
Step Action
1 Place DIP switch B2 on the back of the module in the left (L) position.
2 Use DIP switch B1 to specify the desired input voltage at the count pulse inputs.
3 Use DIP switch B3 to specify whether the counter gate activity will be HIGH or
LOW.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 567

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Overview of ZAE 201 Counter Mode Commands and States

Parameterization When the ZAE 201 has been installed as a counter module and the Compact-984
Controller has been powered up, the ZAE 201 comes up in a NET IN state. In the
NET IN state, the module is able to accumulate pulse counts and store current count
information in the second and third word of the input data block. The ZAE 201 must
be given a set of counter mode parameters before the count gate and relays can
operate.
Two parameters—P1 and P2—must be passed to the module. These two
parameters are the count values at which relay 1 and relay 2, respectively, are to be
either opened or closed. A third bit of information must also be passed to the module
defining how the relays are to operate when the count is equal to P1 or P2.

READY and RUN Once the module has been parameterized, it goes into a READY state, where it is
States prepared for normal counting functionality controlled by the counter gate input.
When the counter gate is active, the module is in the RUN state where it proceeds
with its counting operation.
When the counter gate is not active, the module switches to the READY state where
it stops counting and maintains the count that it has accumulated. Activating and
deactivating the counter gate switches the module from READY to RUN and back.

RESET If you need to change the operating parameters without stopping the controller, you
can put the module back into a NET IN state at any time by issuing a RESET
command.

Single Count and The relays can operate in either single or multiple count operations.An example of
Multiple Count a single count operation might be using the P1 parameter is set to define when relay
Operations 1 opens—when the specified count is reached, the relay opens and the count
continues.
An example of a multiple count operation might be a relay scheduled to open at a
defined count and close when the count reaches 1.25 times the defined count. This
operation will continue to open at every multiple of the defined parameter and close
at every quarter multiple of that parameter.

568 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

ZAE 201Counter Mode Commands

Counter Mode There are three commands that can be used in the counter mode—parameterize,
Commands clear current count, and reset. These commands are implemented in the three-word
output data block specified in the I/O Map for the ZAE 201.As described in the
following table, not all commands are acceptable at all times to the module:
State parameterize clear current counter reset
NET IN allowed allowed allowed
READY not allowed allowed* allowed
RUN not allowed not allowed allowed
* Allowed, but has no effect if the module has entered RUN state since being
parameterized.

If a command is issued during a state that does not allow that command, an error is
reported in the first word of the input data block.

Counter Mode The parameterize command implements the first two words in the output data block.
Parameterize
Output Data Block Format: parameterize Command in Counter Mode
Command
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

not used
Second Word in the Output Data Block
index pointer to a table of five 4x registers in state RAM

Third Word in the Output Data Block Not Used

The second word contains an index into a table of five 4x registers in the controller’s
state RAM. These five registers contain the information necessary to parameterize
the module.
The first register in the 4x table contains information that defines how the relays will
be set and how they will react when the count is met:

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 569

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

The following diagram illustrates how the relays will be set and how they will react
when the count is met.

13 14 15 16

not used

0 = Normal open position of relay 2

1 = Normal closed position of relay 2

0 = Normal open position of relay 1

1 = Normal closed position of relay 1

0 = Relay 2 responds only once

1 = Relay 2 reset after 0.25 P1 of the pulses

0 = Relay 1 responds only once

1 = Relay 1 reset after 0.25 P1 of the pulses

Any values that might appear in bits 1 ... 12 of the register are ignored.
The second and third registers in the 4x table contain a hexadecimal representation
of P1, the count value controlling relay 1. The value of P1 < 8,388,607. The second
register contains the high order part of the hex value, and the third register contains
the low order part of the hex value.
The fourth and fifth registers in the 4x table contain a hexadecimal representation of
P2, the count value controlling relay 2. The value of P2 < 8,388,607. The fourth
register contains the high order part of the hex value, and the fifth register contains
the low order part of the hex value.
If an error occurs during the issue of the parameterize command, the appropriate
code will be returned in the first word of the input data block.

Counter Mode The reset command implements only the first word in the output data block.
reset Command
Output Data Block Format: reset Command in Counter mode
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

not used
Second Word in the Output Data Block Not Used

There are no errors associated with this command. If the module is in a RUN or
READY state when the reset command is issued, the module will be put into a NET
IN state. If the module is already in NET IN when the command is issued, nothing
will happen.

570 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Counter Mode The clear current count command implements only the first word in the output data
clear current block, as shown in the graphic below.
count Command
Output Data Block Format: clear current count Command in Counter Mode
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

not used
Second and Third Words in the Output Data Block Not Used

The only potential error associated with this command will be flagged if you issue it
while the module is in RUN mode.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 571

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Example: Using the ZAE 201 as a High-Speed Counter

Overview This system carries piece parts along a motor-driven conveyor line. The line
continues to a diverting mechanism that sends parts to either the right (R) or left (L)
into separate bins. The ZAE 201 Counter will enable the system to be controlled
such that the gate will switch positions after every 4,000 pieces.
The following diagram illustrates a conveyer system application example.

Piece Parts

Gate Position A
(Relay 1)

Gate Position B
(Relay 2)
Proximity
Sensor
Motor Drive

Counter Example Set the DIP switches on the back of the module for COUNTER mode, 5 V input
DIP Switch voltage, and LOW activity on the count gate.
Settings The following diagram illustrates this procedure.
B1 B2 B3 B4

Gate Count

Activity
Operating Mode
Input Voltage

R
ON OFF

572 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Counter Example Traffic cop the drop to support the system with the ZAE 201 high speed counter, a
Traffic Cop DAP 216 discrete output module, and a DEP 216 discrete input module:
Settings
Service Comm DelDrop Quit
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 OFF F9
TRAFFIC COP
984-128/138/145 CONTROLLERS

Drop : 1 ( 1 ) Rack : 1
Number Inputs : 64 Number Outputs : 64

Module Reference Numbers Data Module

Slot Type Input Output type Description

101 984 PC -145 POWERSUPPLY

102 984 PC -145 POWERSUPPLY
103 ZAE201 30001 - 30003 40001 - 40003 BIN COUNTER/POSITION
104 DAP216 00001 - 00016 16 - OUT 24VDC
105 DEP216 10001 - 10016 16 - IN 24VDC

Counter Example The following coils will be implemented in the example counting operation:
Coil Use
Usage Coil Function
External (DAP 216) 00001 Control coil for gate position A (at DAP 216 terminal screw 3)
00002 Control coil for gate position B (at DAP 216 terminal screw 4)
00007 Control coil for the count gate, the FKE input (at terminal
screw 14)
Internal 00017 Logic solve coil—when ON, ladder logic is being solved
External (DEP 216) 10009 State of Relay 1 output from ZAE 201
External (DEP 216) 10011 State of Relay 2 output from ZAE 201

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 573

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Counter Example Go to the reference editor by pressing <ALT><F2>, and edit register values to
Parameterization parameterize the ZAE 201 high speed counter:

Service Comm Format Setting SmplASC Transfr FileI/O Ref E/D Quit
F1 F2 F3 F4 Reference Data F6 F7 F8 OFF F9

40002 50
40050 0
40051 0
40052 4000
40053 0
40054 8000

Format : Binary Read from File Range :1 File :1 Page :0

Set register 40002 to a decimal value of 50; this indicates a pointer to a block of five
4x registers starting at 40050. (Do not set values in register 40001 manually—this
will be done by the user logic.)
The values you set in the table registers indicate:
l Relays 1 and 2 are normally open and provide one–shot responses, since the
four least significant bits in register 40050 are all set to 0
l The high order word value for relay 1, as expressed in register 40051, is 0
l The low order word value for relay 1, as expressed in register 40052, is 4,000
(FA0 in hex)
l The high order word value for relay 2, as expressed in register 40053, is 0
l The low order word value for relay 2, as expressed in register 40054, is 8,000
(1F40 in hex)
These parameterizing values will cause Relays 1 and 2 to close at the count values
of 4000 and 8000, respectively.

574 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Counter Example The discrete modules will be used to control the mechanics of the switching gate.
Field Wiring Field wire the three A120 I/O modules like this:
Diagram
24 Vdc
24 V Common

1 1 1
2 2 2
3 A 3 3
Count Pulses 4
4 from Prox A 4
5 5 5
Switch (5 Vdc) 6
6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 5V 9 9
10 Supply 10 10
11 11 11
12 24Vdc 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 Gate A 14
15 15 15
16 16 Gate B 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 19 19
20 20 20
21 21 21
22 22 22
DEP 216 ZAE 201 DAP 216

24 Vdc COM

Count Gate

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 575

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

47.3 Using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module as

a Positioning Controller

At a Glance

Purpose This section provides an overview of the using the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner
Module as a positioning controller.
The ZAE 201 does not control speed, but provides relay outputs that indicate when
speed should be changed. The actual control of speed must be provided by the user
(ladder or hardware) logic—the module itself does not control the speed. Similarly,
the ZAE 201 does not control direction; this is also a function of user-defined logic
(ladder or hardware).

What’s in this This section contains the following topics:

Section?
Topic Page
Field Wiring for ZAE 201 Positioning Applications 577
Switch Settings for Using the ZAE 201 as a Positioning Controller 580
Overview of ZAE 201 Positioning Mode Commands and States 581
The ZAE 201 Positioning Mode Commands 582
Example: Using the ZAE 201 Module as a Positioner 588

576 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Field Wiring for ZAE 201 Positioning Applications

Field Wiring for The ZAE 201 module can be field wired for positioning applications in three different
Positioning ways—for 24 V inputs with or without the power monitor jumpered between
Applications terminals 1 and 2, and for 5 V inputs.

Note: When the jumper between terminals 1 and 2 is removed and when both
terminals are field wired, as they are in Figure 18 (a), the amber LED opposite
terminal 2 can be used as a power monitor for 24 V input signals. In all other cases,
the jumper should be left installed.

Wiring a ZAE 201 The ZAE 201 can be field wired for positioning applications with 5 V inputs as shown
Module for here.
Positioning with
5 V Inputs
Green LED
I/O Bus
1 Interface
+5 V Amber LED
2
Quad1 VCC
3 Green Ready LED
Quad1N
5V 4
Pulse Quad2 VCC
5 Amber Run LED
Generator Quad2N 6
0 Ref Red Reference
7 VCC
0N Ref Trip LED
8
+5 V 9
External
0V 10
5 V Supply
0V 11
12
13
14
Reference Trip 15 Red LEDs
16
Relay 1
17
18
Relay 2
19
20
21
0.1A 22

24 Vdc
24 V Common

The direction of motion and speed are user defined. The ZAE 201 provides relay
outputs that indicate when speed should be changed.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 577

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Wiring a ZAE 201 The ZAE 201 can be field wired for positioning applications with monitoring as
Module for shown in (a), and without (b).
Positioning with
Green LED I/O Bus
24 V Inputs
Interface
1 Amber LED
2 Green Ready
Quad1 3 VCC LED
24 V 4 Amber Run
Pulse Quad2 5 VCC
LED
Generator 0 Ref 6 Red Reference
7 VCC
Trip LED
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 Red LEDs
Reference Trip 15
Relay 1 16
17
Relay 2 18
19
20
21
0.1A 22

24 Vdc
24 V Common
(a)

Green LED I/O Bus

Interface
1 Amber LED
2 Green Ready
Quad1 VCC LED
3
24 V 4 Amber Run
Pulse Quad2 5 VCC
LED
Generator 6
0 Ref 7 VCC Red Reference
8 Trip LED
9
10
11
12
13
14 Red LEDs
Reference Trip 15
Relay 1 16
17
Relay 2 18
19
20
0.1A 21
22

24 Vdc
24 V Common
(b)

578 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Position Control For 24 V operations, a ZAE 201 positioning module requires three input signals from
an incremental encoder to maintain absolute position—two quadrature pulse inputs
connected at terminal screws 3 and 5 provide position and direction, and a third
signal connected at terminal screw 7 provides a single pulse on every rotation of the
encoder.
For 5 V operations, differential inputs are required; a ZAE 201 positioning module
must be wired at six terminal screws:
l Quad pulse 1 and quad pulse 1 at terminal screws 3 and 4, respectively
l Quad pulse 2 and quad pulse 2 at terminal screws 5 and 6, respectively
l The 0 reference and 0 reference at terminal screws 7 and 8, respectively
The pulse signal combined with the reference trip input at terminal screw 14 define
0 for the linear travel route being controlled by the module.
The reference trip input is derived from the output of some type of proximity sensor
placed at a position defined as 0. On command, the object under control is passed
by the proximity switch. By logically ANDing the rotational pulse from the encoder
with the signal from the proximity switch, you define 0 and maintain the position
value of 0 within the module.
Position control is handled by user-defined discrete logic that controls a drive motor
based on information provided by the Compact-984 Controller. Relays 1 and 2 on
the ZAE 201 module control motor speed in the following manner, depending on
whether the parameterize command has been set for overlapping mode or
alternating mode pulse reception:
Overlapping Mode
l Both relays ON — fast speed
l Relay 1 OFF and relay 2 ON — slow speed
l Both relays OFF — stop drive motor
Alternating Mode
l Relay 1 ON and relay 2 OFF — fast speed
l Relay 1 OFF and relay 2 ON — slow speed
l Both relays OFF — stop drive motor
Motor direction must be controlled by other logic, typically by a discrete output
module or ladder logic that drives a D/A converter—e.g., a DAU 202.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 579

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Switch Settings for Using the ZAE 201 as a Positioning Controller

Switch Settings To set a ZAE 201 module up as a one-axis positioning controller, place DIP switch
B2 on the back of the module in the right (R) position, use DIP switch B1 to specify
the desired input voltage at the encoder inputs, and use DIP switch B3 to specify
whether the reference trip activity will be HIGH or LOW.
The ZAE 201’s maximum allowable positions are limited to a range between -
8,388,607 and +8,388,607.

Note: The ZAE 201 does not control speed, but provides relay outputs that indicate
when speed should be changed. The actual control of speed must be provided by
the user (ladder or hardware) logic-the module itself does not control the speed.
Similarly, the ZAE 201 does not control direction; this is also a function of user-
defined logic (ladder or hardware).

580 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Overview of ZAE 201 Positioning Mode Commands and States

Parameterization When the ZAE 201 has been installed as a positioning module and the Compact-
984 Controller has been powered up, the ZAE 201 comes up in a NET IN state. In
the NET IN state, the module is unable to conduct any position control operations.
It must be given a set of positioner mode parameters before it becomes a functioning
module.
The process involves the setting of three positioning parameters—P1, P2, and P3—
which describe how the two relays will manage motor speed as the target position
is approached, These parameters are unsigned numbers that refer to three different
distances from the target position.
For example, in overlapping mode, P1, P2, and P3 are values that must be defined
based on the dynamics of the operation being controlled. When the distance from
the target position reaches the value defined as P1, relay 1 is opened and the drive
motor speed begins to be reduced. When the distance from the target position
reaches the value defined as P2, relay 2 is opened and the drive motor is turned
OFF; when the motor is turned OFF, the operation coasts to a stop. P3 defines an
acceptable region on either side of the target position where you plan to stop the
system.
Two additional bits of information must be passed to the module during the
parameterization process. The first specifies the relay operation as a function of P1
and P2; the other specifies the speed at which the reference point will be
approached.

Running a After the ZAE 201 has been parameterized for positioning mode, the module is not
Reference Point yet able to perform motion control until it has undergone a procedure called running
a reference point. This procedure defines the 0-point on the axis of travel. It
requires the issuing of the run reference point command in the output data block
in order to drive the system toward the 0-position (defined by a proximity sensor) and
set the position value in the module to 0 when that point is reached.
The direction of motion is totally user-controlled.

The READY State After you have completed running a reference point, the ZAE 201 module enters the
READY state for positioning operations. At this point, motion control can be enacted
by simply requesting that the module drive the system to a particular coordinate.

RESET If you need to change the operating parameters, you can put the module back into
a NET IN state at any time by issuing a reset command.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 581

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

The ZAE 201 Positioning Mode Commands

Overview As shown in the following table, there are five commands that can be used in the
positioning mode—parameterize, reset, run reference point, run reference point
+, and go to target. These commands are implemented in the three-word output
data block specified in the I/O Map for the ZAE 201. Before ordering encoders,
ensure they comply with the A, B, and Z pulses shown in the Specifications section.
Not all commands are acceptable at all times to the module:
The following table summarizes command and state compatibilities in positioner
mode.
State parameterize reset run ref run ref + go to target
NET IN allowed allowed not allowed not allowed not allowed
PARAM not allowed allowed allowed not allowed not allowed
READY not allowed allowed not allowed allowed allowed
RUN FAST not allowed allowed* not allowed not allowed not allowed
RUN SLOW not allowed allowed* not allowed not allowed not allowed
RUN HUNT not allowed allowed* not allowed not allowed not allowed
* Allowed but can cause current motion to stop by opening both relays.

If a command is issued during a state that does not allow that command, an error is
reported in the first word of the input data block.

Positioning The parameterize command implements the first two words in the output data
Mode block:
parameterize Output Data Block Format: parameterize Command in Positioner Mode
Command
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

not used
Second Word in the Output Data Block
index pointer to a table of seven 4x registers in state RAM

Third Word in the Output Data Block Not Used

The second word contains an index into a table of seven 4x registers in the
controller’s state RAM. These seven registers contain the information necessary to
parameterize the module.

582 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

4[x] Table The first register in the 4x table contains information that defines the operation of the
relays during motion to a target position and the speed at which a run reference
point is executed.
The following diagram illustrates this procedure.

15 16

not used
0 = run reference point fast
1 = run reference point slow
0 = Relays receiving pulses in overlapping mode
1 = Relays receiving pulses in alternating mode

Relay 1
Overlapping Mode
Relay 2

Relay 2

P1 P2

Any values that might appear in bits 1 ... 14 of the register are ignored.
The second and third registers in the 4x table contain a hexadecimal number that
defines P1—the distance from the target position at which the motor speed should
slow down. The value of P1 < 8,288,607. The second register contains the high
order part of the hex value; the third register contains the low order part of the hex
value.
The fourth and fifth registers in the 4x table contain a hexadecimal number that
defines P2—the distance from the target position at which the motor should turn
OFF. The value of P2 < 8,288,606. The fourth register contains the high order part
of the hex value; the fifth register contains the low order part of the hex value.
The sixth and seventh registers in the 4x table contain a hexadecimal number that
defines P3—the distance from the target position that is deemed within acceptable
tolerance of the desired position. The value of P3 < 8,288,605. The sixth register
contains the high order part of the hex value; the seventh register contains the low
order part of the hex value.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 583

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Positioning
Mode Motion
CAUTION
Completion
Possible need to reset.
If the motion never achieves the target tolerance, the ZAE 201 will never
report the motion completed—no further motion commands can be
given without resetting the module.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Positioning The reset command implements only the first word in the output data block:
Mode reset
Command Output Data Block Format: reset Command in Positioner Mode
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

not used
Second and Third Words in the Output Data Block Not Used

There are no errors associated with this command. If the module is in a RUN or
READY state when the reset command is issued, the module will be put into a NET
IN state. If the module is already in NET IN when the command is issued, nothing
will happen.

Note: The reset can be used as an emergency stop for any motion.

584 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Positioning The run reference point command is used to define a 0-point along the range of
Mode run motion available to the system being controlled. The system is driven in the
reference point direction of a 0-point that has been predefined by a proximity sensor before issuing
Command the command. When the system reaches the 0-point, the module defines its 0
reference location as this point.
The run reference point command implements only the first word in the output data
block:
Output Data Block Format: run reference point Command in Positioner Mode
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 1 0 0

not used
Second and Third Words in the Output Data Block Not Used

This command must be issued as part of the parameterization process and is valid
only when the module is in a parameterized but not READY state.

Positioning The go to target command is the major motion command used in the positioning
Mode go to target mode; it implements all three words in the output data block:
Command
Output Data Block Format: go to target Command in Positioner Mode
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

not used
Second Word in the Output Data Block
signed hex position value (high order)

Third Word in the Output Data Block

signed hex position value (low order)

When you issue the go to target command, you tell the ZAE 201 module to drive
the system under control to a position specified by a hexadecimal number entered
in the second and third words of the output data block. The value of that hex number
is in the range -8,388,608 ... +8,388,607. The direction of motion may be positive or
negative; anticipated direction must be specified in user logic and transmitted to the
position control logic during the same cycle that the go to target command is
issued.When a go to target command is received, bit 1 in the first word of the input
data block is set to 1; the bit remains set until the target is reached and the READY
state is reached. No further motion commands are permitted while the busy bit is
set.
The go to target command is valid only while the ZAE 201 is in the READY state.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 585

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Positioning The run reference point + command implements all three words in the output data
Mode run block:
reference point +
Command Output Data Block Format: run reference point + Command in Positioner Mode
First Word in the Output Data Block
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

Second Word in the Output Data Block

signed hex position value (high order)

Third Word in the Output Data Block

signed hex position value (low order)

When you issue the run reference point + command, you tell the ZAE 201 module
to drive the system under control in a positive direction to a position specified by a
hexadecimal number entered in the second and third words of the output data block.
The value of that hex number is in the range -8,388,608 ... +8,388,607. In order for
this command to be satisfied, the system under control must be driven through the
0 reference point.
The run reference point + command is designed specifically for systems that
continually return to the 0 reference point when driven in a positive direction—e.g.,
a continuous belt-driven machine. In this type of system, where all positions are
defined as positive offsets of the predefined 0-point, the command may be used as
an alternative to the go to target command for sending the system a target. If, for
example, you want to move a system currently located at position 10,000 to target
position 5,000, you may proceed to the target in either the positive or negative
direction:
l To proceed in the negative direction, issue the go to target command to target
position 5,000:

10,000
5,000

586 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

l To proceed in the positive direction, issue the run reference point + command
to target position 5,000:
10,000
5,000

In the second case, the run reference point + command moves the system forward
to the 0 reference point, resets the count to 0, then continues system movement
positively to target position 5,000.
When a run reference point + command is received, bit 1 in the first word of the
input data block is set to 1; the bit remains set until the target is reached and the
READY state is reached. No further motion commands are permitted while the busy
bit is set.
The run reference point + command is valid only while the ZAE 201 is in the
READY state.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 587

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Example: Using the ZAE 201 Module as a Positioner

Positioning The ZAE 201 module is used to control horizontal positioning in the following
Example example. The system is a process line where printed circuit boards are dipped into
a series of four tanks. In the positioning mode, the ZAE 201 carry the PCBs along
the process line, position them over each of the four stations, and move them to the
unload position at the end of the line. The example treats only the horizontal
movement portion of the application; it does not treat vertical dipping motions.

Limit Switch Dip Tank Process Line

To Unload Bin

A B C D

Cleaning Bath Dryer Acid Bath Dryer

0 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000

Positioner Set the DIP switches on the back of the module for POSITION mode, 5 Vdc input
Example DIP voltage, and HIGH activity on the count gate:
Switch Settings
B3 B4

Gate Count
Activity
B1 B2

Operating Mode

Input Voltage

L R
ON OFF

588 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Positioner Traffic cop the drop to support the system with the ZAE 201 positioning module with
Example Traffic a DAU 202 analog output module and a DAP 220 24 Vdc combo I/O module:
Cop Settings
Service Comm DelDrop Quit
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 OFF F9
TRAFFIC COP
984-120/130/145 CONTROLLERS

Drop : 1 (1) Rack : 1

Number Inputs: 56 Number Outputs: 88

Module Reference Numbers Data Module

Slot Type Input Output Type Description

101 984 PLC-145

102 984 PLC-145
103 DAP220 10001 - 10008 00001 - 00008 8-IN 8-OUT 24V
104 DAU202 40150 - 40151 BIN 2 CHANNEL D/A
105 ZAE201 30001 - 30003 40101 - 40103 BIN POSITION/HS COUNT

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 589

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Positioner Field wire the two A120 I/O modules like this:
Example Field
Wiring Diagram
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
24 V Common 24 V Common
DAU 202 ZAE 201
DAP 220
1 1
1 2
2 2
3 3
3 4
4 4 Quadrature
5 5
5 Encoder 6
6 6
7 7
7 8
8 8 9
9 9
Drive Unit with 10 10
10 11
11 Supply Voltage 11
12 12
12 13
13 13
14 14
14 15
Limit Switch 15 15
16 16
16 17
17 17
18 18
18
0.1A 19 19
19 20
20 20
21 21
21
22 22

Positioning The following ladder logic program automatically parameterizes the module upon
Example Ladder power-up and then repeatedly directs the motion:
Logic l Relays 1 and 2 are normally open and provide one-shot responses, since the four
least significant bits in register 40120 are all set to 0
l The high order byte value for P1—the distance from the target location at which
the motor drive will begin to slow the process—is expressed in register 40121 as
0
l The low order byte value for P1 is expressed in register 40122 as 1,000
l The high order byte value for P2—the distance from the target location at which
the motor drive will stop—is expressed in register 40123 as 0
l The low order byte value for P2 is expressed in register 40124 as 500
l The high order byte value for P3—the acceptable distance from the target
location—is expressed in register 40125 as 0
l The low order byte value for P3 is expressed in register 40126 as 250

Positioning The following values, initialized in State RAM, will enable the positioning example to
Example State operate using the logic, traffic cop, and module connections as described in the
RAM Values following tables.

590 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Data Blocks Parameterize Data Blocks

40120 0 Parameterize Data
40121 0 P1 Value
40122 1000 Decimal
40123 0 P2 Value
40124 500 Decimal
40125 0 P3 Value
40126 250 Decimal

Motion Direction Data Block

40130 32 These registers, when moved to call group 00001 - 00016, set Coil 10 or 11,
specifying the direction of motion.
40131 32
40132 32
40133 32
40134 32
40135 64
40099 0 Pointer to table of direction bits
40140 0 Pointer to table of motion commands
40100 1 Command data for parameterized command, pointing to a table starting with
register 40120. This command will be active at the end of the first scan.
40101 120
40102 0

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 591

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Motor Speed, Motor Speed And Direction Values

Direction, Motion
40160 4096 (+10 V) One of these values is moved to register 40150, which is I/O mapped
Commands
to the DAU 202. The output of the DAU 202 will control the motor
speed and direction. NOTE: The specific values used here are
application-dependent.
40161 3072 (+5 V)
40162 2048 0
40163 1024 (-5 V)
40164 0 (-10 V)

Motion Command Table

40200 4 Run reference point command data
40201 0
40202 0
40203 6 Move to position 10,000 command data
40204 0
40205 2710 Hex
40206 6
40207 0 20,000
40208 4E20 Hex
40209 6
40210 0 30,000
40211 7530 Hex
40212 6
40213 0 40,000
40214 9C40 Hex
40215 6
40216 0 0
40217 0

Positioning In the example shown here, the HOME proximity switch is simulated by disabling
Example Coil 00001 and momentarily forcing it ON and then OFF, while the Run Reference
Network Point command is being executed. This toggles the FKE input to the ZAE 201 via
Diagrams the DAP 220.

592 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Networks 1 and 2 The following diagram describes Networks 1 and 2.

NETWORK 1

3001

SENS 00101
40099
1
6 0

SUB 1
40002
ADD
40099
00101

0 Network 1 monitors the busy bit in status Register 30001.

When the bit is on, a motion is in progress. A negative
00101 transition indicates the end of a motion; a positive transition
0
indicates a new motion has started. If a new motion has
ADD just started, the command register is cleared. If the motion
40100 command has just completed, a check is made to see if the
end of the motion table has been reached (40099 = 6); if
so, the pointer to the motion table is reset to 1.
NETWORK 2

500 Network 2 delays the positioning movement by 5 s after each new

00101 00102 position has been reached. Once the timer has timed out, the new
T.01 position values are moved into 40100 ... 40102.
40003
00102 40130 40141

40200 40099 40140 00001

40099 1 TBLK BLKM

1 1
TBLK SUB
3 40140
Also in this network, position pointer 40099 and direction pointer 40140
are incremented by 1 as part of the TBLK function block.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 593

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Networks 3 and 4 The following diagram describes Networks 3 and 4.

NETWORK 3
30001 40162 40160
00010 00011 00043 00044
00033 40150 0

BLKM BLKM SUB

1 1 40150
40161
00010 00011 00043 00044
0
Network 3 controls speed in the positive direction by moving SUB
the value of 30001 to coils 33 ... 49. This is done to monitor 40150
bits 10 and 11 of the status word (R1 and R2), which are
placed in coils 43 and 44. When P1 and P2 are reached, the
system will change speeds appropriately (normal speed to slow
speed, then slow speed to stop). Coils 10 and 11 define the
direction of motion.

The BLKM of registers 40162 ... 40150 assumes no motion will

occur. Subsequent logic sets up the appropriate speed.

NETWORK 4

40163
00010 00011 00043 00044
0

SUB
40150
40164
00010 00011 00043 00044
0

SUB
40150
Network 4 is similar to Network 3, but controls speed in the
negative direction.

594 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

47.4 Specifications of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner

Module

Specifications of the ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Purpose The purpose of this section is to list technical specifications of the module.

ZAE 201 Counter/ Module Topology

Positioner
Number of Relay Outputs 2
Specifications
Operating Modes Switch-selectable counter/positioner

Power Supplies
External Power Source (for all operating modes) 24 Vdc, 30 mA
Internal Power Source from I/O Bus 5 V, 100 mA maximum

Electrical Characteristics
Working Voltage Range of Relays 24 ... 60 Vdc
24 ... 250 Vac
Contact Current Load Currents @ 230 Vac 2 A continuous resistive
(maximum) 4 A instantaneous resistive
1 A continuous (Cos Φ = 0.5)
Load Currents @ 24 Vdc 2 A continuous resistive
4 A instantaneous resistive
1 A continuous (L/R* = 30 ms)
Wetting Current 5 mA (relay outs)
Contact Delay Time ~10 ms
Protective Circuitry 68 Ω + 15 nF in parallel with the
contact
Consumes ~1 mA
Maximum Wire Length from 24 V Pulse Generator 20 m
65 ft
from 5 V Pulse Generator 50 m
163 ft
* L = Load Inductance in H R = Load Resistance in Ω

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 595

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Input Characteristics
5 V Input Selection Differential RS-422 12 V peak-to-peak maximum
400 mV peak-to-peak minimum
24 V Input Selection for 1 signal 12 ... 30 V
for 0 signal -2 ... +5 V
Maximum Count Frequency for 5 V input 500 kHz
for 24 V input 50 kHz
PNP Encoder Quadrature type Two-track plus marker signal
Count Gate/Reference Trip 1 = 12 Vdc (min)
0 = 5 Vdc (max)
Encoder Pulse Alignment See diagram below.
Duration > 10 ms
Rise Time N/A

Relay Contact Service Life

Mechanical Switching Cycles 20,000,000
Electric Switching Cycles @ 230 Vac/0.2 A 10,000,000
(Resistive Load) @ 230 Vac/0.5 A 7,000,000
@ 30 Vdc/2 A, clamping diode 8,000,000 (typical)
@ 60 Vdc/1 A with clamping 1,000,000 typical
diode 3,000,000 maximum
3000 cycles/hr maximum
Electric Switching Cycles @ 230 Vac/ 0.5 A 5,000,000
(Inductive Load, Cos Φ = 0.5)

I/O Map
Register 3x/4x 3 in/3 out

Dimensions
WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm
1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in
Weight 300 g
0.7 lb

Agency Approvals
VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No.142; and FM Class I, Div 2 Standards

596 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

Pulse Alignment Encoders used with the ZAE 201 module should be ordered with the alignment of A,
of Encoders B and Z pulses as shown below.
Used with the
ZAE 201 Module
A

Z
Index

Encoders used with the ZAE-201 module should be ordered with

the alignment of A, B + Z pulses as shown above.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 597

ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module

598 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Overview of the ZAE 204 High-
Speed Counter Module

At a Glance

Purpose The purpose of this chapter is to describe the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module.

WARNING
Compatibility
The ZAE 204 module will only operate properly when used with an
A984, E984, or Micro 512/612 controller.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in death, serious injury,
or equipment damage.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
What is the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module? 600
Operating and Display Elements of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module 602
Configuration of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module 603
Example Field Connections and Signal Addresses for the ZAE 204 Module 606
Output Register Formats of the ZAE 204 Module 609
Input Register Formats of the ZAE 204 Module 614
Operation of the ZAE 204 Module 617
Specifications of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counting Module 619

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 599

ZAE 204

What is the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module?

Brief Product The ZAE 204 is a high speed counter module with the following characteristics:
Overview l Four counter inputs for counting 5 Vdc (TTL) and 24 Vdc pulses; a counting range
of 5 decades; and a counting frequency of up to 1 kHz (channel 1 can operate up
to 10 kHz)
l Four 24 Vdc count enable inputs
l Four 24 Vdc semiconductor output switches, 0.5 A each, with short circuit/
overload protection and hardware reset
Power required by the module is:
l 5 Vdc via the internal I/O bus
l 24 Vdc external supply for 24 V counting inputs, outputs, and enable inputs
The ZAE 204 can be installed in any slot in the A120 subracks (DTA 200, 201, and
202). The module has bus contacts at the rear and field connections on the front.
The blank label, which fits in the module cover, can be filled in with relevant
information (signal values, etc.) in the spaces provided. Refer to ZAE 204 Diagram,
p. 601 below.
The ZAE 204 is made up of 4 independent counters for the following modes:
l Event counter
l Repeat counter
l Differential counter
The above operating modes and the parameters required for them are preset by the
user program. See Operation of the ZAE 204 Module, p. 617 for a description of
these modes.

600 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

ZAE 204 Diagram Any output that is overloaded or short-circuited is switched OFF, and is indicated by
the amber fault LED (see next section (See Operating and Display Elements of the
ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module, p. 602)). Correction is made by use of the
RESET button as shown in the front view and label diagram below.

ZAE 204
ZAE 204

1 U
2 Input
RESET 1
3
PUSHBUTTON
4 TTL

5 2
6 TTL
7 3
8 TTL
9 4
10 TTL
11 M
ready U
12
13
1
14
Output

2
15
3
16
4
17
1
18
2
Gate

19
20 3
21 4
22 M
card

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 601

ZAE 204

Operating and Display Elements of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module

ZAE 204 LEDs The ZAE 204 has eleven LEDs on the front of the module. From top to bottom, they
are:
Color Type Function
Green Power External 24 Vdc—when lit, power ON; when off, power OFF
Green Ready When lit, indicates firmware initialization is complete and module is
ready for service; when off, indicates start-up functions are not
complete and module is not yet ready.
Note: The PLC must be running for this LED to illuminate.
Amber Fault Indicates the presence of an overload or short-circuit at one or
several output points. When lit, indicates an overload or short circuit;
when off, no faults detected.
Red Output 1 ... 4 Located opposite terminal screws 14 ... 17. When lit, these LEDs
indicate that the outputs are ON.
Red Gate 1 ...4 Located opposite terminal screws 18 ... 21. When lit, these LEDs
indicate that the enable inputs (function gate) have a high signal level
voltage applied to them.

The RESET button is used to restore the operation of an output switch after the
overload condition has been removed.

602 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

Configuration of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module

ZAE 204 The ZAE2 04 contains four independent 16–bit 1 kHz counters. In addition, channel
Configuration 1 can be programmed to accept up to 10 kHz inputs. The ZAE 204 has several
Overview modes of operation. It can operate as four independent up or down counters, either
one time or repetitively. Alternatively, channels 1 and 2 and/or channels 3 and 4 can
operate together as differential counters. In this mode, a single count value is
maintained for channel pairs.
For the channel 1, 2 pair, input pulses at the channel 1 field connector cause this
count value to increase, and input pulses at channel 2 cause the count value to
decrease. The differential count value for the channel 1, 2 pair are returned to the
location normally associated with channel 1. The channel 3, 4 pair works in a similar
manner.
An output is provided for each channel (pins 14 ... 17) to signal when the
accumulated count at a particular channel has reached its programmed target,
counted up to or counted down from 0. An input signal (pins 18 ... 21) is provided for
each channel to enable the counting operation. The accumulation of counts on any
channel can be controlled through the state of the enable input to the appropriate
pin.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 603

ZAE 204

ZAE 204 Field The module must be traffic copped as six 3x input registers and one 4x output
Side register, as shown in the following field side connections diagram.
Connections

ZAE 204

1 Module power, 24 Vdc typical

2 Internally connected to Pin 1
3 Input pulses for Channel 1 (24 Vdc)

4 Input pulses for Channel 1 (5 Vdc)

5 Input pulses for Channel 2 (24 Vdc)
6 Input pulses for Channel 2 (5 Vdc)

7 Input pulses for Channel 3 (24 Vdc)

8 Input pulses for Channel 3 (5 Vdc)

9 Input pulses for Channel 4 (24 Vdc)

10 Input pulses for Channel 4 (5 Vdc)
11 Ground

12 Internally connected to Pin 1

13 Internally connected to Pin 1

14 Target count signal for Channel 1 (output)

15 Target count signal for Channel 2 (output)
16 Target count signal for Channel 3 (output)

17 Target count signal for Channel 4 (output)

18 Count control (count gate enable) for Channel 1 (input)

19 Count control (court gate enable) for Channel 2 (input)

20 Count control (count gate enable) for Channel 3 (input)

21 Count control (count gate enable) for Channel 4 (input)
22 Internally connected to Pin 11

604 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

ZAE 204 Cabling l Shielded, twisted pair cable (2 or 4 x 0.5 mm/channel) should be used. All
channels can be connected with a common shielded cable. The maximum cable
length is 100 m.
l Connect shield to ground (GND) on one side with a short cable (< 8 in).
l Observe a minimum distance of 20 in between the module and power lines or
other sources of electrical disturbance.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 605

ZAE 204

Example Field Connections and Signal Addresses for the ZAE 204 Module

Field Connection Three examples of ZAE 204 connections are provided:

Diagrams l 5 V inputs (see 5 V Inputs Connection Example, p. 606);
l 5 V inputs on a noisy system (see 5 V Inputs, High Interference Connection
Example, p. 607);
l 24 V inputs (see 24 V Inputs Connection Example, p. 608).

Note: Detailed Compact 984 cabling and installation instructions are found in the
984-A120 Compact Programmable Controllers User Guide (GM-A984-PCS).

5 V Inputs Example connections for 5 V inputs are shown below.

Connection
Example 1
5V 2

3
E1
4
5
E2
6
TTL
7
E3
8

9
E4
10
11
COM
24V 12
13
A1
14
A2
15
A3
16
A4
17
01
18
02
19
03
20
04
21
COM 22

606 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

5 V Inputs, High Example connections for 5 V inputs, on a system with a high interference level, are
Interference shown below.
Connection
Example 24V Filtered 1
5V 2
3
E1
4
5
E2
6
TTL
7
E3
8

9
E4
10
11
COM
24V 12
13
A1
14
A2
15
A3
16
A4 17
01
18
02
19
03
20
04
21
COM
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 607

ZAE 204

24 V Inputs Example connections for 24 V inputs are shown below.

Connection
Example
1
24VDC
2
E1
3

4
E2
5
6
E3
7
8
E4
9
10

11
COM

24V 12

13
A1
14
A2
15
A3
16
A4
17
01
18
02
19
03
20
04
21
COM 22

608 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

Output Register Formats of the ZAE 204 Module

Overview The ZAE 204 is traffic copped for set up through a single 4YYYY word (BIN register).
The content of this word is interpreted as a pointer to the first of eight 4x registers
that contain the programmable operating parameters for each of the four counter
channels.
The format, of the eight words pointed to, appears in the following graphic, which
shows the output register format for the ZAE 204 module.
I/O MAP
REGISTER

40YYY XXX DATA = POINTER VALUE

MEMORY REGISTER DATA

4x COUNTER 1 MODE

4x + 1 COUNTER 1 TARGET

4x + 2 COUNTER 2 MODE

4x = 3 COUNTER 2 TARGET

4x + 4 COUNTER 3 MODE

4x + 5 COUNTER 3 TARGET

4x + 6 COUNTER 4 MODE

4x + 7 COUNTER 4 TARGET

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 609

ZAE 204

The following figure shows the bits in the ZAE 204 mode control word and their
meanings.
MODE CONTROL WORD

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

[15-9] Not Used

[8] Mode set, must be toggled (set

and then reset) to input the mode
control word data.
[7] Not used.
[6] If set, requests counting up; otherwise,
down counting.
[5] Defines the active level of “count achieved
target” signal for the channel associated with this
request. If set = 1, target count output goes low
when count is achieved; if set = 0, target count goes
high when count is achieved.
[4] Defines the active level of “count gate” for the channel
associated with this request. If set, a high gate input allows
counting.
[3] If set, negative edge transitions are counted on the
channel associated with this request. N/A for 10kHz counts

[2] If set, requests operation at 10 kHz (only valid for Channel 1).
[1] If set, requests that the channel associated with this request and the
next channel operate in differential mode (only valid for channels 1 and 3).

[0] If set, requests repetitive counting; if = 0, continuous count.

The target value is used in several ways. When up counting, the target value is the
count at which the target value output for a channel will be on. When down counting,
the target value is the value from which the counter counts down to zero. See
Operating and Display Elements of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter Module,
p. 602 for a more complete description.

610 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

Caution
CAUTION
Chance of Incorrect Health Status Indication
Caution:Modicon 984 PLCs assert IORST, the I/O bus reset, when in
STOP mode. This signal halts operation of the ZAE 204 internal
microprocessor by forcing it to a reset condition. When I/O Mapping as
required in STOP mode, the module will be indicated unhealthy by an
asterisk in the I/O module display, and the module description will
incorrectly read, "B8 ". This does not affect I/O Mapping, which may
proceed as usual. When using a STAT block, module health is properly
indicated when Executive Prom Combination #1003 or greater is
installed in the 984. Parameters will have to be loaded (or reloaded)
after going into RUN from STOP mode, and that 3x register data will be
zeroed when going from STOP to RUN. Refer to the next figure (See
ZAE 204 RUN/STOP Mode, p. 612).
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 611

ZAE 204

ZAE 204 RUN/ To ensure that the ZAE 204 parameters are loaded after the PLC is set to RUN from
STOP Mode STOP mode, the ZAE 204 RUN/STOP mode user logic, shown below, may be
used..

NETWORK #1 / SEGMENT #1

0003

10 40YYY CTR 1 Mode

40YYY + 1 CTR 1 Target
0001 40YYY + 2 CTR 2 Mode
T.01 40YYY + 3 CTR 2 Target
40XXX 40YYY + 4 CTR 3 Mode
0003 40YYY + 5 CTR 3 Target
40YYY + 6 CTR 4 Mode
40YYY + 7 CTR 4 Target

NETWORK #2 / SEGMENT #1

P 40YYY
0001 0002
40ZZZ

BLKM
8

N 0008 0008 0008 0008

0002
40ZZZ 40ZZZ+2 40ZZZ+4 40ZZZ+6

MBIT MBIT MBIT MBIT

1 1 1 1

612 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

Operation of On the first scan, the timer in Network 1 is set to zero. The next scan starts the timer,
Networks in the set for 100 ms. When it times out, the output comes on and will activate the BLKM
RUN/STOP Mode through the positive transition contact referenced to Coil 1. The values of the 8 fixed
User Logic 40YYY registers are block moved into 8 40ZZZ registers, which is a table pointed to
Diagram by the contents of the I/O mapped output register. These registers contain the mode
and target data for the module. The mode registers in the 40YYY table must have
bit 8 set to 1, as required, to load the parameters into the ZAE 204. On the following
scan after the BLKM is solved, coil 2 goes OFF. Power is then passed through the
negative transitional to the MBIT blocks, which set bit 8 to zero in each mode control
register in the 40ZZZ table. When this is done, the module is ready to accept counts
from external pulse generators.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 613

ZAE 204

Input Register Formats of the ZAE 204 Module

Overview As described in the following table, the module is I/O mapped to input through six 3x
words (BIN registers). The first two of the input words contain global and channel–
specific status information. The last four input words contain the count associated
with each of the four channels.
I/O Map Registers Description
3x Module status information
3x + 1 Mode–request errors for each channel
3x + 2 Current count for channel 1
3x + 3 Current count for channel 2
3x + 4 Current count for channel 3
3x + 5 Current count for channel 4

614 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

The following figure shows the meanings of the bits in the ZAE 204 RUN/STOP first
input word..
FIRST INPUT WORD
[15] If set, indicates that communication with the module is no
longer possible. To correct, power cycle the module.
[14] If set, indicates that the module is unhealthy. The PLC has read the
wrong personality in the slot I/O mapped to this module.
[13] If set, indicates that the pointer to the output data table is invalid.
[12] If set, indicates an overload of module output signals.
[11] If set, indicates that the input counts to
Channel 4 have exceeded the target count.
[10] If set, indicates that the input counts to Channel
3 have exceeded the target count.
[9] If set, indicates that the input counts to
Channel 2 have exceeded the target count.
[8] If set, indicates that the input counts to
Channel 1 have exceeded the target count.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

[7] Signals when Channel 4 counter

has reached the target count.
[6] Signals when Channel 3 counter
has reached the target count.
[5] Signals when Channel 2 counter
has reached the target count.
[4] Signals when Channel 1 counter
has reached the target count.
[3] If set, indicates that the count gate
input for Channel 4 is 12 - 30 V.
[2] If set, indicates that the count gate
input for Channel 3 is 12 - 30 V.
[1] If set, indicates that the count gate
input for Channel 2 is 12 - 30 V.
[0] If set, indicates that the count gate
input for Channel 1 is 12 - 30 V.

The format for the second input word is:

SECOND INPUT WORD

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Report error code Report error code Report error code Report error code
for Channel 4. for Channel 3. for Channel 2. for Channel 1.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 615

ZAE 204

Each nibble of the second word contains a single digit identifying the type of error
found while trying to program the module with the user instruction provided for that
channel. The meaning of the error codes is as follows:
Error Code Meaning
0 No error
1 Differential and 10kHz operation requested on channel 1
2 Differential and repetitive mode requested on channels 1 or 3
3 10 kHz operation requested on channels 2, 3, or 4
4 Mode change requested on channels 2 or 4 while channels 1 or 3 (respectively)
are set to differential operation
5 Differential operation requested on channels 2 or 4
6 An invalid target value has been specified

616 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

Operation of the ZAE 204 Module

Overview The operation of the ZAE 204 is controlled through the 4x register output table (see
Output Register Formats of the ZAE 204 Module, p. 609. To control the operation of
the module through user logic, the logic must be designed to set up the desired
operating mode and then toggle the mode change bit (bit 8) in the mode control word
for a particular channel for one scan.
If the bit is not cleared after one scan, the driver will continually attempt to change
modes and reset the module (and count) based on the selected mode, thus not
allowing the module to operate. Having set the desired mode of operation, the actual
counting begins when the active level of the count gate for a channel based on bit 4
of the control word is asserted on the input terminal for the channel (pins 18 ... 21).
An LED is associated with each of the count gate terminals (described previously)
that will illuminate when the count gate has 24 V applied. If the count gate is
deasserted, the counting is temporarily suspended until it is once again asserted.
When a count operation is completed (count equals target or 0), the status bit in the
first input word for that channel (bits 4 ... 7) is set. In addition, the signal on the output
pin for the channel (pin 14 ... 17) is asserted to a level based in the state of bit 5 of
the control word for the channel. An LED is associated with the output pin (described
previously) that will illuminate. The ZAE 204 will continue to accumulate counts even
though the count target has been reached. If this occurs it will be indicated by one
of bits 8 ... 11 being set in the first input word depending on the particular channel.
The actual operation of the module depends on the mode of operation chosen. The
operating mode is chosen by the state of bits 0 ... 7 of the mode control word.
However, all combinations of these bits are not allowed. Invalid combinations are
sensed and reported in the second input word. The following describes the operation
in each of the allowed modes.

One–time This is the default operation obtained by clearing all mode bits (0 ... 7) of the control
Operation word. In this mode, the module will count up or down (see bit 6 of the control word)
once, and when the target value or 0 is reached, the input status and discrete
outputs will reflect this. The module will continue to accumulate counts after this
occurs. The counting process can be restarted by deasserting and reasserting the
count gate input for the channel in question. In this mode, the maximum target value
allowed is 32767.

Repetitive This mode is activated by setting bit 0 of the control word for the channel in question.
Operation This mode is similar to one-time operation except that the count process restarts
when the target value is reached. The target achieved signal in the status input, the
output discrete, and the LED are asserted and remain so for 25% of the next count
cycle, or 20 ms minimum. In this mode, the maximum target value allowed is 32767.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 617

ZAE 204

Differential This mode applies to channels 1 and 3 only and is activated by setting bit 1 in the
Counter control word. If differential mode is selected for channel 1, channels 1 and 2 operate
together, and the accumulated count value is reported in the channel 1 input counter
( 3x + 2). In this mode, the pulses input to the channel 1 input increment the count,
while those input to channel 2 decrement the count. This mode is only available to
be programmed in channels 1 or 3. When differential mode is selected for Channel
3, Channels 3 and 4 operate together.
The accumulated count value is reported in the Channel 3 input counter (3x + 4).
Any attempt to use this mode in channels 2 or 4 will result in an error. Additionally,
if a mode change to channel 2 or 4 is requested while channels 1 or 3 respectively
are set to differential mode, an error will be reported. Selection of up or down
counting (bit 6 of the control word) has no effect in this mode. The counting range is
from -32767 ... +32768.

10 kHz Count In The default operation of the module is to accept input pulses at a maximum of 1 kHz.
Channel 1 For channel 1 only, an option is available to accept up to 10 kHz pulses. This option
is chosen by setting bit 2 of the control word for channel 1 to a 1. Choosing this
option for any other channel will result in an error. Differential mode is not allowed.
Only the 5 V input can be used, and only negative edge transitions are counted.

Note: If set to one–time operation, the counter associated with channel 1 will not
continue to accumulate counts after target is reached.

618 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

Specifications of the ZAE 204 High-Speed Counting Module

ZAE 204 Module The following table describes the module topology.
Topology
Number of Counting Inputs 4
Number of 24 Vdc Outputs 4
Number of Enable Inputs 4
Operating Mode High Speed Counter
Isolation Opto–coupler on each field point

ZAE 204 Power Power supply details:

Supplies
External Power Source Load 24 Vdc Count Inputs, 25 mA maximum
Gate Inputs, 30 mA maximum
Outputs, 1 A maximum
5 Vdc Count Inputs, 10 mA maximum
Internal Power Source Load from I/O bus maximum 5 V, 100 mA
typical 75 mA

ZAE 204 Counter Counter input details

Inputs
Quantity 4 for input pulses with 5 Vdc (TTL) or 24 Vdc
Signal Level at ON signal >= 2.3 V
5 V (TTL) OFF signal 0 ... 1 V
Input Current <= 2.5 mA each at 0 V (current sink)
Signal Level at ON signal 12 ... 30 V
24 V (TTL) OFF signal -2 ... +5 V
Input Current (current source) < 6 mA each at 30 V
Minimum 0 Pulse Width 0.35 ms
Allowable Mark-space Ratio 65/35 percent maximum
Counting range 0 ... 32,767 or -32,768 ... 0 ... +32,767, depending on
operating mode
Counting Frequency 1 kHz maximum
Input 1 with 5 V pulses 10 kHz maximum

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 619

ZAE 204

ZAE 204 Enable Enable input details:

Inputs (Gate)
Quantity 4
Rated Signal Value 24 V
Signal Level HIGH Signal 12 ... 30 V
LOW signal -2 ... +5 V
Input Current 7 mA @ 24 V
Input Delay (contact bounce suppression) 4 ms
Input Rise Time N/A

ZAE 204 Semiconductor output details:

Semiconductor
Quantity 4
Outputs
Working Voltage V US = 24 Vdc
Signal Language True High
Signal Output Level ON VS = 0 ... + 2 V
OFF 0 ... 2 V, < 1 mA
US = 20 ... 30 Vdc
Load Current/Output 500 mA maximum
Load Current for All Outputs 1 A maximum
Switching Delay < 1 ms
Power Dissipation 1.25 W
Inrush Current for Lamps 5 W maximum

ZAE 204 Operating fequency details:

Operating
Resistive Load 100/s
Frequency
Inductive Load @ 500 mA 1000/hr
Bulb Load @ 1.2 W 8/s
@5W 1000/hr

ZAE 204 I/O Map Register detail:

Registers 3x/4x 6 in/1 out

620 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 ZAE 204

Dimensions Dimensions details:

WxHxD mm 40.3 x 145 x 117.5
in 1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5
Weight g 300
lb 0.7

ZAE 204 Agency Agency Approval details:

Approvals
VDE 0160; UL 508; CSA 22.2 No. 142 and FM Class I, Div 2 Standards.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 621

ZAE 204

622 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Appendices

At a Glance

Purpose The following chapters contain material related to A120 I/O modules.

What’s in this The appendix contains the following chapters:

Appendix?
Chapter Chapter Name Page
A IEC Wiring Diagrams for A120 I/O Modules 625
B I/O Configuration with Concept 671
C I/O Configuration of A120 Series I/O Modules with Modsoft 745
D Modsoft Application Examples for Selected A120 Series I/O 753
Modules
E A120 Option Modules 769
F Requirements for CE Compliance 779
G Technical Assistance 789

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 623

Appendices

624 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams for A120 I/O
Modules

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides IEC-compliant wiring diagrams for the A120 Series I/O
modules.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
IEC Nomenclature Legend 626
IEC Wiring Diagrams for A120 Modules 627

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 625

IEC Wiring Diagrams

IEC Nomenclature Legend

Legend The following table describes the IEC nomenclature used in the IEC wiring
diagrams.
Nomenclature Description
U Voltage
I Current
M Common
PE Ground
L 230Vac or hot
US 24Vdc
UB Supply voltage for modules
US Working voltage for activating the actuators
N1 Supply 1
N2 Supply 2
E1 Input 1
A1 Output 1
EW1 Input 1 wiring
AW1 Output 1 wiring
F1 Automatic circuit breaker 1 or fuse
C1 Capacitor 1
V1 Isolation diode 1
R1 Resistor 1
G Gate

626 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

IEC Wiring Diagrams for A120 Modules

Overview The following diagrams are IEC-compliant versions of the A120 diagrams shown
throughout this manual.

ADU 204 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the ADU 204.
Wiring Diagram
1
2
3 3

PT 100
4 4
1 U 1
5 5
6 6
7 7
PT 100
8 8
2 U 9 2 9
10 10
11
12
13
14 14
PT 100

15 15
3 3 U
16 16
17 17
18 18
PT 100

19 19
4 U
4 20 20
21 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 627

IEC Wiring Diagrams

ADU 205 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the ADU 205.
Wiring Diagram
1
2
3 3
I 4
1 U
5 5
6 6
7 7
U I 8
2 9 9
10 10
11
12
13
14 14
15
3 U I
16 16
17 17
18 18
19
4 U I
20 20
21 21
22
AGND

628 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

ADU 206 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the ADU 206.
Wiring Diagram
UB
M2
0.16A
1
2
3 3
4 4
5 5
1 I U
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
2 I U
10 10
11
12
13
14
15 15
16 16
3 U I
17 17
18
19 19
20 20
4 U I
21 21
22
* For current inputs please
use the enclosed jumpers
Jumpers.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 629

IEC Wiring Diagrams

ADU 210 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the ADU 210.
Wiring Diagram
+24 VDC
Common

0.16A

1
2
3 3
4 4
5 5
1 I 6 U
6
7 7
8 8
9 9
2 I U
10 10
11
12
13
14
15 15
16 16
3 U I
17 17
18
19 19
20 20
4 U I
21 21
22

* Apply Jumpers to select

20mA range per channel.

630 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

ADU 211/212 IEC The five figures that follow are all ADU 211/212 IEC wiring diagrams.
Wiring Diagrams The following figure is an ADU 211/212 IEC wiring diagram.

+ 24 VDC (AS-BADU211 ONLY)

24 V Common (AS-BADU211 ONLY)
0.5 A Slo-Blo Recommended

1
2
Ch 1 U
3
4
5 Group 1 showing
6 Voltage
7 Configuration
8
Ch 4 U 9
10
11
12
13
Ch 5
14
14
15
17 Group 2 showing
18 Thermocouple
19 Configuration with Open
Ch 8
20 Circuit Detection
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 631

IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an ADU 211/212 IEC wiring diagram.

+24 VDC (AS-BADU211 ONLY)

+24 V Common (AS-BADU211 ONLY)
0.5 A Slo-Blo Recommended

1
2
Ch 5 3
4
5 Group 1 showing
6 Thermocouple
7 with External CJC
8 Configuration
Ch 8 9
10
11
12
13
Ch 5
14
15
16 Group 2 showing
17 Thermocouple
Optional thermistor 18 Configuration
for both groups 19 with External CJC
Ch 8 20 and Open
external Cold
Junction 21 Thermocouple
Compensation TC 22 Detection
(Betatherm 10K3A1
or equivalent)

632 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an ADU 211/212 IEC wiring diagram.

+ 24 VDC (AS-BADU211 ONLY)
24 V Common (AS-BADU211 ONLY)
0.5 A Slo-Blo Recommended
1
sence
2
sence
3
4
5
Group 1 showing
6
three-wire RTD
7
8 Configuration
Excitation 9
10
Excitation 11
12
13
Ch 5
14
15
16
17 Group 2 showing
18 Thermocouple
19 Configuration
Ch 8 20
21
22
The following figure is an ADU 211/212 IEC wiring diagram.
+ 24 VDC (AS-BADU211 ONLY)
24 V Common (AS-BADU211 ONLY)
0.5 A Slo-Blo Recommended
1
sence
2
sence
3
4
5
6 Group 1 showing
7 two-wire RTD
8 Configuration
9
Excitation 10
Excitation 11
12
sence 13
sence 14
15
16
17 Group 2 showing
18 three-wire RTD
Configuration
19
20
Excitation 21
Excitation 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 633

IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an ADU 211/212 IEC wiring diagram.

+ 24 VDC (AS-BADU211 ONLY)

24 V Common (AS-BADU211 ONLY)
0.5 A Slo-Blo Recommended
1
1 2
Ch 1
3
4
5
6 Group 1 showing
7 Current Configuration
1 8
Ch 4
9
10
11
12
sence 13
sence 14
15
16
Group 2 showing
17
four-wire RTD
18
Configuration
19
20
Excitation
21
22

634 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

ADU 214 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the ADU 214.
Wiring Diagram
UB
M2
0.16A
3) 1
2
3 3
4 4
2 1) 1 U 2 U
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
4 1) 3 I 2) 4 U
9 9
0 ... 10 Ohm
10 10
11
12
13
14
6 15
U 5 I 2)
16
17
18
19
8 7 2) I 20
2) 21
8
22

1) Resistance temperature detector Pt 100 ... 1000, Ni 100 ... 1000 or

remote resistance detector 0 ... 2000 Ohm
2) External reference resistance 50 or 100 Ohm, 0.1%, 0.125 W, Tk 25
3) See Voltage and Current measuring
4) The common reference point “AGND” is internally connected to 0 V
(reference potential of PLC).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 635

IEC Wiring Diagrams

ADU 216 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the ADU 216.
Wiring Diagram Cold junction ADU 216
Equalizing line
Cu-conductor 1
2
1 3
4
2 5
6
3 7
8
9
4
10
11

AD592
12
13
5 14
15
16
6 17
7 18
19
20
8
21
22

ADU 257 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the ADU 257.
Wiring Diagram
1
+ 2
3 Thermocouple
+ 4
5 Voltage
6
7
8 RTD or Resistor
9 4 Wire Connection
10
11
12 +CJC
AD592
13 -CJC
14
15
16 3 Wire Connection
17
18
19
20 2 Wire Connection
21
22

636 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAO 216 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAO 216.
Wiring Diagram US = 24 VDC
M2
4A
1
2
3
Q1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q8
11
12
13
14
Q9
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Q16 22

* Terminal 11 should be connected in the shortest possible way to the

functional earth (hat rail). In case of connection failure compensating
currents can occur via M2→ 0 V path. These lead to the destruction of
the protective resistor (R31).

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 637

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 204 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 204.
Wiring Diagram
US = 24 ... 110 VDC / L = 24 ... 230 VAC
M4/N
UB = 24 VDC
M2

4A

4A
0.16 A
1
2
3
4
5
Q1 6
7
8
9
Q2 10
11
12
13
14

16

18

20
Q4
22

638 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 208 IEC The following figure is IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 208.
Wiring Diagram
US = 24 ... 110 VDC / L = 24 ... 230 VAC
M4/N
UB = 24 VDC
4A M2

4A

4A

4A
0.16A
1
2
3
Q1 4
5
Q2 6
7
Q3 8
9
Q4 10
11
12
13
14
Q5 15
16
Q6 17
18
19
Q7
20
Q8 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 639

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 210 IEC The following figure is IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 210.
Wiring Diagram L = 24 ... 230 VAC
N

1
2
Q1 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Q2
10
11
12
13
14
Q3
16

18

20
Q4
22

640 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 211 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 211. Note that this
Wiring Diagram diagram is for Voted (Dual) applications only. See DAP 211 Combined I/O Module
Field Wiring, p. 259for more information.

F DAP 211
LIN
L 1
AUX 2
OUT IN
3 OUT I/O-1
OUT
4
IN
5
6
7 IN
8 OUT I/O-2
L 9
10
11

DAP 211
LIN
N 12
AUX
13 IN
OUT OUT
14 I/O-1
OUT
15
IN 16
17
18 IN
19 OUT I/O-2
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 641

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 212 and The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 212 and the DAP 292.
DAP 292 IEC US = 24 ... 110 VDC / L = 24 ... 230 VAC
Wiring Diagram M4/N
UB2 = 24 VDC
M2
UB1 = 24 VDC at DAP 212; UB1 = 60 VDC at DAP 292
M1
0.16A

4A
4A
0.16A
1
2
3
Q1 4
5
Q2 6
7
8
Q3 9
Q4 10
11
12
13
11 14
15
16
17
18
19
18 20
21
22

642 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 216/DAP The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 216/DAP216N.
216N IEC Wiring
Diagram US = 24 VDC
M4
4A 4A
1
2
3
Q1
4
5
.............

6
7
8
9
10
Q8
11
12
13
14
Q9
15
16
.............

17
18
19
20
21
Q16
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 643

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 217 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 217.
Wiring Diagram US = 5 ... 24 VDC
M4
1A 1A

1
2
A1 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A8 10
11
12
13
A9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A16 21
22

644 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 218 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 218.
Wiring Diagram L = 24 ... 115 VAC
N

1
2
3
Q1
4
5
.............

6
7
8
9
10
Q8
11
12
13
14
Q9 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Q16
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 645

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 220 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 220.
Wiring Diagram
US = 24 VDC
M4
UB = 24 VDC
M1
0.16 A

10 A
1
2
3
Q1 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q8
11
12
13
I1 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
18 21
22

646 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 252 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 252.
Wiring Diagram US = 24 ... 110 VDC / L = 24 ... 230 VAC
M4/N
UB2 = 22 VDC
M2
UB1 = 24 VDC
M1
0.16A

4A

4A
0.16A

1
2
3
A1 4
5
A2 6
7
A3 8
9
A4 10
11
12
13
E1 14
15
16
17
18
19
E8 20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 647

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAP 253 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAP 253.
Wiring Diagram
US = 24 ... 110 VDC / L = 24 ... 230 VAC
M4/N
UB2 = 24 VDC
M2
UB1 = 24 VDC at DAP 212; UB1 = 60 VDC at DAP 292
M1
0.16A

4A
4A
0.16A
1
2
3
Q1 4
5
Q2 6
7
8
Q3 9
Q4 10
11
12
13
I1 14
15
16
17
18
19
18 20
21
22

648 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAU 202 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAU 202.
Wiring Diagram
UB = 24 VDC
M2
0.16A
1
2
3
4
U1
5
6
1
7
8
11
9
10
11
12
13
14
U2 15
16
17
18
12 19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 649

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAU 204 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAU 204.
Wiring Diagram
24 VDC (required)
24 V Common (return to P/S)
0.5 A
1
2
3
Channel 1 4
R>20k Ohm 5
6
7
8
R<500 Ohm
Channel 2 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
R<500 Ohm
Channel 4 20
21
22

650 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DAU 208 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DAU 208.
Wiring Diagram UB = 24 VDC
M2
0.16 A
1
2
1 U1 3
4
5
2 U2 6
3 U3 7
8
9
4 U4
10
11
12
13
5 U5 14
15
6 U6 16
17
7 U7 18
19
20
8 U8 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 651

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEO 216 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DEO 216.
Wiring Diagram
UB = 24 VDC
M2
0.16A
1
2
I1 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I8 10
11
12
13
I9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I16 21
22
* Terminal 11 should be connected in
the shortest possible way to the
functional earth (hat rail). In case of
connection failure compensating
currents can occur via M2→ 0 V path,
which lead to the destruction of the pro-
tective resistor (R16).

652 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEP 208 and DEP The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for both the DEP 208 and the
210 IEC Wiring DEP 210.
Diagram L = 230 VAC for DEP 208; L = 115 VAC for DEP 210
N
0.16 A for DEP 208
0.2 A for DEP 210
1
2
I1 3
4
I2 5
6
I3 7
8
I4 9
10
11
12
13
I5 14
15
16 16
17
I7 18
19
18 20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 653

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEP 211 IEC The following figure is the DEP 211 IEC wiring diagram.
Wiring Diagram
L = 115 VAC
N
0.1A 0.1A 0.1A 0.1A
1
2
I1 3
4
I2 5
6
I3 7
8
I4 9
10
11
12
13
I5 14
15
16 16
17
I7 18
19
18 20
21
22

654 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEP 214 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DEP 214.
Wiring Diagram
UB = 12 ... 60 VDC
M1
0.16A 0.16A
1
2
I1 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I8 10
11
12
13
I9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I16 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 655

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEP 215 and DEP The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for both the DEP 215 and the DEP
217 IEC Wiring 217.
Diagram
UB = 5 VDC at DEP 215; UB = 24 VDC at DEP 217
M1
0.16A 0.16A
1
2
I1 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I8 10
11
12
13
I9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I16 21
22

656 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEP 216 and DEP The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for both the DEP 216 and the DEP
220 IEC Wiring 220.
Diagram
UB = 24 VDC
M1
0.16A 0.16A
1
2
I1 3
4
5
6
71
8
9
I8 10
11
12
13
I9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I16 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 657

IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEP 218 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DEP 218.
Wiring Diagram
L = 115 VAC
N
0.2A

0.2A
1
2
I1 3
I2 4
I3 5
I4 6
I5 7
I6 8
I7 9
I8 10
11
12
13
I9
14
I10 15
16
I12 17
18
I14 19
20
I16 21
22

DEP 257 IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the DEP 257.
Wiring Diagram
U 1
2 First of 16 Input Circuits
E1 3
4
5
6
7 PAB
8 YE
9 RD
E8 10
M 11
U 12
13
E9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
E16 21
M 22

658 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

DEP 296 and DEP The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for both the DEP 296 and the DEP
297 IEC Wiring 297.
Diagram
UB = 60 VDC at DEP 296; UB = 48 VDC at DEP 297
M1
0.16A 0.16A
1
2
I1 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I8 10
11
12
13
I9 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I16 21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 659

IEC Wiring Diagrams

MOT 201/202 IEC The seven figures that follow are IEC wiring diagrams for the MOT 201, the MOT
Wiring Diagram 202, or both (MOT 201/202), as specified in the introduction to each diagram.
The following figure is an MOT 201/202 IEC wiring diagram.

5Vdc
5V COMMON

R>3KΩ J1 INTERNAL TO AS-BMOT

REF
I/O BUS
7 INTERFACE
D/A
8
5V
9
REG
10
11 TO ENCODER CONNECTORS J4, J5
NOTE:
SEE SECTION NO TAG ALTERNATE POWER
12
13 GREEN

14
+LIM
15
-LIM RED FIRST OF
16
FIVE
HOME 17 INPUT
JOG+ CIRCUITS
18
JOG- 19

BRAKE OUT 1 20
21
22

24 Vdc
24v COMMON RED

660 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an MOT 201 (Motor Drive) IEC wiring diagram.
I/O BUS
INTERFACE
J3
MOTOR DRIVE INTERNAL TO AS-BMOT
+VEL 1 D/A

>3KΩ
2

-VEL 3

>3KΩ
COMMON 4
+5V
10K RED
FAULT 5

NC
6
NO
7

COM YELLOW
ENABLE 8

SHELL

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 661

IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an MOT 201/202 (Encoder) IEC wiring diagram.

PCB
J5 INTERNAL TO MOT
ENCODER 2

6 1 FROM J1
A+
A- 300Ω
+V 7 2
B+
5V DIFF. B-
ENCODER 8 3 220Ω FIRST OF SIX
M+ ENCODER INPUTS
M- 9
0V 4

10 KEY = Pin 5
NOTE: B LEADS A.
FOR CLOCKWISE
(POSITIVE) MOTION
J4
ENCODER 1

1 KEY = Pin 6
A+
A-
+V 7 2
B+
5V DIFF. B-
8 3
ENCODER
M+
M- 9
0V 4

FRONT OF MODULE
10 5 BOTTOM VIEW

662 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an MOT 202 (Motor Drive) IEC wiring diagram.

I/O BUS
MOTOR DRIVE INTERFACE
J6 INTERNAL TO MOT
>3KΩ TYP
PHASE A D/A
1

PHASE B 2

PHASE C
3 D/A

COMMON 4
+5V
10K RED
FAULT
5
NC
6
NO
7

ENABLE COM
8
YELLOW
9

10

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 663

IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an MOT 202 (Resolver) IEC wiring diagram.

I/O BUS
INTERFACE
J7 INTERNAL TO MOT
REF +
2 3.75 KHZ
REF -
7
4
SIN +
3
SIN - 7K
8 R/D
CONVERTER
RESOLVER
COS +
5
COS - 7K
10 +5V
+5V +5V RED
1
6 3K 3K
T T

3K

The following figure is an MOT 202 (Resolver) IEC wiring diagram.

I/O BUS
INTERFACE
J8 INTERNAL TO MOT
REF +
12 3.75 KHZ
REF -
13
14
SIN +
15
SIN - 7K
16 R/D
17 CONVERTER
RESOLVER
COS +
18
COS - 7K
19 +5V
+5V +5V RED
20
3K 3K
21
T T
22
3K

664 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is an MOT 202 (Motor Driver) IEC wiring diagram.
I/O BUS
MOTOR DRIVE INTERFACE
J8 INTERNAL TO MOT
>3KΩ TYP
PHASE A D/A
1

PHASE B 2

PHASE C D/A
3

COMMON
4 +5V
10K RED
FAULT
5
NC
6
NO
7

COM YELLOW
ENABLE
8

10

11

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 665

IEC Wiring Diagrams

VRC/CTR 2xx IEC The following figure is the IEC wiring diagram for the VRC/CTR 2xx.
Wiring Diagram
+20 to 30 VDC
DC Common
250 mA

1
Channel 1 2
3
4
5
Channel 2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Channel 3 14
15
16
Channel 4 17
18
19
20
21
22

666 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

ZAE 201 IEC Both of the following figures are IEC wiring diagrams for the ZAE 201.
Wiring Diagram The following figure is a ZAE 201 IEC wiring diagram.
US/L1 US/L1
M4/N M4/N
UB UB
M2 M2
4A 0.5A 4A 0.1A
1 1
U
2 2
E
3 3
1 1
4 4
1N 5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
+5V
9 9
5V
10 10
0V N N
11 11
M
12 12
U U
13 13
14 14
15 G1 15
Output 1 16 16
17 Output 1
17
18 Output 2 18
Output 2 19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

* with Attached Jumpers (as Delivered)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 667

IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is a ZAE 201 IEC wiring diagram.

US/L1 US/L1
M4/N M4/N
UB UB
M2 M2
4A 0.05A 4A 0.1A

1 1
U
2 2
1 E
3 3
1N 1
4 4
2
5 5
2N 2
6 6
0
7 7
0N 0
+5V 8 8
9 9
5V 10 10
0V N 11 N
11
M
12 12
U U
13 13
14 14
G1 G1
15 15
16 16
Output 1 Output 1
17 17
Output 2 18 18
Output 2
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

* with Attached Jumpers (as Delivered)

668 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 IEC Wiring Diagrams

ZAE 204 IEC Both of the following figures are IEC wiring diagrams for the ZAE 204.
Wiring Diagram The following figure is a ZAE 204 IEC wiring diagram.

UB5 UB5
UB24 UB24
M1 M1
UB24
filtered
2A 0.05A 2A 0.05A

1 1
U
2 2
3 3
I1 4 I1 4
5 5
I2 I2 6
6
7 7
I3 I3 8
8
I4 9 I4 9
10 10
M M 11
11
12 12
U U
13 13
O1 O1
14 14
O2 O2
15 15
O3 O3
O4 16 O4 16
G1 17 17
18 G1 18
G2 G2
19 19
G3 G3
20 20
G4 21 G4 21
22 22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 669

IEC Wiring Diagrams

The following figure is a ZAE 204 IEC wiring diagram.

UB
M1

2A

U 1
2
11
3
12 4
5
13 6
7
8
14
9
10
M
11
12
U
13
01
14
02
15
03
04 16
17
G1
18
G2
19
G3
20
G4
21
22

670 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes how to configure A120 Series I/O modules with Concept.

Note: When using Modsoft with certain A120 I/O modules you had to build ladder
logic to multiplex the data into the PLC. This is no longer required when using
Concept programming panel software for these I/O modules: ADU 214/216/211/
212, VIC 2xx/VRC 2xx/CTR2xx.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
Multiplexing I/O Data with Concept 672
Configuring A120 Discrete Input Modules with Concept 673
Configuring Discrete Output Modules with Concept 676
Configuring Discrete Combination Modules with Concept 679
Configuring Analog Input Modules with Concept 685
Analog Output Modules 718
Intelligent Modules 726
Communication Interfaces 736
Concept I/O Map Status Words 739

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 671

I/O Configuration with Concept

Multiplexing I/O Data with Concept

Overview If you use Modsoft to configure certain A120 I/O modules, you must build ladder
logic to multiplex the data into the PLC. This is not required if you use Concept
programming panel software for the following I/O modules: ADU214/216/211/212,
VIC2xx/VRC2xx/CTR2xx.

672 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Configuring A120 Discrete Input Modules with Concept

Discrete Input This following information describes how to configure these modules:
Modules l DEO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 208 8-point 230 Vac Discrete Input
l DEP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Input
l DEP 210 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 211 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 214/254/254C 16-point 12 ... 60Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 215 16-point 5 Vdc TTL Discrete Input
l DEP 216/256/256C 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 217 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 218 16-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 220 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 257 16-point 110 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 296 16-point 60 Vdc Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 297 16-point 48 Vdc Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 284* 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input
*The DEP 284 is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the module.

Using Concept
Step Action
2.1 or Higher
1 Select Configure from the menu.
2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select DEPxxx and click on OK. A number and description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 1x or 3x and press Enter. The software completes the
In Ref and In End fields.
7 Click on Params... The Input Type dialog appears.
8 Select either Binary or BCD and click on OK.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 673

I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDEO-216/ The AS-BDEO-216 dialog box, which follows, is used with these modules: AS-
AS-BDEP 214/ BDEO-216/ AS-BDEP 214/ 215/ 216/ 217/ 218/ 220/ 254(C)/ 256(C)/ 257(C)/ 296/
215/ 216/ 217/ 297.
218/ 220/ 254(C)/
256(C)/ 257(C)/ AS-BDEO216
296/ 297
Input Type

Binary BCD

OK Cancel Help

Input Type: The Binary and BCD option buttons in the input type section require
corresponding choices between 1x-/3x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD). The 1x-
references are shown in binary.

Meanings for the These modules require sixteen 1x-discrete inputs. A single 3x-input register can be
AS-BDEO-216/ mapped instead of sixteen 1x-discrete inputs (shown in the following figure).
AS-BDEP 214/ The following figure shows the 3x-register arrangement for the above-named
215/ 216/ 217/ modules.
218/ 220/ 254(C)/ 3x-register 1
256(C)/ 257(C)/
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB
296/ 297 Module
Mapping
#Input 1 #Input 16

674 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDEP 208/ The AS-BDEP-208 dialog, shown in the following figure, is used with these modules:
210/211 AS-BDEP 208/210/211.

AS-BDEP 208

Input Type

Binary BCD

OK Cancel Help

Input Type: The Input Binary and BCD option buttons require a corresponding
choice between 1x-/3x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).

Meanings for the These modules require eight 1x-discrete inputs. A single 3x-input register can be
AS-BDEP 208/ mapped instead of eight 1x-discrete inputs.
210/ 211 Module The following figure shows the 3x-register arrangement for the above-named
Mapping modules.

3x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

#Input 1 #Input 8
Bits 8 ... 15 are not used

Note: Concept provides three ways to display address formats. The default is
standard (400001). To change the address format display, use the steps in Change
Address Format Display Procedure, p. 675. All four formats apply to discrete,
analog, and intelligent modules.

Change Address Use the following steps to modify the address format display.
Format Display
Step Action
Procedure
1 From the Main menu, select Options, then select Preferences.
2 Select standard (400001), separator (4:00001), or compact (4:1); then click OK.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 675

I/O Configuration with Concept

Configuring Discrete Output Modules with Concept

Discrete Output This following information describes how to configure these modules:
Modules l DAO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Output
l DAP 2x4 4-point 24 ... 110 Vdc/24 ... 250 Vac Relay Discrete Output
l DAP 208/258/258C 8-point 24 ... 110 Vdc/24 ... 250 Vac Relay Discrete Output
l DAP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Output
l DAP 210 8-point 24 ... 240 Vac Discrete Output
l DAP 216(N)16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Output
l DAP 217 16-point 5 ... 24 Vdc Discrete Output
l DAP 218 16-point 24 ... 240 Vac Discrete Output
l DAP 284* 4-point 24 ... 110 Vdc/24 ... 250 Vac Relay Discrete Output (Special,
Intrinsically Safe)
*The DAP 284 is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the module.

Using Concept
Step Action
2.1 or Higher
1 Select Configure from the menu.
2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select DAPxxx and click on OK. A number and description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 0x or 4x and press Enter. The software fills in the Out
Ref and Out End fields.
7 Click on Params... The Output Type and Timeout State dialogs appear.
8 Select either Binary or BCD for the Output Type, and either Last Value or User
Defined for the Timeout State. Click on OK.

CAUTION
Power-down or kernel mode.
The output module Timeout States are valid only in a normal PLC stop
state. Therefore, when the PLC powers down or goes into kernel mode,
the outputs default to the module’s fail safe state. The Timeout States
are defined in the I/O Map module parameter screens.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

676 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDAO-216/ The AS-BDA0-216 dialog box, which follows, isused with the following modules: AS-
AS-DAP-216/N/ BDAO-216/ AS-DAP-216/N/ 217/ 218/209.
217/218/209
AS-BDAO216

Output Type
Binary BCD

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined
User Defined Timeout State (In Hex.):

0000

OK Cancel Help

Output Type: The Binary and BCD option buttons require corresponding choices
between 0x-/4x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Timeout State: The Compact timeout state only reflects a user program in stop
mode.
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
value upon user program stop.
Activation of the User Defined option button causes the outputs to assume the
value defined in the user-defined timeout state text field.
User Defined: If the User Defined option button was activated, the corresponding
hex value can be entered here.

Meanings for the The AS-BDAO-216/ AS-DAP-216/N/ 217/ 218/209 modules require 16 0x-discrete
AS-BDAO-216/ outputs. The BCD button will alternatively require mapping to a 4x-output register.
AS-DAP-216/N/ The following figure shows the AS-BDAO-216/ AS-DAP-216/N/ 217/ 218/209 4x
217/218/209 register arrangement.
Module Mapping
4x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

#Output 1 #Output 16

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 677

I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDAP-204 This AS-DBAP-204 dialog, which follows, is used with the following modules: AS-
BDAP-204.

AS-BDAP-204

Output Type
Binary BCD

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined
User Defined Timeout State (In Hex.):

0000

OK Cancel Help

Output Type: The Binary and BCD option buttons require corresponding choices
between 0x-/4x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Timeout State: The Compact timeout state only reflects a user program in stop
mode.
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
value upon user program stop.
Activation of the User Defined option button causes the outputs to take on the value
defined in the user-defined timeout state text field.
User Defined: If the User Defined option button was activated, the corresponding
hex value can be entered here.

Meanings for the The AS-BDAP-204 module require four 0x-discrete outputs. The BCD option button
AS-BDAP-204 will alternatively require mapping to a 4x-output register.
Module Mapping The following diagram shows the AS-BDAP-204 4x-register arrangement.
4x-register 1
MSB 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB

#Output 1 #Output 4
Bits 4 ... 15 are not used

678 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Configuring Discrete Combination Modules with Concept

Discrete This follwoing information describes how to configure these modules:

Combination l DAP 211 Monitored 4-point in/4-point out 120 Vac Combined I/O
Modules l DAP 212/252/252C 8-point in/4-point out 24 Vdc Combined I/O
l DAP 220/250/250C 8-point in/8-point out 24 Vdc Combined I/O
l DAP 252 8-point in/4-point relay out 24 Vdc LT Combined I/O
l DAP 253 8-point in/4-point relay out 110 Vdc LT Combined I/O
l DAP 292 8-point in/4-point relay out 60 Vdc Combined I/O

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the module.

using Concept
Step Action
2.1 or Higher
1 Select Configure from the menu.
2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select DAPxxx and click on OK. A number and description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 1x or 3x and press Enter. The software completes the
In Ref and In End fields.
7 In the Out Ref field, enter 0x or 4x and press Enter. The software completes the
Out Ref and Out End fields.
8 Click on Params... The Output Type and Timeout State dialogs appear.
9 Select either Binary or BCD for the Output Type and either Last Value or User
Defined for the Timeout State. Click on OK.

CAUTION
Power-down or kernel mode.
The output module Timeout States is valid only in a normal PLC stop
state. Therefore, when the PLC powers down or goes into kernel mode,
the outputs default to the module’s fail safe state. The Timeout States
are defined on the I/O Map module parameter screens.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 679

I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDAP-211 The AS-BDAP-211dialog, which follows, is used with the following module: AS-
BDAP-211

AS-BDAP211

Output Type
Binary BCD
Input Type
Binary BCD

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined
User Defined Timeout State (In Hex.):
0000

OK Cancel Help

Output Type: The output Binary and BCD option buttons require corresponding
choices between 0x-/4x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Input Type: The input Binary and BCD option buttons require corresponding
choices between 1x-/3x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Timeout State: The Compact Timeout State only reflects a user program in stop
mode.
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
valueupon user program stop.
Activation of the User Defined option button causes the outputs to take on the value
defined in the user-defined timeout state text field.
User Defined: If the User Defined option button was activated, the corresponding
hex value can be entered here.

680 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The AS-BDAP-211 modules require four 1x-discrete inputs and four 0x-discrete
AS-BDAP-211 outputs. The BCD option button will alternatively require mapping to a 4x-output
Module Mapping register instead of four 0x–discrete outputs. A single 3x-input register can be
mapped, instead of four 1x-discrete inputs (as shown in the following figures).
The following figure shows the AS-BDAP-211 3x-register arrangement.

3x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

Bits 4 ... 15 are not used #Input 1

The following figure shows the AS-BDAP-211 4x-register arrangement.

4x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

Bits 4 ... 15 are not used #Output 1 #Output 4

AS-BDAP-212/ The AS-BDAP-212/252(C)/ 253/ 292 dialog box, which follows, is used with the
252(C)/ 253/ 292 following modules: AS-BDAP-212/ 252(C)/ 253/ 292.

AS-BDAP2x2/253

Output Type
Binary BCD
Input Type
Binary BCD

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined

User Defined Timeout State (In Hex):

0000

OK Cancel Help

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 681

I/O Configuration with Concept

Output Type: The output Binary and BCD option buttons require corresponding
choices between 0x-/4x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Input Type: The input Binary and BCD option buttons require corresponding
choices between 1x-/3x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Timeout State: The Compact Timeout State only reflects a user program in stop
mode.
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
value upon user program stop.
Activation of the User Defined option button causes the outputs to assume the
value defined in the user-defined timeout state text field.
User Defined: If the User Defined option button was activated, the corresponding
hex value can be entered here.

Meanings for the The AS-BDAP-212/ 252(C)/ 253/ 292 modules require eight 1x-discrete inputs and
AS-BDAP-212/ four 0x-discrete outputs. The BCD option button will alternatively require mapping to
252(C)/ 253/ 292 be made to a 4x-output register. A single 3x-input register can be mapped instead
Module Mapping of eight 1x-discrete inputs.
The following figure shows the AS-BDAP-212/252(C)/253/292 3x-register
arrangement.

3x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

#Input 1 #Input 8
Bits 8 ... 15 are not used

The following figure shows the AS-BDAP-212/ 252(C)/253/292 4x-register

arrangement.

4x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

Bits 4 ... 15 are not used #Output 1

682 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDAP-220/ The AS-BDAP220/250(C) dialog, which follows, is used with the following modules:
252(C) AS-BDAP-220/250(C).

AS-BDAP220/250

Output Type
Binary BCD
Input Type
Binary BCD

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined
User Defined Timeout State (In Hex):
0000

OK Cancel Help

Output Type: The output Binary and BCD option buttons require corresponding
choices between 0x-/4x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Input Type: The input Binary and BCD option buttons require orresponding choices
between 1x-/3x-references (i.e., in binary or BCD).
Timeout State: The Compact Timeout State only reflects a user program in stop
mode.
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
value upon user program stop.
Activation of the User Defined option button causes the outputs to take on the value
defined in the user-defined timeout state text field.
User Defined: If the User Defined option button was activated, the corresponding
hex value can be entered here.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 683

I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The AS-BDAP-220/ 250(C) modules require eight 1x-discrete inputs and eight 0x-
AS-BDAP-220/ discrete outputs. The output BCD option button will alternatively require mapping to
250(C) Module a 4x-output register. The input BCD option button will require a 3x-input register
Mapping mapping (as shown in the following two figures).
The following figure shows the AS-BDAP-220/ 250(C) 3x-register arrangement.

3x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

#Input 1 #Input 8
Bits 8 ... 15 are not used

The following figure shows the AS-BDAP-220/ 250(C) 4x-register arrangement.

4x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

#Output 1 #Output 8
Bits 8 ... 15 are not used

684 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Configuring Analog Input Modules with Concept

Analog Input The following information describes how to configure these modules:
Modules l ADU 204/254/254C 4–point Voltage/RTD Analog Input
l ADU 205 4–point Voltage/Current Analog Input
l ADU 206/256/256C 4–point Voltage/Current Isolated Analog Input
l ADU 210 4–point Voltage/Current Analog Input (Only supported in Concept 2.2
or higher)
l ADU 214 8–point Voltage/Current Isolated Analog Input (Only supported in
Concept 2.2 or higher)
l ADU 216 8–point Thermocouple Isolated Analog Input
l ADU 257/257C 8–point Millivolts/RTD/TC/Resistance Analog Input (Only
supported in Concept 2.2 or higher)
l ADU 282/282M* 2–point Analog Input (Special, Intrinsically Safe)
l ADU 284* 2-point Analog Input (Special, Intrinsically Safe)
l ADU 211/212 8–point Universal Isolated Analog Input (Not supported in Concept
2.1 or higher)
*This is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the module.

Using Concept
Step Action
2.1 or Higher
1 Select Configure from the menu.
2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select ADUxxx and click on OK. A number and description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 3x and press Enter. The software completes the In Ref
and In End fields.
7 Click on Params... The applicable configuration dialog appears, depending on
the selected module. Refer to the specific modules.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 685

I/O Configuration with Concept

Configuring AS- The following information applies to the AS-BADU-204/254(C) modules.

BADU-204/ The AS-BADU-204/ 254(C) parameter dialog, which follows, is used for the analog
254(C) Modules modules AS–BADU–204/ 254(C).

AS-BADU204/254

Channel: Channel Configuration:

Channel 1
Channel 2 1.0 C 0.1 C 1.0 F 0.1 F 13-bit 15-bit+sign
Channel 3
Type:
Channel 4
Pt 100,-200 to 850 Ni 200,-60 to 150 R, 0 to 400 ohms
Pt 200,-200 to 250 APt100,-200 to 600
Ni 100,-60 to 250 APt200,-200 to 250

OK Cancel Help

Channel: The option buttons here allow the selection of individual channels for
configuration, as follows:
l Channel 1 = Pins 3 ... 6
l Channel 2 = Pins 7...10
l Channel 3 = Pins 14 ... 17
l Channel 4 = Pins 18 ... 21
Channel–specific option panels are presented for each channel selection. Values
entered for a channel are saved automatically when another channel is selected,
and therefore are not lost during the definition of another channel.
Channel Configuration: Measuring ranges and data formats for temperature
measurement data transfer to the Compact PLC can be determined in this list box.
The 1.0 C/F and 0.1 C/F option buttons allow a choice of measuring steps of either
1.0 or 0.1 degree (in Centigrade or Fahrenheit). This allows differing displays for the
same measurement value, as shown in the following table.
1.0 degree Centigrade 0.1 degree Centigrade
-60 -600
200 2000

686 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

The remaining option buttons 13–bit and 15-+sign (15–bit value + sign) determine
the value range to be transferred.
The tables that follow are present values for all configurable resistive temperature
sensors, which are listed here:
l Pt 100, -200 to 850
l Pt 200, -200 to 250
l Ni 100, -60 to 250
l Ni 200, -60 to 150
l APt 100, -200 to 600
l APt 200, -200 to 250
l R, 0 to 400 ohms
Pt 100-200 degrees C to 850 degrees C
Temp. 1.0 C 0.1 C 1.0 F 0.1 F 13-bit 15-bit + Measuring step/
(degrees C) sign value range
<-205 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under-range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 3132 -7529
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 Nominal range
+850 +850 +8500 +1562 +15620 8191 32000
>+870 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Overrange

Pt 200-200 degrees C to 250 degrees C

Temp. 1.0 C 0.1 C 1.0 F 0.1 F 13- 15-bit + Measuring step/
(degrees C) bit sign value range
<-205 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under-range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 819 -25600
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 Nominal range
+250 +250 +2500 +482 +4820 8191 32000
>+256 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Overrange

Ni 100-60 degrees C to 250 degrees C

Temp. 1.0 C 0.1 C 1.0 F 0.1 F 13- 15-bit + Measuring step/
(degrees C) bit sign value range
<-61 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under-range
-60 -60 -600 -76 -760 3113 -7680
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 Nominal range
+250 +250 +2500 +482 +4820 8191 32000
>+256 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Overrange

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 687

I/O Configuration with Concept

Ni 100-60 degrees C to 150 degrees C

Temp. 1.0 C 0.1 C 1.0 F 0.1 F 13- 15-bit + Measuring step/
(degrees C) bit sign value range
<-61 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under-range
-60 -60 -600 -76 -760 2458 -12800
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 Nominal range
+150 +150 +1500 +302 +3020 8191 32000
>+151 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Overrange

APt 100-200 degrees C to 600 degrees C

Temp. 1.0 C 0.1 C 1.0 F 0.1 F 13- 15-bit + Measuring step/
(degrees C) bit sign value range
<-205 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under-range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 2731 -10667
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 Nominal range
+600 +600 +6000 +1112 +11120 8191 32000
>+614 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Overrange

APt 200-200 degrees C to 250 degrees C

Temp. 1.0 C 0.1 C 1.0 F 0.1 F 13- 15-bit + Measuring step/
(degrees C) bit sign value range
<-205 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 -32768 Under-range
-200 -200 -2000 -328 -3280 819 -25600
0 0 0 +32 +320 4096 0 Nominal range
+250 +250 +2500 +482 +4820 8191 32000
>+256 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 8191 +32767 Overrange

R, 0 to 400 ohms
Resistance in W 13-bit 15-bit + sign Value range
0 0 0
100 2048 +8000 Recommended
200 4096 +16000 nominal range
399.902 8191 +32000
>= 400 8191 +32767 Overrange

688 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Type: In this section, an option button can be used to choose a resistive

temperature sensor type for the selected channel, or a direct resistance
measurement can be performed.

Note: The type R, 0 to 400 ohms button, only selects values whose size has been
determined to be either 13–bit or 15–bit + sign through the appropriate option
buttons.

Meanings for the The AS-BADU-204/254(C) modules require four 3x-input registers addressed in
AS-BADU-204/ sequence, beginning with channel 1 as shown here.
254(C) Module
3x-register 1 (channel 1)
Mapping
MSB LSB

3x-register 2 (channel 2)
MSB LSB

3x-register 3 (channel 3)
MSB LSB

3x-register 4 (channel 4)
MSB LSB

Note: Refer toConcept I/O Map Status Words, p. 739.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 689

I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BADU-205 The following information applies to the AS-BADU-205 module.

The 20AS-BADU-205 parameter dialog, which follows, is valid for the analog module
AS-BADU-205.

AS-BADU 205

Resolution Mode: 12-bit

Channel 1: Channel 2: Channel 3: Channel 4:

+/- 20 V +/- 20 V +/- 20 V +/- 20 V

+/- 40 mV
+/- 10 V
+/- 20 mV
0...20 mA
4...20 mA Cancel Help
0...10 V
0...20 V

Resolution Mode: This list box defines the value range for all channels:
l 12-bit
l 12-bit + sign
l 13-bit
l 15-bit + sign
l 16-bit
Channel 1 ... 4: The desired measuring ranges can be chosen in these list boxes.

Note: The combination of current and voltage ranges is not allowed. Pay attention
to the switches on the rear of the module.

The measuring ranges can be chosen from the following selections:

l +/- 20 VDC
l +/- 40 mA
l +/- 10 VDC
l +/- 20 mA
l 0 ... 20 mA
l 4 ... 20 mA
l 0 ... 10 VDC
l 0 ... 20 VDC

690 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

+/- 20 mA, +/- 40 mA

Input current 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits + 15-bits + Range
(mA) sign sign
<-20/-40 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
-20/-40 0 0 0 -4095 -32000
0 2048 4096 32768 0 0 Nominal range
+20/+40 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>+20/+40 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

+/- 10 VDC, +/- 20 VDC

Input voltage 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits + 15-bits + Range
(VDC) sign sign
<-10/-20 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
-10/-20 0 0 0 -4095 -32000
0 2048 4096 32768 0 0 Nominal range
+10/+20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>+10/+20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

0 ... 10 VDC, 0 ... 20 VDC

Input voltage 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits + 15-bits + Range
(VDC) sign sign
<0 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
10/20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>10/20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

0 ... 20 mA
Input current 12-bits 13-bits 16-bits 12-bits + 15-bits + Range
(mA) sign sign
<0 0 0 0 -4095 -32768 Under-range
0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 691

I/O Configuration with Concept

4 ... 20 mA
Input current 12-bits 13- 16-bits 12-bits + 15-bits + Range
(mA) bits sign sign
< 0 ... 2 0 0 0 0 0 Wire breakage
2.1 ... 3.61 0 0 0 0 -32768 Under-range
3.62 ... 3.99 0 0 0 0 Tolerable range
4 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32000
>20 4095 8191 65520 +4095 +32767 Overrange

Meanings for the The AS–BADU–205 module requires four 3x–input registers addressed in
AS-BADU-205 sequence, beginning with channel 1 (as shown in the following figure).
Module Mapping
3x-register 1 (channel 1)

MSB LSB

3x-register 2 (channel 2)
MSB LSB

3x-register 3 (channel 3)
MSB LSB

3x-register 4 (channel 4)
MSB LSB

Note: Refer toConcept I/O Map Status Words, p. 739.

692 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BADU-206/ The following information describes the AS-BADU-206/256(C) modules.

256(C) The AS-BADU-206/ 256(C) parameter dialog shown below is valid for the analog
modules AS–BADU–256/ (C).

AS-BADU206/256

Overrange Open circuit Unipolar

Resolution 12-Bit

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

+/- 1V/20 mA +/- 1V/20 mA +/- 1V/20 mA +/- 1V/20 mA

+/- 10V +/- 10V +/- 10V +/- 10V
0..1V/0...20 mA 0..1V/0...20 mA 0..1V/0...20 mA 0..1V/0...20 mA
0..10V 0..10V 0..10V 0..10V
0,2..1V/4...20 mA 0,2..1V/4...20 mA 0,2..1V/4...20 mA 0,2..1V/4...20 mA
2..10V 2..10V 2..10V 2..10V

OK Cancel Help

Overrange: Activation of the Overrange option button enables range exception

monitoring. Any range exceptions then trigger a corresponding message within the
first input status word (bits 0 ... 3).
Open circuit: Activation of the Open circuit (wire breakage) option button enables
open-circuit monitoring. Any subsequent error messages are then visible within the
first input status word (bits 4 ... 7).
Unipolar: Selection of the Unipolar option button restricts choices to the unipolar
measuring ranges (e.g. 0 ... 20 mA/ 0 ... 10 V).
Resolution: This list box defines the value range for all channels:
l 11-bit + sign
l 12-bit
l 15-bit + sign
l 16-bit
Channel 1 ... 4: The measuring ranges for channels 1-4 can be chosen from the
tables that follow.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 693

I/O Configuration with Concept

Measuring ranges 0 ... 10 VDC/2 ... 10 VDC, 0 ... 20 mA/4 ... 20 mA

Voltage Current 12-bits 16-bits 11-bits + 15-bits + Range
(VDC) (mA) sign sign
0 0 0 0 Under-range
0 0 0 0 Neg. tolerance
range
0/2 0/4 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
10 20 4000 64000 +2000 +32000
10.01 ... 20.02 ... 4001 64016 +2001 +32016 Pos. tolerance
range
>= 10.24/ >= 20.48/ 4095 65520 +2047 +32760 Overrange
10.19 20.39

Measuring ranges +/- 10 VDC/ +/- 20 mA

Voltage (VDC) Current 12-bits 16-bits 11-bits 15-bits + Range
(mA) + sign sign
<=-10.24 <=-20.48 0 0 -2048 -32768 Under-range
-10.01 -20.02 47 -2001 -32016 Neg. tolerance
range
-10.00 -20 48 768 -2000 -32000
0 0 2048 32768 0 0 Nominal range
+10.00 +20 4048 64768 +2000 +32000
+10.01 ... +20.02 ... 4049 +2001 +32016 Pos. tolerance
range
>=10.24 >=20.48 4095 65520 +2047 +32752 Overrange

694 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BADU-206/ The AS–BADU–206/256 modules require five 3x–input registers addressed in

256(C) Module sequence, beginning with the input status word, then channel. (Refer to the following
Input Status two figures.)
Word The following figure shows the AS-BADU-206/ 256(C) 3x module status word.
3x-register 1
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

reserved

1 = The module is not ready, or one or

more of the bits 1 ... 4 are set

1 = External supply voltage is not

present
1 = Range exception for the current or
voltage ranges 4 ... 20 mA, 0.2 ... 1
VDC, 2 ... 10 VDC

1 = 12-bit unipolar module setting for

current or voltage
Channel 4 measuring range
over/underrun
or wire breakage
Channel 3 measuring range
over/underrun
or wire breakage
Channel 2 measuring range
over/underrun
or wire breakage
Channel 1 measuring range
over/underrun
or wire breakage

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 695

I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The following figure shows the AS-BADU-206/ 256(C) 3x-register arrangement.
AS-BADU-206/
3x-register 1 (channel 1)
256(C)Module
Mapping MSB LSB

3x-register 3 (channel 2)
MSB LSB

3x-register 4 (channel 3)

MSB LSB

AS–BADU–210 The following information applies to the AS-BADU-210 module.

The dialog, which follows, works with the analog module AS–BADU–210.

AS-BADU210

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

inactive inactive inactive inactive

0...10V 0...10V 0...10V 0...10V
2...10V 2...10V 2...10V 2...10V
+/-10V +/-10V +/-10V +/-10V
0...5V(0...20mA) 0...5V(0...20mA) 0...5V(0...20mA)
0...5V(4...20mA) 0...5V(4...20mA) 0...5V(4...20mA)
+/-5V(+/-20mA) +/-5V(+/-20mA) +/-5V(+/-20mA)
limit < > 0 limit < > 0 limit < > 0 limit < > 0

OK Cancel Help

696 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Channel 1 ... 4:
For Chanel ... 4, use the following guidelines:
l Select inactive when channel is not used.
l Select limit < > 0 if you want to use the 1.6% rated value without causing an error
for uniplar ranges only.
Use the information in the following tables to choose the measuring ranges for
channels 1 to 4.
Conversion Values of Voltage Inputs
Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Decimal Notes
value 0 value 0 value 1 value 2 value +/–5 value +/– value
... 5 V ... 10V ... 5 V ... 10 V V 10 V
<-0.080 <-0.16 <+0.52 <+1.04 <-5.12 <-10.24 -32 767 underflo
w error
-5.119 ... - -10.239... -32 766... -32 overload
5.00 -10.00 001 range
-0.08 ... -0.16 ... +0.52 ... +1.04 .. 0 (-3 840) 0 (- overload
-0.00 -0.00 +0.936 +1.87 ... 512) 0 (-1) range
... +0.99 +1.99
-5.00 -10.00 -32 000 linear
-2.50 -5.00 -16 000 linear
-0.50 -1.00 -3 200 linear
-0.25 -0.50 -1 600 linear
-0.05 -0.10 -320 linear
-0.005 -0.01 -32 linear
-0.0025 -0.005 -16 linear
0 0 1 2 0 0 0 linear
0.0025 0.005 1.002 2.004 +0.0025 +0.005 +16 linear
0.005 0.01 1.004 2.008 +0.005 +0.01 +32 linear
0.05 0.10 1.04 2.08 +0.05 +0.10 +320 linear
0.25 0.50 1.20 2.40 +0.25 +0.50 +1 600 linear
0.50 1.00 1.40 2.80 +0.50 +1.00 +3 200 linear
2.50 5.00 3.00 6.00 +2.50 +5.00 +16 000 linear
5.00 10.00 5.00 10.00 +5.00 +10.00 +32 000 rated
value
5.000... 10.000.. 5.00... 10.00... +5.000.. +10.00... +32 001... overload
5.119 . 10.239 5.09 10.19 +5.119 +10.239 +32 766 range
>5.12 >10.24 >5.09 >10.19 >+5.20 >+10.24 >+32 767 overflow
error

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 697

I/O Configuration with Concept

Note: Brackets denote range with limiting value –1.6%. No brackets denotes
range with limiting value 0.

Conversion Values of Current Inputs

Analog value 0 Analog value Analog value +/ Decimal value Notes
... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA –20 mA
<-0.32 <+2.08 <-20.479 -32 767 underflow error
-20.478 ... -32 766 ... overload range
-20.000 -32 001
-0.32 ... -0.00 +2.08 ... +3.74 ... 0 (-3 840) 0 overload range
+3.99 (-512) 0 (-1)
-20.00 -32 000 linear
-10.00 -16 000 linear
-2.00 -3 200 linear
-1.00 -1 600 linear
-0.20 -320 linear
-0.02 -32 linear
-0.01 -16 linear
0 +4 0 0 linear
+0.01 +4.008 +0.01 +16 linear
+0.02 +4.016 +0.02 +32 linear
+0.20 +4.16 +0.20 +320 linear
+1.00 +4.80 +1.00 +1 600 linear
+2.00 +5.60 +2.00 +3 200 linear
+10.00 +12.00 +10.00 +16 000 linear
+20.00 +20.00 +20.00 +32 000 rated value
+20.000 ... +20.00 ... +20.38 +20.000 ... +32 001 ... overload range
+20.478 +20.478 +32 766
>+20.479 >+20.38 >+20.479 >+32 767 overflow error

Note: Brackets denote range with limiting value –1.6%. No brackets denotes range
with limiting value 0.

698 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The AS–BADU–210 module requires four 3x–input registers addressed in
AS–BADU–210 sequence, beginning with channel 1 as shown below.
Module Mapping
3x-register 1 (channel 1)
MSB LSB

3x-register 2 (channel 2)
MSB LSB

3x-register 4 (channel 4)
MSB LSB

Note: Refer to Concept I/O Map Status Words, p. 739 for Concept I/O Map Status
Words.

AS–BADU–214 The following dialog is valid for the analog module AS–BADU–214.
AS-BADU214

Channel 1/2 Channel 3/4 Channel 5/6 Channel 7/8

Channel 1 inactive Channel 2 inactive

V V+/- Pt Ni R

Channel 1 Channels 1/2 Channel 2

0...10V 2...10V +/-10V 0...10V 2...10V
0...5V 1...5V +/-5V 0...5V 1...5V
0...1V 0.2...1V +/-1V 0...1V 0.2...1V
0...0.5V 0.1...0.5V +/-0.5V 0...0.5V 0.1...0.5V
limit < > 0 limit < > 0

Sensor R(0) Temp. Range Resistor Range

100 ohms -60...+160C 0...100ohms
200 ohms -160...+160C 0...200ohms
500 ohms -200...+320C 0...500ohms
1000 ohms -200...+640C
0...2000ohms
2-wire adjust

OK Cancel Help

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 699

I/O Configuration with Concept

Channel 1 ... 8: Bipolar measurements are configured in pairs. Either channel of

the pair may be made inactive. Also, the 2–wire adjust is used for 2 or 3 wire 10 ohm
compensation.
The measuring ranges for channels 1 to 8 can be chosen in these sections.
Conversion Values of Unipolar Voltage Inputs
0...0.5 V 0...1 V 0...5 V 0...10 V 0.1...0.5 V 0.2...1 V 1...5 V 2...10 V
< –0.008 < –0.016 < –0.08 < –0.16 < +0.052 < < < +1.04
+0.104 +0.52
+0.052 +0.104 +0.52 +1.04
–0.008 ... –0.016 ... –0.08 .. –0.16 .. +0.094 ... +0.187 +0.93 +1.87 ...
... 6 ...
–0.000 –0.000 –0.00 –0.00 +0.099 +0.199 +0.99 +1.99
0 0 0 0 0.1 0.2 1 2
0.000 02 0.000 03 0.000 16 0.000 31 0.100 0 0.200 0 1.000 2.000 3
1
0.000 25 0.000 5 0.002 5 0.005 0.100 2 0.200 4 1.002 2.004
0.000 5 0.001 0.005 0.01 0.100 4 0.200 8 1.004 2.008
0.005 0.01 0.05 0.10 0.104 0.208 1.04 2.08
0.025 0.05 0.25 0.50 0.12 0.24 1.20 2.40
0.05 0.10 0.50 1.00 0.14 0.28 1.40 2.80
0.25 0.50 2.50 5.00 0.30 0.60 3.00 6.00
0.50 1.00 5.00 10.00 0.50 1.00 5.00 10.00
0.500 0 ... 1.000 0 ... 5.000 ... 10.000 ... 0.500 ... 1.000 ... 5.00 ... 10.00 ...
0.511 9 1.023 9 5.119 10.239 0.509 1.019 5.09 10.19
>=0.512 >=1.024 >=5.12 >=10.24 >0.509 >1.019 >5.09 >10.19
NOTE: Numbers not in parentheses = range with + limit.

700 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Conversion Values of Unipolar Voltage Inputs (continued)

15-BIT NOTES
–32,767 underflow error
0 (–3,840) overload range
0 (–512)
0 (–1)
0 rated value
+1
+16
+32
+320 Linear Range
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 overflow error

Note: Numbers in parentheses = range with + and - limit.

Conversion Values of Bipolar Voltage Inputs

+/-0.5 V +/-1 V +/-5 V +/-10 V
<= –0.512 <= –1.024 <= –5.12 <= –10.24
–0.511 9 ... –1.023 ... –5.119 ... –10.239 ...
–0.500 0 –1.000 –5.000 –10.000
–0.50 –1.00 –5.00 –10.00
–0.25 –0.50 –2.50 –5.00
–0.05 –0.10 –0.50 –1.00
–0.025 –0.05 –0.25 –0.50
–0.005 –0.01 –0.05 –0.10
–0.000 5 –0.001 –0.005 –0.01
–0.000 25 –0.000 5 –0.002 5 –0.005
0 0 0 0
+0.000 02 +0.000 03 +0.000 16 +0.000 31

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 701

I/O Configuration with Concept

+/-0.5 V +/-1 V +/-5 V +/-10 V

+0.000 25 +0.000 5 +0.002 5 +0.005
+0.000 5 +0.001 +0.005 +0.01
+0.005 +0.01 +0.05 +0.10
+0.025 +0.05 +0.25 +0.50
+0.05 +0.10 +0.50 +1.00
+0.25 +0.50 +2.50 +5.00
+0.50 +1.00 +5.00 +10.00
+0.500 0 ... +1.000 0 ... +5.000 ... +10.000 ...
+0.511 9 +1.023 9 +5.119 +10.239
>= +0.512 >= +1.024 >= +5.12 >= +10.24

Conversion Values of Bipolar Voltage Inputs (continued)

15-BIT NOTES
–32,767 underflow error
–32 766 overload range
–32 001
–32 000 rated value
–16 000
–3 200
–1 600
–320
–32
–16
0 linear range
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 overflow error

702 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Conversion Values of Current Inputs

0...10 mA 0...20 mA 2...10 mA 4...20 mA +20 mA
< –0.16 < –0.32 < +1.04 < +2.08 <= –20.479
–20.478 ...
–20.000
+1.04 ... +2.08 ...
–0.16... –0.32... +1.87 ... +3.74 ...
–0.00 –0.00 +1.99 +3.99
–20.00
–10.00
–2.00
–1.00
–0.20
–0.02
–0.01
0 0 +2 +4 0
+0.005 +0.01 +2.004 +4.008 +0.01
+0.01 +0.02 +2.008 +4.016 +0.02
+0.1 +0.20 +2.08 +4.16 +0.20
+0.5 +1.00 +2.40 +4.80 +1.00
+1 +2.00 +2.80 +5.60 +2.00
+5 +10.00 +6.00 +12.00 +10.00
+10.0 +20.00 +10.00 +20.00 +20.00
+10.000... +20.000... +10.00... +20.00... +20.000...
+10.239 +20.478 +10.19 +20.38 +20.478
>= +10.24 >= +20.479 > +10.19 > +20.38 >= +20.479

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 703

I/O Configuration with Concept

Conversion Values of Current Inputs (continued)

15-BIT NOTES
–32,767 underflow error
–32 766 overload range
–32 001
0 (–3 840)
0 (–512)
0 (–1)
–32 000 rated value
–16 000
–3 200
–1 600
–320
–32
–16
0 linear range
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 overflow error

Note: NOTE: Numbers in parentheses + range with +/– limit

704 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Conversion Values of Temperature Inputs

-60 ... +160oC -160 ... +160oC -200 ... +320oC -200 ... +640oC
< –60 < –160 < –200 < –200
–160
–100 –200
–60 –60 –120
–50 –50 –100 –200
–16 –16 –32 –64
0 0 0 0
+0.005 +0.005 +0.01 +0.02
+0.08 +0.08 +0.16 +0.32
+0.16 +0.16 +0.32 +0.64
+8 +8 +16 +32
+16 +16 +32 +64
+80 +80 +160 +320
+160 +160 +320 +640
+160.005 ... +160.005 ... +320.01 ... +640.02 ...
+163.83 +163.83 +327.66 +655.32
>= +163.84 >= +163.84 >= +327.67 >= +655.34

Conversion Values of Temperature Inputs (continued)

15-BIT NOTES
–32,767 measuring range underflow (error)
–32 000 rated value
–22 000
–12 000
–10 000
–3 200
0 linear range
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600
+3 200
+16 000

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 705

I/O Configuration with Concept

15-BIT NOTES
+32 000 rated value
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 measuring range overflow error

Conversion Values for Resistance Inputs

0...100 Ω 0...200 Ω 0...500 Ω 0...1000 Ω 0...2000 W
< –1.6 < –3.2 < –8 < –16 < –32
0...–1.6 0...–3.2 0...–8 0...–16 0...–32
0 0 0 0 0
0.003 0.006 0.015 0.03 0.06
0.05 0.1 0.25 0.5 1
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2
1 2 5 10 20
5 10 25 50 100
10 20 50 100 200
50 100 250 500 1000
100 200 500 1000 2000
100.00 ... 200.00 ... 500.01 ... 1000.03 ... 2000.06 ...
102.39 204.78 511.97 1023.94 2047.88
>= 102.40 >= 204.79 >= 511.98 >= 1023.97 >= 2047.94

Conversion Values of Resistance Inputs (continued)

15-BIT NOTES
–32 767 underflow error
0 overload range
0 rated value
+1
+16
+32
+320
+1 600 linear range
+3 200
+16 000
+32 000 rated value

706 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

15-BIT NOTES
+32 001 ...
+32 766 overload range
+32 767 overflow error

Meanings for the The AS–BADU–214 module requires eight 3x–input registers addressed in
AS–BADU–214 sequence, beginning with channel 1 as shown in the figure below.
Module Mapping
3x-register 1 (channel 1)
MSB LSB

Note: Refer to Concept I/O Map Status Words, p. 739 for Concept I/O Map Status
Words.

AS-BADU 216 8-
point
Note: This modules does not require any params... screens.
Thermocouple
Isolated Analog
Input

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 707

I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The AS–BADU–216 module requires five 3x–input registers, addressed in
AS-BADU-216 sequence beginning with the first register. Refer to ADU 216 Analog Input Module,
Module Mapping p. 139 for details on the 3x status word for this module (as shown below.
3x-register 1 (status word)
3x-register 2 (input 1)

MSB LSB

3x-register 5 (input 4)

LSB

Note: Refer to Concept I/O Map Status Words, p. 739 for Concept I/O Map Status
Words.

The AS–BADU–216 module requires one 4x–output register, addressed in

sequence beginning with the first register. Refer to ADU 216 Analog Input Module,
p. 139 for details on the 4x control word for this module as shown below.
4x-register 1 (control word)
MSB LSB

AS–BADU–257/
257C
Note: The ADU 257 may operate in two different modes: either as a ADU 257 or
as an ADU 216. This description ONLY applies the ADU 257 mode. For the ADU
216 description, refer to ADU 216 Analog Input Module, p. 139 or I/O Configuration
of A120 Series I/O Modules with Modsoft, p. 745.

708 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

The following dialog is valid for the analog module AS–BADU–257.

AS-BADU257

Channel 1 Channel 2 Celsius

Channel 3 Channel 4 Fahrenheit
Channel 5 Channel 6
Channel 7 Channel 8
Cold Junction

Type B Pt 100 IEC Platinum

Type E Pt 200 US Platinum
Type J Pt 500
Type K Pt 1000
2/4 Wire
Type N Ni 100
3 Wire
Type R Ni 200
Type S Ni 500
Type T Ni 1000
Resolution Mode
+/-100mV linear 4k ohms 12-Bit
inactive

OK Cancel Help

Channel 1 ... 8: Cold junction compensation is selectable for the module. Eight
thermocouple types are supported. Two RTD types with various resistances are
supported. Two linear ranges are offered. Two temperature units are available.
Either IEC or US platinum RTDs are supported. RTD connections allowed are 2, 3,
4–wire.
Resolution: This list box defines the value range for all channels:
l 12-bit
l 16-bit
l 15-bit + sign
l 32-bit

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 709

I/O Configuration with Concept

The measuring ranges for channels 1 to 8 can be chosen in these sections.

+/– 100mV Range and Data Display Format
Millivoltage 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
high resolution point
<+102.4mV +4095 +65535 +32767 +1.024 E02 Overrange
>+100mV ... +4095 +65535 +32001 ... +1.0 E02 ... +1.024 Pos. tolerance
+102.4mV +32766 E02 range
+100mV +4095 +65535 +32000 +1.0 E02
0mV +2048 +32768 0 0 Nominal
–100mV 0 0 –32000 –1.0 E02
<–100mV ... 0 0 –32001 ... <–1.0 E02 ... Neg. tolerance
–102.4mV –32766 –102.4 E02 range
<–102.4mV 0 0 –32767 –1.024 E02 Underrange

0 ... 4000W Range and Data Display Format

Resistance 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
high resolution point
>4095W +4095 +65535 +32767 +4.096 E03 Overrange
>4000 ... +4095 +65535 +32001 ... >+4.0 E03 ... Pos. tolerance
4095W +32766 +4.095 E03 range
4000W +4095 +65535 +32000 +4.0 E03 Nominal
0W 0 0 0 0
0 0 –2 –2.0 E00 Broken wire

IEC 751 Pt100,200,500,1000 –200 ... +850 C (–328 ... +1562 F) Range and Data
Display Format
RTD 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating point Range
(0.1F)
>+850C +4095 +65535 +8501 (+15621) 8.501 E02 (1.5621 E03) Overrange
(+1562F)
+850C +4095 +65535 +8500 (+15620) 8.500 E02 (1.562 E03)
(+1562F)
0 (+32F) +780 +12483 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–200C 0 0 –2000 (–3280) –2.00 E02 (–3.28 E02)
(–328F)
<–200C 0 0 –2001 (–3281) –2.001 E02 (–3.281 E02) Underrange
(–328F)
0 0 –2002 (–3282) –2.002 E02 (–3.282 E02) Broken wire

710 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

SAMA (US) Pt100,200,500,1000 –200 ... +650 C (–328 ... +1112 F) Range and
Data Display Format
RTD 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+600C +4095 +65535 +6001 (+11121) 6.001 E02 Overrange
(+1112F) (1.113 E03)
+600C (+1112F) +4095 +65535 +6000 (+11120) 6.000 E02
(1.112 E03)
0C (+32F) +1024 +16384 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–200C (–328F) 0 0 –2000 (–3280) –2.00 E02
(–3.28 E02)
<–200C (–328F) 0 0 –2001 (–3281) –2.001 E02 Underrange
(–3.281 E02)
0 0 –2002 (–3282) –2.002 E02 Broken wire
(–3.282 E02)

DIN43760 Ni100,200,500,1000 –60 ... +250 C (–76 ... +482 F) Range and Data
Display Format
RTD 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
0.1C (0.1F) point
>+250C (+482F) +4095 +65535 +2501 (+4821) 2.501 E02 Overrange
(4.821 E02)
+250C (+482F) +4095 +65535 +2500 (+4820) 2.500 E02
(4.820 E02)
0C (+32F) +793 +12684 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–60C (–76F) 0 0 –600 (–760) –6.00 E01
(–7.6 E01)
<–60C (–76F) 0 0 –601 (–761) –6.01 E01 Underrange
(–7.61 E01)
0 0 –602 (–762) –6.02 E01 Broken wire
(–7.62 E01)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 711

I/O Configuration with Concept

Thermocouple Type R,S –50 ... +1768 C (–58 ... +3214.4 F) Range and Data
Display Format
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 Range
0.1C (0.1F) floating point
>+1768C (+3214.4F) +4095 +65535 +17681 1.7681 E03 Overrange
(+32146) (3.2146 E03)
+1768C (+3214.4F) +4095 +65535 +17680 1.7680 E03
(+32144) (3.2144 E02)
0C (+32F) +113 +1802 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–50C (–58F) 0 0 –500 (–580) –5.00 E01
(–5.80 E01)
<–50C (–58F) 0 0 –501 (–582) –5.01 E01 Underrange
(–5.82 E01)
0 0 –502 (–584) –5.02 E01 Broken wire
(–5.84 E01)

Thermocouple Type B +50 ... +1800 C (+122 ... +3272 F) Range and Data Display
Format
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
0.1C (0.1F) point
>+1800C (+3272F) +4095 +65535 +18001 1.8001 E03 Overrange
(+32722) (3.2722 E03)
+1800C (+3272F) +4095 +65535 +18000 1.8000 E03 Nominal
(+32720) (3.2720 E03)
50C (+122F) 0 0 +500 (+1220) 5.00 E01
(1.220 E02)
<50C (+122F) 0 0 +499 (+1218) 4.99 E01 Underrange
(1.218 E02)
0 0 +498 (+1216) 4.98 E01 Broken wire
(1.216 E02)

712 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Thermocouple Type J –210 ... +1200 C (–346 ... +2192 F) Range and Data Display
Format
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
0.1C (0.1F) point
>+1200C (+2192F) +4095 +65535 +12001 1.2001 E03 Overrange
(+21922) (2.1922 E03)
+1200C (+2192F) +4095 +65535 +12000 1.2000 E03
(+21920) (2.1920 E03)
0C (+32F) +610 +9761 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–210C (–346F) 0 0 –2100 (–3460) –2.100 E02
(–3.460 E02)
<–210C (–346F) 0 0 –2101 (–3462) –2.101 E02 Underrange
(–3.462 E02)
0 0 –2102 (–3464) –2.102 E02 Broken wire
(–3.464 E02)

Thermocouple Type T –270 ... +400 C (–454 ... +752 F) Range and Data Display
Format
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
0.1C (0.1F) point
>+400C (+752F) +4095 +65535 +4001 (+7522) 4.001 E02 Overrange
(7.522 E02)
+400C (+752F) +4095 +65535 +4000 (+7520) 4.000 E02
(7.520 E02)
0C (+32F) +1650 +26410 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2700 (–4540) –2.700 E02
(–4.540 E02)
<–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2701 (–4542) –2.701 E02 Underrange
(–4.542 E02)
0 0 –2702 (–4544) –2.702 E02 Broken wire
(–4.544 E02)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 713

I/O Configuration with Concept

Thermocouple Type E –270 ... +1000 C (–454 ... +1832 F) Range and Data Display
Format
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
0.1C (0.1F) point
>+1000C (+1832F) +4095 +65535 +10001 1.0001 E03 Overrange
(+18322) (1.8322 E03)
+1000C (+1832F) +4095 +65535 +1000 (+18320) 1.0000 E03
(1.8320 E03)
0C (+32F) +871 +13933 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2700 (–4540) –2.700 E02
(–4.540 E02)
<–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2701 (–4542) –2.701 E02 Underrange
(–4.542 E02)
0 0 –2702 (–4544) –2.702 E02 Broken wire
(–4.544 E02)

Thermocouple Type K –270 ... +1372 C (–454 ... +2501.6 F) Range and Data
Display Format
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 Range
0.1C (0.1F) floating point
>+1372C (+2501.6F) +4095 +65535 +13721 1.3721 E03 Overrange
(+25018) (2.5018 E03)
+1372C (+2501.6F) +4095 +65535 +13720 1.3720 E03
(+25016) (2.5016 E03)
0C (+32F) +673 +10776 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2700 (–4540) –2.700 E02
(–4.540 E02)
<–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2701 (–4542) –2.701 E02 Underrange
(–4.542 E02)
0 0 –2702 (–4544) –2.702 E02 Broken wire
(–4.544 E02)

714 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Thermocouple Type N –270 ... +1300 C (–454 ... +2372 F) Range and Data Display
Format
TC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign IEEE 754 floating Range
0.1C (0.1F) point
>+1300C (+2372F) +4095 +65535 +13001 1.3001 E03 Overrange
(+23722) (2.3722 E03)
+1300C (+2372F) +4095 +65535 +13000 1.3000 E03
(+23720) (2.3720 E03)
0C (+32F) +704 +11270 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2700 (–4540) –2.700 E02
(–4.540 E02)
<–270C (–454F) 0 0 –2701 (–4542) –2.701 E02 Underrange
(–4.542 E02)
0 0 –2702 (–4544) –2.702 E02 Broken wire
(–4.544 E02)

Cold Junction Sensor AD592 –25 ... +105 C (–13 ... +221 F) Range and Data
Display Format
CJC 12 bit 16 bit 15 bit + sign 0.1C IEEE 754 floating Range
(0.1F) point
>+125C (+257F) +4095 +65535 +1051 (+2212) 1.051 E02 Overrange
(2.212 E02)
+125C (+257F) +4095 +65535 +1050 (+2210) 1.050 E02
(2.210 E02)
0C (+32F) +683 +10923 0 (+320) 0 (3.20 E01) Nominal
–25C (–13F) 0 0 –250 (–130) –2.50 E01
(–1.30 E01)
<–25C (–13F) 0 0 –251 (–132) –2.51 E01 Underrange
(–1.32 E01)
0 0 –252 (–134) –2.52 E01 Broken wire
(–1.34 E01)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 715

I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The AS–BADU–257 module requires twenty 3x–input registers addressed in
AS–BADU–257 sequence, beginning with two module status 3x registers, 16 data channel 3x
Module Mapping registers (channels 1 ... 8), and two cold junction sensor 3x registers as shown
below.

3x-register 1 (module status word)

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

Ch4 Ch3 Ch2 Ch1

3x-register 2 (module status word)

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

Ch8 Ch7 Ch6 Ch5

Chn The following errors apply to each channel:

Channel OK = 0000

Channel overrange error = 0001

Channel underrange error = 0010

Broken wire error = 0011

Invalid parameter error = 0100

Cold junction error = 0101 (applies to TC parameters ONLY)

(All others are reserved)

716 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

The following figure shows the AS-BADU-257 3x-register arrangement.

3x-register 3 (channel 1 data, low word)

MSB LSB

3x-register 4 (channel 1 data, high word)

MSB LSB

3x-register 17 (channel 8 data, low word)

MSB LSB

3x-register 18 (channel 8 data, high word)

MSB LSB

3x-register 20 (channel 9 data-cold junction sensor, high word)

MSB LSB

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 717

I/O Configuration with Concept

Analog Output Modules

Analog Output The following information describes how to configure these modules:
Modules l DAU 202/252/252C 2-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current Analog Output
l DAU 204 4-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current Analog Output
l DAU 208 8-point +/-10 Vdc Isolated Analog Output
l DAU 282* 2-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current Analog Output (Special, Intrinsically
Safe)
*The DAU 282 is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the module.

using Concept
Step Action
2.1 or Higher
1 Select Configure from the menu.
2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select DAU202/252/252C or DAU-208 and click on OK. A number and
description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 0x or 4x and press Enter. The software completes the
Out Ref and Out End fields.
7 Click on Params... The appropriate configuration dialogs appear, depending on
the module selected. Refer to the specific modules.

CAUTION
Power-down or kernel mode.
The output module Timeout States is valid only in a normal PLC stop
state. Therefore, when the PLC powers down or goes into kernel mode,
the outputs default to the module’s fail safe state. The Timeout States
are defined on the I/O Map module parameter screens.
Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment
damage.

718 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDAU-202/ The following dialog is valid for the following modules: AS-BDAU-202/ 252(C).
252(C)
AS-BDAU2x2

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined
User Defined Timeout State (In Hex):
Word 1 0000 Word 2 0000

Resolution 15-bit+sign

OK Cancel Help

Timeout State:
The Compact Timeout State only reflects a user program in stop mode.
Activation of the User Defined option button causes the outputs to take on the value
defined in the user-defined timeout state text field.
Last Value
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
value upon user program stop.
User Defined:
Activation of the User Defined option button causes the outputs to take on the hex
values defined in the user-defined timeout state text fields Word 1/2.
Resolution Mode
This list box defines the value range for all channels:
l 12-bit
l 15-bit + sign
Measuring ranges +/- 10 VDC/ +/- 20 mA
Voltage (VDC) Current (mA) 12-bits 15-bits + sign Range
-10.24 ... -20.48 ... 0 -32768 Under-range
-10.005 -20.01 47 -32016
-10.00 -20.00 48 -32000
0 0 2048 0 Nominal range
+10.00 +20.00 4048 +32000
+10.005 ... +20.01 ... 4049 +32016 Overrange
+10.24 +20.48 4095 +32752

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 719

I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The AS-BDAU-202/ 252(C) modules require two 4x-output registers, as shown
AS-BDAU-202/ below.
252(C) Module 4x-register 1 (channel 1)
Mapping MSB LSB

4x-register 2 (channel 2)
MSB LSB

AS-BDAU-204 This following dialog is valid for the analog module AS-BDAU-204.

AS-BDAU 204

Output

Timeout State: Last Value User Defined

User Defined timeout State (In Hex.):

Channel 1: 0000 Channel 2: 0000 Channel 3: 0000 Channel 4: 0000

Override Last Value

Set to Bottom of Scale Channel 1 Set to Bottom of Scale Channel 3

Set to Bottom of Scale Channel 2 Set to Bottom of Scale Channel 4

Resolution
Built-In Tests
Resolution Mode: 12-bit None

Range

Channel 1: Channel 2: Channel 3: Channel 4:

4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA

OK Cancel Help

Timeout StateThe Compact Timeout State only reflects a user program in stop
mode.
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
value upon user program stop.
User Defined: Activation of the User Defined option button causes the 4 outputs to
take on the hex values defined in the user-defined timeout state text fields Channel
1/4.

720 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Override Last Value: Activation of the Set to Bottom of Scale Channel x option
button causes channel x output to be set to the lowest value of the selected
measuring range (Range) upon user program stop.
Example: For a selected measuring range of 4 ... 20 mA the output will carry 4 mA
upon user program stop, and thus guarantee a defined switch-off behavior.

Note: Activation of the Set to Bottom of Scale option button disables any further
alteration of the user-defined timeout state text field for the particular channel.

Resolution Mode: This list box defines the output value range for all channels:
l 11-bit
l 12-bit
l 15-bit + sign
l 16-bit
Built-In Tests: This list box can cause the execution of module built-in tests either
automatically at power-up, or during on-line operation. The module’s green LED
lights as long as no functional fault is determined.
Selection of Category 2 (+/- 10 VDC) restricts the built-in tests exclusively to the +/-
10 VDC measuring range (Range).
Selection of Category 3 (4 ... 20 mA) restricts the built-in tests exclusively to the 4 ...
20 mA measuring range (Range). "None" can be selected if the execution of built-in
tests is not desired.
Range:Measuring ranges for the individual channels can be chosen in these list
boxes.
l 0 ... 1 VDC
l 0 ... 5 VDC
l 0 ... 10 VDC
l 0 ... 20 mA
l 4 ... 20 mA
l +/- 1 VDC
l +/- 5 VDC
l +/- 10 VDC
0 ... 1 VDC, 0 ... 5 VDC, 0 ... 10 VDC
0 ... 1 VDC 0 ... 5 VDC 0 ... 10 VDC 11-bits 12-bits 15-bits + sign 16-bits Range
0 ... 1 VDC 0 ... 5 VDC 0 ... 10 VDC 11-bits 12-bits 15-bits + sign 16-bits Range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0.5 2.5 5 1024 2048 16000 32768 Nominal
range
1 5 10 2047 4095 32000 65520

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 721

I/O Configuration with Concept

0/4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 11-bits 12-bits 15-bits + sign 16-bits Range
0 4 0 0 0 0
10 12 1024 2048 16000 32768 Nominal range
20 20 2047 4095 32000 65520

+/- 1 VDC, +/- 5 VDC, +/- 10 VDC

+/- 1 VDC +/- 5 VDC +/- 10 VDC 11-bits 12-bits 15-bits + sign 16-bits Range
-1 -5 -10 0 0 -32000 0
0.5 2.5 0 1024 2048 0 32768 Nominal
range
+1 +5 +10 2047 4095 +32000 65520

Meanings for the The AS-BDAU-204 module requires one 3x-input register and five 4x-output
AS-BDAU-204 registers. The 4x-output registers are addressed in sequence, beginning with
Module Mapping channel 1. See the following figures.
The following figure shows the AS-BDAU-204 3x-register arrangement.

3x-register 1 (module status word)

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

1 = Memory fault

1 = Hardware fault

1 = Channel 4 current fault

1 = Channel 3 current fault

1 = Channel 2 current fault

1 = Channel 1 current fault

1 = Current fault (general message)

Bits 5 ... 13 are not used

722 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

The following figure shows the AS-BDAU-204 4x-register arrangement.

4x-register 1 (channel 1)

MSB LSB

4x-register 4 (channel 4)
MSB LSB

Runtime Control Word

The runtime control word supports the following calibration properties:

4x-register 5

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

1 = Calibration values were retained

1 = trim up

1 = trim down

1 = Calibration gain active

1 = Calibration offset (=0)

1 = Reset to default setting

(10% current fluctuation)

1= Calibrating channel 1 = 0 0
1= Calibrating channel 2 = 0 1
1= Calibrating channel 3 = 1 0
1= Calibrating channel 4= 1 1

1= Calibration enabled
Bits 8 ... 14 are not used

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 723

I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BDAU-208 The following dialog is valid for the analog module AS-BDAU-208.

AS-BDAU 208

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined

User Defined Timeout State (In Hex.):

1. 0000 2. 0000

0000 4. 0000
3.
5. 0000 6. 0000

7. 0000 8. 0000

Resolution Mode: 15-bit+sign

OK Cancel Help

Timeout State
The Compact Timeout State only reflects a user program in stop mode.
Activation of the Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their last valid
value upon user program stop.
If the User Defined option button was activated, the 8 corresponding hex values can
be entered here.
User Defined:
If the User Defined option button was activated in the timeout state section, the
corresponding hex values can be entered in the text boxes 1/8, determining one
value for each of the 8 output registers.
Resolution Mode
This list box defines the output value range for all channels:
l 12-bit
l 15-bit + sign
Measuring Range

724 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

The +/- 10 VDC measuring range representation can be gathered from the following
table:
+/- 10 VDC 12-bits 15-bits + sign Range
-10.24 ... 0 -32768 Under-range
-10.005 47 -32016
-10.00 48 -32000
0 2048 0 Nominal range
+10.00 4048 +32000
+10.005 ... 4049 +32016 Overrange
+10.24 4095 +32752

Meanings for the The AS-BDAU-208 module requires eight 4x-output registers. The 4x-output
AS-BDAU-208 registers are addressed in sequence, beginning with channel 1 as shown below.
Module Mapping
4x-register 1 (channel 1)

MSB LSB

4x-register 8 (channel 8)

MSB LSB

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 725

I/O Configuration with Concept

Intelligent Modules

Intelligent This section describes how to configure the following modules:

Modules l FRQ-204/254 Frequency
l MOT 201 Motion -Encoder Only
l MOT 202 Motion-Resolver and Encoder
l VIC-2xx (Not supported in Concept 2.1 or higher)
l VRC 200/CTR 205/212/224 (Not supported in Concept 2.1 or higher)
l ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the module.

of FRQ Modules
Step Action
using Concept
2.1 or Higher 1 Select Configure from the menu.
2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select FRQ--204/205 and click on OK. A number and description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 3x and press Enter. The software fills in the In Ref and
In End fields.
7 Click on Params...

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the module.

of Motion and
Step Action
Counter/
Positioner 1 Select Configure from the menu.
Modules using 2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
Concept 2.1 or 3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
Higher
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select MOT--2X or ZAE--201 and click on OK. A number and description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 3x and press Enter. The software fills in the In Ref and
In End fields.
7 In the Out Ref field, enter 4x and press Enter. The software fills in the Out Ref
and Out End fields.
8 Click on OK. (No Params are required for these modules.)

726 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BFRQ 204/ The following dialog is valid for the AS-BFRQ 204/ 254 modules (frequency/
254 revolution counters).

FRQ204/254

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

Mode Mode Mode Mode

<=1 kHz <=1 kHz <=1 kHz <=1 kHz
<=50 kHz <=50 kHz <=50 kHz <=50 kHz
Revolution Revolution Revolution Revolution
Falling Edge Falling Edge Falling Edge Falling Edge
Inverse Output Inverse Output Inverse Output Inverse Output

Time Time Time Time

62.5 msec 62.5 msec 62.5 msec 62.5 msec
125 msec 125 msec 125 msec 125 msec
250 msec 250 msec 250 msec 250 msec
500 msec 500 msec 500 msec 500 msec
1000 msec 1000 msec 1000 msec 1000 msec
2000 msec 2000 msec 2000 msec 2000 msec
8000 msec 8000 msec 8000 msec 8000 msec
EM <= 20 Hz EM <= 20 Hz EM <= 20 Hz EM <= 20 Hz

0 Divide Factor 0 Divide Factor 0 Divide Factor 0 Divide Factor

0 Lower Limit 0 Lower Limit 0 Lower Limit 0 Lower Limit

0 Upper Limit 0 Upper Limit 0 Upper Limit 0 Upper Limit

OK Cancel Help

Channel 1 ... 4
The individual channels are configured in the columns Channel 1 ... 4. Enter the
desired counting frequency as offered (4 x <=1 kHz, 1 x <=50 kHz)
Mode
The counting frequency can be selected in this section with the <=1 kHz or <=50 kHz
option buttons.

Note: Channel 1 can be alternatively driven with counting frequencies of up to 50

kHz.

Revolution counting mode is activated through the Revolution option button.

Selecting the Revolution Mode changes the actual value received from Hz to rev/
min.
Activate the Falling Edge option button to trigger on the negative counting edge
(1->0). The default setting is positive edge (0->1).
Activation of the Inverse Output option button causes negation of both channel limit
signals.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 727

I/O Configuration with Concept

FRQ204 Mode Configuration Example

Mode Selection Time Units of Actual Input Display Value
(Gating Time) Measure Signal Value Received
1kHz 1 ... 7 Hz 247 Hz 247
50kHz 1 ... 7 Hz 26780 Hz 26780
Revolution 1 ... 7 Rev/Min. 14820 Rev/Min. 14820
Revolution/50kHz 1 ... 7 Rev/Min. 29654 Rev/Min. 29654
1kHz 8 Hz 14.286 Hz 14286
Revolution 8 Rev/Min. 857.1 Rev/Min. 8571

Time
Time is the frequency of how often the counts are updated. The gating time for
frequency/revolution measurements can be selected in this section.
l 62.5 msec
l 125 msec
l 250 msec
l 500 msec
l 1000 msec
l 2000 msec
l 8000 mesc
l EM <= 20 Hz
The 62.5 to 8000 msec presets open the measurement window a corresponding
period for input signal summation, which can then be converted into Hz or RPM
units.
The EM <= 20 Hz option button causes the measurement to be derived from the
slope time rather than the gate time. This results in higher precision for frequencies
up to 20 Hz or below 1200 RPM, which are achieved in a shorter gate-time period.
Divide Factor
The divide factor actually divides your counts by the number you enter. A factor can
be entered in this text field. The factor entered here is used for the connection of
incremental encoders, sensors, or similar devices with high resolution, i.e. >1 count
per revolution. As a value, the number of impulses per revolution has to be given.
For example, if you have a 256 pulse/revolution encoder, then you would enter 256.
The real frequency response speed is returned from the FRQ 204. The default value
is 1. If you enter 0 it will be seen as a 1.
Lower Limit
This establishes the lower limit of your range. The lower limiting threshold for
minimum frequency or revolution monitoring (as well as wire breakage), can be
entered in this text field. Values falling short of this preset value initiate status bits
within the first input register (bits 0 ... 3), and in the status register of the drop station.
Measurements continue and remain uninfluenced. When the lower limit is exceeded
the corresponding module outputs are set.

728 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Upper Limit
This establishes the upper limit of your range. The upper limiting threshold for
maximum permissible frequency or revolution monitoring can be entered in this text
field. Values falling short of this preset value initiate status bits within the first input
register (bits 4 ... 7), and in the status register of the drop station. Measurements
continue and remain uninfluenced. When the upper limit is exceeded the
corresponding module outputs are set.

Meanings for the The frequency counting modules require five 3x-input registers, as shown in AS-
AS-BFRQ 204/ BFRQ 204/ 2 Registers, p. 730 and AS-BFRQ 204/ 2 Registers, p. 730 below.
254 Module
Mapping 1 = Input 4 active (24 VDC)

1 = Input 3 active (24 VDC)

1 = Input 2 active (24 VDC)

1 = Input 1 active (24 VDC)

3x-register (status)

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

1 = Channel 4 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 3 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 2 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 1 upper limiting value

1 = Channel 4 lower limiting value

1 = Channel 3 lower limiting value

1 = Channel 2 lower limiting value

1 = Channel 1 lower limiting value

Bits 12 ... 15 are not used

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 729

I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BFRQ 204/ 2 The following figures shows the AS-BRFQ 204/254 3x-status register (top) and the
Registers AS-BFRQ 204/ 254 3x +1 ... +4 data register (bottom).

3x-register +1 (frequency/revolution data)

MSB LSB

...
...
...

3x-register +4 (frequency/revolution data)

MSB LSB

Note: Refer toConcept I/O Map Status Words, p. 739 for Concept I/O Map Status
Words.

AS-BMOT-201/
202
Note: These modules do not require any params... screens.

The AS-BMOT-201/ 202 modules require six 3x-input registers and six 4x-output
registers.

730 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The following figure shows the AS-BMOT-201/ 202 3x-register arrangement.
AS-BMOT-201/
202 Module 3x-register 1 (status word)
Mapping Error
fault message
(tolerance exceeded)
reserved

In Position

Reserved (current limiting)

Motion mode terminated

Motion mode active

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

Reserved (trigger status)

Servo on

Serial master

Reserved (operating status)

Buffer assigned

Axis ready

reserved

Response type, bit 2

Response type, bit 1

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 731

I/O Configuration with Concept

The following figure shows the AS-BMOT-201/ 202 3x-register arrangement.

3x-register 2 (input data word 2)

MSB LSB

3x-register 3 (input data word 3)

MSB LSB

...
...
...

3x-register 6 (input data word 6)

MSB LSB

732 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

The following figure shows the AS-BMOT 201/ 202 4x-register arrangement.
+ Limit OK / IN1

- Limit OK / IN2

Not in home position / IN3

Manual mode, positive / IN4

Manual mode, negative / IN5

IN6

reserved

Fast command register

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

Servo on

Motion halted

Fast stop

Pending command

Stop command

Halt

Response type, bit 2

Response type, bit 1

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 733

I/O Configuration with Concept

The following figure shows the S-BMOT-201/ 202 4x-register arrangement.

4x-register 2 (output data word 2)

MSB LSB

4x-register 3 (output data word 3)

MSB LSB

...
...
...

4x-register 6 (output data word 6)

MSB LSB

AS-BZAE-201
Note: This module does not require any params... screens.

The AS-BZAE-201 module requires three 3x-input registers and three 4x-output
registers.

Meanings for the The following figure shows the AS-BZAE-201 3x-register arrangement.
AS-BZAE-201
3x-register 1 (input 1)
Module Mapping
MSB LSB

...
...
...

3x-register 3 (input 3)

MSB LSB

734 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

The following figure shows the AS-BZAE-201 4x-register arrangement.

4x-register 1 (output 1)

MSB LSB

...
...
...

4x-register 3 (output 3)

MSB LSB

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 735

I/O Configuration with Concept

Communication Interfaces

Communication This section describes how to configure the following modules:

Interfaces l BKF-201 (16W)/BKF-201 (64W) Interbus S Master
l BKF-202 Interbus S Slave
l DEA-202 Interbus S Interface (No Mapping required)
l DEA-203253/243C Profibus DP Slave Module (No Mapping required)
l MVB-258/258A*
*The MVB-258/258A is a "special,"and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Instructions for configuring the BKF-201 (16W) and BKF-201(64W) follow.
Using Concept
Step Action
2.1 or Higher
1 Select Configure from the menu.
2 Select I/O Map from the menu.
3 Click on Edit... The Local Common CPU Drop dialog appears.
4 Click on Module. The I/O Module Selection dialog appears.
5 Select BKF and click on OK. A number and description appear.
6 In the In Ref field, enter 3x and press Enter. The software completes the In Ref
and In End fields.
7 In the Out Ref field, enter 4x and press Enter. The software completes the Out
Ref and Out End fields.
8 Click on Params... The Timeout State for Outputs on IBS dialog appears.)
9 Select either Set to Zero or Hold Last Value and click on OK.

736 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

AS-BBKF-201 / The following dialog is used with the communication module AS-BBKF-201 (16
202 words/64 words). A different dialog box is used for AS–BBKF–202 (16 words); it is
very similar.

AS-BDAP211

Output Type
Binary BCD
Input Type
Binary BCD

Timeout State:
Last Value User Defined
User Defined Timeout State (In Hex.):
0000

OK Cancel Help

Timeout state for outputs on IBS

The Compact timeout state only reflects a user program in stop mode.
Activation of the Set to Zero option button causes outputs to be set to 0 upon user
program stop, and thus guarantee a defined switch-off behavior.
Activation of the Hold Last Value option button causes the outputs to retain their
last valid value upon user program stop.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 737

I/O Configuration with Concept

Meanings for the The AS-BBKF-201 module requires 16 or 64 4x-output registers; the AS-BBKF-202
AS-BBKF-201/ module requires 16 4x-output registers addressed in sequence, beginning with the
202 Module first register (refer to the following figure(s). Refer to BKF 201 (16W) & (64W)
Mapping InterBus S Master Module, p. 183 and BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module, p. 201 for
details about the 4x control word for these modules.
The following figures show the AS-BBKF-201/202 3x-register arrangement.

3x-register 1 (status word)

3x-register 2 (input 1)

MSB LSB

3x-register 16/64 (input 15/63)

MSB LSB

The AS-BBKF-201 module requires 16 or 64 3x-input registers, the AS-BBKF-202

module requires 16 3x-input registers, addressed in sequence beginning with the
first register (refer to the figure below). Refer to BKF 201 (16W) & (64W) InterBus S
Master Module, p. 183 and BKF 202 InterBus S Slave Module, p. 201 for details on
the 3x status word for these modules.

4x-register 1 (control word)

4x-register 2 (output 1)
MSB LSB

4x-register 16/64 (output 15/63)

MSB LSB

738 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

Concept I/O Map Status Words

Status Words
Note: All other modules do not provide status word information.

The following lists the modules that provide Concept I/O Map Status Words. Most
provide only an error flag, yet others provide additional error information.
The following table shows I/O Map Status Word Error Flags and Additional Error
Information.
I/O Module Error Flag Meaning (Refer to Provides Additional Error
Figure 54) Information
ADU204/254/254C Not applicable Yes. Refer to ADU 204/254/
254(C) Status Word, p. 740.
ADU205 Not applicable Yes. Refer to ADU 205 Status
Word, p. 740.
ADU206 1=Group signal when detail status
information is available
ADU210 1=Group signal when detail status Yes. Refer to ADU 210 Status
information is available Word, p. 741.
ADU214 1=Group signal when detail status Yes. Refer to ADU 214 Status
information is available Word, p. 742.
ADU216 1=Group signal when detail status
information is available
ADU257 1=Group signal when detail status Yes. Refer to ADU 257 Status
information is available Word, p. 743.
BKF201/202 1=Module error
DAP208/210/258/258C 1=Overload on one or more outputs
DAP220/250/250C 1=Power missing, or overload on
one or more outputs
DAU202/252/252C 1=Error during generation of the
internal +/-15V supply
DAU208/258 1=Error during generation of the
internal +/-15V supply
FRQ204/254 1=Overflow of a counter or Yes. Refer to FRQ 204/254
overload on one or more outputs Status Word, p. 743.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 739

I/O Configuration with Concept

Status Word The following figure shows the Status Word Error Flag.
Error Flag
Error Flag

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

ADU 204/254/ The following figure shows the ADU 204/254/254(C) Status Word.
254(C) Status
Word MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

reserved

Channel 4 measuring range out of tolerance

Channel 3 measuring range out of tolerance

Channel 2 measuring range out of tolerance

Channel 1 measuring range out of tolerance

ADU 205 Status The following figure shows the ADU 205 Status Word.
Word
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

reserved

Channel 4 wire breakage

Channel 3 wire breakage
Channel 2 wire breakage
Channel 1 wire breakage
Channel 4 measuring range over-/underrun
Channel 3 measuring range over-/underrun
Channel 2 measuring range over-/underrun
Channel 1 measuring range over-/underrun

740 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

ADU 210 Status The following figure shows the ADU 210 Status Word.
Word Error Flag

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

reserved

Channel 1 error = 001

Channel 2 error = 010
Channel 3 error = 011
Channel 4 error = 100

Parameter error = 001

Underrange or broken wire error = 101
Overrange error = 110

System error or power failed = 11111111

Bits 7 & 3 are not used

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 741

I/O Configuration with Concept

ADU 214 Status The following figure shows the ADU 214 Status Word.
Word
Error Flag

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

reserved

Channel 1 error = 0001

Channel 2 error = 0010
Channel 3 error = 0011
Channel 4 error = 0100
Channel 5 error = 0101
Channel 6 error = 0110
Channel 7 error = 0111
Channel 8 error = 1000

Parameter error = 0001

Channels 1,3,5,7 (for 2-wire voltage or current ONLY) error = 0010
Channels 2,4,7,8 (for voltage or current ONLY)
(channels 1,3,5,7 MUST be inactive) error = 0011
Broken wire (2-wire or 4-wire RTD measurement ONLY) error = 0100
Underrange, sensor short circuit, or broken wire (of any channel) error = 0101
Overrange (of any channel) error = 0110
Bipolar measurement
(both channels MUST be configured as the same-measurement range) error = 0111

System error or power failed = 11111111

742 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Concept

ADU 257 Status The following figure shows the ADU 257 Status Word.
Word Error Flag

MSB LSB

reserved
reserved

Channel 9 status (cold junction sensor)

Channel OK = 0000
Channel overrange = 0001
Channel underrange = 0010
Broken Wire = 0011
(All others reserved)

No error in channels 1 ... 8 = 0

Error in channels 1 ... 8 = 1

FRQ 204/254 The following figure shows the FRQ 204/254 Status Word.
Status Word
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB

reserved

1 = Outside the 20 Hz range

1 = System fault
1 = Output overload
1 = Channel 4 frequency overflow error
1 = Channel 3 frequency overflow error
1 = Channel 2 frequency overflow error
1 = Channel 1 frequency overflow error

Bit 7 is not used

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 743

I/O Configuration with Concept

744 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration of A120 Series
I/O Modules with Modsoft

At a Glance

Purpose This chapter describes the configuration of A120 Series I/O modules with Modsoft.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
Configuring A120 Discrete Input Modules with Modsoft 746
Configuring A120 Discrete Output Modules with Modsoft 747
Configuring A120 Discrete Combination Modules with Modsoft 748
Configuring A120 Analog Input Modules with Modsoft 749
Configuring A120 Analog Output Modules with Modsoft 750
Configuring A120 Intelligent Modules with Modsoft 751
Configuring A120 Communication Interfaces with Modsoft 752

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 745

I/O Configuration with Modsoft

Configuring A120 Discrete Input Modules with Modsoft

Discrete Input This following information describes how to configure the following modules:
Modules l DEO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 208 8-point 230 Vac Discrete Input
l DEP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Input
l DEP 210 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 211 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 214 16-point 12 ... 60Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 215 16-point 5 Vdc TTL Discrete Input
l DEP 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 217 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 218 16-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 220 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 257 16-point 110 Vdc Discrete Input
l DEP 296 16-point 60 Vdc Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 297 16-point 48 Vdc Isolated Discrete Input
l DEP 284* 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Input (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6
or lower)
*The DEP 284 is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure A120 discrete input modules using
Using Modsoft Modsoft.
2.6 or Lower
Step Action
1 Select I/O Map (or press F4). This places you at rack 1, slot position 101...105.
2 Move the cursor to slot 104.
3 Hold the Shift key and press the ? key. This displays a list of possible I/O
modules.
4 Select DEPxxx.
5 Enter the input reference 10001 and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range. If you are using a 3x register, the cursor
automatically moves to Data Type.
6 Select either Binary or BCD and press the Enter key.
7 Choose Quit (or press F9). Escape to the Modsoft main menu.
8 Refer to individual module chapters for more information.

746 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Modsoft

Configuring A120 Discrete Output Modules with Modsoft

Discrete Output The following information describes how to configure these modules:
Modules l DAO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Output
l DAP 204 4-point 24 ... 110 Vdc/24 ... 250 Vac Relay Discrete Output
l DAP 208 8-point 24 ... 110 Vdc/24 ... 250 Vac Relay Discrete Output
l DAP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Output
l DAP 210 8-point 24 ... 240 Vac Discrete Output
l DAP 216(N)16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Output
l DAP 217 16-point 5 ... 24 Vdc Discrete Output
l DAP 218 16-point 24 ... 240 Vac Discrete Output
l DAP 284* 4-point 24 ... 110 Vdc/24 ... 250 Vac Relay Discrete Output (Special,
Intrinsically Safe) (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower)
*This is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure the A120 discrete output modules using
Using Modsoft Modsoft.
2.6 or Lower
Step Action
1 Select I/O Map (or press F4). This places you at rack 1, slot position 101...105.
2 Move the cursor to slot 104.
3 Hold the Shift key and press the ? key. This displays a list of possible I/O
modules.
4 Select DAPxxx.
5 Enter the input reference 10001 and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the output range. If you are using a 3x register and a 4x
register, the cursor automatically moves to Data Type.
6 Select either Binary or BCD and press the Enter key.
7 Choose Quit (or press F9). Escape to the Modsoft main menu.
8 Refer to individual module chapters for more information.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 747

I/O Configuration with Modsoft

Configuring A120 Discrete Combination Modules with Modsoft

Discrete The following information describes how to configure these modules:

Combination l DAP 211 Monitored 4-point in/4-point out 120 Vac Combined I/O (Requires a
Modules loadable (SW–IODR–001) for proper operation using certain PLCs (A984–1xx,
E984–24x/251/255) with Modsoft. Refer to Installing the Loadables for A120
Series I/O Modules, p. 791 for details).
l DAP 212 8-point in/4-point out 24 Vdc Combined I/O
l DAP 220 8-point in/8-point out 24 Vdc Combined I/O
l DAP 252 8-point in/4-point relay out 24 Vdc LT Combined I/O
l DAP 253 8-point in/4-point relay out 110 Vdc LT Combined I/O
l DAP 292 8-point in/4-point relay out 60 Vdc Combined I/O

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure A120 discrete output modules using
Using Modsoft Modsoft.
2.6 or Lower
Step Action
1 Select I/O Map (or press F4). This places you at rack 1, slot position 101...105.
2 Move the cursor to slot 104.
3 Hold the Shift key and press the ? key. This displays a list of possible I/O
modules.
4 Select DAPxxx.
5 Enter the input reference 10001 and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range.
6 Enter the output reference 0001 and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range. If you are using a 3x register and a 4x
register, the cursor automatically moves to Data Type.
7 Select either Binary or BCD and press the Enter key.
8 Choose Quit (or press F9). Escape to the Modsoft main menu.
9 Refer to individual module chapters for more information.

748 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Modsoft

Configuring A120 Analog Input Modules with Modsoft

Analog Input This section describes how to configure the following modules:
Modules l ADU 204 4-point Voltage/RTD Analog Input
l ADU 205 4-point Voltage/Current Analog Input
l ADU 206 4-point Voltage/Current Isolated Analog Input
l ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current Analog Input (Not supported in Modsoft)
l ADU 214 8-point Voltage/Current Isolated Analog Input
l ADU 216 8-point Thermocouple Isolated Analog Input
l ADU 257/257C 8-point Voltage/RTD/TC Analog Input (Not supported in Modsoft)
NOTE: If the ADU257s DIP switch is set to the ADU216 mode, the ADU257
operates just like an ADU216 module. Refer to Overview of the ADU 257 Analog
Input Module, p. 155.
l ADU 282/282M* 2-point Analog Input (Special, Intrinsically Safe) (Not supported
in Modsoft 2.6 or lower).
l ADU 284* 2-point Analog Input (Special, Intrinsically Safe) (Not supported in
Modsoft 2.6 or lower)
l ADU 211/212 8-point Universal Isolated Analog Input
*This is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure A120 discrete output modules using
Using Modsoft Modsoft.
2.6 or Lower
Step Action
1 Select I/O Map (or press F4). This places you at rack 1, slot position 101...105.
2 Move the cursor to slot 104.
3 Hold the Shift key and press the ? key. This displays a list of possible I/O
modules.
4 Select ADUxxx.
5 Enter the input reference 3x and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range.
6 Enter the output reference 4x and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range. If you are using a 3x register and a 4x
register, the cursor automatically moves to Data Type.
7 Select either Binary or BCD and press the Enter key.
8 Choose Quit (or press F9). Escape to the Modsoft main menu.
9 Refer to individual module chapters for more information.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 749

I/O Configuration with Modsoft

Configuring A120 Analog Output Modules with Modsoft

Analog Output This section describes how to configure the following modules:
Modules l DAU 202 2-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current Analog Output
l DAU 204 4-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current Analog Output
l DAU 208 8-point +/-10 Vdc Isolated Analog Output
l DAU 282* 2-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current Analog Output (Special, Intrinsically
Safe) (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower)
*The DAU 282 is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure A120 discrete output modules using
Using Modsoft Modsoft.
2.6 or Lower
Step Action
1 Select I/O Map (or press F4). This places you at rack 1, slot position 101...105.
2 Move the cursor to slot 104.
3 Hold the Shift key and press the ? key. This displays a list of possible I/O
modules.
4 Select DAUxxx.
5 Enter the output reference 4x and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range. If you are using a 4x register, the cursor
automatically moves to Data Type.
6 Select either Binary or BCD and press the Enter key.
7 Choose Quit (or press F9). Escape to the Modsoft main menu.
8 Refer to individual module chapters for more information.

750 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 I/O Configuration with Modsoft

Configuring A120 Intelligent Modules with Modsoft

Intelligent This section describes how to configure the following modules:

Modules l FRQ-204/254 Frequency
l (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower)
l MOT 201 Motion-Encoder Only
l MOT 202 Motion-Resolver and Encoder
l VIC-2xx High-Speed Input
l VRC 200/CTR 205/212/224 Variable Reluctance Counter/Counter
l ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner
l ZAE 204 High-Speed Counter

I/O Configuration Use the following procedure to configure A120 discrete output modules using
Using Modsoft Modsoft.
2.6 or Lower
Step Action
1 Select I/O Map (or press F4). This places you at rack 1, slot position 101...105.
2 Move the cursor to slot 104.
3 Hold the Shift key and press the ? key. This displays a list of possible I/O
modules.
4 Select XXXxxx.
5 Enter the input reference 3x and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range.
6 Enter the output reference 4x and press the Enter key. The software
automatically fills in the input range. If you are using a 3x register and a 4x
register, the cursor automatically moves to Data Type.
7 Select either Binary or BCD and press the Enter key.
8 Choose Quit (or press F9). Escape to the Modsoft main menu.
9 Refer to individual module chapters for more information.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 751

I/O Configuration with Modsoft

Configuring A120 Communication Interfaces with Modsoft

Communication The following communication interfaces are not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower:
Interfaces l BKF-201 (16W)/BKF-201 (64W) Interbus S Master
l BKF-202 Interbus S Slave (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower)
l DEA-202 Interbus S Interface (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower)
l DEA-203/253/243C Profibus DP Slave Module (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or
lower)
l MVB-258/258A* (Not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower)
*The MVB-258/258A is a "special", and therefore it is not included in this document.

I/O Configuration
Using Modsoft
Note: The modules are not supported in Modsoft 2.6 or lower.
2.6 or Lower

752 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples for
Selected A120 Series I/O Modules

At a Glance

Purpose This chapter provides examples of how to use selected Series A120 I/O modules
with Modsoft’s Ladder Logic.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
ADU 205 Application Example 754
DAU 204 Application Example 757
VRC/CTR 2xx (VIC2xx) Application Notes 760

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 753

Modsoft Application Examples

ADU 205 Application Example

Overview In many applications, analog signals are scaled to engineering units that indicate
units such as I/O points,degrees C, gal/min, cm/s, etc. An operator may view the
scaled analog input data via LED displays, screen displays on a monitor, or report
printouts.

Temperature For example, assume that the -10 ... +10 V signal is being used to represent a
Example temperature between -40 ... +140 F. The following figure shows the Signal-to-
Temperature Relationship.

140

120

100

80

60
Temp

40

20

-20

-40

-10V
2049 +10V Module Configuration
Analog Input Data 6143 Operating Range

To appropriately display this analog data as a temperature value, you can use an
ADU 205 Analog Input module I/O Mapped as follows: 30001-30004 input registers
and binary.

754 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples

Field Wiring The following information describes how to field wire the ADU 205. The information
Illustration consists of a field wiring illustration and a procedure (see Procedure for Generating
Logic, p. 756.
The following figure illustrates how to field wire the ADU 205.
ADU 205
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Voltage Source 9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 755

Modsoft Application Examples

Procedure for Use the following procedure to generate the ladder logic.
Generating Logic
Step Action
1 Divide the temperature range, 180 degrees, by 4095.
(180 / 4095 = .044)
2 Obtain the MUL block constant by multiplying the result by 10,000.
(.044 x 10,000 = 440)
3 Generate the ladder logic to subtract the 2049 offset multiply the analog input by
the constant; the high order result register will contain the range. Then subtract
the Y-intercept, -40, to obtain the answer, as shown.

30001 40001 40010

2049 440 40
SUB MUL SUB
(Minus sign)
40001 40001 40020

This logic generates the scaled value in register 40020 from the analog signal in
30001. Only the high order result of the MUL operation is used, and no
compensation for round-off is used in this example.

756 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples

DAU 204 Application Example

How the Module The figures in this map show a ladder logic program that uses 1 timer (register
Ramps Outputs 40010) and 1 upcounter (register 40020) to decrement all 4 output channel registers
through to the of the DAU204 (registers 40001 through 40004). This is very easily done using block
Full Scale moves and 5 holding registers (registers 40011 through 40015). With the module
configured for 4 ... 20 mA output on all four channels (0 in register 40005), each
channel is decremented from the top of the scale (4095) to the bottom of the scale
(0) in 5 second intervals. After each interval, the outputs are changed to different
values, again for 5 seconds. The counter is then reset, which starts the sequence
again.

Note: This is only an example showing how the module operates to ramp the
outputs through the full scale. The ladder logic (four networks) are not required to
operate the module.

Network 1 The following figure illustrates the logic for Network 1.

Example

0005 00050
T1.0
00050
40010

00050 0006 00051

UCTR
00051
40020

40020

00001

BLKM
0001

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 757

Modsoft Application Examples

Network 2 The following figure illustrates the logic for Network 2.

Example
00016 00015 00014 40011 40011 40011 40011

40001 40002 40003 40004

BLKM BLKM BLKM BLKM

0001 0001 0001 0001

00016 00015 00014 40012 40012 40012 40012

40001 40002 40003 40004

BLKM BLKM BLKM BLKM

0001 0001 0001 0001

Network 3 The following figure illustrates the logic for Network 3.

Example

00016 00015 00014 40013 40013 40013 40013

40001 40002 40003 40004

BLKM BLKM BLKM BLKM

0001 0001 0001 0001

00016 00015 00014 40014 40014 40014 40014

40001 40002 40003 40004

BLKM BLKM BLKM BLKM

0001 0001 0001 0001

758 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples

Network 4 The following figure illustrates the logic for Network 4.

Example
40015 40015 40015 40015
00016 00015 00014

40001 40002 40003 40004

BLKM BLKM BLKM BLKM

0001 0001 0001 0001

00016 00015 00014 40011 40012 40014 40015

40001 40002 40003 40004

BLKM BLKM BLKM BLKM

0001 0001 0001 0001

Reference Data The following figure shows the reference data for the DAU 204 application example.
REFERENCE DATA
30001 0000000000000000
40010 1 Dec
40001 4095 Dec
40020 5 Dec
40002 3072 Dec
40003 1027 Dec 40011 4095 Dec
40004 0 Dec 40012 3072Dec
40005 0 Dec 40013 2045 Dec
40006 0 Dec 40014 1027 Dec
40015 0 Dec

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 759

Modsoft Application Examples

VRC/CTR 2xx (VIC2xx) Application Notes

Controlling the The VRC/CTR module is structured to minimize the amount of I/O resources
Module required to operate the module. A total of six registers, set up as two separate
groups of three registers each (three 3x input and three 4x output registers) is the
total amount of resources dedicated to the module. Note that some individual
registers are designed for use within the ladder program as contacts or coils.
Ladder Logic Example 1, p. 761, which follows, shows how to move data from a
word format into a bit location for use as a contact or coil within the ladder program.
(This is only one example. You can accomplish the same result differently.)
In this example, the command will copy the data from input register 30152 (16 bits)
into sixteen consecutive bit locations starting at output reference 00065. It will also
copy 32 bit locations starting at output reference 81 and move the data into two (2)
consecutive holding registers starting at 4005. Refer to the figures in Accompanying
Bit Functions, p. 762 to see the bit functions that will be in place with Ladder Logic
Example 1, p. 761.
Some of the individual registers are designed for use within the ladder program as
contacts or coils. With this ladder program, you can easily manipulate coils or simply
monitor bits within the ladder program to control or monitor the VRC/CTR module.

760 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples

Ladder Logic The following figure illustrates how to move data from a word format into a bit
Example 1 location for use as a contact or coil within the ladder program. This example assigns
registers 30150 ... 30152 and 40050 ... 40052 to the VRC/CTR module.

VRC/
CTR
to 30152
PLC
0x
65

BLKM
1

81

40051
PLC
to
VRC/ BLKM
CTR 2

In this figure, the command will copy the data from input register 30152 (16 bits) into
sixteen consecutive bit locations starting at output reference 00065. It will also copy
32 bit locations starting at output reference 81 and move the data into two (2)
consecutive holding registers starting at 40051.

Note: For consistency, it is recommended that the rung of logic illustrated in this
figure be placed after all logic associated with the VRC/CTR module. This does not
affect the module, but it may be important for consistent control of the module.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 761

Modsoft Application Examples

Accompanying The following figures show the bit functions that will be in place with Ladder Logic
Bit Functions Example 1, p. 761.
If you were to program as shown in Ladder Logic Example 1, p. 761, the output
references would allow you to control and monitor the VRC/CTR module, as shown
in the following figure.
Channel 1 Data Valid
Channel 2 Data Valid

Channel 3 Data Valid

Channel 4 Data Valid
Channel 1 Rollover
Channel 2 Rollover
Channel 3 Rollover

Channel 4 Rollover

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Channel 1 Overspeed
Channel 2 Overspeed
Channel 3 Overspeed
Channel 4 Overspeed
Auto Sequence Enabled
Module Memory Error
Module Error
Unused

762 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples

The following figure depicts Output Register #2, VRC/CTR Control Word 1 (as it
would appear if accompanying Ladder Logic Example 1, p. 761).
Select Channel 1
Select Channel 2
Select Channel 3
Select Channel 4
Clear Channel 1
Clear Channel 2
Clear Channel 3
Clear Channel 4

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96

Hold Channel 1
Hold Channel 2
Hold Channel 3
Hold Channel 4
Load Channel 1 K Factor
Load Channel 2 K Factor
Load Channel 3 K Factor
Load Channel 4 K Factor

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 763

Modsoft Application Examples

The following figure depicts Output Register #3, VRC/CTR Control Word 2
(accompanying (as it would appear if accompanying Ladder Logic Example 1,
p. 761).
Load Channel 1 M Factor
Load Channel 2 M Factor
Load Channel 3 M Factor
Load Channel 4 M Factor
Channel 1 Frequency (Hz)
Channel 2 Frequency (Hz)
Channel 3 Frequency (Hz)
Channel 4 Frequency (Hz)

97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112

Auto Sequence Enable

Display K Factor
Display M Factor
BITE Enabled
BITE Bit #1
BITE Bit #2
Unused
Display Frequency

Factor Values The VRC/CTR module can accept K and Meter factor data to process the incoming
pulse information.

K Factor The VRC/CTR module uses K factor information specific to the field device attached
to each channel. K factor values may be any number from 1 ... 65,535, and are used
in conjunction with the Meter factor value to calculate the incoming pulse
information. Typically, the K factor number is imprinted on the side of the field device
or listed in the documentation associated with the device.

764 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples

Meter Factor During typical use, sensing device characteristics change due to wear, material
accumulation, or other items that impact performance. A meter factor value may be
used to adjust the original K factor value to account for these deviations. The value
used for a meter factor is multiplied into the K factor, and the result used to modify
the incoming information. Meter factor values typically take the form of floating point
variables from 0.0001 ... 1.9999.
To accomplish this, the VRC/CTR module assumes a decimal point in a standard
integer value, as the information in the follow table shows.
PLC Data VRtC/CTR Data
5000 0.5000
12550 1.2550

The module’s meter factor defaults to a value of unity 1 (or 10000 integer). If a
channel’s characteristics need to be modified, the user may insert the meter factor
value in the appropriate channel, and the module then calculates all incoming data
based on the corrected value.The C factor = (K x M)/10,000.
The following table provides some examples.
Original K Factor Meter Factor C Factor # Received Pulses Displayed Data
1000 1.0000 1000 9500 9
1000 0.9875 987.5 10500 10
3800 1.0155 3859 38500 9
1775 0.9725 1726 23471 13

By manipulating bits in Write register 3 (control word 2), you may view the contents
of each channel’s K Factor, Meter Factor, or C (calculated) factor value.

Auto Sequence To minimize the amount of ladder programming required to operate the module, the
VRC/CTR has the capability to autoscan the four input channels. If enabled, the auto
sequence feature scans through channels 1 ... 4 (in order) every 1/2 s. (All channels
are updated every 2 s.)
The Compact 984 or Micro ladder program simply needs to monitor four status bits
assigned to input register 3 (bits 1 ... 4 in the module). These bits turn ON if the data
for that channel is valid.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 765

Modsoft Application Examples

The following ladder logic example, Ladder Logic Example #2, shows how to use
the data valid bits to move data into a specific holding register for use within the
ladder program. Moving data into specific holding registers allows for each channel
to be viewed at any time.

30149
65
0XXXx
40048

BLKM
1

30149
66
40049

BLKM
1

30149
67
40051

BLKM
1

30149
68
40052

BLKM
1

766 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Modsoft Application Examples

[Please review the Controlling the Module, p. 760 and the Accompanying Bit
Functions, p. 762 for more information about register operation.] By using these
four valid data bits, the ladder program distinguishes which channel is displayed at
any given moment in time. By moving the data that is displayed for each channel
(based on the status of these bits) into specific registers for use by the program, the
ladder program can better utilize the information in other sections of the ladder
program.

Manual Manual selection of channels is controlled by four bits located in output word 2, VRC/
Operation CTR control word 1. By setting these bits ON or OFF, you may select a specific
channel for monitoring.
Using the above example (see Auto Sequence, p. 765), all you would need to do is
program four (4) coils in the ladder program, as shown in the following figure.

CONDITIONAL LOGIC
00081 00082 00083 00080

CONDITIONAL LOGIC

00080 00082 00083 00081

CONDITIONAL LOGIC

00080 00081 00083 00082

CONDITIONAL LOGIC
00080 00081 00082 00083

Overspeed Bits It is recommended that the user monitor the overspeed bits in the ladder program.
For the VRC–200 version of the module, the overspeed bits signal that the data from
the module is potentially inaccurate. For these applications, it is recommended that
the overspeed bits be monitored in ladder logic and flag an overspeed condition.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 767

Modsoft Application Examples

768 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 A120 Option Modules

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes several A120 modules that are options.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
SIM 203 Analog Simulator Module 770
SIM 216 Binary Simulator Module 774
NUL 200 and 202 Modules 777

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 769

A120 Option Modules

SIM 203 Analog Simulator Module

General The SIM 203 simulator module is an A120 option that allows you, for instructional
purposes, to generate two analog signals - 0 ... 1V or 0 ... 10V (toggle switch
selectable) and to display one 10V output signal from a Compact 984 controller
output module. The SIM 203 outputs interface to the controller through the ADU 204
and ADU 205 input modules.

Note: The SIM 203 Module is a simulator module used for training purposes only.
It is not a functional Compact 984 I/O module.
Note that also for instructional purposes only, the DAU 202 module may be used
to output an analog signal to the SIM 203 readout. For more information, see the
Brief Product Description, p. 332.

Operation The design of the SIM 203 uses the same form factor as the standard A120 I/O
modules do; however, the SIM 203 has no bus connection in back. The SIM 203 fits
in any available slot in a DTA housing, and it can be mounted in any available I/O
slot (in the same way that a standard A120 I/O module is mounted). The SIM 203
can also be mounted directly on a DIN rail.
The SIM 203 has an interconnection cable that can be brought out either through the
top or the bottom of the module cover. The individual cable wires can be connected
to the corresponding terminal assignments of the ADU 204, ADU 205, or DAU 202.
The module can also be connected to the analog terminals of a Modicon Micro
model 612.

770 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 A120 Option Modules

Design The following list and figure describe the structure of the SIM 203.
The SIM 203 has the following principal parts:
l One output voltmeter (0 V ... +10 V)
l Two input potentiometers
l One toggle switch, which has the following two positions:
l Toggle switch left position: 0 V ... +1 V (used with ADU 204’s PT100 slot)
l Toggle switch right position: 0 V ... +10 V (used with ADU 205’s 10 V slot)
The following figure shows the front view of the SIM 203 Module.

SIM 203 AEG

10
8
Voltmeter 6
4
2
0 A0

5
Ala

0 10
Potentiometers 5
Alb

0 10

Toggle Switch 1V 10V

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 771

A120 Option Modules

Wiring The SIM 203 module receives power from the 24 Vdc source on the controller. All
of the units in the configuration must be properly grounded.
The wiring diagram, which follows, shows the connections for the SIM 203.

Voltage in to meter + P1
violet

brown
Voltage in to meter −

10 V +10V
red Regulator

P2

24 VDC common
blue

Output 1 +
green

Output 2 +
yellow

772 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 A120 Option Modules

Specifications The following table lists specifications of the SIM 203 option module.
Electrical Characteristics
Power Supply Voltage and Current Required 24 Vdc, 50 mA maximum
Signals to Controller 2 analog signals, selectable
Output 0 V ... +1 V
Input 0 V ... +10 V
Input Signal from Controller 1 analog signal: 0 V ... +10 V
Physical Characteristics
Module Standard A120 module form factor
Operating and Monitoring Devices 2 potentiometers, 1 toggle switch, 1 voltmeter
Connections Stripped wires, to be clamped to screw/clamp
type terminals of A120 modules
Dimensions
WxHxD 40.3 x 145 x 117.5 mm (1.6 x 5.6 x 4.5 in)

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 773

A120 Option Modules

SIM 216 Binary Simulator Module

General For instructional purposes, the SIM 216 Binary Simulator module allows you to
generate up to 16 binary input signals (24 Vdc) for Compact 984 controller modules.
The SIM 216 outputs interface to the controller through the DEO 216 and DEP 216
input modules, and the DAP 212 and DAP 220 combined I/O modules.
The SIM 216 module’s power load is 24 Vdc, and it contains a thermally controlled
resistor fuse, which adopts high resistance if loads exceed 0.65A. The fuse
reassumes low resistance if load is reduced.

Note: The SIM 216 Module is a simulator module used for training purposes only.
It is not a functional Compact 984 I/O module.

Operation The design of the SIM 216 uses the same form factor as the standard A120 I/O
modules do; however, the SIM 216 has no bus connection in back. The SIM 216 fits
in any available slot in a DTA housing, and it can be mounted in any available I/O
slot (in the same way that a standard A120 I/O module is mounted). The SIM 216
can also be mounted directly on a DIN rail.
The SIM 216 has an interconnection cable that can be brought out either through the
top or the bottom of the module cover. The cable terminates into two 11-pole screw/
clamp-type terminals, to which the corresponding terminal assignments of the DEO
216, DEP 216, DAP 212, and DAP 220 are connected.

Design The following list and figure describe the structure of the SIM 216.
The SIM 216 has the following principal parts (which are shown in the figure):
l 16 toggle switches, including 2 latched and 1 jog switch
l Two 11-pole terminal strips, numbered 1-11 and 12-22
Note the two rows of removable cards alongside the toggle switches (refer to the
figure). Use these cards to label the switches by function, voltage, input signal
source, and so forth. It is suggested that you photocopy the original cards and use
the photocopies to ensure a ready supply of labels.

774 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 A120 Option Modules

The following figure shows the SIM 216 front view and wiring terminals.

1
SIM 216
2

3
1 9 4

5
2 10
6
3 11 7

4 12 8

9
5 13
10
6 14 11

7 15 12
13
8 16
card card 14
15

16
17

18
19
20
21
22

red blue

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 775

A120 Option Modules

Wiring The SIM 216 module can receive power from the 24 Vdc source on the controller.
Make sure that all units in the configuration are properly grounded.
The wiring diagram, which follows, shows the connections for the SIM 216.

24 VDC (Red)
Common (Blue)

0.65A 1
2
1
3
2 4
3 5
4
1
6
5 7
6 8
7
9
8 10
11
ON/OFF SWITCH
12
13
9 14
10 15
11 16
12 17
13
18
14 19
15
20
16 21
22
Binary
Input
80 cm

776 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 A120 Option Modules

NUL 200 and 202 Modules

Design Two types of empty units, the NUL 200 and the NUL 202, are available. The design
of these units uses the same form factor as the standard A120 I/O modules do. They
fit in any available slot in a DTA housing, and allow you to prewire modules for future
use.
The following figure shows the NUL 200 and the NUL 202.

NUL 200 NUL 202

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

The NUL 200 Unit The NUL 200 is an empty unit that is used for the following: fixing cables not
currently in use, field wiring reserve I/O slots, as a terminator, or as a rest for the
snap-in front cover plate. It can be used in a partially configured DTA backplane, and
it can be mounted in any available I/O slot, as does a standard A120 I/O module.
The terminal screw connectors are all isolated from one another and from the I/O
bus.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 777

A120 Option Modules

NUL 200 The following table describes the NUL 200 specifications.
Specifications
Connectors 22 isolated terminal screws for field wire cross-sections; 0.25 ... 2.5 mm2
Maximum Voltage Between Adjacent Terminals < or = 50 V
Nonadjacent Terminals < 250 V

The NUL 202 Unit The NUL 202 is an empty unit that can be used for terminal multiplication. There are
two groups of 11 terminal screws to terminate field wiring connections. The two
internally combined groups may be used as connection multipliers for two potentials.
The unit can be used in a partially configured DTA backplane, and it can be mounted
in any available I/O slot as does a standard A120 I/O module.

NUL 202 The following table describes the NUL 202 specifications.
Specifications
Connectors Two groups of 11 terminal screws for field wire distribution;
0.25 ... 2.5 mm2
Maximum Voltage < or = 50 V
Sum Current/Connector 10 A (maximum)

778 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Requirements for CE Compliance

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter describes how to ensure your installation of A120 Series I/O modules
is in compliance with the European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC.

Note: The E984--258/265/275/285 PLCs meet EMC requirements by design.

Therefore, this chapter does not apply to these four PLC models.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
CE Compliance Requirements for Compact 984 Group 1 780
CE Compliance Requirements for Compact 984 Group 2 784

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 779

CE Compliance

CE Compliance Requirements for Compact 984 Group 1

Group 1 This section covers the installation requirements necessary to maintain compliance
Requirements with the European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC for certain (PC-A984-145, PC-
E984-241, PC-E984-245, PC-E984-251, PC-E984-255, AS-BDAP-210, AS-BDAP-
218, AS-BVIC-200, AS-BVIC-205, AS-BVIC-212, AS-BVIC-224, AS-BVRC-200,
AS-BCTR-205, AS-BCTR-212, AS-BCTR-224, AS-BADU-211, AS-BADU-212, AS-
BADU-204 and AS-BMOT-201) Compact 984 components.

Note: For details regarding specific I/O modules, please refer to the A120 Series
I/O Modules User Guide (890 USE 109 00 formerly GM-A984-IOS).

The following requirements should be followed for installations complying with the
CE marking:
l Use Braided Shielded Cable on all power supply, communications, and I/O lines.
Either the Modicon Grounding Bar (Modicon part number 043509693) or a
compatible device may be used. The cable should have at least 80% shield
coverage. When using the Grounding Bar, the Outer Diameter of the shield
should be in the range of 0.189 ... 0.240 in (4.8 ... 6.0 mm).
l All cable shields must be grounded using the clips on the Grounding Bar as
shown below. Alternatively, the user may supply an equivalent low impedance RF
ground clamp.
l CPU/PS ground terminal ( ) must be left open as shown.
l Install braided earth ground as shown below from building earth ground to
grounding clip (or clips as required) and to backplane 0 Volt reference.
l Use the plastic faceplate supplied with the backplane to cover the front of
modules.
l If using a BMOT-201 module, all cables (Motor I/O Cable, Encoder Cable and I/
O Cable) exiting the BMOT-201 module must pass through a large Ferrite Bead
(Steward part number 28 B2400-000).

780 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 CE Compliance

The following figure shows a schematic view of the CE compliance requirements.

Backplane
CPU/PS I/O I/O B
Positive
M
Conductor
O
External + Out Negative + 24Vin T 0V Reference
24VDC Conductor 2
Power - Out 0
- 24Vin
Supply 1
Shield
Braid

No
Connection
Here Flat Braid Cable .25in (6.3MM) or wider

Stripped Outer Jacket

Grounding Bar

To Building Ground 2 Conductor Cable

With Braided Shield

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 781

CE Compliance

The following figure depicts the CE compliance requirements.

DIN Rail

Reference
Ground Point
1

2
4

5
Insulation Removed in
Region Near Grounding Clip
(Both Input and Output Cables)

Flat Braid Cable

to Earth Ground Tie Wraps to Hold 3
Cables in Grounding
Clips

782 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 CE Compliance

The following table is the Parts List for the Callout used in the two previous figures.
Callout Vendor Part Number Description Instructions
(or equivalent)
1 Modicon Shipped with Plastic Cover Installation is
backplane Required.
2 Flat Braid Cable
.25in(6.3mm) or wider
3 Modicon 043509693 Grounding Bar All cable shields must
be grounded.
4 Steward 28 B2400-000 Ferrite Bead For a BMOT-201
(Outside the 1.37in(34.8mm) I.D.; ONLY:
United States 2.5in(63.5mm) O.D.; All cables (Motor I/O,
call Livingston, .44in(11.2mm) Thick Encoder and I/O
Scotland at cables) must pass
(0044) 1-506- through this large
414-200) ferrite bead. Secure it
with a tie wrap or
equivalent.
5 Braided Shielded
Cable. 80% shield
coverage, # of
conductor and gauge
per user requirements.

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 783

CE Compliance

CE Compliance Requirements for Compact 984 Group 2

Group 2 This section covers the installation requirements necessary to maintain compliance
Requirements with the European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC for certain (AS-HDTA-200, AS-
HDTA-201, AS-HDTA-202, AS-BDAO-216, AS-BDAP-204, AS-BDAP-208, AS-
BDAP-211, AS-BDAP-212, AS-BDAP-216, AS-BDAP-216N, AS-BDAP-217, AS-
BDAP-220, AS-BDAP-250, AS-BDAP-252, AS-BDAP-292, AS-BDEO-216, AS-
BDEP-208, AS-BDEP-210, AS-BDEP-211, AS-BDEP-214, AS-BDEP-215, AS-
BDEP-216, AS-BDEP-217, AS-BDEP-218, AS-BDEP-220, AS-BDEP-257, AS-
BDEP-254, AS-BDEP-296, AS-BDEP-297, AS-BADU-204, AS-BADU-205, AS-
BADU-206, AS-BADU-210, AS–BADU–214, AS-BADU-216, AS-BADU-254, AS-
BADU-256, AS-BADU-257, AS-BDAU-202, AS-BDAU-208, AS-BFRQ-204, AS-
BBKF-201, AS-BZAE-201, AS-BZAE-204 and AS–BDEA–203) Compact 984
components. These particular modules operating voltages are Ub (24Vdc), working
voltages Us (24Vdc/230Vac).
The following requirements should be followed for installations complying with the
CE marking:
l Install equipment following approved EMC practices, i.e., protective earthing and
functional earthing, connections with good conductivity, and grounding cables of
sufficient cross section
l Avoid all sources of electrical disturbance in proximity of the equipment,
encapsulation with metallic walls
l Use manufacturer approved cabling
l Use EMC compliant grounding of cable shielding (proper mechanical connection,
connection surface, clamps)
l Separate data and signal cable routing, which emit disturbances (e.g. power
cables with switching transients)
l Use the prescribed suppression filters and their competent installation

784 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 CE Compliance

Improvement of To improve EMC stability on the modules, it is recommended that the U (voltage)
the EMC Stability and M (common) connections used here have as short as possible capacitive
on the Modules discharge from the terminal towards the functional earth. This is the purpose of the
capacitive discharge terminal (GND 001), which is shown in the following figure. In
an environment that has a high interference level, an increase of the capacity on the
C1 from 2.2 nF to 22 nF is recommended.
The following figure shows the use of the capacitive discharge terminal to improve
EMC stability.
N

DTA 200 DTA 201/202

to M of the power supply N1, N2 ...

2.5 qmm Z2

C1 ≥ 2.5 qmm

≥ 6 qmm DTA 201 DTA 201/202

C1 Capacitive discharge terminal GND 001

N Power supply modules CPU / DEA / ASP / P120
Z2 Earthing cleat EDS 000
Z3 Cable earthing bar CER 001

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 785

CE Compliance

The following figure shows another view of the capacitive discharge terminal.
U = 24 VDC F Automatic circuit breaker
C1 Capacitive discharge terminal GND 001

F
I/O Module
U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

C1
≥ 2.5 qmm Cu
M
10 12 14 16

Earthing System The earthing system of the 0 V on the rack is already preset when delivered. More
of the Top Hat details are described in Earthing System of the Shielded Cable Lines, p. 787 (the
Rails and following section). To have noise-free operation, perform the following earthing
Modules system measures described in that section.

786 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 CE Compliance

Earthing System The following table provides an overview of recommended shielded cables.
of the Shielded
Type Features Use
Cable Lines
KAB-2277-LI shielded, 3 x 0.14 qmm DCF 77E to KOS
KAB-2205-LI shielded, twisted-pair, 2 x 2 x 0.5 System fieldbus to DEA 201; inputs,
qmm outputs for ADU and DAU; counting input
for ZAE 204; pulse counter for ZAE 201
KAB-0505-LI shielded, 5 x 0.5 qmm Output unit on TXT 201
KAB-0875-LI shielded, 8 x 0.75 qmm Sensors and drives for POS 202
KAB-1005-LI shielded, twisted-pair, 5 x 2 x 0.5 Group line to ZAE 204; position sensing
qmm for ZAE 201; sensors and drives for POS
202
KAB-1014-LI shielded, 10 x 0.14 qmm Sensor for POS 202
KAB PROFIB shielded, inflexible, 2 x 0.64 qmm PROFIBUS to DEA 203

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 787

CE Compliance

788 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Technical Assistance

At a Glance

Purpose This chapter describes resources that may prove useful in the installation and
troubleshooting of A120 series I/O modules.

What’s in this This chapter contains the following topics:

Chapter?
Topic Page
Schneider Automation Customer Service Numbers 790
Installing the Loadables for A120 Series I/O Modules 791

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 789

Technical Assistance

Schneider Automation Customer Service Numbers

Schneider Schneider Automation telephone numbers are as follows:

Automation l To call us from anywhere in North America except from within the state of
Telephone Massachusetts: 1-(800)-468-5342
Numbers l To call us from within Massachusetts or from outside North America: 1-(978)-975-
5001
l To call us in Seligenstadt, Germany: (49) 6182 81 2900, or fax us at (49) 6182 81
2492
When calling the Schneider Automation 800 telephone number, you will get a
recording asking you to enter a one digit code for the type of service you request
provided you use a touch tone telephone. The service categories and the extra digit
responses for touch tone phones are:
The service categories - and extra digit code responses for push-button phones -
are:
1 Hardware or software technical support
2 Order entry, buying hardware or software
3 Modfax
4 Training/course registration inquiries
5 General information other than above.

Note: MODFAX: For available hardware data sheets, application notes, and
software information. Recommended catalogue MC-FAX-DIR, which is the master
of all available catalogues, (only twelve pages) lists all catalogues available on the
MODFAX system.

Note: BBS (Schneider Automation’s Customer Service Bulletin Board): For

Modsoft updates, conversion utilities, hardware and software help, field service
bulletins, Modbus and Modbus Plus help, software revision levels, FLASH EXEC
updates for Modicon equipment, and more. Parameters are up to 56.6k baud, no
parity, 8 data, 1 stop, phone 1-(978)-975-9779.

790 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Technical Assistance

Installing the Loadables for A120 Series I/O Modules

Overview The following information describes how to install loadables.

General The SW-IODR-001 (Rev 1.20 or higher) loadable is available from the Customer
Procedure Service Bulletin Board Service (978/975-9779). Note that all users of the A984- 1XX,
Micro 512, and Micro 612 PLCs may be required to perform the following steps if a
particular I/O module is not included in the module table.
Step Action
1 From the Main Menu, select F-files to download.
2 Then select 0-loadables.

Update the The following information must appear in the GCNFA120.SYS file in the Modsoft/
Modsoft Runtime directory, if the file version is less than Ver. 2.1. Edit your file accordingly.
GCNFA120.SYS l BMOT201,110,0,12,12,1-AXIS MOTN ,1,
File (If Less Than l BMOT202,111,0,12,12,1-AXIS MOTN ,1,
Ver. 2.1) l DEP211,17,0,1,0,8-I 110VAC ,0,
l DEP215,46,0,2,0,16-I 5VDC TTL ,0,
l DEP217,45,0,2,0,16-I 24VDC ,0,
l DEP214,20,0,2,0,16-I 10-60VDC ,0,
l DAP217,42,0,0,2,16-O 24VDC ,0,
l VIC2XX,120,0,6,6,COUNTER ,0,
l ADU211,118,0,6,6,8 CHN ANALOG ,0,
l ADU216,59,0,10,2,8 CHN A/D TC ,0,
l ADU214,36,0,6,4,4/8 CHN A/D ,1,
l ADU204,32,0,8,0,4 CHN 0.5V ,1,
l DAU204,117,0,2,12,4 CHN OUTPUT ,1,
l DAP211,10,0,1,1,4 MIXED I/O ROVAC ,0,

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 791

Technical Assistance

Procedure for Use the following steps to install the SW-IODR-001 Loadable.
Installing the
Step Action
SW-IODR-001
Loadable 1 Using Modsoft, from the OFFLINE Mode menu, select PROGRAM.
2 Once the program is loaded, select CONFIGuration.
3 From the Configuration Overview Screen, select LOADABLE.
4 To install the loadable, select DIRectory and enter the applicable file name, for
example, drive:\MODSOFT\PROGRAM\SVI.DAT. The file names are listed in
Applicable File Names and Modules, p. 792, immediately following this procedure.
5 Once the file is loaded, select EDIT, and then INSERT.
6 Select the applicable loadable, for example, #SVI. The names of the loadables are
listed in DX Loadable Configuration Files and File Names, p. 792.
7 To load the program into the PLC, return to the Main Menu and select TRANSFER.
8 Select File to PLC. The loadable will now be installed in the PLC as part of the
configuration and user logic.

Applicable File The following table lists the file names for the modules to load in Procedure for
Names and Installing the SW-IODR-001 Loadable, p. 792.l
Modules
File Name Module
BMOT.DAT BMOT20X
DSC1.DAT DEP211, 214,215, 217, and DAP217/211
SVI.DAT ADU211,VIC2XX, and DAU204
ADU216.DAT ADU216
ADU214.DAT ADU214

DX Loadable The following table lists the configuration file names for the loadables to use in
Configuration Procedure for Installing the SW-IODR-001 Loadable, p. 792.l
Files and File
DX Loadable Configuration File File Name
Names
#MOT BMOT.DAT
#DS1 DSC1.DAT
#SVI SVI.DAT
#216 ADU216.DAT
#214 ADU214.DAT
Note that the Rev, size, and opcode will vary from file to file.

792 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

A ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated Analog
Input, 66, 105
ADU 204 4-point Voltage/RTD Analog Input
application notes, 84
Module configuration, 87
dip switches, 13 dip switches, 69
ADU 204/254 4-point Voltage/RTD Analog
field wiring, 74
Input Module, 6, 7 quick start, 67
field wiring, 12 troubleshooting, 103
simplified schematic, 12
ADU 212 8-point Universal Isolated Analog
specifications, 17 Input, 66
ADU 205 4-point Voltage/Current Analog specifications, 105
Input Module, 19
ADU 214 8-point Voltage/Current Isolated
application example, 754 Analog Input, 110
calibration, 27 configuration, 123
field wiring, 25
dip switches, 132
simplified schematic, 25 field wiring, 130
specifications, 29 simplified schematic, 112
ADU 206/256 4-point Voltage/Current
specifications, 133
Isolated Analog Input ADU 216 8-point Thermocouple Isolated
calibration, 47 Analog Input, 140
configuration, 38
calibration, 152
simplified schematic, 37 configuration, 145
specifications, 50 programming modes, 147
wiring diagram, 39
simplified schematic, 143
ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current Isolated wiring example, 146
Analog Input, 54 ADU 257 8-point TC/RTD Isolated Analog
conversions, 61
Input
installation, 57 block diagram, 158
operation, 59 installation, 159
simplified schematic, 55
operation, 161
specifications, 63 specifications, 169
wiring diagram, 58 wiring diagram, 160

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xix

Index

analog input modules ADU 206/256 4-point Voltage/Current

ADU 204, 6, 7 Isolated Analog Input, 47
ADU 205, 19 ADU 216 8-point Thermocouple Isolated
ADU 210, 54 Analog Input, 152
ADU 211, 66 DAU 204 4-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current
ADU 214, 110 Analog Output, 358
ADU 216, 140 DAU 208 8-point +/-10 Vdc Isolated
ADU 257, 156 Analog Output, 374
analog isolated Capacitive discharge terminal
ADU 211, 66 GND 001, 785
ADU 214, 110 clear current count command
ADU 216, 140 for ZAE 201 counting operations, 571
analog output modules combined I/O modules
DAU 202, 332 DAP 211, 254
DAU 202/252, 332 DAP 212/252, 262
DAU 204 conversion ranges, 342 DAP 220/250, 298
Installing the DAU 204, 345 DAP 253, 308
installing the DAU 204, 344 DAP 292, 320
application example Concept, 2
ADU 205 4-point Voltage/Current Analog configuration
Input Module, 754 ADU 206/256 4-point Voltage/Current
application notes Isolated Analog Input, 38
ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated
Analog Input, 84 Analog Input, 87
CTR 205 High Speed Input Module, 760 ADU 214 8-point Voltage/Current
CTR 212 High Speed Input Module, 760 Isolated Analog Input, 123
CTR 224 High Speed Input Module, 760 ADU 216 8-point Thermocouple Isolated
VRC 200 High Speed Input Module, 760 Analog Input, 145
DAU 204 4-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current
Analog Output, 353
B DAU 208 8-point +/-10 Vdc Isolated
BKF 201 interbus s master module Analog Output, 372
specifications, 199 conversions
BKF 202 interbus s slave module ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current
specifications, 212 Isolated Analog Input, 61
block diagram counter module
ADU 257 8-point TC/RTD Isolated ZAE 201, 567
Analog Input, 158 counter/positioner modules
ZAE 201, 557
CTR 205 High Speed Input Module
C application notes, 760
calibration troubleshooting, 546
ADU 205 4-point Voltage/Current Analog CTR 212 High Speed Input Module
Input Module, 27 troubleshooting, 546

xx 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Index

CTR 224 High Speed Input Module DAP 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Output
application notes, 760 Module, 274
troubleshooting, 546 simplified schematic, 276
specifications, 281
wiring diagram, 276
D DAP 217 16-point 5...24 Vdc Discrete Output
DAO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Output Module
Module, 214 field connections, 287
simplified schematic, 216 simplified schematic, 286
specifications, 219 specifications, 289
wiring diagram, 217 DAP 218 16-point 24...240 Vac Discrete
DAP 204 4-point 24...110 Vdc/24...250 Vac Output, 292
Relay Output, 222 simplified schematic, 294
simplified schematic, 224 specifications, 295
specifications, 227 wiring diagram, 294
wiring diagram, 222, 224 DAP 220/250 8-point in/8-point out 24 Vdc
DAP 208/258 8-point 24...110 Vdc/24...250 Combined I/O, 298
Vac Relay Output, 232 simplified schematic, 301
simplified schematic, 234 specifications, 304
specifications, 237 wiring diagram, 301
wiring diagram, 234 DAP 253 8-point in/4-point relay out 110 Vdc
DAP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Output LT Combined I/O, 308
Module, 242 field connections, 310
simplified schematic, 244 simplified schematic, 311
specifications, 245 specifications, 314
wiring diagram, 244 DAP 292 8-point in/4-point relay out 60 Vdc
DAP 210 8-point 24...230 Vac Discrete Combined I/O, 320
Output Module, 252 field connections, 322
simplified schematic, 249 simplified schematic, 323
specifications, 250 specifications, 326
wiring diagram, 249 DAP216N 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Output
DAP 211 4-point in/4-point out 120 Vac Module, 274
Combined I/O, 254 simplified schematic, 276
field connections, 259 specifications, 281
specifications, 260 wiring diagram, 276
DAP 212/252 8-point in/4-point out 24 Vdc DAU 202/252
Combined I/O, 262 2-point 24 Vdc Voltage/Current Analog
specifications, 268 Output, 332
DAP 212/252 8-point in/4-point relay out 24 field-wiring, 334
Vdc LT Combined I/O DAU 204 4-point 24Vdc voltage
field connections, 264 current analog output, 341
simplified schematic, 265

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xxi

Index

DAU 204 4-point 24Vdc Voltage/Current/ DEP 214/254 16-point 12...60 Vdc Discrete
Analog Output Input Module, 418
calibration, 358 field connections, 420
configuration, 353 simplified schematic, 421
indicators, 361 specifications, 422
specifications, 364 DEP 215 16-point 5Vdc TTL Discrete Input
DAU 208 8-point +/-10 Vdc Isolated Analog Module, 424
Output field connections, 426
calibration, 374 simplified schematic, 427
configuration, 372 specifications, 429
field connections, 373 DEP 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
simplified schematic, 371 Module
DEA 202, 380 wiring diagram, 434
DEA 202 InterBus S interface module DEP 216/256 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
specifications, 387 Module, 432
DEO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input simplified schematic, 434
Module, 390 specifications, 435
simplified schematic, 390 DEP 217 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
specifications, 391 Module, 438
wiring diagram, 390 simplified schematic, 440
DEP 208 8-point 230 Vac Discrete Input specifications, 441
Module wiring diagram, 440
simplified schematic, 396 DEP 218 16-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete
specifications, 398 Input, 444
use with Proximity Switches, 397 field connections, 446
wiring diagram, 396 simplified schematic, 447
DEP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Input specifications, 448
Module, 400 DEP 220 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
simplified schematic, 402 Module, 452
specifications, 404 simplified schematic, 453
use with proximity switches, 403 specifications, 454
wiring diagram, 402 wiring diagram, 453
DEP 210 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete DEP 257 16-point 110 Vdc Discrete Input
Input, 406 Module, 457
field connections, 408 simplified schematic, 458
simplified schematic, 409 specifications, 459
specifications, 410 DEP 296 16-point 60 Vdc Isolated Input
DEP 211 8-point 115 Vac Isolated Discrete Module, 463
Input, 412 field connections, 464
field connections, 414 simplified schematic, 465
simplified schematic, 415 specifications, 466
specifications, 416 DEP 297 16-point 48 Vdc Isolated Discrete
Input Module, 469
field connections, 470
simplified schematic, 471
specifications, 472

xxii 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Index

dip switches DAP 217 16-point 5...24 Vdc Discrete

ADU 204 4-point Voltage/RTD Analog Output Module, 287
Input Module, 13 DAP 253 8-point in/4-point relay out 110
ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated Vdc LT Combined I/O, 310
Analog Input, 69 DAP 292 8-point in/4-point relay out
ADU 214 8-point Voltage/Current 60Vdc Combined I/O, 322
Isolated Analog Input, 132 DAU 208 8-point +/-10 Vdc Isolated
discrete input modules Analog Output, 373
DAP 212/252, 262 DEP 210 8-point 115 Vac Isolated
DAP 220/250, 298 Discrete Input, 408
DEO 216, 390 DEP 211 8-point 115 Vac Isolated
DEP 209, 400 Discrete Input, 414
DEP 214, 418 DEP 214/254 16-point 12...60 Vdc
DEP 216/256, 432 Discrete Input Module, 420
DEP 217, 438 DEP 215 16-point 5 Vdc TTL Discrete
DEP 220, 452 Input Module, 426
DEP 257, 457 DEP 218 16-point 115 Vac Isolated
discrete isolated Discrete Input, 446
DEP 210, 406 DEP 296 16-point 60 Vdc Isolated Input
DEP 211, 412 Module, 464
DEP 218, 444 DEP 297 16-point 48 Vdc Isolated
DEP 296, 463 Discrete Input Module, 470
discrete output modules ZAE 204 High Speed Counter, 606
DAO 216, 214 field wiring
DAP 209, 242 ADU 204/254 4-point Voltage/RTD
DAP 210, 252 Analog Input Module, 12
DAP 216, 274 ADU 205 4-point Voltage/Current Analog
DAP 218, 292 Input Module, 25
ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated
Analog Input, 74
E ADU 214 8-point Voltage/Current
E984-258/265/275/285 PLCs Isolated Analog Input, 130
Panel software requirements, 1 flash EEPROM
EMC measures, 785 MOT 201 Motion Encoder, 523
end-of-travel limits MOT 202 Motion Resolver/Encoder, 523
MOT 201 Motion Encoder, 522 FRQ 204/254 frequency module
MOT 202 Motion Resolver/Encoder, 522 Configuration, 477
general, 474
operation and LEDs, 481
F Specifications, 482
field connections
DAP 211 4-point in/4-point out 120 Vac
Combined I/O, 259
DAP 212/252 8-point in/4-point relay out
24 Vdc LT Combined I/O, 264

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xxiii

Index

G isolated discrete
DEP 210, 406
GND 001
DEP 211, 412
Capacitive discharge terminal, 785
DEP 218, 444
go to target command
DEP 296, 463
for ZAE 201 positioning operations, 585
DEP 297, 469

H L
home limit
LEDs
MOT 201 Motion Encoder, 523
ZAE 204 high speed counter module,
MOT 202 Motion Resolver/Encoder, 523
602
loadables
I installation of, 791
loadables required
I/O map ADU 211, 66
ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module, 561 ADU 216, 156
indicators DAP 217, 6, 254, 283
DAU 204 4-point 24Vdc Voltage/Current DEP 211, 412
Analog Output, 361 DEP 214, 418
input modules DEP 215, 424
analog, ADU 204, 6, 7
analog, ADU 205, 19
analog, ADU 206, 54 M
analog, ADU 211, 66
Modsoft, 1, 3
analog, ADU 214, 110
MOT 201 Motion Encoder
analog, ADU 216, 140
Analog Output, 499
analog, ADU 257, 156
Connectors, 492
DEO 216, 390
Discrete I/O, 499
discrete, 262, 308, 400, 418, 432, 438
Encoder Feedback Interface, 497
discrete,DEP 220, 452
end-of-travel limits, 522
discrete,DEP 257, 457
flash EEPROM, 523
installation
home limit, 523
ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current
motion development software, 524
Isolated Analog Input, 57
Motor Drive Interface, 500
ADU 257 8-point TC/RTD Isolated
The DIP Switch, 501
Analog Input, 159
installation of
loadables, 791
InterBus S interface module, 380
isolated analog
ADU 210, 54
ADU 211, 66
ADU 214, 110
ADU 216, 140

xxiv 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Index

MOT 202 Motion Resolver/Encoder parameterize command

Analog Output, 517 for ZAE 201 counting operations, 569
Connectors, 507 for ZAE 201 positioning operations, 582
DIP Switches, 519 programming modes
Discrete I/O, 517 ADU 216 8-point Thermocouple Isolated
Encoder Feedback Interface, 515 Analog Input, 147
end-of-travel limits, 522
flash EEPROM, 523
home limit, 523 Q
motion development software, 524 quick start
Motor Drive Interface, 518 ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated
Resolver Feedback/Thermal Interface, Analog Input, 67
518
specifications, 525
MOT 20X Motion Modules, 489 R
motion development software relay output modules, 232
MOT 201 Motion Encoder, 524 DAP 204, 222
MOT 202 Motion Resolver/Encoder, 524 DAP 212/252, 262
DAP 253, 308
N reset command
NUL 200 Module, 777 for ZAE 201 counting operations, 570
specifications, 778 for ZAE 201 positioning operations, 584
NUL 202 Module, 777 run reference point + command
NUL 202Module for ZAE 201 positioning operations, 586
specifications, 778 run reference point command
for ZAE 201 positioning operations, 585

O S
one-axis positioning module
ZAE 201 Module, 580 Shielded cable, 787
operation Shielding, 787
ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current SIM 203 Analog Simulator Module, 770
Isolated Analog Input, 59, 161 specifications, 773
operation and LEDs wiring diagram, 772
FRQ 204/254 frequency module, 481 SIM 216 Binary Simulator Module
output modules, 232 wiring diagram, 776
discrete, 214, 242, 252, 274, 292 simplified schematic
relay, 222, 262, 308 ADU 204 8-point Voltage/Current
Isolated Analog Input, 112
ADU 204/254 4-point Voltage/RTD
P Analog Input Module, 12
ADU 205 4-point Voltage/Current Analog
Panel software requirements
Input Module, 25
for A984-1xx/E984-24x/251/255 PLCs, 1

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xxv

Index

ADU 206/256 4-point Voltage/Current DEP 215 16-point 5 vdc TTL Discrete
Isolated Analog Input, 37 Input Module, 427
ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current DEP 216/256 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete
Isolated Analog Input, 55 Input Module, 434
ADU 216 8-point Thermocouple Isolated DEP 217 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
Analog Input, 143 Module, 440
DAO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Output DEP 218 16-point 115 Vac Isolated
Module, 216 Discrete Input, 447
DAP 204 4-point 24...110 Vdc/24...250 DEP 220 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input
Vac Relay Output, 224 Module, 453
DAP 208/258 8-point 24...110 Vdc/ DEP 257 16-point 110 Vdc Discrete Input
24...250 Vac Relay Output, 234 Module, 458
DAP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete DEP 296 16-point 60 Vdc Isolated Input
Output Module, 244 Module, 465
DAP 210 8-point 24...240 Vac Discrete simplified schematic, 265
Output Module, 249 software requirements, 1
DAP 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete specifications
Output Module, 276 ADU 204/254 4-point Voltage/RTD
DAP 217 16-point 5...24 Vdc Discrete Analog Input Module, 17
Output Module, 286 ADU 205 4-point Voltage/Current Analog
DAP 218 16-point 24...240 Vac Discrete Input Module, 29
Output, 294 ADU 206/256 4-point Voltage/Current
DAP 220/250 8-point in/8-point out 24 Isolated Analog Input, 50
Vdc Combined I/O, 301 ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current
DAP 253 8-point in/4-point relay out 110 Isolated Analog Input, 63
Vdc LT Combined I/O, 311 ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated
DAP 292 8-point in/4-point relay out Analog Input Module, 105
60Vdc Combined I/O, 323 ADU 212 8-point Universal Isolated
DAP216N 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Analog Input Module, 105
Output Module, 276 ADU 214 8-point Voltage/Current
DAU 208 8-point +/-10 Vdc Isolated Isolated Analog Input, 133
Analog Output, 371 ADU 257 8-point TC/RTD Isolated
DEO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input Analog Input, 169
Module, 390 BKF 202 interbus s slave module, 212
DEP 208 8-point 230 Vac Discrete Input DAO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Output
Module, 396 Module, 219
DEP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Input DAP 204 4-point 24...110 Vdc/24...250
Module, 402 Vac Relay Output, 227
DEP 210 8-point 115 Vac Isolated DAP 208/258 8-point 24...110 Vdc/
Discrete Input, 409 24...250 Vac Relay Output, 237
DEP 211 8-point 115 Vac Isolated DAP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete
Discrete Input, 415 Output Module, 245
DEP 214/254 16-point 12...60 Vdc DAP 210 8-point 24...230 Vac Discrete
Discrete Input Module, 421 Output Module, 250

xxvi 890 USE 109 00 March 2003

 Index

DAP 211 4-point in/4-point out 120 Vac DEP 296 16-point 60 Vdc Isolated Input
Combined I/O, 260 Module, 466
DAP 212/252 8-point in/4-point out 24 DEP 297 16-point 48 Vdc Isolated
Vdc Combined I/O, 268 Discrete Input Module, 472
DAP 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete NUL 200 Module, 778
Output Module, 281 NUL 202 Module, 778
DAP 217 16-point 5...24 Vdc Discrete SIM 203 Analog Simulator Module, 773
Output Module, 289
DAP 218 16-point 24...240 Vac Discrete
Output, 295 T
DAP 220/250 8-point in/8-point out 24 troubleshooting
Vdc Combined I/O, 304 ADU 211 8-point Universal Isolated
DAP 253 8-point in/4-point relay out 110 Analog Input, 103
Vdc LT Combined I/O, 314 CTR 205 High Speed Input Module, 546
DAP 292 8-point in/4-point relay out CTR 212 High Speed Input Module, 546
60Vdc Combined I/O, 326 CTR 224 High Speed Input Module, 546
DAP216N 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete VRC 200 High Speed Input Module, 546
Output Module, 281 TTL input modules
DAU 204 4-point 24Vdc Voltage/Current DEP 215, 428
Analog Output, 364
DEA 202 InterBus S interface
module, 387 U
DEO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input use with Proximity Switches
Module, 391 DEP 208 8-point 230 Vac Discrete Input
DEP 208 8-point 230 Vac Discrete Input Module, 397
Module, 398 DEP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Input
DEP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Input Module, 403
Module, 404
DEP 210 8-point 115 Vac Isolated
Discrete Input, 410 V
DEP 211 8-point 115 Vac Isolated VRC 200 High Speed Input Module
Discrete Input, 416 application notes, 760
DEP 214/254 16-point 12...60 Vdc Installation, 536
Discrete Input Module, 422 LED locations and module wiring, 533
DEP 215 16-point 5Vdc TTL Discrete Specifications, 549
Input Module, 429 troubleshooting, 546
DEP 216/256 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete
Input Module, 435
DEP 217 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input W
Module, 441 wiring diagram
DEP 218 16-point 115 Vac Isolated ADU 206/256 4-point Voltage/Current
Discrete Input, 448 Isolated Analof Input, 39
DEP 257 16-point 110 Vdc Discrete Input ADU 210 4-point Voltage/Current
Module, 459 Isolated Analog Input, 58

890 USE 109 00 March 2003 xxvii

Index

DAO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Output ZAE 201 Module

Module, 217 counter example, 572
DAP 204 4-point 24...110 Vdc/24...250 Counter Mode commands, 569
Vac Relay Output, 224 field wiring the counter for 24 V inputs,
DAP 208/258 8-point 24...110 Vdc/ 565
24...250 Vac Relay Output, 234 field wiring the counter for 5 V inputs, 564
DAP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete field wiring the positioner for 5 V inputs,
Output Module, 244 577
DAP 210 8-point 24...240 Vac Discrete for positioning operations, 581
Output Module, 249 high speed counting, 567
DAP 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete input data block, 560
Output Module, 276 one-axis positioning module, 580
DAP 218 16-point 24...240 Vac Discrete output data block, 560
Output, 294 parameterization
DAP 220/250 8-point in/8-point out 24 for positioning operations, 582
Vdc Combined I/O, 301 parameterization for counting operations,
DAP216N 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete 568, 569
Output Module, 276 positioning example, 588
DEO 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input READY state for counting operations,
Module, 390 568
DEP 208 8-point 230 Vac Discrete Input RESET for positioning operations, 581
Module, 396 RESET state
DEP 209 8-point 120 Vac Discrete Input for counting operations, 568
Module, 402 RESET state for counting operations,
DEP 216 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input 570
Module, 434 RESET state for positioning operations,
DEP 217 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input 584
Module, 440 run reference point command for
DEP 220 16-point 24 Vdc Discrete Input positioning operations, 581, 585
Module, 453 RUN state for counting operations, 568
SIM 203 Analog Simulator Module, 772 The READY state for positioning
SIM 216 Binary Simulator Module, 776 operations, 581
wiring example ZAE 204 High Speed Counter, 599
ADU 216 8-point Thermocouple Isolated Configuration, 603
Analog Input, 146 field connections, 606
Specifications, 619
ZAE 204 high speed counter module
Z LEDs, 602
ZAE 201
counter module, 567
counter/positioner modules, 557
ZAE 201 Counter/Positioner Module
I/O map, 561
input data block, 561
output data block, 562
Specifications, 595

xxviii 890 USE 109 00 March 2003